Sie sind auf Seite 1von 1185

Parameter Guide

5
Contents

75:GERealTimeParameters................113
Program mode: HD-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 76:PerfRealTimeParameters...............116
77:DynamicMIDI .........................120
HD-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
78:RandomSeeds .........................122
Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 79:Name/NoteMap .......................125
01:Main ................................... 2
Program P8: Insert Effect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
06:KARMAGE............................. 7
81:Routing...............................127
07:ControllerView/Effect................... 11
85:InsertFX ..............................130
08:AudioInput/Sampling .................. 12
86:TrackView............................133
09:ControlSurface ......................... 18
87:IFX112...............................134
Program P1: Basic/Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 89:CommonFXLFO.......................136
11:ProgramBasic .......................... 33
Program P9: Master/Total Effect . . . . . . . . . . 138
15:VectorControl ......................... 39
91:Routing...............................138
16:VectorEnvelope ........................ 43
92:MFX1 .................................140
18:SetUpControllers...................... 46
93:MFX2 .................................141
19:SetUpPads ............................ 47
94:TFX1..................................141
Program P2: OSC/Pitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 95:TFX2..................................141
21:OSC1Basic ............................ 49
Program: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . 142
22:OSC1Pitch............................. 54
25:OSC2Basic ............................ 57
26:OSC2Pitch............................. 57
29:PitchEG .............................. 57
Program mode: EXi. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Program P3: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 EXi Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
31:Filter1 ................................. 61 01:Main..................................160
32:Filter1Modulation ...................... 64 06:KARMAGE ...........................161
33:Filter1LFOModulation.................. 68 07:ControllerView/Effects..................161
34:Filter1EG............................. 69 08:AudioInput/Sampling..................161
35:Filter2 ................................. 72 09:ControlSurface ........................161
36:Filter2Modulation ...................... 72 EXi Program P4: Basic/Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
37:Filter2LFOModulation.................. 72 41:ProgramBasic..........................163
38:Filter2EG............................. 72 42:EXiAudioInput........................168
Program P4: Amp/EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 45:VectorControl .........................168
41:Amp1/Driver1.......................... 74 46:VectorEnvelope........................169
42:Amp1Modulation...................... 76 48:SetUpControllers ......................169
43:Amp1EG ............................. 79 49:SetUpPads............................169
45:Amp2/Driver2.......................... 81 EXi Program P5: Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
46:Amp2Mod. ............................ 82 51:CommonStepSeq......................170
47:Amp2EG ............................. 82 52:CommonLFO.........................173
49:EQ .................................... 82 53:CommonKeyboardTrack ...............173
Program P5: LFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 EXi Program P6: EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
51:OSC1LFO1............................ 84
EXi Program P7: KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
52:OSC1LFO2............................ 87
55:OSC2LFO1............................ 87 EXi Program P8: Insert Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
56:OSC2LFO2............................ 87 EXi Program P9: Master/Total Effect . . . . . . . 173
59:CommonLFO ......................... 88
EXi Program: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . 174
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track. . 90
61:OSC1AMSMixer ...................... 90
65:OSC2AMSMix........................ 96 EXi: AL-1 Analog Synthesizer . . . . . . 175
69:CommonKeyboardTrack................ 97
AL-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Program P7: KARMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
71:GESetup/KeyZones ................... 100 EXi Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
72:MIDIFilter/CCOffset .................. 103 01:Main..................................176
73:ModuleParametersControl ............. 105 Program P4: OSC Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
74:ModuleParametersTrigger ............. 110

iii
41:OSCBasic ............................ 178
42:Sub/Noise/RingMod ................... 181 EXi: STR-1 Plucked String. . . . . . . . . .239
43:Mixer ................................ 182
STR-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
44:PitchCommon........................ 184
45:PitchEG/Mod ......................... 186 EXi Program P0: Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
01:Main..................................241
Program P5: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
51:FilterBasic ............................ 188 Program P4: String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
52:MultiFilter ........................... 191 41:PluckandNoise........................243
53:FilterModulation ...................... 192 42:PCMOscillator .........................245
54:FilterLFOMod........................ 195 43:PCMOscillatorPitch ....................247
44:ExcitationMixer ........................250
Program P6: Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
45:StringMain............................ 252
61:Amp/Driver........................... 196
46:DampingandDispersion................256
62:AmpModulation ...................... 198
47:StringPitch ............................ 258
63:AmpEG............................. 200
48:PickupsandFeedback ...................260
Program P7: EG 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 49:Mixer .................................263
71:EG1(Filter) .......................... 203 Program P5: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
72:EG2(Pitch) .......................... 206
51:FilterBasic .............................265
73:EG3 ................................. 206
52:MultiFilter ............................ 268
74:EG4 ................................. 206
53:FilterModulation .......................269
Program P8: Step Seq/LFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 54:FilterLFOMod .........................272
81:StepSequencer........................ 207 Program P6: Amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
82:LFO1................................ 209
61:Amp..................................273
83:LFO2................................ 212
62:AmpModulation.......................274
84:LFO3................................ 212
63:AmpEG ..............................276
85:LFO4................................ 212
Program P7: EG 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Program P9: AMS Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
71:EG1(Filter) ...........................279
91:AMSMixer ........................... 213
72:EG2(Pitch) ...........................279
AL-1: Tone Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 73:EG3 ..................................279
74:EG4 ..................................279
AL-1: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Program P8: LFO 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
81:LFO1................................. 279
EXi: CX-3 Tonewheel Organ. . . . . . . 217 82:LFO2................................. 279
83:LFO3................................. 279
CX-3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
84:LFO4................................. 279
EXi Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Program P9: AMS Mixers and String Track . . . 280
01:Main ................................. 218
91:AMSMixers12 ........................280
Program P4: Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 92:AMSMixers34 ........................280
41:Basic ................................. 220 99:StringTrack...........................280
42:Controllers............................ 221
STR-1: Tone Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Program P5: Split & Drawbars . . . . . . . . . . . .223
51:KeyboardSplit........................ 223
52:Drawbars ............................. 224 EXi: MS-20EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
53:EXDrawbars.......................... 225
MS-20EX Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Program P6: Percussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Onscreenknobsandswitches,
61:Percussion ............................ 227 andtheParameterDetailsarea...............286
62:EXPercussion ......................... 228
EXi Program P0: Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Program P7: Amp, V/C, Rotary Speaker. . . . .230 01:Main..................................287
71:Amp&V/C ........................... 230
Program P4: Oscillators & Filters . . . . . . . . . . 289
72:RotarySpeaker ........................ 232
41:Oscillators&Filters.....................289
Program P9: AMS Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Program P5: MG, EG, & Modulation. . . . . . . . 293
91:AMSMixer ........................... 235
51:MG,EG,&Modulation ..................293
CX-3: Tone Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Program P6: Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Changes from the original CX-3 . . . . . . . . . . .237 61:PatchPanel ............................ 297
CX-3: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
iv
Program P7: EG 3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 EXi Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
71:EG3................................. 307 01:Main..................................340
72:EG4.................................. 307
Program P4: Patch Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
73:EG5................................. 307
41:PatchPanel............................342
74:EG6................................. 307
Program P5: Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Program P8: LFO 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
51:OscMain ..............................346
81:LFO1................................ 307
52:PCMOsc..............................350
82:LFO2................................ 307
53:PCMMod.............................352
83:LFO3................................ 307
54:VPMOsc1 .............................355
84:LFO4................................ 307
55:VPMOscillator2 .......................365
Program P9: AMS Mixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 56:VPMOscillator3 .......................365
91:AMSMixers12........................ 308 57:VPMOscillator4 .......................365
92:AMSMixers34........................ 308 58:VPMOscillator5.......................365
59:VPMOscillator6 .......................365
MS-20EX: Tone Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
MS-20EX: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . 311 Program P6: Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
61:FilterBasic.............................366
62:MultiFilter ............................366
63:FilterModulation.......................366
EXi: PolysixEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
64:FilterLFOMod.........................366
PolysixEX Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Program P7: Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Onscreenknobsandswitches,andtheParameter
71:Mixers13.............................367
Detailsarea............................... 314
72:MainMixer ............................368
EXi Program P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 73:Amp ..................................369
01:Main ................................. 315 74:AmpModulation .......................369
Program P4: Main. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 75:AmpEG..............................369
41:Main ................................. 317 Program P8: EG 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Program P5: Modulation & Arpeggiator. . . . . 322 81:EG1..................................370
82:EG2..................................373
51:Modulation&Arpeggiator.............. 322
83:EG3..................................373
Program P7: EG 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 84:EG4..................................373
71:EG2................................. 324 85:EG5..................................373
72:EG3................................. 324 86:EG6..................................373
Program P8: LFO 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 87:EG7..................................373
88:EG8..................................373
81:LFO1................................ 324
89:EG9..................................373
82:LFO2................................ 324
Program P9: Step Sequencer, LFO 1-4, and AMS
Program P9: AMS Mixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Mixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
91:AMSMixers12....................... 324
91:StepSequencer ........................374
92:AMSMixers34....................... 324
92:LFO1 ................................374
PolysixEX: Tone Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 93:LFO2 ................................374
94:LFO3 ................................374
95:LFO4 ................................374
EXi: MOD-7 Waveshaping 96:AMSMixers12........................374
VPM Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 97:AMSMixers34........................374
98:AMSMixers56........................374
MOD-7 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
99:AMSMixers78........................374
UsingtheParameterDetailsarea ............ 329
LoadingDXsounds ........................ 329 MOD-7: Tone Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Synthesis with the MOD-7: a guided tour . . . . 331 MOD-7: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . 376
Overview ................................. 331
Individualoscillators
andsubtractivesynthesis ................... 332 Combination mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
VPM(akaFM)............................. 333 Combination P0: Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
FilteredVPM.............................. 334
01:ProgramSelect/Mixer...................377
PCMasaVPMmodulator .................. 335
06:KARMAGE ...........................383
Waveshaping ............................. 336
07:ControllerView/Effect ..................386
RingModulation .......................... 338
08:AudioInput/Sampling..................387

v
09:ControlSurface........................ 389 05:Preferences............................ 484
06:KARMAGE...........................488
Combination P1: EQ/Vector/Controller. . . . . .401
07:ControllerView/Effect .................. 490
11:TimbreEQ ............................ 401
08:AudioIn/Sampling.....................491
15:VectorVolumeControl ................. 403
09:ControlSurface ........................493
16:VectorCCControl..................... 406
17:VectorEnvelope ....................... 409 Sequencer P1: EQ/Vector/Controller . . . . . . . 505
18:SetUpControllers..................... 412 11:MIDITrackEQ.........................505
19:SetUpPads ........................... 413 12:AudioTrackEQ ........................507
15:VectorVolumeControl..................508
Combination P2: Timbre Parameters . . . . . . . .415
16:VectorCCControl ......................511
21:MIDI................................. 415
17:VectorEnvelope........................514
22:OSC ................................. 416
18:SetUpControllers ......................517
23:Pitch ................................. 418
19:SetUpPads............................519
24:Delay ................................ 419
25:WaveSequence/KARMA............... 420 Sequencer P2: Track Parameters . . . . . . . . . . 521
26:EXiAudioInput ....................... 422 21:MIDI .................................521
22:OSC..................................523
Combination P3: MIDI Filter/Zones . . . . . . . . .423
23:Pitch ..................................525
31:MIDIFilter1........................... 423
24:Delay.................................526
32:MIDIFilter2........................... 424
25:WaveSequence/KARMA ................528
33:MIDIFilter3........................... 425
26:EXiAudioInput ........................530
35:KeyboardZones ....................... 426
27:AudioTrackDelay .....................531
36:VelocityZones ........................ 428
Sequencer P3: MIDI Filter/Zones . . . . . . . . . . 532
Combination P7: KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
31:MIDIFilter1 ...........................532
71:GESetup/KeyZones................... 430
32:MIDIFilter2 ...........................533
72:MIDIFilter/CCOffset.................. 434
33:MIDIFilter3 ...........................535
73:ModuleParametersControl............. 435
35:KeyboardZones........................536
74:ModuleParametersTrigger ............. 436
36:VelocityZones.........................538
75:GERealTimeParameters............... 438
76:PerfRealTimeParameters .............. 441 Sequencer P4: Track Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
77:DynamicMIDI........................ 443 41:TrackEdit.............................540
78:RandomSeeds ........................ 444 42:MIDITrackName......................542
79:Name/NoteMap ...................... 446 43:AUDIOTrackName ....................543
Combination P8: Insert Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Sequencer P5: Pattern/RPPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
81:Routing1 ............................. 448 51:PatternEdit............................544
82:Routing2 ............................. 451 52:PatternName ..........................546
85:InsertFX ............................. 452 53:RPPRSetup............................547
86:TrackView ........................... 454
Sequencer P7: KARMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
87:IFX112 .............................. 455
71:GESetup/KeyZones ....................551
89:CommonFXLFO ...................... 457
72:MIDIFilter/CCOffset ...................555
Combination P9: Master/Total Effect . . . . . . . .458 73:ModuleParametersControl .............556
91:Routing .............................. 458 74:ModuleParametersTrigger.............. 557
92:MFX1................................ 459 75:GERealTimeParameters ...............558
93:MFX2................................ 460 76:PerfRealTimeParameters...............560
94:TFX1 ................................. 460 77:DynamicMIDI .........................561
95:TFX2 ................................. 460 78:RandomSeeds.........................562
79:Name/NoteMap .......................563
Combination: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . .461
Sequencer P8: Insert Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
81:MIDIRouting1 .........................565
Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 82:MIDIRouting2 .........................567
83:AudioRouting1 ........................568
Sequencer Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
84:AudioRouting2 ........................570
MIDIsequencer ........................... 467
85:InsertFX..............................571
Setupparameters&Musicaldata............ 469
86:TrackView............................ 572
Tip:AutoSongSetup ...................... 470
87:IFX112...............................574
Sequencer P0: Play/REC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 89:CommonFXLFO.......................576
01:MIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer ........... 471 Sequencer P9: Master/Total Effect . . . . . . . . . 578
02:AudioTrackMixer..................... 477
91:Routing...............................578
03:MIDITrackLoop...................... 482
92:MFX1 ................................. 580

vi
93:MFX2 ................................ 581 22:UserScale.............................718
94:TFX1 ................................. 581
Global P3: Category Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
95:TFX2 ................................. 581
31:ProgramCategory ......................720
Sequencer: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . 582 32:CombiCategory ........................721
System Exclusive events supported in 33:KARMACategory ......................721
Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618 Global P4: Wave Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
41:SequenceParameters....................722
42:PerStepParameters ....................727
Sampling mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 Global P5: Drum Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Sampling Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 51:SampleSetup..........................731
SamplingtoRAM,ordirecttodisk........... 621 52:SampleParameters .....................735
Samplingfeatures.......................... 621 53:VoiceAssign/Mixer .....................736
Sampling P0: Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Global P6: Plug-in Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
01:Recording ............................ 625 Global: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 740
08:AudioInput........................... 631
09:ControlSurface ........................ 636
Sampling P1: Sample Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 Disk mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
11:SampleEdit ........................... 643
Disk P0: File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Sampling P2: Loop Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 01:Load ..................................751
21:LoopEdit ............................. 646 02:Save..................................753
03:Utility.................................754
Sampling P3: Multisample Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . 649
09:MediaInformation......................755
31:MultisampleEdit...................... 649
Disk P1: Audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Sampling P4: EQ/Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
11:MakeAudioCD ........................756
41:EQ ................................... 652
12:PlayAudioCD .........................758
48:SetUpControllers..................... 653
19:MediaInformation......................760
49:SetUpPads ........................... 655
Disk: Page Menu Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Sampling P5: Audio CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
51:AudioCD ............................ 657
Sampling P8: Insert Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Effect Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
81:Routing .............................. 660
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
85:InsertFX.............................. 662
Abouteffectsresources......................787
86:TrackView ........................... 664
Effectsineachmode........................788
87:IFX112 .............................. 665
Dynamicmodulation(Dmod)andTempo
89:CommonFXLFO ...................... 666
Synchronization ............................789
Sampling P9: Master/Total Effect . . . . . . . . . . 668 CommonFXLFOs ..........................790
91:Routing .............................. 668 FXControlBuses...........................790
92:MFX1 ................................ 670 EffectI/O ..................................792
93:MFX2 ................................ 670
Insert Effects (IFX1IFX12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
94:TFX1 ................................. 670
In/Out ....................................794
95:TFX2 ................................. 670
Routing...................................794
Sampling: Page Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . 672 Mixer.....................................804
ControllingtheInsertEffectsviaMIDI ........805
Master Effects (MFX1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Global mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 In/Out ....................................807
Global P0: Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 Routing...................................807
01:BasicSetup ........................... 699 Mixer.....................................811
02:AudioInput........................... 705 ControllingtheMasterEffectsviaMIDI .......812
Global P1: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708 Total Effects (TFX1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
11:MIDI ................................. 708 In/Out ....................................813
12:External1............................. 714 Routing...................................813
13:External2............................. 716 Mixer.....................................814
UsingMIDItocontroltheTotalEffects........814
Global P2: Controller/Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
21:Controller ............................ 717 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

vii
MainOutputs ............................. 815 051:StereoPhaser ..........................866
IndividualOutputs ........................ 815 052:StereoRandomPhaser.................. 867
053:StereoEnvelopePhaser .................868
Effect/Mixer Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
054:BiPhaser ..............................868
Dynamics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .819
Modulation and Pitch Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
000:NoEffect............................. 819
055:StereoVibrato..........................870
001:StereoDynaCompressor ............... 819
056:StereoAutoFadeMod. ..................871
002:StereoCompressor..................... 820
057:2VoiceResonator......................872
003:StereoExpander ....................... 823
058:Doppler ...............................873
004:St.MultibandCompressor............... 824
059:Scratch ................................874
005:StereoLimiter ......................... 826
060:GrainShifter ...........................874
006:MultibandLimiter..................... 827
061:StereoTremolo .........................875
007:StereoMultibandLimiter............... 828
062:StereoEnvelopeTremolo ................876
008:StereoMasteringLimiter ............... 829
063:StereoAutoPan ........................877
009:StereoGate ........................... 830
064:StereoPhaser+Tremolo ..................878
010:StereoNoiseReduction ................. 831
065:StereoRingModulator ..................879
EQ and Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .832 066:StereoFrequencyShifter.................880
011:StereoParametric4EQ.................. 832 067:Detune ................................881
012:StereoGraphic7EQ.................... 833 068:PitchShifter ...........................881
013:StereoMaster3EQ..................... 834 069:StereoPitchShifter .....................882
014:StereoExciter/Enhncr .................. 835 070:PitchShifterBPM.......................883
015:StereoIsolator ......................... 836 071:StereoPitchShifterBPM.................884
016:StereoWah/AutoWah ................. 836 072:PitchShiftMod. ........................885
017:St.Vintage/CustomWah................ 838 073:OrganVibrato/Chorus .................. 886
018:StereoRandomFilter ................... 839 074:RotarySpeaker.........................886
019:MultiModeFilter ...................... 840 075:RotarySpeakerProOD .................888
020:StereoSubOscillator................... 841 076:RotarySpeakerProCX ..................889
021:TalkingModulator..................... 842
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
022:StereoDecimator...................... 843
077:L/C/RDelay ...........................891
023:StereoAnalogRecord.................. 844
078:L/C/RLongDelay......................891
024:StereoWaveShaper .................... 844
079:Stereo/CrossDelay .....................892
025:PianoBody/Damper ................... 846
080:Stereo/CrossLongDelay ................893
026:Vocoder .............................. 846
081:StereoMultitapDelay ...................893
Overdrive, Amp models, and Mic models . . . .848 082:StereoModulationDelay................894
027:OD/HiGainWah ...................... 848 083:StereoDynamicDelay .................. 895
028:OD/HyperGainWah................... 849 084:StereoAutoPanningDelay..............896
029:StereoGuitarCabinet .................. 850 085:TapeEcho .............................897
030:GuitarAmpModel+P4EQ .............. 850 086:MultibandMod.Delay ..................898
031:GuitarAmpModel+Cabinet............ 851 087:ReverseDelay..........................899
032:StereoBassCabinet.................... 852 088:HoldDelay ............................900
033:BassAmpModel ...................... 852 089:AutoReverse ..........................901
034:BassAmpModel+Cabinet .............. 853 090:SequenceBPMDelay ...................902
035:BassAmpTubeDrive+Cab ............. 854 091:L/C/RBPMDelay ......................903
036:TubePreAmpModeling ................ 855 092:L/C/RBPMLongDelay .................904
037:St.TubePreAmpModeling............. 855 093:StereoBPMDelay ......................905
038:MicModeling+PreAmp................ 856 094:StereoBPMLongDelay.................906
039:St.MicModeling+PreAmp ............. 856 095:StereoBPMMultitapDelay .............. 907
Chorus, Flanger, and Phaser . . . . . . . . . . . . .857 096:StereoBPMMod.Delay .................908
097:St.BPMAutoPanningDly...............909
040:StereoChorus ......................... 857
098:TapeBPMEcho........................910
041:StereoHarmonicChorus................ 858
099:ReverseBPMDelay .....................911
042:St.BiphaseModulation................ 859
043:MultitapCho/Delay4Taps .............. 860 Reverb and Early Reflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 913
044:MultitapCho/Delay6Taps .............. 860 100:Overb................................. 913
045:BiChorus............................. 861 101:ReverbHall............................914
046:Ensemble ............................. 863 102:ReverbSmoothHall ....................914
047:PolysixEnsemble ...................... 863 103:ReverbWetPlate .......................914
048:StereoFlanger ......................... 864 104:ReverbDryPlate.......................914
049:StereoRandomFlanger................. 865 105:ReverbRoom..........................915
050:StereoEnvelopeFlanger ................ 865 106:ReverbBrightRoom....................915

viii
107:EarlyReflections....................... 916 165:Exciter//Exciter ........................943
108:EarlyReflectionsHiDens ............... 916 166:Exciter//OD/HiGain...................943
167:Exciter//Wah ..........................944
Mono-Mono Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
168:Exciter//Chorus/Flanger................944
109:P4EQExciter ......................... 921
169:Exciter//Phaser ........................944
110:P4EQWah ........................... 921
170:Exciter//MtapBPMDly.................944
111:P4EQChorus/Flanger................. 921
171:OD/HiGain//OD/HiGain ..............945
112:P4EQPhaser ......................... 922
172:OD/HiGain//Wah.....................945
113:P4EQMultitapDelay ................. 922
173:OD/HiGain//Cho/Flanger ..............945
114:CompWah .......................... 922
174:OD/HiGain//Phaser ...................945
115:CompAmpSim...................... 923
175:OD/HiGain//MtBPMDly..............946
116:CompOD/HiGain.................... 923
176:Wah//Wah ............................946
117:CompP4EQ ......................... 923
177:Wah//Chorus/Flanger..................946
118:CompChorus/Flanger................. 924
178:Wah//Phaser ..........................946
119:CompPhaser ........................ 924
179:Wah//MultitapBPMDly................947
120:CompMultitapDelay ................. 925
180:Cho/Flange//Cho/Flanger ...............947
121:LimiterP4EQ ........................ 925
181:Cho/Flange//Phaser ....................947
122:LimiterChorus/Flanger ............... 925
182:Cho/Flange//MtBPMDly...............947
123:LimiterPhaser ....................... 926
183:Phaser//Phaser........................948
124:LimiterMultitapDelay ................ 926
184:Phaser//MtapBPMDly .................948
125:ExciterComp ........................ 927
185:Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPMDly ..............948
126:ExciterLimiter ....................... 927
127:ExciterChorus/Flanger ................ 927
128:ExciterPhaser ........................ 928
129:ExciterMultitapDelay ................ 928
KARMA GE guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
130:OD/HiGainAmpSim ................. 928 About the KARMA GE guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
131:OD/HiGainCho/Flanger.............. 929 HowtoreadtheGEGuide.................949
132:OD/HiGainPhaser................... 929 HowGEparameternamesaredisplayed ......949
133:OD/HiGainMultitapDly.............. 929
About KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
134:WahAmpSim ....................... 930
135:DecimatorAmpSim .................. 930 Overview..................................951
136:DecimatorComp..................... 931 TheoryOfOperation ........................951
137:AmpSimTremolo .................... 931 KARMAArchitecture(Diagram) .............952
138:Cho/FlangerMultitapDly ............. 932 GE (Generated Effect) Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
139:PhaserChorus/Flanger................ 932 Overview..................................953
140:ReverbGate ......................... 932 GEGlobalParameters .......................953
Mono/Mono Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 Note Series Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956
141:P4EQ//P4EQ ......................... 937 Overview..................................956
142:P4EQ//Comp ......................... 937 Parameters ................................956
143:P4EQ//Limiter ........................ 938
Phase Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960
144:P4EQ//Exciter........................ 938
145:P4EQ//OD/HiGain.................... 938 Overview..................................960
146:P4EQ//Wah.......................... 938 AboutPhasePatterns .......................960
147:P4EQ//Chorus/Flanger ................ 939 GeneralParameters .........................960
148:P4EQ//Phaser ........................ 939 PhaseSpecificParameters ...................962
149:P4EQ//MultitapBPMDly .............. 939 EndLoopParameters.......................963
150:Comp//Comp ........................ 939 PatternParameters .........................963
151:Comp//Limiter ....................... 940 Rhythm Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965
152:Comp//Exciter........................ 940 Overview..................................965
153:Comp//OD/HiGain................... 940 AboutRhythmPatterns .....................965
154:Comp//Wah.......................... 940 GlobalParameters ..........................965
155:Comp//Chorus/Flanger ................ 941 PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters.........966
156:Comp//Phaser ........................ 941 RandomWeightingParametersPools ........967
157:Comp//MultitapBPMDly ............. 941 RandomWeightingParametersTies.........967
158:Limiter//Limiter...................... 941 AssociatedParameters ......................968
159:Limiter//Exciter....................... 942
Duration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970
160:Limiter//OD/HiGain .................. 942
161:Limiter//Wah......................... 942 Overview..................................970
162:Limiter//Chorus/Flanger ............... 942 AboutDurationPatterns ....................970
163:Limiter//Phaser ....................... 943 PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters.........970
164:Limiter//MtapBPMDly ............... 943 AssociatedParameters ......................970

ix
RandomWeightingParametersPools....... 971 PatternEditingGrid
RandomWeightingParametersTies ........ 972 &AssociatedParameters................... 1003
AssociatedParameters ..................... 972 AssociatedParameters..................... 1004
RandomWeightingParametersPools....... 1005
Index Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .973
RandomWeightingParametersRests ....... 1006
Overview................................. 973
AssociatedParameters..................... 1006
AboutIndexPatterns....................... 973
PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters ........ 973 Direct Index Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010
AssociatedParameters ..................... 973 Overview ................................ 1010
RandomWeightingParameters.............. 974 GeneralParameters ........................ 1010
AssociatedParameters ..................... 974 DurationParameters ....................... 1011
RepeatParameters......................... 1012
Cluster Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .977
BendParameters.......................... 1012
Overview................................. 977
AboutClusterPatterns..................... 977 Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters ........ 977 UsingAutoBend .......................... 1014
RandomWeightingParameters.............. 978 RandomWeightingCurves ................. 1015
AssociatedParameters ..................... 978
Velocity Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979
Overview................................. 979
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1019
AboutVelocityPatterns .................... 979 Alternate Modulation Sources (AMS). . . . . . . 1019
GlobalParameters......................... 979 AlternateModulationOverview............. 1019
PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters ........ 980 AlternateModulationSource(AMS)List ..... 1021
RandomWeightingParameters.............. 980 AlternateModulationsettings............... 1025
AssociatedParameters ..................... 980
Dynamic Modulation Sources (Dmod) . . . . . . 1030
CCs/Pitch Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .982 Overview ................................ 1030
Overview................................. 982 DynamicModulationSourceList ............ 1030
AboutCC/Bend/PitchPatterns .............. 982
Controller Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters ........ 982
SW1/2Assignments........................ 1033
RandomWeightingParameters.............. 983
RealtimeKnobs58Assignments ............ 1034
GlobalParameters......................... 984
FootSwitchAssignments ................... 1035
AssociatedParameters ..................... 984
FootPedalAssignments .................... 1036
WaveSeq Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .986
Dynamic MIDI Sources & Destinations. . . . . . 1038
Overview................................. 986
DynamicMIDISources..................... 1038
AboutWaveSeqPatterns ................... 986
DynamicMIDIDestinations ................ 1040
GlobalParameters......................... 986
PatternGrid&AssociatedParameters ........ 987 MIDI transmission from OASYS controllers . . 1045
RandomWeightingParameters.............. 988
OASYS and MIDI CCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
AssociatedParameters ..................... 988
ResponsestostandardMIDIcontrollers...... 1049
Envelope Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .989 ParameterscontrolledbyMIDICCs#7079 ... 1052
Overview................................. 989
MIDI applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
AboutEnvelopes .......................... 989
AboutMIDI .............................. 1055
Parameters ............................... 989
ConnectingMIDIdevices&computers ....... 1055
LevelCombinations........................ 992
Messagestransmitted
TimeCombinations ........................ 992
andreceivedbytheOASYS ................. 1056
Repeat (Melodic Repeat) Group . . . . . . . . . . .994
MIDI Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Overview................................. 994
GeneralParameters........................ 994 Error and confirmation messages . . . . . . . . . 1072
RangeParameters ......................... 997 A(ADCAreYouSure) .................... 1072
GEMode=RealTimeParameters............ 997 B(Buffer)................................. 1072
C(CantcalibrateCompleted) .............. 1072
Bend Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .999
D(DestinationDisk)....................... 1073
Overview................................. 999 E(ErrorExceeded)........................ 1074
GeneralParameters........................ 999 F(FileFront) ............................. 1074
GEMode=RealTimeParameters........... 1001 I(IllegalIndex)........................... 1076
Drum Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1003 M(MasterMultisample)................... 1076
Overview................................ 1003 N(NodataNotenoughsongmemory) ...... 1077
AboutDrumPatterns ..................... 1003 O(ObeycopyrightrulesOscillator).......... 1078
P(PatternProgram) ....................... 1079

x
R(RearsampleRoot) ..................... 1079 * ScreenshotsfromtheKARMAsoftwarethatappear
S(SampleSource)........................ 1079 throughoutthisguideare19942004byStephenKay,
T(TheclockTrack)....................... 1080 KarmaLabLLC.Usedbypermission.Allrights
reserved.
U(UnabletocreatedirectoryUSBHub) ..... 1081
W(Wave)................................ 1081 * KARMATechnologycanbelocatedontheinternetat:
www.karmalab.com.
Y(You) .................................. 1081
* LinuxisatrademarkorregisteredtrademarkofLinus
Disk mode information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083 TorvaldsintheUnitedStatesandinothercountries.
AIFFandWAVEformatdetails:importing ... 1083 * Thisproductwasdevelopedunderlicenseofphysical
AIFFandWAVEformatdetails:exporting... 1083 modelingtonegeneratorpatents(http://www.sondius
AboutKORGformatfiles .................. 1084 xg.com)ownedbyStanfordUniversityUSAand
CDR/RWdisksontheOASYS:UDFandpacket YamahaCorporation.
writing.................................. 1086 * Companynames,productnames,andnamesofformats
etc.arethetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksoftheir
EXB-DI option board, additional memory, & respectiveowners.
calendar battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089
Safetyprecautions ........................ 1089
Overview:userinstallablehardware........ 1090
Installinganoptionboard,memory/calendar
battery .................................. 1090
EXBDIoption............................ 1094
Updating the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096
Using the included Restore CDs to restore the
system and factory sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097

Voice Name List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099


Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
Drum Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
GM Drum Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
KARMA GEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
External Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
Multisamples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Drumsamples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159
Wave Sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170
Preset Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
Template Songs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171
Demo Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172

* KARMA(KayAlgorithmicRealtimeMusicArchitec
ture)TechnologyhasbeenlicensedfromStephenKay,
andisprotectedbyU.S.Patents5,486,647,5,521,327,
6,084,171,6,087,578,6,103,964,6,121,532,6,121,533,
6,326,538,and6,639,141.Otherpatentspending.
* KARMAandtheKARMALogoareregisteredtrade
marks,andGeneratedEffect(GE),MelodicRepeat,
DirectIndex,ManualAdvance,SmartScan,
FreezeRandomize,RandomCapture,Random
FF/REWandSceneMatrixaretrademarksof
StephenKay,KarmaLabLLC.Thismanualcopyright
19942004byKORGInc.andStephenKay.Allrights
reserved.

xi
xii
Program mode: HD-1

HD-1 Overview
TheHD1HighDefinitionSynthesizerisKorgsnew WaveSequencing,forcreatingrhythmicpatternsor
flagshipPCMsynthesisengine,featuringoutstanding complex,evolvingtimbres
soundquality,uniquesounddesigntools,andarich VectorSynthesis
arrayofmodulationpossibilities,including:
Dualmultimoderesonantfilters
Ultrahighqualitysampleinterpolation,basedon
new,proprietarytechnology,forminimalaliasing DriveandLowBoost,foraddingpervoicegrit,
andcrystalclearhighfrequencies girthanddistortion

OveragigabyteofROMandEXssamplelibraries Threeenvelopes,twoLFOs,andtwoAMSMixers
perOSC,plusacommonLFO,Vectorenvelope,
DualOSCstructure,providingtwocompletevoice andKARMAfortheProgramasawhole
chainsforlayersandsplits
TwocomplexkeytrackinggeneratorsperOSC,
WithineachOSC,uptofourwayvelocitysplits plustwomorefortheProgramasawhole
andcrossfades(includingtwowaylayers)
Extensiverealtimemodulationcapabilities

HD-1 Program Structure Common


Vector KARMA Key
LFO Track 1
2

OSC1
Mixer
Effects
& EQ
OSC2

HD-1 OSC Structure


AMS AMS
LFO 1 LFO 2
Mixer 1 Mixer 2

Filter Amp Amp


Pitch EG Filter EG
Key Track EG Key Track

Serial/
Parallel

Filter A

Osc + Drive Amp

Filter B
Serial/
Parallel

OSC1
OSC2

1
Program mode: HD-1

Program P0: Play


ThisisthemainpageofProgrammodeforHD1 Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhile
Programs.Amongotherthings,youcan: youreplaying,youcanusethisfunctiontostart
SelectPrograms recordingimmediately.Todoso:

Jumpdirectlytothemaineditingpages 1. HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEkey.
MakebasiceditstoKARMA
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillopenandaskAre
Setuptheaudioinputsandresamplingoptions yousure?
Usethecontrolsurface 2. PressOK.
Auto Song Setup YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode,andwill
beintherecordreadystate.
TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrent
ProgramorCombinationintoaSong,andthenputs 3. PresstheSTART/STOPkeytostartthesequencer
theOASYSinrecordreadymode. andbeginrecording.

01: Main
01PMC

01a

01b

ThisisthemainpageforselectingPrograms,whichare PressitathirdtimetoselectthemainProgram
thebasicsoundsoftheOASYS.Italsoincludesan nameparameter.
interactiveoverviewofthemostimportantProgram
parametersjusttouchaparameter,andyoulljumpto
thecorrespondingeditpage. 01a: Program Select
Tip:WhereveryouareintheProgrammodepages, Bank [INTAF, GM, g(19), g(d), USERAG]
pressingEXITthreetimes(orfewer)willtakeyouback ThisistheBankofthecurrentProgram.
tothispage,andselecttheProgramname.Youcan
thenimmediatelyusethenumerickeysor / YoucanchangetheBankeitherviatheonscreen
switchestoselectadifferentProgram. menu,orbyusingthefrontpanelBankbuttons.

Forinstance,ifyoureonanypageotherthanP0:Play: Banks GM, g(19), and g(d): General MIDI


Pressitoncetogotothepreviouslyselectedtabon TheGMbankcontainsafullsetofGeneralMIDI2
themainP0page,suchasControlSurfaceorAudio Programs,aswellasvariationsubbanksg(1)g(9)
In/Sampling. (GM2variationprograms),andbankg(d)(drums).
PressitagaintogotothefirsttabonthemainP0 EachtimeyoupressthefrontpanelINTGbutton,
pagethemainProgramPlaypage.Ifyouhad youllstepthroughthesevariationbanksinthe
previouslyselectedaparameteronthispage,that followingorder:GMg(1)g(2)g(8)g(9)GM
parameterwillbeselected.

2
Program P0: Play 01: Main

Bank Bank Type Category Popup Tempo

Program Select Popup Program Select Favorite

Ifavariationbankdoesnthaveadifferentversionof Formoreinformation,seeGlobalP6:PluginInfoon
thecurrentProgram,thebasicGMsoundwillbe page 738oftheParameterGuide.
recalledinstead.Inthiscase,anasterisk*willbeadded
tothebeginningoftheProgramname. Bank Type [HD-1, EXi]
YoucaneditGMPrograms,butyoumustthensave ThisshowswhetherthecurrentBankcontainsHD1
themtoadifferentBank;theGMProgramsthemselves ProgramsorEXiPrograms.ThetwoProgramtypes
cannotbeoverwritten. cantbemixedinasinglebank.
HD1:TheBankcontainsHD1Programs.
Program Bank Contents
EXi:TheBankcontainsEXiPrograms.
Asshippedfromthefactory,thecontentsofthe
ProgramBanksareasfollows: Changing the Bank Type for USER-AG
Programbankcontents BankscancontaineitherHD1ProgramsorEXi
Programs,butnotboth.Thisassignmentisfixedfor
Bank Contents Bank Type
theINTbanks,butcanbesetseparatelyforeachofthe
INT-AD HD-1Programs USERbanks.
HD-1Programs; requires the HD-1 TochangethetypeofaUSERbank:
INT-E
EXs1 ROM Expansion PCM
1. PressthefrontpanelGLOBALbuttontoenter
INT-F AL-1 and CX-3 Programs EXi Globalmode.
GM (INT-G) GM2 main Programs 2. SelecttheBasictab.
g(1)g(9) GM2 variation Programs GM 3. Pressthepagemenubutton,andselectSet
ProgramUserBankType.
g(d) GM2 drum Programs
4. ChangetheTypeforthedesiredbanks.Leaveall
HD-1 Programs; requires the oftheotherbankssettoNoChange.
USER-A,
EXs2 Concert Grand Piano
000007 SettingabankstypewillerasealloftheProgramdata
PCM.
inthebanksomakesurethatyourenoterasingany
USER-A, HD-1 Vocoder and demo song Programsyouwanttokeep!
009010 Programs
5. PresstheOKbutton.
USER-A,
Initialized HD-1 Programs Anareyousure?dialogappears.
11127 Bank type
can be set to 6. Ifyourecertainofthechange,pressOKagain.
USER-B Initialized HD-1 Programs
either HD-1
Theselectedbankswillnowbeinitializedtousethe
USER-C MOD-7 Programs or EXi
newProgramtypes.
MS-20EX and PolysixEX
USER-D
Programs Program Select [(0127 (INT and USER Banks),
USER-E STR-1 Programs
1128 (GM Banks)]
ThisisthecurrentProgram.Whenthisparameteris
USER-F AL-1 and CX-3 Programs
selected,youcanselectprogramsusingtheInc and
USER-G Initialized HD-1 Programs Dec buttons,numericbuttons09(followedby
ENTER),ortheValuedial.
FordetailsonthefactoryPrograms,pleaseseethe YoucanalsochangeProgramsviaMIDIProgram
VoiceNameListonpage 1099. Changemessage,orbypressingafootswitch.Formore
Optional EXi and demo mode information,seeFootSwitchAssignmentson
page 1035.
TheMOD7,MS20EXandPolysixEXareoptionalEXi.
Initially,theywillbeindemomode.Youllbeableto StandardProgramsarenumberedfrom0to127,while
play,edit,andsavePrograms,Combis,andSongs GMProgramsusetherangefrom1to128,asperthe
whichusetheseEXibutuntilyoupurchasean GMspecification.
authorizationcode,theirsoundwillfadeout Note:Onthispageonly,theVALUEsliderfunctionsas
periodically. amodulationsourcewhichmeansthatyoucantuse
Topurchaseauthorizationcodes,andtodownload ittoselectPrograms.
additional,freebanksofsounds,goto PressthepopupbuttontocalluptheBank/Program
www.korguser.net.Oncepurchased,youcanenterthe Selectmenu,asdescribedbelow.Thisshowsallofthe
authorizationcodeonthePlugInInfopageinGlobal Programsinmemory,organizedbyBank.
mode.

3
Program mode: HD-1

Bank/Program Select Category/Program Select


1. PressthepopupbuttonattheleftofProgram 1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton(abovethe
SelecttoopentheBank/ProgramSelectmenu. ProgramSelectparameter)toopenthe
2. Pressoneofthetabsonthelefttoselectaspecific Category/ProgramSelectmenu.
bank. 2. Pressoneofthetabsonthelefttoselectthe
3. Selectaprogramfromthelist.Youcantoucha desiredcategory.
Programsnamedirectly,orusetheInc andDec IfnoProgramsareassignedtoaparticularcategoryor
buttons. subcategory,youwontbeabletoselectitstab.
Thepopupshows16Programsatatime.Tobrowse 3. Pressatabinthesecondfromleftcolumntoselect
throughalloftheProgramsinthecurrentbank,use asubcategory.
thescrollbaratthebottomofthewindow. All:Allprogramsinthecategorywillbeshown.
WhenyouselectBankINTG,theVariationbutton Choosethiswhenyoudontneedtousesubcategories.
appearsatthebottomleftofthedialog.Thisbutton 07:Theprogramswillbeshownbysubcategory.
cyclesthroughtheGMvariationbanks,justlike
repeatedlypressingthefrontpanelINTGBank 4. Selectaprogramfromthelist.
button,asdescribedunderBanksGM,g(19),and YoucantouchaProgramsnamedirectly,orusetheInc
g(d):GeneralMIDI,above. andDec buttons.
TheFavoritebuttontrimsthelisttoshowonly IftherearemoreProgramsthancanbeshownonthe
Programsyouvemarkedasfavorites.Iftheselected screenatonetime,usethescrollbartobrowsethrough
BankcontainsnoProgramsmarkedasFavorites,the theentireCategory.
buttoncantbeturnedon. TheFavoritebuttontrimsthelisttoshowonly
Formoreinformation,seeFavorite,below. Programsyouvemarkedasfavorites.Iftheselected
4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice,or CategorycontainsnoProgramsmarkedasFavorites,
presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutchanging thebuttoncantbeturnedon.
theProgram. 5. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourchoice,or
presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutchanging
Category [0018, Name] theProgram.
Allprogramsareclassifiedintooneofeighteen YoucanassignacategorytoaProgramintheWrite
categories,suchasKeyboard,Organ,Strings,etc.Each Programdialog.Formoreinformation,seeSaving
ofthesecategoriesmayalsohaveuptoeightsub youreditsonpage 59oftheOperationGuide,and
categories. Writingaprogramorcombinationonpage 170of
SelectingbyCategoryletsyousearchforaspecifictype theOperationGuide.
ofsound(likeanelectricbass,forexample),without
concernforwhatBanksthesoundsarestoredin. Favorite [Off, On]
ThisbuttonmarkstheProgramasafavorite,which
PresstheCategorypopupbutton,andthe
makesiteasytofindintheBank/ProgramSelectand
Category/ProgramSelectmenuwillappear,as
Category/ProgramSelectdialogs.
describedbelow.

Bank/ProgramSelectmenu

Tab

Scroll bar

4
Program P0: Play 01: Main

NotethatyoumustwritethePrograminordertosave Red:ROMMultisamples
changestothissetting. Green:RAMMultisamples
Tempo ( q ) [040.00240.00, EXT] Blue:WaveSequences
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentProgram,which Orange:DrumKits
appliestotemposyncedLFOsandWaveSequences,
Grey:Off
theVectorEG,KARMA,andtemposyncedeffects.
Mn:Mono
EXTmeansthatthetempowillsynctoexternalMIDI
clocks.YoullseethisiftheGlobalMIDIpageMIDI St:Stereo
ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,orifitssetto TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
AutoandtheOASYSiscurrentlyreceivingMIDI P2OSC1Basicpage.
clocks.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIClock
(MIDIClockSource)onpage 710. Key Zone
040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin ThisindicatesthekeyzoneinwhichOSC1willsound.
BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousing The76or88notekeyboardregionisalsoshown.
thestandarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsojustturn TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
theTEMPOknob,orbyplayingafewquarternoteson P1ProgramBasicpage.
theTAPTEMPObutton.
MS14, Velocity Zone Graphic
ThisshowsthevelocityzonesforOSC1multisamples
01b: Overview and Page Jump
14.
Thissectionshowsanoverviewofthemostimportant TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
Programsettings,suchastheselectedMultisamplesor P2OSC1Basicpage.
WaveSequencesandtheirvelocityranges,filter
settings,EGsandLFOs,andsoon. OSC1 LFO1, OSC1 LFO2 Graphic
Thegraphicsgiveyouaquickwaytocheckallofthese ThisshowsthewaveformsofOSC1LFO1andOSC1
settingsataglance.Theyalsoletyoujumpinstantlyto LFO2.IfMIDI/TempoSyncisselected,thiswill
anyofthedisplayedparameters.Justtouchoneofthe indicateMIDI.
graphics,andyoulljumptothepagecontainingits TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
parameters.Forinstance,ifyoutouchtheFilterEG P5OSC1LFO1pageorOSC1LFO2page.
graphic,youllgototheFilterEGpage.
Filter 1
OSC1
Filter Routing & Type
OSC1 Multisample/Wave Sequence/Drum Kit
Thisshowsthefilter1routingandfiltertype.
ThisareashowsOSC1sfourMultisamplesorWave
Sequences.Colorsandabbreviationsareusedto TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
distinguishbetweenthevariouspossibilities,as P3Filter1page.
detailedbelow.

Category/ProgramSelectmenu

Category tab

Sub-category tab

Scroll bar

5
Program mode: HD-1

Filter Page Graphic


t 01: Page Menu Commands
Thisshowsthecutofffrequency.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP3Filter1
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
page.
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Filter EG Graphic commandsonpage 142.
Thisshowstheshapeofthefilter1EG. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
P3Filter1EGpage. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Amp 1
Drive, Low Boost, Pan, Amp Level
ThisareashowstheAmp1Driver,LowBoost,Pan,
andAmpLevelvalues.
IfBypassison,DriveandLowBoostarenotshown.
TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
P4Amp1/Drive1page.

Amp EG Graphic
Thisshowstheshapeoftheamp1EG.
TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
P4Amp1EGpage.

Common
Voice Assign Mode
Thisshowsthevoiceassignmodeoftheprogram
eitherPOLYorMONO.
TouchthisareatojumptothecorrespondingProgram
P1ProgramBasicpage.

Pitch EG Graphic
ThisshowstheshapeofthePitchEG.
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP2PitchEG
page.

Common LFO Graphic


ThisshowsthewaveformoftheCommonLFO.Also,if
MIDI/TempoSyncisenabled,thewordMIDIwill
appear.
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP5Common
LFOpage.

3Band EQ Graphic
ThisshowstheMIDsweepablethreebandEQ.
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP4EQpage.

IFX
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP8Routing
page.

MFX/TFX
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP9Routing
page.

KARMA
ThisshowsthenameoftheselectedKARMAGE.
TouchthisareatojumptotheProgramP7GE
Setup/KeyZonespage.

6
Program P0: Play 06: KARMA GE

06: KARMA GE
06PMC

06a

06b

06c

ThispageletsyoumakebasicadjustmentstoKARMA.
FormoredetailededitingofKARMAparameters,see
ProgramP7:KARMAonpage 100.
ToenableordisableKARMAfortheselectedProgram,
usetheKARMAON/OFFswitch.
ThestatesoftheKARMAON/OFFandLATCH
buttons,theselectedKARMASCENE,andKARMA
SWITCHES18andSLIDERS18aresaved
independentlyforeachProgram.

06a: Program Select, Load GE Options,


KARMA T.Sig, Tempo
2. SpecifyhowyouwanttheKARMAcontrollers
Bank [INTAF, GM, g(19), g(d), USERAG] andscenesettingstochange(orbepreserved)
whenyouselectadifferentGE.
Bank Type [(HD-1, EXi)]
AutoRTCSetup:WhenyouselectaGE,thesettings
Program [(0127 (INT and USER Banks), fortheKARMASLIDERSandSWITCHESwillbe
1128 (GM Banks)] madeautomatically.Thismeansthatwhenyou
selectaGE,youwillbeabletousetheslidersand
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] switchestocontrolthephrasesoreffectvariations
Thesearethecurrentbank,Program,andTempo.For withouthavingtoreassignthesettingsyourself.
moreinformation,see01a:ProgramSelecton ClearRTCSetup:WhenyouselectaGE,all
page 2. KARMAcontrollerandscenesettingswillbe
cleared(initialized).TheControlSurfaceSlidersand
Load GE Options [Dialogue]
SwitcheswillhavenoeffectontheGE.
Theseoptionsletyouspecifywhetherthevaluesand
KeepRTCSetup:EvenifyouselectaGE,the
assignmentsfortheKARMASLIDERSandSWITCHES
currentKARMAcontrollerandscenesettingswill
willbesetautomatically,beinitialized,orbepreserved
bepreserved.Usethissettingifyouwantto
whenyouselectaGE.
preservethecurrentKARMAcontrollerandscene
TheseoptionsrelatetotheconceptofRTCModels;for settingsbecauseyouareselectingaGEwhose
moreinformation,seeRTCModelonpage 198ofthe assignedGEparametersareexactlythesame(using
OperationGuide. thesameRTCModel),orifyouwanttokeepthe
1. PresstheLoadGEOptionsbuttontoopenthe currentKARMAcontrollersettingsandeditthem
LoadGEOptionsdialogbox. yourselfasnecessary.

7
Program mode: HD-1

3. IfyouchoosetheAutoRTCSetupOnsetting, Tempo ( q ) [040.00240.00, EXT]


checkorunchecktheUseRTCModeloption ThisisthetempoforthecurrentProgram,which
boxtospecifyhowtheautomaticsettingswillbe appliestotemposyncedLFOsandWaveSequences,
made. KARMA,andtemposyncedeffects.
On(checked):ThecurrentKARMAcontroller
EXTmeansthatthetempowillsynctoexternalMIDI
assignmentsandvalueswillbecleared,andnew
clocks.YoullseethisiftheGlobalMIDIpageMIDI
settingswillbemadeaccordingtotheRTCModel
ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,orifitssetto
specifiedforeachGE.HoweverifyouselectaGE
AutoandtheOASYSiscurrentlyreceivingMIDI
whoseRTCModelisCustom,allKARMA
clocks.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIClock
controllerandscenesettingswillbeinitialized(the
(MIDIClockSource)onpage 710.
sameasifyouveselectedClearRTCSetupOn).
Normallyyouwillleavethison. 040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin
BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousing
Off(unchecked):ThecurrentKARMAcontroller
thestandarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsojustturn
assignmentsandvalueswillbepreservedasmuch
theTEMPOknob,orbyplayingafewquarternoteson
aspossible.Forexample,youmightselectadrum
theTAPTEMPObutton.
patternGEwiththissettingturnedOn(checked),
editsomeoftheKARMAScenesettings
appropriatelyforthatGE,andthenturnthisOff 06b: GE Select
(unchecked)whentryingoutadifferentdrum
patternGE,therebyapplyingthesettingsyoumade ThephrasesandpatternsproducedbyaKARMA
tothenewGE. ModulearegeneratedbyaGE(GeneratedEffect).
Basedoninputnotedatafromthekeyboard,theGE
Note:IfyouturnonAutoRTCSetupandturnoff
createsphrasesandpatternsusingnumerousinternal
UseRTCModel,thecurrentKARMAcontroller
parametersettingstocontrolthedevelopmentofthe
settingswillbepreservedasmuchaspossible,
notedata,therhythm,thechordstructure,thevelocity
relativetothestateoftheGERealTimeParameters.
etc.MIDIcontrolchangesandpitchbendetc.canalso
Howeverif(forexample)thenewlyselectedGE
begeneratedinsynchronizationwiththephraseor
doesnothavethesamerealtimeparameters,some
pattern.Inthiswayyoucanproducephrasesand
oftheKARMAcontrollersettingswillbecleared.
patternsinwhichtheGEfreelyvariesthetoneorpitch.
4. IfyouturnedUseRTCModelOn(checked),use TheGEcanbeselectedindependentlyforeach
ResetScenestospecifywhetherscenesettings KARMAModule.
willberesetorpreservedwhenyouselectaGE.
InProgrammodeyoucanuseoneKARMAModule
On(checked):WhenyouselectaGE,thecurrent (ModuleA).InCombinationandSequencermodes,
settingsofscenes18willberesettothestoredGE youcanusefourKARMAModules:A,B,C,andD.
settings.
Off(unchecked):ThecurrentsettingsofScenes18 Module A
willbepreserved.Choosethisifyouintendtoselect
adifferentGEthathasthesameRTCModeland GE Select [Preset 0000...2047,
wanttocontinueusingthesamescenesettings. USER-AL 000...127]
EvenifthisisOff(unchecked),thesettingswillbe ThisselectstheGEfortheKARMAmodule.Thereare
resetifyouselectaGEforwhichadifferentRTC atotalof3,584tochoosefrom:2,048presetGEs,and
Modelisspecified. 1,536rewritableUserGEs(12banksof128each).

IfUseRTCModelisOff(unchecked),theReset PresetGEsarepartofthesystemsoftware.
Sceneoptionisunavailable. UserGEsmaybeincludedwithnewbanksofsounds,
5. ClicktheOKbuttontoapplythesettingsofthe andcanalsobecreatedusingKARMAOASYS
dialogbox,orclicktheCancelbuttontoreturnto software(dedicatedsoftwarefortheOASYS*).For
thesettingsbeforeyouopenedthedialogbox. moreinformationonloadingUserGEs,seeLoad
.KGEonpage 773.
Note:TheRTCModelassociatedwithaGEcanbe
viewedontheControlSurfacepagewhenitissetto *MadebyKarmaLab(http://www.karmalab.com).
R.TimeKnobs/KARMA,andintheVNL. MacintoshandWindowsaresupported.English
versiononly.
KARMA T.Sig (Time Signature)
[GE/TS, 1/416/4, 1/816/8, 1/1616/16] GE Bank Select [Preset...USER-L]
Thisspecifiesthetimesignatureofthephrasesor ThisselectstheGEbank.ThePresetbankispartofthe
patternsgeneratedbytheKARMAModules.The systemsoftware;Userbankscanbeloadedfromdisk.
internaltimesignatureofthephraseorpatternis Formoreinformation,seeGESelect,above.
determinedbytheGE,butyoucansetthisparameter GE Category Select [ArpeggioReal-Time]
tochangethetimesignature.
ThisletsyouselectaGEbycategory,fromArpeggio
GE/TS:Theinitialtimesignaturespecifiedbyeach throughRealTime.
KARMAModulewillbeused.
1/416/16:Specifythedesiredtimesignature.In RTC Model [List of RTC Models]
CombinationandSequencermodes,thiswillchange ThisshowstheGEsRTCModel,asspecifiedinternally
thetimesignatureforallfourKARMAModules. foreachpresetGE.

8
Program P0: Play 06: KARMA GE

Tab
Preset
GE Bank

User
GE Bank

RTC Model
Name

RTCstandsforRealTimeControl.RTCmodels A:KARMAModuleAisbeingcontrolled.Inthiscase,
providealevelofstandardizationforcontrollingthe youarecontrollingaGERealTimeParameter.
over200internalparametersofaGE.Formore P:ThesliderorswitchiscontrollingaPerfRealTime
information,seeRTCModelonpage 198ofthe Parameter.
OperationGuide.
(Parameter Number) [0132]
KARMA Module Info WhenModuleIDisA,thisshowsthenumberofthe
Chord [Chord name] assignedGERealTimeParameter(0132).These
parametersareassignedtocontrolsonthe75:GE
Thisshowsthenameofthechorddetectedbythe RealTimeParameterspage.
KARMAModule.
IfModuleIDisP,thisshowsthenumberofthe
Note:Chorddetectionisaffectedbythefollowing assignedPerfRealTimeParameter(0108).These
parameters: parametersareassignedtocontrolsonthe76:Perf
TheKARMAmodulesKeyZone.SeeKeyZone RealTimeParameterspage.
onpage 101.
Parameter Value
TheKARMAmodulesTranspose.SeeTranspose
onpage 106. ThisareashowsthecurrentvalueoftheGERealTime
ParameterorPerfRealTimeParameter.Thiswill
TheDestination(DynamicMIDIDestination).See changeasyoumovetheslideroroperatetheswitch.
Destinationonpage 121.
Asliderorswitchcanhavemanyparameters
TheChordScanandSmartScansettings. assignedtoit.Amaximumoffourassigned
parameterscanbedisplayedhereintheavailable
KARMA Value
space.Iftherearemore,theywillnotbedisplayed,
WhenyoumoveorpressaKARMASLIDERor buta>willbeaddedtotheendoftheline.They
SWITCH,thisareashowsthenumberandvalueofthe willstillfunctionwhenthecontrolisactivated,even
GERealTimeParametersorPerfRealTime thoughyoucantviewtheirvaluesdirectly.
Parametersassignedtothecontrol.Thisletsyousee
whichparametersarebeingcontrolledbytheslideror Note/CC Activity
switch,andhow.
Displayexample A (Module A)
S (Scene) [18]
Thebluesquareintheupperleftofthesectionshows
thecurrentsceneoftheselectedKARMAmodule.

Parameter Value
ThenumberinparenthesesisthedefaultScene,as
Module ID
Parameter No.
storedintheProgram.

CCs/Notes
(Module ID) [A, P] Thisisarealtimedisplayofthenoteon/offorMIDI
Thisshowsthetypeofparameterassignedtotheslider controlchangemessagesgeneratedbytheKARMA
orswitch. module(ModuleA).

9
Program mode: HD-1

Scan Zone 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore


TheKeyZoneoftheKARMAModuleisdisplayedasa information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
solidbluelineunderthenotesdisplay.Formore page 151.
information,seeKeyZoneonpage 101. 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sceneonpage 151.
Scene
5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Sceneonpage 151.
Module CCs Notes Scan Zone
6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
7:AutoAssignKARMARTCName.Formore
06c: RealTime Controls information,seeAutoAssignKARMARTC
Thisdisplaysthevalues,names,andstoredsettingsof Nameonpage 143.
KARMASLIDERS18andKARMASWITCHES18.
NotethateachScenecanhaveseparatevaluesand
storedsettingsforeachoftheslidersandswitches.

KARMA SWITCHES 18
Current Value 18
ThisshowsthecurrentsettingoftheKARMA
SWITCH.Youcancontrolthiseitherbyusingthe
physicalfrontpanelswitch,orbytouchingtheon
screenswitch.

Stored Value 18
ThisshowsstoredvalueoftheKARMASWITCHfor
thecurrentScene,aswrittenintotheCombination.

Name 18
ThisshowsthenameoftheKARMASWITCH.Youcan
assignthisnameinProgram79:Name/Map.

KARMA SLIDERS 18
Current Value 18
ThisshowsthecurrentsettingoftheKARMASLIDER.
Youcanchangethiseitherbyusingthephysicalfront
panelslider,orbytouchingtheonscreensliderand
thenusinganyofthedataentrycontrols.

Stored Value 18
ThisshowsstoredvalueoftheKARMASLIDERfor
thecurrentScene,aswrittenintotheCombination.

Name 18
ThisshowsthenameoftheKARMASLIDER.Youcan
assignthisnameinProgram79:Name/Map.

t 06: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.

10
Program P0: Play 07: Controller View/Effect

07: Controller View/Effect


07PMC

07a

07b

07c

Thispageshowsthefunctionsassignedtothephysical Knobs 58 [Assignment]


controllers,includingthevectorjoystick,SW1and2, Theseindicatethefunctionsassignedtoknobs58.
andknobs58.Italsoincludesanoverviewofallofthe (See18:SetUpControllersonpage 46)
effects,andletsyouadjusttheWet/DryBalances
separatelyfortheIFX,MFX,andTFX.
07c: Effects
07a: Program Select IFX112, MFX1&2, TFX1&2 [Effect]
Bank [INTAF, GM, g(19), g(d), USERAG] Thisareashowstheeffectassignedtoeachinserteffect,
mastereffect,andtotaleffect,anditson/offstatus.
Bank Type [HD-1, EXi]
FX Balance
Program [(0127 (INT and USER Banks),
1128 (GM Banks)] IFX [-100+10]
ThiscontrolstheWet/Drybalanceofallinsert
q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] effects.Asettingof+10isWetorWet,asettingof+0
Thesearethecurrentbank,Program,andTempo.For leavesthesettingsoftheprogramunmodified,anda
moreinformation,see01a:ProgramSelecton settingof10isDry.
page 2.
MFX [-100+10]
ThiscontrolstheMFX1and2Return.Asettingof
07b: Controller View +10is127,asettingof+0leavesthesettingsofthe
programunmodified,andasettingof10is000.
VJS
Thisareashowsinformationaboutthevectorjoystick. TFX [-100+10]
XMode,YMode:Theseindicatethebehaviorofthe ThiscontrolstheWet/DrybalanceofTFX1and2.A
vectorCCfortheXaxisandYaxis.Formore settingof+10isWetorWet,asettingof+0leavesthe
information,seeVJSXModeonpage 41. settingsoftheprogramunmodified,andasettingof
10isDry.
VJS+X,VJSX,VJS+Y,VJSY:Theseindicatethe
controllertransmittedbythe+X,X,+Y,andY Whenyoueditthesesettings,thechangewilloccur
vectors.Formoreinformation,see+Xonpage 41. immediatelyinthesound,butthevaluesofthe
originalprogramparameterswillnotchangeuntil
SW1, SW2, Knob58 yousavetheprogram.Whenyousavetheprogram,
thevalueswillbeupdatedandthesesliderswillbe
SW1&2 [Assignment] resetto0.
TheseindicatethefunctionsassignedtoSW1and2.

11
Program mode: HD-1

0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
t 07: Page Menu Commands Programonpage 142.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.

08: Audio Input/Sampling


08PMC

07a

08b

08a

08c

08d

Thispageletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,effects
sends,andbussingfortheaudioinputs,including 08a: Audio Input
analoginputs14andS/P DIFL/R.Italsocontrolsthe
Use Global setting [Off, On]
samplingrelatedsettingsforProgrammode.
EachProgramcaneitherusethesingle,Globalaudio
TheOASYScansampleexternalaudiofromtheanalog
inputmixersetup,orhaveitsowncustomsettings.
orS/P DIFinputs,at48 kHz16bitresolution,inmono
TheGlobalsettingsaredescribedunder02:Audio
orstereo.YoucanrecordsamplesintoRAM,orsample
Input,onpage 705.
directlytodisk.
WhenUseGlobalSettingsisOn,theProgramusesthe
Youcanalsodigitallyresamplethecompletesoundof
Globalsettings.Thisisthedefault,andletsyouchange
aProgram,playedpolyphonically,liveorsequenced,
freelybetweendifferentPrograms,Combis,andSongs
includinganyeffectsandKARMAgeneratedevents.
withoutaffectingtheaudioinputs.
Finally,youcanalsousetheOASYSasa6in,10out
Also,anyeditsmadeonthispagewillaffecttheGlobal
effectsprocessor.
setting,alongwithanyotherPrograms,Combis,or
Youcancombineanyandallofthesefeaturesatonce. SongswhichusetheGlobalsetting.
Forinstance,youcansamplealiveguitarrifffromthe
Ontheotherhand,itmaysometimesbeconvenientto
audioinputs,processedthroughOASYSeffects,while
saveaparticularmixersetupwithanindividual
listeningtoandeitherrecordingornotrecordinga
Program,Combi,orSong,tosetupspecialsubmixer
KARMAgeneratedphrase.
settingsoreffectsprocessingforparticularinputs.For
Using the control surface to adjust Audio Input example,youcansetupaProgramtouseamicinput
withavocoder,asdescribedunderVocoder(Program
Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustmostofthe
mode)onpage 791.
AudioInputmixerparameters,includingPlay/Mute,
Solo,Pan,Level,andSends1and2. Inthiscase,setUse/EditGlobalSetuptoOff,andthe
audioinputswillusetheProgramscustomsettings.
Formoreinformation,see09c:AudioInputson
page 22,andAdjustingvolume,Pan,EQ,andFX Input14
sendsonpage 56oftheOperationGuide.
Thesearesettingsforanaloginputs1through4.Inputs
1and2aremic/line;inputs3and4arelinelevelonly.

12
Program P0: Play 08: Audio Input/Sampling

S/P DIF L, S/P DIF R 1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentin


stereotothespecifiedpairofRECbusses.ThePan
ThesearesettingsfortheS/P DIFdigitalaudioinput, settingsendsthesignalinstereotobusses1and2or
forconnectingexternalA/Dconverters,computer busses3and4.
audiosystems,DATmachines,orotherdigitalaudio
gear. Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]
OASYSsupportsS/P DIFinputateither48kHzor96
Send2 (to MFX2) [000127]
kHz.Youllneedtoselectthecorrectrateusingthe
GlobalpageS/P DIFSampleRateparameter.96kHz Theseadjustthelevelsatwhichtheexternalaudio
dataisconvertedto48kHzforsampling. inputsignalissenttothemastereffects.

WhensamplingfromS/P DIF,makesurethatthe Send1(toMFX1):Sendthesignaltomastereffect1.


GlobalmodesSystemClockparameterisset Send2(toMFX2):Sendthesignaltomastereffect2.
appropriately.Formoreinformation,seeSystem
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoIFX112,
Clockonpage 702.
thesendlevelstothemastereffectsaresetbythepost
Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.) [L/R, IFX112, 18, IFX112Send1andSend2(82a).(SeeAudioInput,
1/27/8, Off] S/P DIFINonpage 801)
Thisspecifiesthebusfortheexternalaudioinput Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
signal. parameter.(SeeUsingthecontrolsurfacetoadjust
AudioInputonpage 12)
L/R:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesenttothe
L/Rbus. PLAY/MUTE [Play, Mute]
IFX112:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesent Thisshowswhethertheexternalaudiosignalbeing
totheIFX112bus.Chooseoneofthesesettingsifyou inputisinPLAYorMUTEstatus.
wanttoapplyaninserteffectwhilesampling. YoucanusetheMIXPLAY/MUTE16switchesto
18:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesent,in changethis.
mono,toINDIVIDUALoutputs18.Pandoesnot Mute:Theinputsoundwillbemuted(silent).
applyinthiscase. Play:Theinputsoundwillbeheard.
1/27/8:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
theindividualoutputsinstereopairs. parameter.Formoreinformation,seeUsingthe
Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbeinput. controlsurfacetoadjustAudioInputonpage 12.

FX Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus) [Off, 1, 2] SOLO On/Off


Thisletsyousendtheaudioinputtooneofthetwo ThisindicatestheSOLOstatusofeachexternalaudio
stereoFXControlbusses.SeeFXControlBuseson signalinput.YoucanusetheMIXSELECT16
page 790. switchestochangethis.

REC Bus [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4] Soundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelsforwhich


SOLOisOn.Otherchannelswillbemuted.
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheREC
busses(fourmonochannels;1,2,3,4). TheSolofunctionincludestheoscillatorsinProgram
mode,thetimbresinCombinationmode,andMIDI
UsingtheRECbusses,youcanisolateoneormore tracksandaudiotracksinSequencermode.
soundsforrecordingorsamplingevenifthesounds
arealsobeingmixedintothemainoutputs.For ThewayinwhichtheSolofunctionoperateswill
example,youcanplayaguitarthroughOASYSIFX dependonthesettingoftheExclusiveSolopagemenu
whilelisteningtoaKARMAdrumphrase,andrecord commandineachmode.
theprocessedguitarwithoutrecordingthedrums. ExclusiveSoloOff:Selectedisoff,youcansolo
IndividualPrograms,CombiTimbres,Sequencer multipleaudioinputs.Thesolostatuswillchangeeach
Tracks(bothMIDIandAudio),audioinputs,and timeyoupressSoloOn/Off.
InsertEffectscanallberoutedtotheRECbusses,in ExclusiveSoloOn:Selectedison,pressingaSolo
additiontotheirmainoutput/IFXbussettings. buttonwillsoloonlythataudioinput.
Youcansamplethesesignalsbysettingthesampling TheSOLOsettingisnotmemorizedwhenyouWrite
SourceBus(08c)toRECbus. aProgram.
Formoreinformation,seethediagramSourceBus= Tip:YoucanholddowntheENTERswitchandpress
RECBus1/2onpage 16. numerickey1toswitchExclusiveSoloon/off.
Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbesenttothe Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
RECbusses.NormallyyouwillusetheOffsetting. parameter.Formoreinformation,seeUsingthe
1,2,3,4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto controlsurfacetoadjustAudioInputonpage 12.
thespecifiedRECbus.ThePansettingisignored,and
Pan [L000C064R127]
thesignalissentinmonaural.
Thisspecifiesthepanningoftheexternalaudioinput
signal.Whenusingtwoinputsforastereoaudio
source,youllnormallysettheinputstoL000andR127
respectively.

13
Program mode: HD-1

Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
parameter.Formoreinformation,seeUsingthe 08b: Recording Level [dB]
controlsurfacetoadjustAudioInputonpage 12.
Recording Level [Inf, 72.0+0.0+18.0]
Level [000127] Thisadjuststhesignallevelatthefinalstageof
Thiscontrolstheleveloftheexternalaudiosignal.The sampling.
defaultis127. TheRecordingLevelsettingismadeforProgram
TheanalogaudiosignalsfromAUDIOINPUTS14are modeasawhole,andisnotsavedindependentlywith
convertedintodigitalformbyanA/Dconverter.This eachProgram.
parametersetsthelevelofthesignalimmediatelyafter
Level Meter
thisconversion.
Thisshowsthesignallevelatthefinalstageof
Ifthesoundisdistortedeventhoughthislevelsetting
sampling,afteranyadjustmentsontheAudioInputs
isverylow,seeTipsforeliminatingdistortionwhen
page,anyeffects,etc.Themeterisactiveonlyduring
usingtheanaloginputs,below.
standbymodeandrecording.
Tip:Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthis
parameter.(SeeUsingthecontrolsurfacetoadjust CLIP!
AudioInputonpage 12.) If0dBisexceeded,thedisplaywillindicateCLIP!
Thismeansthatthelevelofthesamplingsignalistoo
Avoiding extraneous noise high;inthiscase,adjusttheRecordingLevel,andif
IfaudiocablesareconnectedtoAUDIOINPUTS1 necessaryfollowtheinstructionsunderTipsfor
4,anynoisecarriedbythecableswillenterintothe eliminatingdistortionwhenusingtheanaloginputs,
OASYSmixerstructure.Similarly,theS/P DIFinput below.
maycarrynoisefromexternaldevices.Thismay
includehiss,hum,andotheraudionoise. Setting levels
Toavoidnoisefromunusedaudioinputs,either: Forthebestresults,setthelevelsasdescribedbelow:

SettheinputsLevelto0 1. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch.
OASYSwillentersamplingstandbymode,andthe
or
LevelMeterbecomesactive.
SetallofthebusassignmentstoOff,includingBus
2. Initially,settheRecordingLevelto0.0dB.
Select(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign),RECBus,andFX
ControlBus 3. Adjusttheleveloftheinputsignalsothatitisas
highaspossiblewithoutactivatingtheCLIP!or
IfnoaudiocablesareconnectedtoAUDIOINPUTS
ADCOVERLOAD!messages.
14,theinputsignalsareforcedtozero,preventing
anyadditionalnoise. IfyoureusingAUDIOINPUTS1and/or2,adjustthe
volumeusingrearpanelMIC/LINEswitchesand
ADC OVERLOAD! LEVELknobs.
IfthesignallevelfromAUDIOINPUT14jacksistoo IfyoureusingAUDIOINPUT3and/or4,orthe
high,theADCOVERLOAD!indicationwillappear. S/P DIFinput,adjusttheoutputlevelofyourexternal
YoullneedtoadjusttheMIC/LINEgainselect audiosource.
switchesand/orLEVELknobs(forAUDIOINPUTS1
Ifyouresamplingexternalaudiothroughtheinternal
and2only),ortheoutputlevelofyourexternalaudio
effects,youmayalsoneedtoadjusttheindividual
source.
effectsinputand/oroutputlevelparameters.
Ifyoureusinginternalsounds,adjustthelevelsusing
thecontrolsurface,effectsinput/outputtrim,etc.
4. Ifthelevelisstillnothighenough,increasethe
RecordingLevelusingtheonscreenslider.

Audioinput/output

"Audio Input" (08a)

Bus(IFX/Indiv.) "Source Bus" (0-8c)


ADC OVERLOAD !! = L/R or IFX1-12 Insert = L/R CLIP !!
Effects Sampling
AUDIO INPUT 1, 2 ADC Total L-Mono
Effects R-Mono Stereo
LEVEL Analog to
(MIC/LINE) Digital "Level" "Pan" REC Sample Setup
(MIN...MAX) Converter [127=0dB] "Mode" (08c)
Master
ADC OVERLOAD !! Insert Effects
Effects
AUDIO INPUT 3, 4 ADC
Analog to
Digital "Level" "Pan" "Recording Level" (08b)
Converter [127=0dB] [inf ... 0.0dB ... +18.0dB]

Insert
Effects
L/MONO AUDIO
S/P DIF IN (L, R) OUTPUT
R
"Level" "Pan"
[127=0dB]

14
Program P0: Play 08: Audio Input/Sampling

Again,thegoalistogetthelevelashighaspossible Whensamplinginstereo,theoddnumberedchannel
withoutactivatingtheCLIP!orADCOVERLOAD! (suchas1,3,5,or7)correspondstotheleftchannel,
messages. andtheevennumberedchannel(suchas2,4,6,or8)
correspondstotheright.
Tips for eliminating distortion when using the
L/R:Thisletsyousamplethesignalheardatthemain
analog inputs
L/Routputs,includinganyprocessingbyTFX1/2.This
Ifsoundfromtheanaloginputsisdistorted,butthe isthedefaultsetting.Formoreinformation,seethe
CLIP!messagedoesntappear,itspossiblethat diagramSourceBus=L/Ronpage 15.
distortionisoccurringattheanaloginputstage,orthat
distortionisbeingcausedbythesettingsoftheinternal REC1/2,REC3/4:Theseletyousamplethesignalssent
effects. totheREC1/2orREC3/4busses.

IftheADCOVERLOAD!messageappearsabovethe UsingtheRECbusses,youcanisolateoneormore
RecordingLevelmeters,thedistortionisdueto soundsforrecordingorsamplingevenifthesounds
excessivelevelsattheinput.Inthiscase,eitherlower arealsobeingmixedintothemainoutputs.For
theoutputleveloftheexternalaudiosource,or(for example,youcanplayaguitarthroughOASYSIFX
inputs1and2only)adjusttheMIC/LINEgainselect whilelisteningtoaKARMAdrumphrase,andrecord
switchandLEVELknobsothatthismessagedoesnot theprocessedguitarwithoutrecordingthedrums.
appear. IndividualPrograms,CombiTimbres,Sequencer
Ifthereisdistortion,buttheADCOVERLOAD! Tracks(bothMIDIandAudio),audioinputs,and
messagedoesnotappear,itspossiblethatthe InsertEffectscanallberoutedtotheRECbusses,in
distortionisbeingcausedbythesettingsoftheinternal additiontotheirmainoutput/IFXbussettings.
effects.Tosolvethisproblem,eitherlowertheinput Formoreinformation,seethediagramSourceBus=
Level(seeLevel,above),oradjusttheeffectssettings RECBus1/2onpage 16.
(suchaschangingtheindividualeffectInputTrim AudioInput1/2,AudioInput3/4:Choosethese
parameters). settingstosampledirectlyfromtheanalogaudio
inputs,withoutanyotherprocessingbyOASYS.The
08c: Sampling Setup settingsontheAudioInputsmixer,includingvolume,
pan,busses,sends,mute,andsolo,willhavenoeffect
Source Bus [L/R, REC1/2 & 3/4, ontherecordedaudio.
Audio Input1/2 & 3/4, Formoreinformation,seethediagramSourceBus=
S/P DIF L/R, Indiv.1/27/8] AudioInput1/2onpage 16.
Youcansampleinstereofromanypairofaudio S/P DIFL/R:ChoosethissettingtosampletheS/P DIF
inputs,fromthetwostereoRECbusses,orfromthe inputdirectly,withoutanyotherprocessingby
signalatanyofthe10outputs(L/RandIndividual1/2 OASYS.ThesettingsontheAudioInputsmixer,
7/8). includingvolume,pan,busses,sends,mute,andsolo,
WhenyousamplefromanoutputpairorRECbus, willhavenoeffectontherecordedaudio.
youllrecordallaudiosenttotheoutputorbus, Formoreinformation,seethediagramSourceBus=
includinginternalProgramsorCombis,effects,audio S/P DIFL/Ronpage 16.
inputs,andHDRaudio.
Indiv.1/27/8:Thisletsyousampletheindividual
outputbusses.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
SourceBus=Indiv.1/2onpage 16.

SourceBus=L/R

Source Bus = L/R L/R REC REC Indiv.


Bus 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8
...

Master
Effects CLIP !! Sampling

Total L-Mono
Effects R-Mono Stereo
Insert
Effects
Audio Inputs
Monitor
Level Pan
L/MONO AUDIO OUTPUT
R HEADPHONES

Insert
Effects

OSC

Bus = L/R or IFX1-12

15
Program mode: HD-1

SourceBus=RECBus1/2

Source Bus = REC Bus 1/2


L/R REC REC Indiv.
Bus 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8
...
REC Bus = 1/2
CLIP !! Sampling
L-Mono
R-Mono Stereo
Insert
Effects
Audio Inputs Master
Effects Monitor
Level Pan
Total L/MONO AUDIO OUTPUT
Effects R HEADPHONES
[x] Source Direct Solo

Insert
Effects

OSC

Bus = L/R or IFX1-12

SourceBus=AudioInput1/2

Source Bus = Audio Input 1/2


L/R REC REC Indiv.
Bus 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8
...

CLIP !! Sampling
L-Mono
R-Mono Stereo
Insert
Effects
Audio Input 1 Master
Effects Monitor
Level Pan
Insert Total L/MONO AUDIO OUTPUT
Effects Effects R HEADPHONES
[x] Source Direct Solo
Audio Input 2

Level Pan

Insert
Effects

OSC

Bus = L/R or IFX1-12

SourceBus=S/P DIFL/R

Source Bus = S/P DIF L/R


L/R REC REC Indiv.
Bus 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8
...

CLIP !! Sampling
L-Mono
R-Mono Stereo
Insert
Effects
S/P DIF L Master
Effects Monitor
Level Pan
Insert Total L/MONO AUDIO OUTPUT
Effects Effects R HEADPHONES
[x] Source Direct Solo
S/P DIF R

Level Pan

Insert
Effects

OSC

Bus = L/R or IFX1-12

SourceBus=Indiv.1/2

Source Bus = Indiv.1/2 L/R REC REC Indiv.


Bus 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8
...

CLIP !! Sampling
L-Mono
R-Mono Stereo
Insert
Effects
Audio Inputs Master
Effects Monitor
Level Pan
Total L/MONO AUDIO OUTPUT
Effects R HEADPHONES
[x] Source Direct Solo

INDIV.1 AUDIO OUTPUT


INDIV.2
Insert
Effects

OSC

Bus = Indiv.1/2 or IFX1-12

16
Program P0: Play 08: Audio Input/Sampling

Source Direct Solo [Off, On] usersamplingwillvarydependinguponboththe


ThisselectswhatisheardthroughtheL/Routputsand amountofphysicalRAMinstalled,andthesizeofthe
headphoneswhenSamplingRECisenabled. currentlyloadedEXsbanks.Formoreinformation,see
SamplingandRAMonpage 621.
On(checked):OnlythesignaloftheselectedSource
Buswillbeheard.Thisletsyouhearonlythesound DatawrittenintoRAMmemorywillbelostwhen
thatwillbesampled. thepoweristurnedoff,soyoumustsaveitifyou
wanttokeepit.
Off(unchecked):ThesignaloftheselectedSourceBus
willbemergedwiththemainL/Rsignal.Thisisthe Note:IfSaveToissettoRAM,the+12dB(Sampling
default. 21d)settingwillbeappliedtothesamplesampledto
RAM.If+12dBison,aonevoicesamplewillhavea
Note:IfSourceBusissettoL/R,thissettingisignored playbacklevelapproximately+12dBhigher,sothatthe
sincethatsignalisnormallyheardattheL/Routputs levelwillbethesameduringplaybackasitwaswhile
already! sampling.
Trigger [Sampling START SW, Note On] IfyouveselectedtheAuto+12dBOncheckboxinthe
Specifieshowsamplingwillbeinitiated. SelectSampleNo.pagemenucommand,the+12dB
settingwillautomaticallybeturnedonforsampling.
SamplingSTARTSW:PressingtheSAMPLINGREC
switchwillcausetheOASYStoentersampling DISK:Sampleswillberecordedtotheinternalhard
standbymode,andsamplingwillbeginwhenyou diskoraUSBconnectedexternalharddisk.
presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. Whenyousample,aWAVEfileiscreatedonthedisk.
NoteOn:PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthen UsetheSelectDirectorypagemenucommandto
presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter specifythewritingdestinationdiskanddirectory.
samplingstandbymode.Samplingwillbeginwhen Toopentheresultingsample,youcaneitheruseDisk
youplaythekeyboard. modetoloadthesampleintoRAM,oruseh:Select
Directoryetc.toselectthefileandthenpressthePlay
SamplingwillalsobeginifaMIDInoteonis buttonortheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch.
received(insteadofplayingthekeyboard).
Regardlessofthesettingsyoureusing,pressthe Mode (Sampling Mode) [L-Mono, R-Mono, Stereo]
SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchonceagainwhen Specifiesthechannel(s)thatyouwanttosample,and
youvefinishedsampling.Alternatively,samplingwill specifywhetheramonoorstereosamplewillbe
endautomaticallyifthespecifiedSamplingTime created.
elapses. TheLandRchannelsofthebusspecifiedbySource
Bus(08c)willbesampled.
Metronome Precount [Off, 4, 8, 3, 6]
Thisspecifieswhetherthemetronomewillsounda LMono:TheleftchanneloftheSourceBuswillbe
countdownbeforesamplingbegins.Thiscanbeset sampledinmono.
onlyifTriggerissettoSamplingSTARTSW. RMono:TherightchanneloftheSourceBuswillbe
Off:Samplingwillbeginimmediatelywhenyoupress sampledinmono.
theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchfromrecording Stereo:TheLandRchannelsofthebusspecifiedby
standbymode. SourceBuswillbesampledinstereo.Thiswillcreatea
4,8,3,6:WhenyoupresstheSAMPLING stereomultisampleandsamples.Formoreinformation,
START/STOPswitchfromrecordingstandbymode, seeAboutstereomultisamplesandstereosamples
themetronomewillcountthespecifiednumberof onpage 627.
beatsatthesystemtempo,andthensamplingwill Sample Time [min sec]
begin.Ifyousetthisto4,samplingwillbeginonthe
countof0afteraprecountof43210. Thissetstheamountoftimethatyouwishtosample.
Thiscanbesetin0.001secondincrements.
Theoutputdestinationandlevelofthemetronome
soundarespecifiedbyMetronomeSetup(08d).If Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,this
Bus(Output)SelectissettoL/R,themetronomewill parametershowsthemaximumavailablesampling
stopsoundingtheinstantsamplingactuallybegins. time,equivalenttotheentireamountoffreeRAM.
EachtimeyoupressSTOPaftersamplingtoRAM,the
Save to [RAM, DISK] changeinremainingsampletimewillbedisplayed
Specifiesthedestinationtowhichthedatawillbe automatically.
writtenduringsampling. IfSavetoissettoDISK,themaximumvalueis
RAM:ThesoundwillbesampledintoRAMmemory. determinedbythefreespaceonthecurrentdisk,as
specifiedbytheSelectDirectorymenucommand.
AsamplewrittenintoRAMmemorycanbeheard
immediatelyinProgrammodeorSamplingmode.Use Tips:IfyouhavesufficientRAMmemory,itsagood
thepagemenucommandg:SelectSampleNo.to ideatosetagenerousamountofSampleTime.After
specifytheSampleNo.andtomakesettingsfor yousample,youcanthenusetheTruncatemenu
automaticconversiontoaprogram. commandtodeleteunwantedportionsofthesample,
andreduceittotheminimumsizenecessary.Formore
Note:TheamountofRAMavailableforusersampling information,seeTruncate(forSampleEdit)on
isshownbyFreeSampleMemory/Locations page 680andTruncate(forLoopEdit)onpage 686.
(Sampling01f).TheamountofRAMavailablefor

17
Program mode: HD-1

YoucanalsopresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP 18:Themetronomewillbeheardonlyintheselected
switchtomanuallystopsamplingafteryouhave individualoutput.
recordedthedesiredmaterial.Formoredetailson
sampling,seePreparationsforsamplingonpage 125 Level [000127]
oftheOperationGuide. Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemetronomesound.
IfSavetoissettoRAM,andyoucontinuesampling
withtheAutoOptimizeRAM(Global01d)option t 08: Page Menu Commands
unchecked,wastedspacewilldevelopinmemory,
decreasingtheamountofavailableRAM.Inthis ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
case,usetheOptimizeRAMmenucommandto numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
recoverthewastedspace. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Note:FreeSampleMemory/Locations(Sampling0
1f)inSamplingmodeletsyouchecktheremaining 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
amountofRAM. Programonpage 142.
Note:ThevariousRecordingSetupsettingsarenot 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
madeindependentlyforeachprogram;theyapplyto ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
theentireProgrammode. 2:OptimizeRAM.Formoreinformation,see
OptimizeRAMonpage 143.
08d: Metronome Setup 3:SelectSampleNo.ThisappliesonlywhenSave
toissettoRAM.Formoreinformation,seeSelect
Hereyoucanspecifytheoutputdestinationand SampleNo.onpage 143.
volumeofthemetronome,assetupinbyMetronome
Precount(02c).Themetronomeisavailableonlyif 3:SelectDirectory.ThisappliesonlywhenSaveto
TriggerissettoSamplingSTARTSW. issettoDisk.Formoreinformation,seeSelect
Directoryonpage 144.
Bus (Output) Select [L/R, L, R, 18] 4:AutoSamplingSetup.Formoreinformation,see
Thissetstheaudiooutputforthemetronomesound. AutoSamplingSetuponpage 144.
L/R:Themetronomewillbeheardinthemainstereo
outputs(L/MonoandR),theS/P DIFoutput,andthe
headphones.

09: Control Surface


09PMC

09b
09a

09c

09d

09e

09f

TheControlSurfaceisthesetof9sliders,8knobs,and MIDImessagestoexternaldevices.
16switchestotheleftoftheLCDdisplay.Itlookslikea Thispageshowsyouthecurrentvaluesforeachofthe
mixer,butitcandootherthingsaswell,including sliders,knobs,andbuttons,alongwithinformation
editingsounds,controllingKARMA,andsending aboutwhattheyarecontrolling.Forinstance,youcan:

18
Program P0: Play 09: Control Surface

AdjustthevolumeandpanforOscillators1and2 AUDIOINPUTSletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,and
ControltheProgramsEQsettingsandMaster sendlevelsfortheanalogandS/P DIFaudioinputs.In
EffectsSendlevels Sequencermode,youcanalsousethistoselecttwo
banksofharddiskrecordingtracks,asshownbythe
ModulatesoundsandeffectsusingtheRealTime LEDstotherightoftheswitch.
Knobs
EXTERNALletsyousendMIDImessagestoexternal
ControlKARMA,andselectKARMAscenes,using MIDIdevices.UsetheGlobalP1External1pageto
theslidersandswitches specifytheMIDImessagethatwillbetransmitted.
EditsoundsusingToneAdjust R.TIMEKNOBS/KARMAletsyoumodulatesounds
Assignsliders,knobs,andswitchestodifferent andeffectswiththeknobs,andcontrolKARMAwith
ToneAdjustparameters theslidersandswitches.
TONEADJUSTgivesyouhandsonaccesstosound
Local Control On/Off and the Control Surface
editing,usingthesliders,knobs,andswitches.
TheControlSurfacegeneratesandreceivesMIDICCs
andSystemExclusivemessages,sothatyoucanrecord Youcanfreelychangebackandforthbetweenthe
knob,switch,andslidermovementsintoasequencer. differentfunctions,withoutlosinganyofyouredits.
ThismeansthattheGlobalmodeLocalControlsetting
Front-panel LEDs for sliders and knobs
isimportant:
TheresaverticalcolumnofLEDsnexttoeachslider,
IfLocalControlisOn,thephysicalControlSurface
andaringofLEDsaroundeachknob.Similarly,each
willworkproperlyaslongasMIDIisnotbeing
oftheswitcheshasanLEDtoshowwhetheritsonor
loopedbackintotheOASYS.
off.
IfLocalControlisOff,youmustloopbackMIDI
AsyouswitchbetweenthedifferentControlAssign
intotheOASYSinorderforthephysicalControl
settings,youllnoticethattheLEDschangetoshowthe
Surfacetoworkproperly.
currentvaluesforallofthecontrollers.
RegardlessoftheLocalControlsetting,youcan
Youcaneditthesevaluesusingeitherthephysical
alwayseditControlSurfaceparametersviathe
sliders,knobs,andswitches,orbyselectingtheon
touchscreen.
screenparametersandusingthestandarddataentry
Formoreinformation,seeLocalControlandthe controls.WhenyoueditavalueusingtheLCDand
ControlSurfaceonpage 709. dataentry,youllnoticethattheLEDsonthesliders,
knobs,andswitchesreflectthechangeaswell.
Control Assign Switches and Tabs
YoucanswitchtheControlSurfacebetweenits Jump/Catch
differentfunctionsusingeitherthetabsontheleftside WhenyouchangetheControlAssignsetting,the
oftheLCDdisplay,orthefrontpanelControlAssign physicalpositionoftheknobsorslidersmaybe
switches.Thetabsandthefrontpanelswitchesmirror differentthantheparametervalue,asshownbythe
oneanother;whenyouchangeoneofthem,theother LEDs.
changesaswell.
TheKnob/SliderModeparameter,underSystem
ControlAssignswitches PreferencesontheGlobalmodeBasicpage,determines
howandwhenmovingthephysicalsliderorknobwill
starttoedittheparametervalue.
WhenitissettoJump,theparameterwillsnaptothe
physicalpositionassoonasyoustarttomovetheknob
INPUTS orslider.Usethisifyoudliketheparametersto
HDR 1-8
respondinstantlytocontrollermovements.
HDR 9-16
-16

WhenitissettoCatch,youneedtomovetheslideror
knobsothatitcatchestheparameter,bypassing
throughitscurrentvalue.Untilthevalueiscaught,
movingthesliderorknobhasnoeffectonthe
parameter.Usethiswhenyoudlikeparametereditsto
besmooth,andalwaysmovefromthecurrentvalue.

InProgrammode,youcanselectoneoffivedifferent RESET CONTROLS


functions: ThefrontpanelRESETCONTROLSbuttonletsyou
TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,and recallthestoredsettingsforanyslider,knob,orswitch
sendlevelsforOscillators1and2,alongwiththe onthecontrolsurface.Youcanalsouseittoresetthe
ProgramEQ.InCombiandSequencermodes,youcan VectorJoysticktothecenterposition,ortoresetallof
alsousethistoselecttwodifferentbanksofTimbresor theparametersinthecurrentKARMAModule,orto
Tracks,asshownbytheLEDstotherightoftheswitch. unsoloallchannelsatonce.

Resetting a single control


Toresetasingleknob,slider,orswitch:
1. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbutton.

19
Program mode: HD-1

2. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,movea InProgrammode,Absoluteparameterswillberesetto
sliderorknob,orpressoneofthecontrolsurface thestoredvalue,andRelativeparameterswillbereset
switches. tothecenter(whichmeansnodeviationfromthe
3. Whenyouredone,releasetheRESET storedvalue).
CONTROLSbutton. InCombinationmode,theywillberesettothevalues
Theslider,knob,orswitchwillberesettothevalue storedintheCombination.
storedintheProgramorCombi.Ifthevalueisnot InSequencermode,theywillberesettothestatein
stored(suchaswiththeREALTIMEKNOBS),the whichtheywereimmediatelyafteryouentered
controlisresettoitsdefaultvalue. Sequencermode,selectedtheSong,executedCopy
InSequencermode,controlswillberesettothestatein FromCombi,etc.
whichtheywereimmediatelyafteryouentered
Sequencermode,selectedtheSong,executedCopy
09a: Program Select & Tempo
FromCombi,etc.
Bank (Bank Select)[INTAF, GM, g(1)g(9), g(d),
Resetting a group of controls
USERAG]
Toresetagroupofcontrolsatonce:
1. MakesurethattheControlSurfaceisshowingthe Bank Type [(HD-1, EXi)]
parametersyouwanttoreset. Program Select [(INTAF, USERAG) 0127,
Asasafetyprecaution,youcanonlyresetthe (G, g(1)g(9), g(d)) 1128]
parameterscurrentlydisplayedontheControlSurface.
ThistakesintoaccountboththecurrentControlAssign q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]
setting,andtheMIXERKNOBSbutton. Thisareadisplaysinformationabouttheprogram
Forinstance,ifyouwanttoresetthevolumeandpan selectedforeditingtheprogrambank/number/
forbothOscillators,makesurethatControlAssignis name,andthetempousedtocontroltheKARMA
settoTIMBRE/TRACK,andthatMIXERKNOBSisset functionetc.(See01a:ProgramSelectonpage 2)
toINDIVIDUALPAN.
2. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbutton. 09b: OSC 1/2
3. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,press ThisControlAssignsettingletsyouadjustthevolume,
thecurrentControlAssignbuttonagain. pan,andFXsendsettingsforOscillators1and2,along
Allofthesliders,knobs,andswitchesshownonthe withtheProgramEQsettings.
ControlSurfacewillberesettothevaluesstoredinthe
Program. MIXER KNOBS [Channel Strip, Individual Pan]
TheMixerKnobsswitchisonthefrontpanel,
Resetting the Vector Joystick immediatelytotherightoftheknobs,andisalso
ToresettheVectorJoysticktothecenterposition,hold duplicatedintheonscreendisplay.Theeightknobs
downRESETCONTROLSandthenmovetheVector cancontroltwodifferentsetsofparameters,
Joystick. dependingonthesettingofthisswitch.
Resetting KARMA Module parameters ChannelStrip:Withthissetting,theeightknobswill
controlthePan,EQ,andFXSendsettingsforthe
ToresetalloftheslidersandswitchesintheKARMA
selectedOscillator.UsetheSELECTbuttonstochoose
Module:
betweenOscillators1and2.
1. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
IndividualPan:Withthissetting,thefirstknobwill
2. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,press controlthePanforOscillator1,andthesecondknob
theKARMAMODULECONTROLbutton. willcontrolthePanforOscillator2.Theremaining
Similarly,toresetasingleKARMAScenetoitsstored knobsareunused.
values,holdRESETCONTROLSandpressthedesired MixerKnobsswitch
SCENEbutton.

Clearing all solos


ToturnoffSoloforallMIDITracks,AudioTracks,and
AudioInputsatonce:
1. PressandholdtheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
2. WhileholdingRESETCONTROLS,pressthe
SOLObutton.

Resetting Tone Adjust


ThewaythatTONEADJUSTisresetdependsonboth
thecurrentmode,andwhethertheparameteris
RelativeorAbsolute.(Formoreinformation,see
Absolute,Relative,andMetaparameterson
page 27.)

20
Program P0: Play 09: Control Surface

Knobs 18, Channel Strip Pan (1) [Random, L001C064R127]


WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoChannelStrip, ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator1.Asettingof
theknobsprovidequickaccesstothePan,EQ,andFX L001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,
Sendparameters.ThePanandEQparameters andR127tothefarright.
duplicatethesimilarlynamedparametersfoundon RandomisavailableonlyviatheLCD.(Otherwise,it
theProgrameditingpages;changingthemherewill wouldbedifficulttousetheknobtosweepsmoothly
changethemintheeditingpages,andviceversa. fromlefttoright.)WiththeRandomsetting,thepan
FXSendwillbereflectedbythecorrespondingMFX positionwillbedifferentforeachnoteon.
Send1and2.
Pan (2) [Random, L001C064R127]
PAN [Random, L001C064R127] ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator2.Formore
ThiscontrolsthestereopanoftheselectedOscillator, details,seePan(1),above.
andmirrorstheAmppagePanparameter.Asettingof
L001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter, Play/Mute switches 12
andR127tothefarright.
ThetoprowofswitchesallowyoutoturnOscillators1
RandomisavailableonlyviatheLCD.(Otherwise,it and2onandoff,whichcanbeconvenientwhen
wouldbedifficulttousetheknobtosweepsmoothly editingsounds.
fromlefttoright.)WiththeRandomsetting,thepan
positionwillbedifferentforeachnoteon. Play/Mute (1) [Play, Mute]
Whenthisswitchison(LED=on),Oscillator1will
EQ TRIM [0099] play.Whentheswitchisoff(LED=off),Oscillator1
ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ. willbemuted.
HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrols
Play/Mute (2) [Play, Mute]
cancausesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.You
cancompensateforthisbyturningdowntheinput Whenthisswitchison,Oscillator2willplay.Whenthe
trim. switchisoff,Oscillator2willbemuted.

Note:iftheEQpageEQBypassparameteristurned SOLO switch and SELECT switches 12


On,thennoneoftheEQparametersherewillhave
anyeffect. Solo [Off, On]
LOW EQ [18.00+18.00dB] SololetsyouisolateoneormoreOscillatorsorAudio
Inputs,sothatyouhearthembythemselves.Itdoes
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in thisbytemporarilymutingallnonsoloedOscillators
incrementsof0.5dB. andAudioInputs.
MID FREQ [100Hz10.00kHz] SolousestheSELECTswitches.Theseswitchescan
ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ. showandcontroleitherwhichOscillatoriscurrently
selected,orwhichOscillatorsaresoloed.Themain
MID GAIN [18.00+18.00dB] Solobuttonletsyouswitchbackandforthbetweenthe
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,in twoviews.
incrementsof0.5dB. WhenSoloisOff(LED=Off),theSELECTswitches
selectthecurrentOscillator;whenSoloisOn(LED=
HIGH EQ [18.00+18.00dB] Onorblinking),theSelectswitchesletyousolooneor
Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10kHzHighShelfEQ,in bothOscillators.
incrementsof0.5dB.
WhenSoloisOn,andoneormoreOscillatorsor
SEND 1 [000127] AudioInputsaresoloed,theSOLOLEDwillblinkon
andofftoremindyouthatsoloisinuse.
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend1.Ifthe
ProgramsOutputBusparameterissettoL/RorOFF, Note:ThemainSOLObuttonmerelychangesthe
itscalestheOscillatorsendlevels.IftheOutputBusis functionsoftheSELECT/SOLOswitches.Itdoesnot
settoIFX112,itdirectlycontrolsthepostIFXsend enableorcleartheindividualsolostates.
levels.
Clearing all solos
SEND 2 [000127] ToturnoffSoloforallOscillatorsandAudioInputsat
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend2.Formore once:
details,seeSEND1,above. 1. PressandholdtheRESETCONTROLSbutton.
2. WhileholdingRESETCONTROLS,pressthe
Knobs 12, Individual Pan
SOLObutton.
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoIndividualPan,
knobs1and2controlthepansettingsforOscillators1 Exclusive Solo menu parameter
and2,respectively.Theother6knobshavenoeffect. ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteralsoaffectsthe
TheseduplicatethePanparametersoftheOscillators1 waythatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff
and2Amppages;changingthemherewillchange (unchecked),youcansolomultipleoscillatorsand
themintheeditingpages,andviceversa. inputsatonce.

21
Program mode: HD-1

WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyone MasterVolume
oscillatororinputcanbesoloedatatime.Inthismode,
pressingaSoloswitchautomaticallydisablesany Control Surface Universal Exclusive Front Panel
previoussolos. Master Volume Master Volume Analog Volume
Slider (Fom Knobs, Pedals, Slider
YoucanalsotoggleExclusiveSolobyholdingENTER MIDI, or Sequencer)
andpressing1onthenumerickeypad.

OSC1 Select/Solo [Off, On]


Headphone
ThisswitcheitherselectsorsolosOscillator1, & Main L/R
TFX 2
dependingontheSoloswitch.Formoredetails,see Outputs
Solo,above.

OSC2 Select/Solo [Off, On]


ThisswitcheitherselectsorsolosOscillator2, S/PDIF
dependingontheSoloswitch.Formoredetails,see Output
Solo,above.

MIX VOLUMES Sliders 12


Theseslidersadjusttheoveralloutputlevelof
Oscillators1and2.Theseareseparatevolumecontrols,
whichscalethemainAmplevelparameter.

OSC 1 Volume [000127]


ThisslideradjuststhevolumelevelofOscillator1.

OSC 2 Volume [000127]


ThisslideradjuststhevolumelevelofOscillator2.

Master Volume Slider


Master Volume [000127]
Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemainstereooutputs,
aftertheTotalEffects.ItdoesnotaffectIndividual
Outputs18.

09c

Youcanusethispagetomixsoundsfromother
09c: Audio Inputs sourcesintotheOASYSoutputsasanonstage
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyouadjustthevolume, submixer,forinstance.
pan,andFXsendsettingsforeachofthesixaudio
inputs:Analog14,andS/P DIFleftandright.

22
Program P0: Play 09: Control Surface

Other Audio Input settings Audio Input Pan (16) [L000C064R127]


Eachaudioinputcanbeassignedtouptothreebusses: ThesecontrolthepanforAnalogInputs14and
AnOutput/IFXBus S/P DIFLeftandRight,respectively.AsettingofL000
placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,and
AnFXControlBus R127tothefarright.
ARECBus
Play/Mute switches 16
YoucansetupthesebusassignmentsontheAudio
In/Samplingpage.Formoreinformation,see08: Thetoprowofswitchesallowyoutomuteanyorallof
AudioInput/Samplingonpage 12. theaudioinputs.

Use/Edit Global Setup [Off, On] Play/Mute (16) [Off, On]


Programscanusethesingle,Globalaudioinputmixer Whenthisswitchison(LED=on),theinputwillbe
setup,orcaninsteadhavetheirowncustomsettings. enabled.Whentheswitchisoff(LED=off),theinput
willbemuted.
WhenUse/EditGlobalSetupisOn,theProgramuses
theGlobalsettings.Thisisthedefault,andletsyou
SOLO switch and SELECT switches 16
changefreelybetweendifferentProgramsand
Combinationswithoutaffectingtheaudioinputs. Solo [Off, On]
Also,anyeditsmadeonthispagewillaffecttheGlobal SololetsyouisolateoneormoreOscillatorsorAudio
setting,alongwithanyotherPrograms,Combis,or Inputs,sothatyouhearthembythemselves.Itdoes
SongswhichusetheGlobalsetting. thisbytemporarilymutingallnonsoloedOscillators
Ontheotherhand,itmaysometimesbeconvenientto andAudioInputs.
saveaparticularmixersetupwithanindividual TheSelectswitchescanshowandcontroleitherwhich
Program,tosetupspecialsubmixersettingsoreffects audioinputiscurrentlyselected,orwhichinputsare
processingforparticularinputs.Inthiscase,set soloed.ThemainSolobuttonletsyoucanswitchback
Use/EditGlobalSetuptoOff,andtheaudioinputs andforthbetweenthetwoviews.
willusetheProgramscustomsettings.
WhenSoloisOff(LED=Off),theSelectswitchesselect
Mixer Knobs [Channel Strip, Individual Pan] thecurrentinput;whenSoloisOn(LED=Onor
blinking),theSelectswitchesletyousolooneormore
Thisswitchcontrolswhethertheknobsshowthepan
inputs.
settingsforall6inputsatonce(IndividualPan),orthe
panandFXSendlevelsfortheselectedinput(Channel WhenSoloisOn,andoneormoreOscillatorsorAudio
Strip).Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMixerKnobs Inputsaresoloed,theSoloLEDwillblinkonandoffto
onpage 23. remindyouthatsoloisinuse.
Note:ThemainSolobuttonmerelychangesthe
Knobs 18, Channel Strip functionsoftheSelect/Soloswitches.Itdoesnotenable
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoChannelStrip, orcleartheindividualsolostates.
theknobsprovidequickaccesstotheselectedinputs Formoreinformation,seeClearingallsoloson
PanandFXSendparameters. page 21,andExclusiveSolomenuparameteron
page 21.
Pan [L000C064R127]
Thiscontrolsthestereopanoftheselectedinput.A Select/Solo (16) [Off, On]
settingofL000placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064in Thisswitcheitherselectsorsolostheinput,depending
thecenter,andR127tothefarright. ontheSoloswitchsetting.Formoredetails,seeSolo,
above.
Send 1 [000127]
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend1.Ifthe Sliders 16
inputsOutputBusparameterissettoL/RorOFF,it
scalestheprogrammedsendlevel.IftheOutputBusis Audio Input Volume (16) [000127]
settoIFX112,itdirectlycontrolsthepostIFXsend Theseslidersadjustthevolumelevelsoftheaudio
levels,overwritinganyprevioussetting. inputs.
Send 2 [000127]
Master Volume Slider
ThiscontrolsthesendlevelintoFXSend2.Formore
details,seeSend1,above. Master Volume [000127]
Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemainstereooutputs,
Knobs 16, Individual Pan aftertheTotalEffects.ItdoesnotaffectIndividual
WhentheMixerKnobsswitchissettoIndividualPan, Outputs18.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
knobs14controlthepansettingsforanaloginputs1 MasterVolumeonpage 22.
4,respectively,andknobs56controlthepansettings
fortheleftandrightS/P DIFinputs.Knobs7and8
havenoeffect.

23
Program mode: HD-1

09d

GchmeansthattheknobwilltransmitontheGlobal
09d: External MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.Thisallowsyou
ThisControlAssignsettingletsyousendMIDI toredirectanynumberofsliders,knobs,switches,and
messagestoexternaldevices.Eachslider,knob,and padstoadifferentchannelatonce,withouteditingthe
switchcanbeassignedtoaseparateMIDIcontroller individualcontrols.
andMIDIchannel.Theeightdrumpadsalsohave
CC# Assign (18) [Off, 000119]
separatesettingswhichapplyonlywhenControl
AssignissettoExternal. ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby
theknob.
InGlobalmode,youcancreateupto128different
ExternalSetups.Forinstance,youmightmakeone Value (18) [000127]
setupforcontrollingseveraldifferentpiecesofMIDI ThisisthecurrentvalueoftheknobsMIDICC.
gearonstage,anotherforcontrollingasoftware
synthesizer(suchasoneofKorgsLegacyCollection Switches 116
synths),andsoon.Formoreinformation,see12:
External1onpage 714. MIDI Channel (116) [0116, Gch]
TheseExternalSetupsarecompletelyseparatefrom ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannelfor
theProgram.YoucanthinkofExternalmodeasbeing theswitch.Eachcansendonadifferentchannel,if
aseparatecontrolsurfacewhichjusthappenstoshare desired.
OASYSssliders,knobs,switches,anddrumpads. GchmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobal
WhenyouselectanExternalSetup,itstaysselected MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.
evenwhenyouchangePrograms,orswitchtoCombi
orSequencermodes.Thismakesiteasytoselect CC# Assign (116) [Off, 000119]
differentOASYSsoundswithoutdisruptingany ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby
externalMIDIcontrol,andviceversa. theswitch.

Setup [000127] Switch Off/On (116) [Off, On]


ThisselectstheGlobalsetupfortheknobs,sliders, Whentheswitchisturnedon,itsendsavalueof127;
switches,anddrumpads. whenitisturnedoff,itsendsavalueof0.
Note:thisselectionisnotstoredwiththeProgram.
Sliders 18 & Master Slider
Knobs 18 MIDI Channel (18) [0116, Gch]
MIDI Channel (18) [0116, Gch] ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannelfor
ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDIChannel theslider.Eachcansendonadifferentchannel,if
assignedtotheknob.Eachcansendonadifferent desired.
channel,ifdesired. GchmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobal
MIDIChannel,assetinGlobalmode.

24
Program P0: Play 09: Control Surface

CC# Assign (18) [Off, 000119] Value (18) [000127]


ThisreadonlyparametershowstheMIDICCsentby ThisisthecurrentvalueoftheslidersMIDICC.
theslider.

Selected
Parameter
Information

09e

PmeansthattheswitchiscontrollingaPerformance
09e: RT/KARMA (Real Time RealTimeParameter.
Knobs/KARMA) Youcanassignmanyparameterstoasingleslideror
ThisControlAssign(labeledR.TimeKnobs/KARMA switch,ifdesired.Duetospacelimitations,however,
onthefrontpanel)settingletsyoumodulateProgram onlyfirstfourparameterswillbeshownhere.Ifthere
andEffectsparameterswiththeeightknobs,and aremoreassignmentsthancanbedisplayed,youllsee
controlKARMAwiththeswitchesandsliders. a>symbolafterthefourthparameter.
Tochangetheparameterassignments,usetheKARMA
Selected parameter information GERTPandPerfRTPpages.Formoreinformation,
WhenyouselectaKARMASliderorSwitch,thisarea pleasesee75:GERealTimeParameterson
showsdetailedinformationaboutitsKARMA page 113,and76:PerfRealTimeParameterson
parameterassignments. page 116.

Control [SW18, SL18] Parameter Value [Depends on parameter]


ThisshowswhichSwitchorSlideriscurrently ThisshowsthevalueoftheGEorPerformanceReal
selected. TimeParametersassignedtotheselectedSlideror
Switch.Therangecanvary,dependingonthe
Assignment [Name] individualparameters.
EachKARMASliderorSwitchcancontrolmultiple
internalparameterssimultaneously.Thegroupof Knobs 18
parameterscanbegivenasinglename,whichisshown Knobs14allhavededicatedfunctionswhich
here. correspondtoMIDICCs.Knobs58canbeassignedto
Youcanselectdifferentnames,ifdesired.Formore awidevarietyoffunctions,manyofwhichalsohave
information,see79:Name/NoteMaponpage 125 correspondingMIDICCs.
Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding
Module and Parameter [A 0132, P 0108]
MIDICC.Also,whentheCCisreceivedviaMIDIor
ThisreadonlydisplayshowstheKARMA generatedbyKARMA,theknobvaluechangesto
parameter(s)assignedtotheSliderorSwitch. matchtheCCvalue.
AmeansthatthesliderorswitchcontrolsaGEReal Unlessotherwisenoted,scalingmeansthatthe
TimeParameterfromKARMAModuleA.(Notethatin parametersareattheirprogrammedvalueswhenthe
Programmode,onlyModuleAisavailable.)The controllerisat64,attheirminimumwhenthe
followingnumberidentifiesthespecificparameter controllerisat0,andattheirmaximumwhenthe
withinthemodule.Forinstance,A22isparameter22 controllerisat127.Foranotherlookatthis,seethe
ofModuleA. diagrambelow.

25
Program mode: HD-1

CCparameterscaling Youcansetknobs58toawidevarietyofmodulation
functions,usingtheControllerSetuppage(P18).
99 ManyofthefunctionsscaleaparticularsetofProgram
parameters.AllofthesettingsalsocorrespondtoMIDI
Parameter
Value messagesusuallyCCs.

KARMA SCENES 18
As Programmed AKARMASceneincludesthesettingsforallofthe
KARMASlidersandSwitches.EachCombicancontain
uptoeightScenes.
00
0 64 127
ToselectaScene,justpressitsswitchyoullseeallof
theKARMASlidersandSwitchesupdateinstantlyto
CC Value
theirnewvalues.

Knob 1: CUTOFF (CC#74) [000127] KARMA SWITCHES 18


ThisknobscalesthecutofffrequenciesofFiltersAand TheseswitchescontrolKARMAPerformanceorGE
B,andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#74. (GeneratedEffect)parameters,asassignedonthe
KARMAPerfRTPandGERTPpages.
Knob 2: RESONANCE (CC#71) [000127]
ThisknobscalestheresonanceofFiltersAandB,and KARMA SLIDERS 18
transmitsandreceivesMIDICC#71. ThesesliderscontrolKARMAPerformanceorGE
Knob 3: Filter EG Intensity (CC#79) [000127] (GeneratedEffect)parameters,asassignedonthe
KARMAPerfRTPandGERTPpages.
ThisknobscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
frequenciesofFiltersAandB.Italsotransmitsand Formoreinformation,seeKARMASWITCHES18,
receivesMIDICC#79. above.

Knob 4: EG Release (CC#72) [000127] Master Volume Slider


ThisknobscalesthereleasetimeoftheFilterandAmp
Master Volume [000127]
EGs,andtransmitsandreceivesMIDICC#72.
Thiscontrolsthevolumeofthemainstereooutputs,
Knob 58 [000127] aftertheTotalEffects.ItdoesnotaffectIndividual
ThisisthecurrentvalueoftheknobanditsMIDICC. Outputs18.Formoreinformation,seethediagram
MasterVolumeonpage 22.

09f

physicalcontrolcanbeassignedtoanyoneofa
09f: Tone Adjust numberofProgramparameters.
ToneAdjustletsyouuseallofthesliders,knobs,and
switchesontheControlSurfacetoeditProgram
parameters,liketheknobsonananalogsynth.Each
26
Program P0: Play 09: Control Surface

Tip:InCombiandSequencermodes,ToneAdjustalso Programparameters.ThevalueoftheRelative
letsyoueditProgramparameterswithoutneedingto parametershowstheamountofchangetothese
saveadifferentversionoftheoriginalProgram.For underlyingProgramparameters.
moreinformationonToneAdjustinthesemodes,see WhentheRelativeparameterisat0(inthecenterofthe
09f:ToneAdjustonpage 397. knoborslider),theunderlyingProgramparameters
Saving Tone Adjust Edits areunchanged.

ToneAdjusteditsaresavedintwodifferentways, Themeaningsofhigherandlowersettingscanvary,
dependingonwhethertheparameterisRelativeor dependingonthespecificparameter.Unlessnoted
Absolute.(Formoreinformation,seeAbsolute, otherwise,theyworkasfollows:
Relative,andMetaparameters,below.) WhentheRelativeparameterisat+99(themaximum),
EditstoRelativeparametersaffectthesound theProgramparametersareallattheirmaximumas
immediately,butdontchangetheunderlyingProgram well.Similarly,whentheRelativeparameterisat99
parametersettingsuntiltheProgramissaved.When (theminimum),theProgramparametersareatzero.
theProgramissaved,theOASYScalculatesthe RelativeToneAdjustparameterscaling
combinedeffectsofToneAdjustanddedicatedCC
modulation(fromtheRealTimeKnobs,forinstance), 99
andsavestheresultsintotheProgramparameters
directly.Atthatpoint,alloftheRelativeparametersare Parameter
resetto0. Value

EditstoAbsoluteparametersareimmediately
reflectedinthecorrespondingonscreenparameters,
andviceversa. As Programmed

Tone Adjust and MIDI SysEx


00
TheToneAdjustsliders,knobs,andswitchesallsend 99 0 +99
andreceiveMIDISystemExclusivemessages.Youcan
Relative Tone Adjust Value
usethistorecordandplaybackToneAdjusteditswith
asequencer,includingthebuiltinsequencer.
AfewoftheProgramparameterscontrolledby
NOTE:TheSysExmessagesaretiedtothephysical RelativeToneAdjustarebipolar,meaningthatthey
controls,andnottothefunctionstowhichtheyare canbeeitherpositiveornegative(insteadofjust
assigned.Forinstance,letssaythatslider1isassigned positive).WhentheseProgramparametersaresetto
tocontrolFilterResonance,andmoveslider1while negativevalues,ToneAdjustmaybehavedifferently
recordingintoasequencer.Thesequencerwillrecord fromthedescriptionabove.
thatslider1hasmoved,andnotthatFilterResonance
Forinstance,ifEGIntensityissettoanegativevalue,
haschanged.Ifyoulaterchangeslider1tocontrol
RelativeToneAdjustwilltakeitfrom0to99,likethe
LFO1Speed,playingbackthesequencewillaffectthe
inverseofthediagramabove.EGSustainworks
LFO,andnotFilterResonance.
differently;ifitssettoanegativevalue,ToneAdjust
Interaction between Tone Adjust and MIDI CCs takesitfrom0downtotheprogrammedvalue,and
thenupto+99,asshownbelow.
AnumberoftheCommonToneAdjustparameters
affectparameterswhicharealsomodulatedby RelativeToneAdjustparameterscaling:EGSustain
dedicatedMIDICCs.ThespecificCCnumbersare
notedinthedescriptionsfortheindividualTone 99
Adjustparameters,below.
Parameter
ToneAdjustandtheCCsworkseparately.Itspossible, Value
forinstance,forToneAdjusttoreducethevalueofa
parameter,andthenforaCCtoincreaseitagain. 00

ToneAdjustscalestheparameterfirst,andthentheCC As Programmed
scalestheresultoftheToneAdjust.

Absolute, Relative, and Meta parameters -99


TherearethreekindsofToneAdjustparameters: 99 0 +99

Absolute,Relative,andMeta. Relative Tone Adjust Value

AbsoluteparametersusuallycontrolasingleProgram
MetaparametersdontaffectProgramparameters
parameter,suchasOscillator1Transpose.The
directly.Instead,theyaffectthewaythatotherTone
ProgramandToneAdjustparametersmirrorone
Adjustparameterswork.Forinstance,Multisample
another;whenyouchangeone,theotherwillchange
Min#andMax#settheminimumandmaximum
tomatch.
valuesoftheToneAdjustMultisampleparameter.
Relativeparameterstypicallyadjusttwoormore
Programparameterssimultaneously.Forinstance, Selected parameter information
Filter/AmpEGAttackTimeaffectsatotalofsix
Thisstatuslineshowsdetailed,readonlyinformation
aboutthecurrentlyselectedToneAdjustparameter.

27
Program mode: HD-1

(Control) [Knob18, SW116, WhenaswitchisassignedtoaRelativeparameter,or


Slider18, Slider M] anAbsoluteparameterwithmorethantwostates:
ThisisthephysicalcontrollerassignedtotheTone SwitchOn=OnValue(seebelow)
Adjustparameter.SliderMistheMasterSlider. SwitchOff=theProgramsstoredvalue
(Assignment) [Full Parameter Name] WhenaswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
Thisshowsthefullnameoftheparameterassignedto parameter,suchasHold,theswitchstatusdirectly
thecontroller.YoucanchangethisusingtheAssign reflectstheparametervalue:
parameter,below. SwitchOn=On

Value [Current Parameter Value] SwitchOff=Off


Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.The Assign [List of Tone Adjust assignments]
rangeofvalueswillvarydependingontheparameter ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe
assignedtothecontrol. switch.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,pleasesee
Type [Relative, Absolute, Meta] CommonToneAdjustParametersandHD1Tone
AdjustParameters,below.
Thisshowsthetypeoftheparameter,whichrelatesto
howeditstotheparameteraresaved.Formore On Value [Depends on parameter]
information,seeAbsolute,Relative,andMeta Theparameterissettothisvaluewhentheswitchis
parametersonpage 27. On.
Stored Value [Original Parameter Value] WhentheswitchisassignedtoatwostateAbsolute
Thisshowstheoriginalvalueoftheparameter,before parameter,suchasHold,thiswillalwaysbethesame
theeffectsofToneAdjust.ItappliesonlytoTone astheSwitchStatus(seebelow).
AdjustparameterswhichcontrolasingleProgram
Switch Status [Off, On]
parameter.
ThissimplyshowswhethertheswitchisOnorOff.
IfyouunassignaRelativeparameterfromacontrol,it ThestatusisalsoshownbytheLEDsinthephysical
willreverttothisvalue. buttons.
Knobs 18 Sliders 18 and Master Slider
Assign [List of Tone Adjust assignments] TheseworkidenticallytoKnobs18,asdescribed
ThisletsyouassignaToneAdjustparametertothe above.
knob.Forafulllistoftheavailablechoices,pleasesee
CommonToneAdjustParametersandHD1Tone Common Tone Adjust Parameters
AdjustParameters,below.
TheseparametersaffectbothOscillators1and2.
Unlessotherwisenoted,alloftheCommonTone
Assign
AdjustparametersareRelative.
Off.ThismeansthattheToneAdjustcontrolhasno
effect.
Value FilterCutoff.(99+99,CC#74)
Thisscalesthecutofffrequencyofallofthefiltersat
once.Forinstance,intheHD1,itaffectsbothFiltersA
PerOscillatorparametersapplytoOSC1and2 andB.
individually,andaremarkedassuch:[OSC1]and FilterResonance.(99+99,CC#71)
[OSC2}. Thisscalestheresonanceofallofthefiltersatonce.For
Eachcontrollercanbeassignedtoonlyoneparameter, instance,intheHD1,itaffectsbothFiltersAandB.
andeachparametercanbeassignedtoonlyone FilterEGIntensity.(99+99,CC#79)
controller. ThisscalestheeffectoftheFilterEGonthecutoff
Toswapaparameterfromonecontroltoanother, frequency.Itaffectsallofthefiltersatonce;for
youllneedtofirstunassignitfromtheoldcontrol, instance,intheHD1,itaffectsbothFiltersAandB.
andthenassignittothenewcontrol. 99meansnomodulation.+99meansmaximum
modulationinthesamedirection,positiveornegative,
Value [Depends on parameter]
astheoriginalProgram.Forinstance,iftheoriginal
Thisshowsthecurrentvalueoftheparameter.The ProgramsEGIntensitywassetto25,thensettingthe
rangeofvalueswillvarydependingontheparameter ToneAdjustto+99movestheEGIntensityto99.
assignedtothecontrol.
AmpVelocityIntensity.(99+99)
Switches 116 ThisscalestheeffectofvelocityontheAmplevel.
99removesthevelocitymodulationentirely.+99
ToneAdjustswitchesactalittledifferentlythanknobs
meansmaximummodulationinthesamedirection,
andsliders.
positiveornegative,astheoriginalProgram.

28
Program P0: Play 09: Control Surface

Filter/AmpEGAttackTime. LFO1Speed.(99+99,CC#76)
(99+99,CC#73) ThisscalesLFO1sfrequency.WhentheLFOisin
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs, MIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.For
alongwithotherrelatedparameters. moreinformation,pleaseseeFrequencyonpage 85.
Whenthevalueis+1ormore,thisalsoaffectstheAmp LFO1Fade.(99+99)
EGsStartandAttackLevels,StartLevelAMS,and ThisscalesLFO1sfadeintime.Formoreinformation,
AttackTimeAMS,asdescribedbelow: pleaseseeFadeonpage 86.
Betweenvaluesof+1and+25,theStartLevel,Start LFO1Delay.(99+99,CC#78)
LevelAMS,andAttackTimeAMSwillchangefrom ThisscalesLFO1sdelaytimethetimebetweennote
theirprogrammedvaluesto0.Overthesamerange, onandtheonsetoftheLFO.Formoreinformation,
theAttackLevelwillchangefromitsprogrammed pleaseseeDelayonpage 86.
valueto99. ThisparameterinteractswithCC#78.
Filter/AmpEGDecayTime. LFO1Stop.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
(99+99,CC#75) ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO1is
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterand stoppedorrunning.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
AmpEGs.ItinteractswithCC#75. Stoponpage 85.
Filter/AmpEGSustainLevel. ThePROGsettingrestorestheProgramsoriginal
(99+99,CC#70) valuesconvenientifOscillator1sLFOwasstopped,
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterandAmp butOscillator2swasnot.
EGs.
LFO2Speed.(99+99)
Filter/AmpEGReleaseTime. ThisscalesLFO2sfrequency.WhentheLFOisin
(99+99,CC#72) MIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBaseNote.For
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterandAmpEGs. moreinformation,pleaseseeFrequencyonpage 85.
FilterEGAttackTime.(99+99) LFO2Fade.(99+99)
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheFilterEGs. ThisscalesLFO2sfadeintime.Formoreinformation,
FilterEGDecayTime.(99+99) pleaseseeFadeonpage 86.
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheFilterEGs. LFO2Delay.(99+99)
FilterEGSustainLevel.(99+99) ThisscalesLFO2sdelaytimethetimebetweennote
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheFilterEGs. onandtheonsetoftheLFO.Formoreinformation,
FilterEGReleaseTime.(99+99) pleaseseeDelayonpage 86.
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheFilterEGs. LFO2Stop.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute)
AmpEGAttackTime.(99+99) ThisAbsoluteparametercontrolswhetherLFO2is
ThisscalestheattacktimesoftheAmpEGs. stoppedorrunning.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Stoponpage 85.
AmpEGDecayTime.(99+99)
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesoftheAmpEGs. CommonLFOSpeed.(99+99)
ThisscalestheCommonLFOsfrequency.Whenthe
AmpEGSustainLevel.(99+99) LFOisinMIDI/Tempomode,thisadjuststheBase
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsoftheAmpEGs. Note.
AmpEGReleaseTime.(99+99) Unison.(Off/On,Absolute)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesoftheAmpEGs. ThisAbsoluteparameterturnsUnisononandoff.For
PitchEGAttackTime.(99+99) moreinformation,pleaseseeUnisononpage 35.
ThisscalestheattacktimesofthePitchEG(orEGs,in #OfVoices.(216,Absolute)
thecaseofsomeEXiinstruments). ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthenumberofUnison
PitchEGDecayTime.(99+99) voices.IfUnisonisnotOn,thisparameterhasno
ThisscalesthedecayandslopetimesofthePitchEG effect.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeNumberof
(orEGs,inthecaseofsomeEXiinstruments). voicesonpage 35.
PitchEGSustainLevel.(99+99) Detune.(0.0200.0,Absolute)
ThisscalesthesustainlevelsofthePitchEG(orEGs,in ThisAbsoluteparametersetsamountofdetuning
thecaseofsomeEXiinstruments).Note:thisdoesnot betweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,this
applytotheHD1. parameterhasnoeffect.Formoreinformation,please
seeDetuneonpage 35.
PitchEGReleaseTime.(99+99)
ThisscalesthereleasetimesofthePitchEG(orEGs,in Thickness.(Off/0109,Absolute)
thecaseofsomeEXiinstruments). ThisAbsoluteparametersetsthepatternofdetuning
betweentheUnisonvoices.IfUnisonisnotOn,orif
PitchLFO1Intensity.(99+99,CC#77)
Detuneissetto0,thisparameterhasnoeffect.For
ThisscalestheeffectofLFO1onthePitch.
moreinformation,pleaseseeThicknessonpage 36.
99removestheLFOmodulationentirely.+99means
CommonStepSequencerAttackSmoothing.(0099,
maximummodulationinthesamedirection,positive
Absolute)
ornegative,astheoriginalProgram.
ThisAbsoluteparametersetsamountofattack

29
Program mode: HD-1

smoothingfortheCommonStepSequencer.Notethat ThelistofMultisamples,WaveSequences,orDrum
thisappliesonlytoEXiPrograms.Formore Kitscanbequitelong.Theslidersorknobswillletyou
information,pleaseseeSmoothingonpage 171. sweepthroughtheentirerange,butitmaynotbe
CommonStepSequencerDecaySmoothing.(0099, possibletoselectalloftheintermediatevalues.Youcan
Absolute) alwaysselectanyindividualitembyusingselectthe
ThisAbsoluteparametersetsamountofdecay onscreenparameterandusethestandarddataentry
smoothingfortheCommonStepSequencer.Notethat controls,suchastheINCandDECbuttons.
thisappliesonlytoEXiPrograms.Formore Youcanalsolimittherangeofthecontrolbyusingthe
information,pleaseseeSmoothingonpage 171. Min#andMax#parameters,describedbelow.
PROGrestorestheProgramsoriginalMultisamples
HD-1 Tone Adjust Parameters andWaveSequences(ortheDrumKit,foraDrum
Program),includingallvelocityrangesandReverse
Macro parameters andStartOffsetsettings.
ThefollowingthreeparametersaffectbothOscillator1 ForSingleandDoublePrograms:
andOscillator2. MS/WS/DKitSelectoverridesallofthe
*Inthelistbelow,theitemsinparenthesesare MultisampleVelocityzones,sothatthenewly
(value,edittype)respectively. selectedMultisampleorWaveSequenceplaysover
PitchStretch.(12+12,Relative) theentirevelocityrange.
ThisspecialcontrolincreasestheOscillatorTune Bydefault,youcanselectfromthesameBankas
parameterwhileloweringtheTransposeparameter. theoriginalProgramsMS1.
Theresultisthatthepitchstaysthesame,butthe Alsobydefault,iftheoriginalProgramsMS1isa
mappingofthesamplestothekeyschanges.Youcan Multisample,youcanselectMultisamples;ifMS1is
usethistocreateinterestingshiftsintimbre. aWaveSequence,youcanselectWaveSequences.
Hold.(Off/On,Absolute) YoucanusetheMS/WSTypeandMS/WS/DKit
ThisletsyouturnHoldonandoff.Formore Bankparameters,describedbelow,tochangethese
informationonthisparameter,seeHoldonpage 36. defaultsasdesired.
Reverse.(PROG/Off/On,Absolute) ForMultisamplesonly:
ThisprovidesaquickwaytoturnReverseonorofffor
allMultisamplesinbothOscillators.PROGrestores YoucanusetheToneAdjustReverseandStart
theProgramsoriginalsettingsconvenientifsome Offsetparameterstomodifythenewlyselected
MultisampleshadbeensettoOff,andotherssettoOn. Multisample.Bydefault,theReverseissettoOff,
anditsStartOffsetissetto0.
Per-Oscillator parameters ForDrumPrograms:
TheseparametersaffecteachOscillatorseparately.In
Bydefault,youcanselectfromthesameBankas
thelist,theparametersforOscillator1appearfirst,
theoriginalProgramsDrumKit.Youcanusethe
witheachnameprefacedby[OSC1];theparameters
MSBankparameter,describedbelow,toselecta
forOscillator2appearnext,prefacedby[OSC2].
differentBank.
Unlessotherwisespecified,allofthePerOscillator
MS/WSType.(Off/MS/WavSeq,Meta)
parametersareAbsolute.
ThisMetaparametermodifiestheMS/WSSelect
*Inthelistbelow,theitemsinparenthesesare parameter,sothatyoucanspecificallychoosetoselect
(value,edittype)respectively. eitherMultisamplesorWaveSequences.
Tune.(1200+1200,Relative) ItappliesonlytoSingleandDoublePrograms,andhas
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromthe noeffectwithDrumKits.
OscillatorsTunesetting,asdescribedunderTuneon
MSBank.(ROMMono,Meta)
page 49.
ThisMetaparametermodifiestheMS/WS/DkitSelect
NOTE:aswithTranspose,below,thisisasimple parameter,sothatyoucanselectMultisamplesfrom
additionorsubtraction,asopposedtothemore anyBankyoulike.
complexscalingfunction.
MS/WS/DKitMin#.(016383,Meta)
Transpose.(60+60,Relative) ThisMetaparametersetsaminimumvalueforthe
ThisRelativeparameteraddstoorsubtractsfromthe MS/WS/DkitSelectparameter.Youcanusethisin
OscillatorsTransposesetting,asdescribedunder conjunctionwiththeMS/WS/DKitMax#parameter,
Transposeonpage 49. below,sothataknoborsliderselectsonlyfromasmall
MS/WS/DKitSelect.(PROG/016383,Absolute) setofchoices.Thisisparticularlyconvenientwiththe
InSingleorDoublePrograms,thisletsyouselecta internalROM,inwhichsimilarMultisamplesare
newMultisampleorWaveSequencefortheOscillator. groupedtogether.Forinstance,thismakesiteasyto
InDrumPrograms,itletsyouselectadifferentDrum selectbetweenagroupofbells,orasetofelectric
Kit.Ingeneral,itsbesttousethisinconjunctionwith basses.
theMS/WSTypeandMS/WS/DKitBankparameters, MS/WS/DKitMax#.(016383,Meta)
asdescribedbelow. ThisMetaparametersetsamaximumvalueforthe
MS/WS/DkitSelectparameter.Pleasesee
MS/WS/DKitMin#,above,formoreinformation.

30
Program P0: Play 09: Control Surface

StartOffset.(08,Absolute) FilterLFO1IntensitytoA.(99+99,Absolute)
ThisallowsyoutochangetheStartOffsetofthe ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoff
MultisamplespecifiedbytheMS/WSSelect modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunder33a:LFO
parameter.Itappliesonlywhen: 1/2onpage 68.
TheProgramisaSingleorDouble(notaDrumKit) FilterLFO1IntensitytoB.(99+99,Absolute)
TheMS/WSSelectparameterisusedtoselecta ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoff
Multisample(notaWaveSequence) modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunder33a:LFO
1/2onpage 68.
FormoreinformationonStartOffsets,seeStart
Offsetonpage 52. FilterLFO2IntensitytoA.(99+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterAcutoff
Drive.(099,Absolute) modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunder33a:LFO
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsDriveparameter,as 1/2onpage 68.
describedunderDriveonpage 74.
FilterLFO2IntensitytoB.(99+99,Absolute)
LowBoost.(099,Absolute) ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofFilterBcutoff
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsLowBoostparameter,as modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunder33a:LFO
describedunderLowBoostonpage 75. 1/2onpage 68.
PitchSlope.(1.02.0,Absolute) PitchLFO1AMSIntensity.(12.00+12.00,Absolute)
ThiscontrolstheOscillatorsPitchSlopeparameter,as YoucanuseanAMSsource,suchasaftertouch,to
describedunderPitchSlopeonpage 54. modulatethedepthofpitchmodulation(vibrato)from
LFO1Waveform.(TriangleRad6,Absolute) LFO1.ThiscontrolstheintensityofthatAMS
ThisselectsthewaveformfortheOscillatorsLFO1,as modulation.Formoreinformation,see42c:LFO1/2
describedunderWaveformonpage 84. onpage 78.
LFO2Waveform.(TriangleRad6,Absolute) PitchLFO2AMSIntensity.(12.00+12.00,Absolute)
ThisselectsthewaveformfortheOscillatorsLFO2,as ThisissimilartoPitchLFO1AMSIntensity,above.
describedunderWaveformonpage 84. Formoreinformation,see42c:LFO1/2onpage 78.
AmpLFO1Intensity.(99+99,Absolute)
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAmp Default Tone Adjust Settings
modulationfromLFO1,asdescribedunder42c:LFO
1/2onpage 78. ToneAdjustprovidesanelegantphysicalinterfaceto
theHD1sparameters.Mostofthefactorysoundsuse
AmpLFO2Intensity.(99+99,Absolute) thedefaultlayout,asshownbelow.Youcanalso
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAmp customizethelayoutforindividualsounds,ifdesired.
modulationfromLFO2,asdescribedunder42c:LFO
1/2onpage 78.

HD1ToneAdjust,DefaultSettings

OSC1 OSC1 OSC1


Filter LFO1 Intensity to A Amp LFO1 Intensity LFO1 Waveform
3 switch: OSC2 4 switch: OSC2 LFO1 Speed Amp Velocity
Pitch LFO1 Intensity Intensity
OSC1 Drive
Pitch Stretch
1 switch: Reverse
2 switch: OSC2 Tune

8 switch:
OSC2 Drive

7 switch:
911 switch: Multisample/Wave Seq
Filter Cutoff, /Drum Kit
Filter Resonance,
Filter EG Intensity 5, 6 switch:
OSC1 Transpose,
OSC2 Transpose

Filter EG ADSR Amp EG ADSR

31
Program mode: HD-1

t 09: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyToneAdjust.Thisisavailableonlywhen
ControlAssignissettoTONEADJUST.Formore
information,seeCopyToneAdjustonpage 147.
3:ResetToneAdjust.Thisisavailableonlywhen
ControlAssignissettoTONEADJUST.Formore
information,seeResetToneAdjustonpage 147.
2:CopyScene.ThisisavailableonlywhenControl
AssignissettoRTKNOBS/KARMA.Formore
information,seeCopySceneonpage 151.
3:SwapScene.ThisisavailableonlywhenControl
AssignissettoRTKNOBS/KARMA.Formore
information,seeSwapSceneonpage 151.

32
Program P1: Basic/Vector 11: Program Basic

Program P1: Basic/Vector

11: Program Basic


11PMC

11a

11b

11c

11d 11e

11f

11g

Thispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsforthe DrumsmodeisaspecialvariationofSinglemode,and
Program.Amongotherthings,youcan: usesaDrumKit(ascreatedinGlobalmode)insteadof
SetuptheProgramtobeaSingle,aDouble,ora multisamples.
DrumKit Single:TheProgramwilluseoneoscillator,fora
SettheProgramtoplaypolyphonicallyor maximumof172notepolyphony.
monophonically Double:TheProgramwillusetwooscillators,fora
CreateakeyboardsplitbetweenOSC1andOSC2 maximumof84notepolyphony.

SelecttheProgramsscale Drums:TheProgramwilluseoneoscillatortoplaya
DrumKit.Inthiscasetheprogramwillnormallyhave
MakebasicWaveSequenceSettings amaximumof172notepolyphony.
Note:whenplayingdrumkits,itsoftenusefultoturn
11a: Program Name and Tempo ontheHoldparameter.Formoreinformation,see
Hold,onpage 36.
Bank [INTAINTG, USERAUSERG]
A note about polyphony
Program Name [000127/001128: Name]
Polyphonymeansthenumberofnotesthatyoucan
Thesetworeadonlyparametersshowthebank, playatatime.Thisnumberwillvarydependingonthe
number,andnameofthecurrentProgram. particularsoundbeingplayed,andhowthatsoundis
produced.Generallyspeaking:
Tempo ( q ) [040.00240.00, EXT]
DoubleProgramsusetwiceasmanyvoicesas
ThisisthetempousedforWaveSequences,LFOs,
SinglePrograms.
effects,andKARMA.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
Tempoonpage 5. Awavesequenceusestwiceasmanyvoicesasa
multisample.Astereowavesequenceusestwiceas
manyvoicesasamonowavesequence.
11b: Oscillator Mode
StereoMultisamplesusetwiceasmanyvoicesas
Oscillator Mode [Single, Double, Drums] MonoMultisamples.
HD1SingleProgramshaveoneoscillator,andDouble IftheVectorEGisenabled,thenumberofvoices
Programshavetwooscillators.Eachoscillatorincludes usedincreasesslightly.
acompletesynthesisvoice,withvelocityswitched
multisamples,dualfilters,EGs,LFOs,andsoon.

33
Program mode: HD-1

Polyphonyalsodependsontheeffectsbeingused,and TheModeparameter,below,switchesbetweentwo
onwhichsynthesistypesarebeingused(HD1,AL1, differentMonoLegatoeffects,eachofwhichachieves
CX3etc.).Formoreinformation,see85a:Effect/EXi thissmoothnessinadifferentway.Seethedescription
FixedResourceMeteronpage 130. ofthatparameterformoredetails.
On(checked):Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing,
11c: Voice Assign Mode thenoteswithinalegatophrasewillsoundsmoother,
accordingtothesettingoftheModeparameter,below.
Voice Assign Mode [Poly, Mono] Off(unchecked):Legatophrasingwillproducethe
Theseradiobuttonsselectthebasicvoiceallocation samesoundasdetachedplaying.
mode.Dependingonwhichoneyouselect,various
otheroptionswillappear,suchasPolyLegato(Poly Mode [Normal, Use Legato Offset]
modeonly)andUnison(Monomodeonly). ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenMonoLegatois
Poly:Theprogramwillplaypolyphonically,allowing On.
youplaychords. Normal:Whenyouplaylegato,themultisample,
Mono:Theprogramwillplaymonophonically, envelopes,andLFOswillnotbereset;onlythepitchof
producingonlyonenoteatatime. theoscillatorwillchange.Thissettingisparticularly
effectiveforwindinstrumentsandanalogsynth
Poly sounds.
Withthisoption,thepitchmayoccasionallybe
Poly Legato [Off, On] incorrect,dependingonwhichmultisampleyou
PolyLegatoisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignMode play,andwhereonthekeyboardyouplay.
issettoPoly. UseLegatoOffset:Whenyouplaylegato,thesecond
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand andsubsequentnoteswillusethelegatostartpoint
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnote specifiedforeachmultisample,ratherthantheStart
isreleased.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached. Offset(21c)setting.
On(checked):Whenyouplayalegatophrase,onlythe Thisiseffectivewhenusedwithamultisamplefor
firstnoteofthatphrase(andnoteswithin30msecof whichyouveassignedaspecificlegatooffsetpoint.
thefirstnote)willusethenormalmultisamplestart Forexample,youmightuseittocontroltheattackofa
pointspecifiedbyStartOffset(21c);allsubsequent breathy,slowattacksaxsound.Onsome
noteswillusethelegatostartpointspecifiedforeach multisamples,thiswillhavenoeffect.
multisample. EnvelopesandLFOswillstillbereset,astheyarewith
Note:Thisisausefulwaytosimulatethepercussive detachedplaying.
attackofatonewheeltypeorgan.
Priority [Low, High, Last]
Off(unchecked):Noteswillalwaysusethesettingof
theStartPointOffset,regardlessofwhetheryouplay PriorityisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeisset
legatoordetached. toMono.

WithsomeMultisamples,PolyLegatomaynothave Thisparameterdetermineswhathappenswhenmore
anyeffect. thanonenoteisbeinghelddown.
Low:Thelowestnotewillsound.Manyvintage,
Single Trigger [Off, On] monophonicanalogsynthsworkthisway
SingleTriggerisavailablewhentheVoiceAssign High:Thehighestnotewillsound.
ModeissettoPoly.
Last:Themostrecentlyplayednotewillsound.
On(checked):Whenyouplaythesamenote
repeatedly,thepreviousnotewillbesilencedbefore Max # of Notes
thenextnoteissounded,sothatthetwodonot
overlap. Max # of Notes [Dynamic, 116]
Off(unchecked):Whenyouplaythesamenote Dynamicisthedefault.Withthissetting,youcanplay
repeatedly,thenoteswilloverlap. asmanynotesasthesystemallows.
116letsyoulimitthemaximumnumberofnotes
Mono playedbytheProgram.Voiceswillstillbeallocated
Mono Legato [Off, On] dynamically,uptothismaximumnumber.Youcanuse
thisto:
ThisisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono. Modelthevoiceleadingofvintagesynthesizers,
suchasthePolysix
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnote Controltheresourcesrequiredbyindividual
isreleased.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached. ProgramsinCombinationandSequencermodes
WhenMonoLegatoisOn,thefirstnoteinalegato Max#ofNotesappliesonlywhenthemainVoice
phrasewillsoundnormally,andthensubsequentnotes AssignModeissettoPoly.IfMonoisselected,thisis
willhaveasmoothersound,formoregentle grayedout.
transitionsbetweenthenotes.

34
Program P1: Basic/Vector 11: Program Basic

ThissettingdoesnotlimittheUnisonNumberof center;at100,thetwogroupswillbehardpannedleft
Voicesparameter.Forinstance,ifMax#ofNotesisset andright,respectively;atintermediatevalues,they
to6,andUnisonNumberofVoicesissetto3,youcan willbepannedtointermediateleftandrightpositions.
playupto6notes,eachwith3Unisonvoices. Ifthereisanoddnumberofvoices,onevoicewillbe
IftheProgramissettoDouble,theMax#ofNotes pannedtothecenter.
appliesequallytobothOscillators.Forinstance,ifMax Ifthevoicesaretruestereo,StereoSpreadsteersthe
#ofNotesissetto4,youcanplayupto4notesoneach stereoimageofeachvoice,similartoMIDIPan
OSC. (CC#10)andtheControlSurfacePanknobs.Inthis
case,intermediatesettingsofStereoSpreadmaybe
Chord themosteffective,sincetheywillstillpreservesomeof
Chord [Off, Bsc, Adv] theoriginalstereoimage.
OffdisablestheChordfunction. Unisondetuningisspreadasevenlyaspossibleacross
theleftandrightchannels.Thelowestvoicewillbeon
Bsc(Basic)recreatesthechordmodeoftheKORG theleft,andthehighestontheright;thenextloweston
Polysix.Eachtimeyouplayanewchord,itwillcutoff theleft,andthenexthighestontheright,etc.,as
thepreviouschord.ThisoptionignorestheVoice below:
Assignsettings.
14cents:L
Adv(Advanced)usestheProgramsVoiceAssign
settings,asifeachnoteinthechordwasatransposed +14cents:R
setofoscillatorslayeredwithintheProgram. 10cents:L
Poly,PolyLegato,SingleTrigger,Mono,MonoLegato, +10cents:Retc.
LegatoOffset,MonoPriority,andMonoandPoly
DependingontheThicknesssetting,thedetuning
Unisonallapply.
mayleanslightlytooneside.
YoucanachievethesameeffectasBsc,above,by
settingChordtoAdvanced,VoiceAssigntoMono, Detune [0200 cents]
PrioritytoLastNote,andLegatotoOff. DetuneisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Formoreinformation,seeUsingChordmodeon ThisparametersetsthetuningspreadfortheUnison
page 54oftheOperationGuide. voices,incents(1/100ofasemitone).TheThickness
parameter,below,controlshowthevoicesare
Source Pad [1...8] distributedacrossthedetuneamount.When
ChordmodeusesthechordsassignedtothePads,and ThicknessisOff,thevoicesaredistributedevenly,
thisselectswhichofthePadstouse.Youcanalso centeredaroundthebasicpitch.
choosechordsusingthePadsthemselves;formore
Forinstance,letssaythattheNumberofvoices
information,seeSelectingchordsonpage 55ofthe
parameterissetto3,Detuneissetto24,and
OperationGuide.
ThicknessisOff:
Unison Voiceonewillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwo
willnotbedetuned,andvoicethreewillbedetunedup
Unison [On, Off] by12cents.
UnisoncanbeusedinbothMonoandPolymodes.
Voice Detune
On(checked):WhenUnisonison,theProgramuses
twoormorestacked,detunedvoicestocreateathick 1 12
sound.
2 0
UsetheNumberofVoicesandDetuneparametersto
setthenumberofvoicesandamountofdetuning,and 3 +12
theThicknessparametertocontrolthecharacterofthe
detuning. Asanotherexample,letssaythatDetuneisstillsetto
Off(unchecked):TheProgramplaysnormally.If 24andThicknessisstillOff,butNumberofvoicesis
UnisonisOff,thenallofitsassociatedparametersare setto4:
grayedout. Voiceonewillstillbedetuneddownby12cents,voice
twowillbedetuneddownby4cents,voicethreewill
Number of voices [216]
bedetunedupby4cents,andvoice4willbedetuned
Thiscontrolsthenumberofdetunedvoicesthatwillbe upby12cents.
playedforeachnotewhenusingUnison.Itapplies
onlywhenUnisonisOn. Voice Detune

Stereo Spread [0...100] 1 12


StereoSpreadletsyoucreateawiderstereofieldwhen
2 4
usingUnison.ItappliesonlywhenUnisonisOn.
ThisfeatureseparatesthedifferentUnisonvoicesinto 3 +4
twogroups.Onegroupispannedtotheleft,andthe
othertotheright.At0,bothgroupswillbeinthe 4 +12

35
Program mode: HD-1

Thickness [Off,0109] Using Hold with Drum Kits


ThicknessisavailablewhenUnisonisOn. Holdcanbeespeciallyusefulfordrumprograms,
Thisparametercontrolsthecharacterofthedetuning sinceitletsthesamplesringoutnaturally.Ingeneral,
fortheunisonvoices. whenyousettheOscillatorModetoDrums,itsgood
tosetHoldtoOn.
Off:Unisonvoiceswillbeevenlydistributedacross
theDetunerange,asshownabove. OnceyouveturnedonHoldforadrumprogram,the
functioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasis
0109:Unisonvoiceswillbedetunedinanasymmetric accordingtosettingswithintheselectedDrumKit.
way,increasingthecomplexityofthedetune,and
changingthewayinwhichthedifferentpitchesbeat IfakeysEnableNoteOffReceiveparameter(onthe
againstoneanother.Thiscreatesaneffectsimilarto VoiceMixertaboftheDrumKitpage)isunchecked,
vintageanalogsynthesizers,inwhichoscillatorswere thenotewillbeheld.
frequentlyslightlyoutoftune.Highernumbers IfthekeysEnableNoteOffReceiveparameteris
increasetheeffect. checked,itwillnotbeheld.
IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbe
11d: Key Zone heldregardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffReceive
setting.
Youcancreatekeyboardsplitsbysettingtopand
bottomkeysforOscillators1and2.Also,youcan Using Hold with Acoustic Pianos
controlthekeyboardrangeoverwhichtheHold Holdisalsousefulforsimulatingthetopoctavesofan
parametertakeseffect. acousticpiano,inwhichnotesalwayssustainuntil
theyfadeoutnaturally,regardlessofhowlongyou
Setting Key Zones from the keyboard
holdthekey.
Inadditiontousingthestandarddataentrycontrols,
TheHoldBottomandHoldTopparametersare
youcanalsosetallkeyboardzonesparametersdirectly
designedforexactlythispurpose.Theyletyoulimit
fromthekeyboard.Justdothefollowing:
theeffectoftheHoldparametertoaspecificrangeof
1. Selectthekeyzoneparameteryoudliketoedit. thekeyboard.
2. PressandholdtheENTERbutton.
Hold Bottom [C1G9]
3. Playanoteonthekeyboardtosettheparameter.
ThissetsthelowestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
4. ReleasetheENTERbutton.
Youcanusethisshortcutforallkeyandvelocity Hold Top [C1G9]
parametersintheOASYS. ThissetsthehighestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction.
Osc 1 Bottom [C1G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichOscillator1willplay. 11e: Wave Sequence
TheSwing,KeySync,andQuantizeTriggersettings
Osc 1 Top [C1G9]
inthissectionaffecthowtheProgramplaysitsWave
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichOscillator1will Sequences.Thesesettingsarestoredwithinthe
play. Program,anddonotchangetheoriginalWave
Sequencedata.
Osc 2 Bottom [C1G9]
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichOscillator2willplay. Swing [300%+300%]
ThisparameterappliesonlywhentheProgramis
Osc 2 Top [C1G9]
usingoneormoreWaveSequencessettoTempomode.
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichOscillator2will
play. UseSwingtoaddasenseofswingtotherhythm.For
example,Swingprovidesaneasywaytoturna
Hold [On, Off] squarerhythmintoashufflegroove.
Holdislikepermanentlypressingdownonthesustain Swingworksbyadjustingthepositionoftheupbeats,
pedal.Inotherwords,notescontinuetosoundasif relativetotheWaveSequencesResolutionsetting.For
youwereholdingdownthekeyevenafteryoulift instance,iftheResolutionissetto1/8,Swingaffects
yourfingersfromthekeyboard. everyother8thnote.
UnlesstheSustainLevelissetto0inAmpEG1(and WhenSwingissetto+100%,thesenoteswillbemoved
AmpEG2inaDoubleProgram),thesoundwillplay onethirdofthewaytowardthenextdownbeat.Ifthe
fortheentirelengthofthesample(s). Resolutionis1/8,forexample,+100%changesstraight
On(checked):TheHoldfunctionisenabledforthe 8thnotesinto8thnotetriplets.
rangesetbytheHoldBottomandHoldTop WhenSwingissetto+300%,upbeatswillbemoved
parameters,below. allthewaytothenextdownbeat.Atthispoint,the
Off(unchecked):Noteswillplaynormally.Thisisthe notesontheupbeatswillnotbeheardatall.
defaultsetting. Positivevaluesmaketheupbeatslater,andnegative
valuesmakethemearlier.

36
Program P1: Basic/Vector 11: Program Basic

WaveSequenceSwing How Quantize Trigger works


Swing Resolution =
TheQuantizeTriggerfeaturetriestomakeagood
guessatwhereyouintendedthenotetobe.Ifyouplay
Beat 1 Beat 2
Swing %
3 3 3 3
thenotejustabitlatewithina32ndnoteofthe8th
0%
noteitwillassumethatyoumeantthenotetosound
+100
onthebeatthatjustpassed.Inthiscase,thenotewill
+100%
100
playimmediately.
100% Ontheotherhand,ifyouplaythenoteuptothree
+200
32ndnotesearly,itwillassumethatyoureintending
+200%
thenotetosoundonthenextbeat.Inthiscase,the
+300%
noteonisdelayeduntilthenext8thnote.
+300

11f: Half-Damper Control


Swing uses the Wave Sequences Resolution setting
Ahalfdamperpedalisaspecialtypeofcontinuous
SincetheprogrammedrhythmsofTempoWave
footpedal,suchastheKorgDS1H.Incomparisontoa
Sequencescanvarywidely,eachhasitsownSwing
standardfootswitch,halfdamperpedalsoffermore
Resolutionsetting,from1/32notetripletsto1/4note.
subtlecontrolofsustain,whichcanbeespeciallyuseful
IftheProgramcontainstwoormoreWaveSequences forpianosounds.
withdifferentSwingResolutionsettings,theProgram
TheOASYSwillautomaticallysensewhenahalf
willusethefinestvalue.Forexample,ifoneissetto1/8
damperisconnectedtotherearpanelDAMPERinput.
andtheotherissetto1/16,theProgramwilluse1/16
Forproperoperation,youwillalsoneedtocalibrate
notes.
thepedal,usingtheCalibrateHalfDampercommand
Key Sync [On, Off] intheGlobalpagemenu.
On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,eachnotesWave Theoffandfullonpositionsofthehalfdamperwork
Sequence(s)willprogressindependently,sothateach justlikeastandardfootswitch.Inconjunctionwiththe
onecanbeonadifferentstep,ormovingatadifferent EnableHalfDamperparameter,below,intermediate
rate. positionsallowagraduatedcontrolofsustain,similar
tothedamperpedalofanacousticpiano.
Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,allofthe
WaveSequenceswillbesynchronizedonthesame Enable Half-Damper [On, Off]
step.Thereisoneexceptiontothis,however:if
WhenthisisOn(checked),HalfDamperpedals,
Durationismodulatedwithvelocityornotenumber,
normalsustainpedals,andMIDICC#64willall
theWaveSequencescanstillprogressatdifferentrates.
modulatetheAmpEG,asdescribedbelow.
Quantize Trigger [On, Off] WhenthisisOff(unchecked),thepedalsandMIDI
ThisparameterappliesonlywhentheProgramis CC#64willstillholdnotesasusual,butwillnot
usingoneormoreWaveSequencessettoTempomode. modulatetheAmpEG.
ItallowsyoutoforcemostTempomodeWave Half-Damper Pedal and Release Time
Sequencenoteonstobeinsync,makingiteasierto
Theamountofmodulationdependsonwhetherthe
playalongwithotherrhythmicelements.
AmpEGSustainLevelissetto0(asisthecasewith
WhenQuantizeTriggersisOn,noteonsarequantized mostacousticpianosounds),orsetto1ormore.The
to8thnotesusingthecurrenttemporeference.(See modulationiscontinuous,from1x(nochange)to55
belowforafewmoredetails.) timeslonger;thetablebelowshowsaselectionof
Thetemporeferencecancomefromdifferentsources, representativepoints.
dependingonthecurrentmode,andwhetherornot HalfDampermodulationofAmpEGReleaseTime
KARMAison:
CC#64 Multiply Amp EG Release Time by
InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAisoff,
Value If Sustain = 0 If Sustain = 1 or more
noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesounding
TempomodeWaveSequence,ifany. 0 1x 1x
InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAison, 32 2.1x 2.1x
noteonsaresynchronizedwithKARMA.
64 3.2x
InSequencermodeduringplaybackorrecording,
noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesequence. 80 5.9x
3.2x
InSequencermode,whilethesequencerisstopped, 96 22.3x
noteonsaresynchronizedwithRPPRand 127 55x
KARMA.
On(checked):Noteonswillbequantized.
11g: Scale
Off(unchecked):Noteonswillbeplayedinstantly,the
momentthatyouplaythekeyboard. Type [Equal TemperamentUser Octave Scale15]
SelectsthebasicscalefortheProgram.

37
Program mode: HD-1

Notethatformanyofthescales,thesettingoftheKey ThissettingdoesnotapplytotheEqualTemperament,
parameter,below,isveryimportant. Stretch,andUserAllNotesscales.
EqualTemperament:Thisisthemostwidelyused IfyoureusingascaleotherthanEqual
scalebyfar,inwhicheachsemitonestepisspacedat Temperament,thecombinationoftheselectedscale
equalpitchintervals. andtheKeysettingmayskewthetuningofthe
EqualTemperamentallowseasymodulation,sothata note.Forexample,AabovemiddleCmightbecome
chordprogressionplayedinthekeyofCsounds 442Hz,insteadofthenormal440Hz.Youcanuse
roughlythesameasthesameprogressionplayedinF#. theGlobalModesMasterTuneparametertocorrect
Sacrificed,however,issomeofthepurityofindividual this,ifnecessary.
intervalsofferedbythescalesbelow. Random [07]
PureMajor:Inthistemperament,majorchordsofthe Thisparametercreatesrandomvariationsinpitchfor
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune. eachnote.Atthedefaultvalueof0,pitchwillbe
PureMinor:Inthistemperament,minorchordsofthe completelystable;highervaluescreatemore
selectedkeywillbeperfectlyintune. randomization.
Arabic:Thisscaleincludesthequartertoneintervals Thisparameterishandyforsimulatinginstruments
usedinArabicmusic. thathavenaturalpitchinstabilities,suchasanalog
synths,tapemechanismorgansoracoustic
Pythagoras:ThisscaleisbasedonancientGreek
instruments.
musicaltheory,andisespeciallyeffectiveforplaying
melodies.Itproducescompletelypurefifths,withone
exception,attheexpenseofdetuningotherintervals t 11: Page Menu Commands
thirdsinparticular.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
AsmuchasPythagorasmighthaveliketodoso,its numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
notpossibletomakeallthefifthspurewhilealso shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
keepingtheoctaveintune.Forthesakeoftheoctave, commandsonpage 142.
oneofthefifthstheintervalfromthesharpfourth
degreetothesharpfirstdegreeismadequiteflat. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
Werkmeister(WerkmeisterIII):Thisscalewasoneof
themanytemperamentsystemsdevelopedtowards 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
theendoftheBaroqueperiod.TheseWellTempered ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
tuningswereaimedatallowingrelativelyfree 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
transpositionalthoughyoullstillnoticethatthe CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
differentkeysmaintaintheirowndistinct
3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
characteristics,unlikeEqualTemperament.
SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
J.S.Bachwasreferringtothesenewscalesinhistitle,
TheWellTemperedClavier.Assuch,thisgroupare
particularlyappropriateforlatebaroqueorganand
harpsichordmusic.
Kirnberger(KirnbergerIII):ThisisasecondWell
Temperedtuning,datingfromtheearly18thcentury.
Slendro:ThisisanIndonesiangamelanscale,withfive
notesperoctave.
WhenKeyissettoC,usetheC,D,F,GandAnotes.
Otherkeyswillplaythenormalequaltempered
pitches.
Pelog:ThisisanotherIndonesiangamelanscale,with
sevennotesperoctave.
WhenKeyissettoC,usethewhitekeys.Theblack
keyswillplaytheequaltemperedpitches.
Stretch:Thistuningisusedforacousticpianos.
UserAllNotesScale:Thisisauserprogrammedscale
withdifferentsettingsforall128MIDInotes.Youcan
setupthisscaleinGlobalmode(Global31b).
UserOctaveScale0015:Theseareuserprogrammed
scaleswithsettingsforeachofthe12notesinan
octave.YoucansetthemupinGlobalmode(Global3
1a).

Key (Scale Key) [CB]


Selectsthekeyofthespecifiedscale.

38
Program P1: Basic/Vector 15: Vector Control

15: Vector Control


15PMC

15a

15b

15c

VectorSynthesisletsyoucontrolProgramandEffects Inadditiontomovingthepointdirectlywiththe
parametersbymovingtheVectorJoystick,byusingthe VectorJoystick,youcanalsousetheVectorEnvelope
programmableVectorEnvelope,orbythecombination tomoveitspositionautomaticallyovertime,asshown
ofthetwo. below.

What does Vector mean? VectorEnvelopemovingtheVectorPoint


Modulationgenerallyworksbymovingasingle +127
control.likeaslider,inastraightline.Atoneendofthe
control,themodulationisatitsminimum;attheother
end,itsatitsmaximum.
Y-Axis 0
VectorSynthesisisalittledifferent.Itworksby
movingaroundapointonatwodimensionalplane,
bothleftrightandupdown.
VectorPointandXandYaxisvalues 127 0 +127
X-Axis
Vector Point

+127 Vector Joystick and Vector Envelope


YoucanmovetheVectorpointusingthecombination
Y value: +50 oftheVectorJoystickandtheVectorEnvelope.Thetwo
Y-Axis 0 worktogether,althoughyoudontnecessaryhaveto
usethembothatthesametime.
WhentheVectorJoystickisinitscenterposition,the
VectorEnvelopehascompletecontroloverthepoints
127 0 +127 position.Likewise,whentheVectorEnvelopeisinthe
X-Axis center,theVectorJoystickhascompletecontrol.
WhentheVectorEnvelopeismoving,theVector
X value: 90 Joystickscalesitseffect.RegardlessoftheEnvelopes
Youcanthinkofthispointasbeingpositionedontwo position,theVectorJoystickcanalwaysmovethe
differentlinesatonce:aleftrightline(theXaxis),and Vectorpointallthewaytoanyoftheextremeedges.
anupdownline(theYaxis). Tip:toquicklyresettheVectorJoysticktoitscenter
Inotherwords,insteadofjusthavingonevalue(likea value,holddownthefrontpanelControlResetbutton
slider),eachVectorpointhastwovalues:oneforX, andmovethejoystick.
andoneforY.SeethegraphicVectorPointandXand
Yaxisvaluesforanexample.

39
Program mode: HD-1

Vector Volume Control and CC Control InCombimode,youcanusethistocontroltherelative


TheVectordoestwomainthings:itcancontrolthe volumesofupto16Programsatonce,usingboththeX
relativevolumeofthetwoOscillatorsinProgram andYaxes.Formoredetails,seetheVectorControl
mode(orofupto16ProgramsatonceinCombi sectionofCombimode.
mode),anditcangenerateCCsforcontrolling Enable Volume Control [Off, On]
ProgramandEffectsparameters.
Whenthisboxischecked,theVectorpositionwill
Vector and MIDI controlthevolumesofOscillators1and2.
TheVectorfeaturesinteractwithMIDIintwodifferent Whenthisboxisnotchecked,theVectorpositionwill
ways:throughtheVectorJoystick,andthroughthe notdirectlyaffectvolume.However,itsstillpossible
VectorCCControl. fortheVectortocontrolvolumeviaVectorCCsand
TheVectorJoysticksendsandreceivestwoMIDI AMS.
controllers:onefortheXaxis,andtheotherfortheY Equal Power [Off, On]
axis.InGlobalmode,youcanassignthesetoanyMIDI
CCnumbersyoulike.ThedefaultsareCC#118forthe ThisappliesonlywhenEnableVolumeControlis
Xaxis,andCC#119fortheYaxis. turnedOn.

TheVectorJoystickanditsCCscontroltheVector WhenEqualPowerisOn,theVectorwillfadebetween
position,inconjunctionwiththeVectorEG. Oscillators1and2usinganequalpowervolume
curve.Thisprovidesasmoothfadebetweenthetwo
TheVectorCCControl,ontheotherhand,isgenerated sounds,andisthetypeofvolumecontrolusedby
bytheVectorposition.Normally,thiswillonlyaffect classicvectorsynths.
internalsoundsandeffects.Ifyoulike,however,you
canalsoenableaGlobalparametertosendthese Also,whenthisischecked,theOSC1andOSC2
generatedCCstoexternalMIDIdevices. CenterVolumeparameterswillbegrayedout,since
EqualPowersetsthecentervolumesautomatically.
WhenEqualPowerisOff,theOSC1andOSC2
15a: Vector Volume Control CenterVolumeparametersdeterminethewayin
VectorVolumeControlletsyouadjusttherelative whichVectorpositionaffectsvolume.
volumesofOscillators1and2bymovingtheVector
OSC1 Center Volume [0, 25, 50, 75, 100%]
Joystick(ortheVectorEnvelope)fromlefttorighton
theXaxis. ThissetsthevolumeofOscillator1atthecenterofthe
Xaxis.ItappliesonlywhenEqualPower,above,isset
TheEqualPowercheckboxmakestheVectorcreatea
toOff.
smoothfadebetweenthetwoOscillators,whilethe
OSC1/2CenterVolumeparametersallowyoutocreate ThevolumesattheextremeendsoftheXaxisare
morecomplexfadeshapes. fixed.Attheleftside,Osc1isalwaysat100%volume;
attherightside,Osc1isalwaysat0%.

Vector Synthesis System


Vector CC MIDI Output Global switch:
Vector MIDI Out

Global Controllers Vector Joystick


Vector Joystick MIDI CC Assignments
Defaults: X=118, Y=119 Vector CC MIDI Output

Vector CC Control

Vector Joystick
MIDI In

Vector CC Control

scale X+/ and Y+/ Vector CC Modulation of


Vector EG VJS X and Y modes
CC Assignments Program and FX Parameters
Program switch:
Enable CC control

Vector Volume Control

Osc 1/2 Center Volume Vector Modulation of


and Equal Power settings Oscillator Volume
Program switch:
Enable Volume control

40
Program P1: Basic/Vector 15: Vector Control

OSC2 Center Volume [0, 25, 50, 75, 100%] VJS X Mode [Positive, Negative, Xfade, Split]
ThissetsthevolumeofOscillator2atthecenterofthe YoucansetuptheVectortosendoutCCsinseveral
Xaxis. differentpatterns,asshowninthegraphicbelow.This
ThevolumesattheextremeendsoftheXaxisare controlsthepatternfortheXaxis.Notethatthissetting
fixed,intheoppositedirectionofOscillator1s.Atthe affectsonlyCCControl;ithasnoeffectonVolume
leftside,Osc2isalwaysat0%volume;attheright Control.
side,Osc2isalwaysat100%. VectorCCModes
OscCenterVolumeandXAxisPosition
Positive Negative
Generates only +X, Generates only X,
increasing from left to right. increasing from right to left.
100%

Volume 50%
0 +X CC 127 127 X CC 0

0%
-127 0 +127
Vector X-axis position
127 0 +127 127 0 +127
X-Axis X-Axis
Center Volume Values: 100
75
Xfade Split
50 Generates both +X and X. Generates both +X and -X.
25 One increases as the other Both are 0 in the center.
decreases. +X increases to the right;
0 X increases to the left.

15b: Vector CC Control 0 +X CC 127


+X CC
0 127
VectorCCControlletsyouusethecombinationofthe
127 0
VectorJoystickandtheVectorEGasAMSsources,for 0 X CC 127
X CC
modulatingProgramparameters,andasDMod
sources,formodulatingEffects.
EachofthefourdirectionsoftheVectorcansenda 127 0 +127 127 0 +127
differentCC,includingleft(X),right(+X),up(+Y), X-Axis X-Axis
anddown(Y).Youcanchoosebetweenseveral
differentpatternscombiningthesefourdirectionsby Positivesendsoutonly+X,startingat0atthefarleft,
usingtheVJSXModeandVJSYModeparameters. andincreasingto127atthefarright.Xisdisabledin
thismode.
YoucaneitherusetheVectorCCstoautomateexisting
modulationroutings,suchasthefrontpanelknobs,or NegativesendsoutonlyX,startingat0atthefarleft,
asdistinctmodulationsources.ThevectorCCis andincreasingto127atthefarright.Inthismode,+X
transmittedasMIDIcontrolchangemessagesonthe isgrayedout.
globalMIDIchannel.Thismeansthatitcontrolsall Xfadesendsoutboth+XandX,overlapping
voicesoftheprogram,notindividualvoices. throughouttheXaxis.Asoneincreases,theother
Note:AGlobalparameterallowsyoutoenableor decreases.
disableMIDIoutputfortheCCControl.Bydefault, Splitsendsoutboth+XandX,withasplitinthe
thisisdisabled.Thissettingdoesnotaffecttheinternal center.+Xissentwhenthepointmovestotherightof
Programs,whichcanalwaysreceivetheVectorCCs. thecenter,andXissentwhenthepointmovestothe
leftofcenter.
Enable CC Control [Off, On]
Whenthisboxischecked,theVectorpositionwill +X [OffMIDI CC#119]
controltheCCsassignedto+X,X,+Y,andY,asset Thisassignsthecontrollersentbythe+Xvector.You
below. canusethisasanAMSsourcetocontrolProgram
Whenthisboxisnotchecked,theVectorpositionwill parameters,orasaDModsourcetocontrolEffects
notaffecttheseCCs.However,thejoystickwillstill parameters.ItwillbegrayedoutiftheVJSXMode,
sendandreceiveitsdedicatedMIDICCs,justlike above,issettoNegative.
otherphysicalcontrollers.SeeVectorandMIDI, InadditiontothestandardlistofMIDIcontrollers,you
above,formoreinformation. canalsoassignthe+Xvectortoduplicatethefunction
ofseveralfrontpanelcontrollers,includingJSX,JS+X,
JSX,Knobs58,andSW12.
Forinstance,ifyouassign+XtoKnob6,thevectors+X
willusethecontrollerassignedtoKnob6onthe
ControllerAssignpage.

41
Program mode: HD-1

Finally,youcanalsoassign+XtocontroltheMaster 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
Volume. CopyOscillatoronpage 148.

X [OffMIDI CC#119] 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see


SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
ThisassignsthecontrollersentbytheXvector.Itwill
begrayedoutiftheVJSXMode,above,issetto
Positive.
Theselectionsarethesameasfor+X,above.

VJS Y Mode [Positive, Negative, Xfade, Split]


ThiscontrolstheVectorCCpatternfortheYaxis.For
moreinformation,seethedescriptionunderVJSX
Mode,above.

+Y [OffMIDI CC#119]
Thisassignsthecontrollersentbythe+Yvector.Itwill
begrayedoutiftheVJSYMode,above,issetto
Negative.
Theselectionsarethesameasfor+X,above.

Y [OffMIDI CC#119]
Thisassignsthecontrollersentbythe+Yvector.Itwill
begrayedoutiftheVJSYMode,above,issetto
Positive.
Theselectionsarethesameasfor+X,above.

15c: Vector Graphic


Vector Graphic
Thisisadiagramofthevectorspace,includingthefive
pointsoftheVectorEG(labeled04)andthecurrent
positionoftheVectorJoystick(labeledJ).
ThetransitionsbetweentheEGspointsareshownby
blacklines,andthelooptransitionisshownbyagray
line.

Show Volume Image [Off, On]


Thevectorgraphicincludesanimagerepresentingthe
currentVectorVolumeControlsettings.Youcanuse
theShowVolumeImagecheckboxtotogglethispart
ofthegraphiconandoff.

Show Point [Vector Joystick,


Vector Envelope Point 04]
YoucanviewthevolumeandCCvaluesforthecurrent
positionoftheVectorJoystick,orforanyoftheEGs
fivepoints.

Oscillator Volume & CC Display


ThisreadonlydisplayshowsthevolumeandCC
valuesforthecurrentVectorpoint,asselectedbythe
ShowPointparameter,above.

t 15: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.

42
Program P1: Basic/Vector 16: Vector Envelope

16: Vector Envelope


16PMC

16a

16b

16c

TheVectorEnvelopeworkstogetherwiththeVector WhenKeySyncisOn,eachnotesVolumeControlEG
JoysticktocontroltheVectorposition.Itsalsospecial willstartatnoteon,andgointoreleaseatnoteoff.All
becauseitstheonlyprogrammablemodulationsource thenoteswillstillshareasingleCCControlEG.
whichletsyoumodulatebothProgramandEffects
parameters.
16a: Basic
TheVectorEnvelopeisdifferentfromtheother
envelopesinseveralways: Vector Envelope On [Off, On]
EachpointhastwolevelsonefortheXaxis,and On(checked):Whenthisboxischecked,theVectorEG
onefortheYaxis. willworkwiththeVectorJoysticktocontrolthevector
Theenvelopetimescanbebasedonsecondsand position.
milliseconds,orsyncedtotempo. Off(unchecked):Whenthisboxisnotchecked,the
Eachpointhasaholdtime,aswellasatransition VectorEGwillnotrun.Thevectorpositionwillbe
timetothenextpoint. controlledsolelybytheVectorJoystick.

Theenvelopecanloopbetweentwopoints,for Key Sync [Off, On]


eitheraspecifiednumberofrepeats,oraslongas TheKeySyncparameterappliesonlytoVectorVolume
youholdthenote. control.AsdescribedunderVectorVolumeandCC
controluseseparateEGs,above,VectorCCcontrol
Vector Volume and CC control use separate EGs
alwaysactsasifKeySyncwereOff.
ThereareactuallytwodifferentVectorEGs,which
sharethesameparameters:oneforVolumeControl, On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,theVector
andtheotherforCCControl. VolumeEGstartseachtimeyoupressakey,andan
independentEGrunsforeachnote.Thisisthenormal
AllofthenotesintheProgramshareasingleCC setting.
ControlEG,sincetherecanonlybeonesetofCCsfor
eachMIDIchannel.ThisEGstartswhenyoufirstplay Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,theVector
anote,andcontinuesaslongasanynotesareheld VolumeEGstartsfromthephasedeterminedbythe
downonthekeyboard.Whenyoureleaseallofthe firstnoteinthephrase,sothattheEGsforallnotes
notes,theEGgoesintoitsreleasephase. beingheldaresynchronizedtogether.

Eachnotethenhasitsown,additionalVolumeControl Mode [Time, Tempo]


EG.TheKeySyncparameterappliesonlytothisper Time:WhentheModeissettoTime,youcansetthe
noteEG. EGsegmenttimesinsecondsormilliseconds.
WhentheKeySyncparameterisOff,theCCControl Tempo:WhentheModeissettoTempo,theVectorEG
andVolumeControlEGsarecompletelysynchronized. willsynchronizetothesystemtempo,assetbyeither
theTempoknoborMIDIClock.Insteadofusing

43
Program mode: HD-1

secondsandmilliseconds,youcanspecifytheEG VectorEGtimes,LoopType=1>3
timesasrhythmicvalues,usingtheBaseNoteand
Note-on or reset Note-off
Multiplierparameters.
Loop

16b: Vector Envelope Loop


TheVectorEGcanloopbetweentwopoints,andcan Change to
Y-Axis
continuetoloopeitherforaslongasyouholdthenote, Time
orforaspecifiednumberofrepeats.Youcanalsoturn
theloopoffcompletely,ifyoulike. Hold 0 H1 T1 H2 T2 H3 T3 H1 T4
(Release)
Transition 0
Loop Type [0->3, 1->3, 2->3, 0<->3, 1<->3]
Thisselectsthestartandendpointsoftheloop,and ThetransitionfromPoint3intotheloopalwaysuses
whethertheloopisforwardsonlyorforwards Point3sTransitiontime,regardlessoftheLoopType.
backwards.
Points0,1,and2sTransitiontimes,however,workin
Thefirstthreeselections,0>3,1>3,and2>3,loop reversewhenmovingbackwardsduringaforwards
forwardsonly.Forinstance,whenLoopTypeissetto backwardsloop.ItsasifyouwereretracingtheEG
1>3,theEGwillplayasfollows:0,1,2,3,1,2,3,1,2,3 shapeinreverse.
etc.
Forinstance,inthebackwardssectionofaloop,
Thelasttwoselections,0<>3and1<>3,areforwards movingfromPoint2toPoint1usesPoint1sTransition
backwards.Forinstance,withthe1<>3setting,theEG time.
willplayasfollows:0,1,2,3,2,1,2,3etc.
ForwardsBackwardsLoop,LoopType=1<>3
Loop Repeat [Off, 1126, Inf]
Loop Type = 1<>3
Off:WhenthisissettoOff,theEGwillnotloopatall.
1126:TheEGwillloopthespecifiednumberoftimes,
andthenholdatpoint3untilthenoteisreleased.
Inf:TheEGwillloopaslongasthenoteisheld,and
Change to
thenmovetopoint4whenthenoteisreleased. Y-Axis
Time

H1 T1 H2 T2 H3 T3 H2 T1 H1
16c: Vector Envelope
LiketheFilter,Amp,andPitchEGs,theVectorEGhas
atotaloffivepoints.SincetheVectorEGcanloop, VJS [Off, 04]
however,thepointsarelabeleddifferently;insteadof Thishorizontalrowofradiobuttonsletsyoueditthe
nameslikeattackanddecay,theyaresimply selectedpointsXYpositionusingtheVectorJoystick.
numbered04.
Justpressthepointsradiobutton,movetheVector
Sustain and Release Joysticktothedesiredlocation.Whenyourefinished,
WhentheEGisinthemiddleofaloop,thereisno presstheOffradiobuttonagain.
sustainpointperse.However,iftheEGhasalready WhenyouarenoteditingtheEGsXYpositions,you
completedthespecifiednumberofLoopRepeats,orif shouldleavethissettoOff,toavoidinadvertent
LoopRepeatisOff,itwillsustainatPoint3until changestotheEG.
release.
Atrelease,theEGalwaysmovestoPoint4. Point 0
Hold and Transition times Position
TheHoldTimesetshowlongtheEGlingersateach InadditiontoeditingtheXandYparameterswiththe
point,andtheTransitiontimesetshowlongittakesto standarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsosimplyuse
gofromtheselectedpointtothenext. theVectorJoysticktosettheposition,asdescribed
underVJS,above.
Forinstance,thegraphicbelowshowsthesuccession
ofHoldandTransitiontimeswhentheLoopTypeisset X [127+127]
to1>3.Forclarity,onlytheYaxispositionsareshown. ThissetsthepointspositionontheXaxis.

Y [127+127]
ThissetsthepointspositionontheYaxis.

Hold Time
ThissetsthelengthoftimethattheEGwillstayon
Point0,beforemovingtoPoint1.YoucansettheHold
Timeineitherseconds/millisecondsorrhythmic
values,dependingonthesettingoftheEGsMode
parameter.

44
Program P1: Basic/Vector 16: Vector Envelope

Time [0ms60sec] Loop


ThisparameterletsyousettheHoldTimeinseconds Thissetsthelengthoftimethatittakestomovefrom
andmilliseconds.ItappliesonlywhentheModeisset Point3tothefirstPointintheloop.Youcansetthisin
toTime. eitherseconds/millisecondsorrhythmicvalues,
dependingonwhethertheModeissettoTimeor
(Base Note) [Off, r w ] Tempo.
ThismenusetsabasicrhythmicvaluefortheHold TheTime,BaseNote,andMultiplierparameterswork
Time,relativetothesystemtempo.Thevaluesrange justlikethoseforPoint0,asdescribedunder
froma32ndnotetoawholenote,includingtriplets. Transitiononpage 45.
ThisparameterappliesonlywhentheModeissetto
Tempo. Point 4
x (Multiply Base Note by) [0132] Point4istheVectorEGsreleasedestination.Itstime
settingisdifferentfromthoseoftheotherPoints.
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For InsteadofsettingthetimeittakestomovefromPoint4
instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and tothenextPoint,itsetshowlongittakestogofromthe
themultiplierissetto3,theHoldTimewilllastfora previousPointtoPoint4.
dottedeighthnote.
TheEGmovestoPoint4assoonasitreleases,
Transition regardlessofwhereitwasbeforetherelease.For
ThissetsthelengthoftimethattheEGtakestomove instance,letssaythattheEGisinthemiddleofPoint
fromPoint0toPoint1. 2sHoldTimeatnoteoff.TheEGwillimmediately
begintomovetoPoint4,withoutwaitingfortheHold
WhentheLoopTypeissetto0<>3,thisalsosetsthe Timetocomplete.
timethatittakestomovefromPoint1toPoint0
duringthebackwardssectionoftheloop. Release
Time [0ms60sec] Thissetsthelengthoftimethatittakestomoveto
Point4afternoteoff.Youcansetthisineither
ThisparameterletsyousettheTransitiontimein seconds/millisecondsorrhythmicvalues,depending
secondsandmilliseconds.Itappliesonlywhenthe onwhethertheModeissettoTimeorTempo.
ModeissettoTime.
TheTime,BaseNote,andMultiplierparameterswork
(Base Note) [r w ] justlikethoseforPoint0,asdescribedunder
ThissetsabasicrhythmicvaluefortheHoldTime, Transitiononpage 45.
relativetothesystemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma
32ndnotetoawholenote,includingtriplets.
KARMA and Vector EG interaction
ThisparameterappliesonlywhentheModeissetto KARMAcancontroltheVectorEGsinvariousways,as
Tempo. describedbelow.

x (Multiply Base Note by) [0132] CC Control EG


ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For WhenKARMAisOn,italwaysstartsandrestartsthe
instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and CCControlEG,accordingtotheKARMAtrigger
themultiplierissetto3,theEGwillmovefromPoint0 settings.ThisletsKARMAcontrolsoundsoreffectsin
toPoint1overadottedeighthnote. synchronizationwiththeKARMAGE.

Volume Control EGs


Points 1 and 2
WhenKeySyncisOff,andKARMAisOn,KARMA
Points1and2workexactlylikePoint0,asdescribed willstartandrestarttheVolumeControlEGsaswell
above. astheCCControlEG.Thismeansthattheresulting
changesinoscillatorvolumeswillbesynchronized
Point 3 withtheKARMAGE.
Point3alsoworksmuchlikePoints02,withtwomain WhenKeySyncisOn,KARMAdoesnotaffectVector
differences: VolumeControl.Eachnotewillhaveitsown,
Point3alwaysusesitsownTimewhenmovinginto independentVolumeControlEG,justasifKARMA
theloop,regardlessofthedirectionoftheloop. wasturnedoff.
IfLoopRepeatissettoOff,orifthenumberisset Entering the EGs release stage
between1126andhasalreadyplayedthespecified
AssumingthatKARMAisOn:
numberoftimes,thentheEGwillstayatPoint3until
theEGeithergoesintorelease,orisresetbyKARMA. WhentheKARMALATCHswitchisOff,the
KARMAcontrolledVectorEG(s)willstarttorelease
Hold Time whenyouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard(and
ThisworksjustliketheHoldTimeforPoint0,as whenKARMAisnolongerreceivinganyinputnotes
describedunderHoldTimeonpage 44. fromothersources).
WhentheKARMALATCHswitchisOn,the
KARMAcontrolledVectorEG(s)willstarttorelease
onlywhenKARMALatchisturnedOffagain.

45
Program mode: HD-1

1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
t 16: Page Menu Commands ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
commandsonpage 142.
SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
4:CopyVectorEnvelope.Formoreinformation,
Programonpage 142.
seeCopyVectorEnvelopeonpage 148.

18: Set Up Controllers


18PMC

18a

18b

Thispageletsyousetupthefunctionalityofswitches1 SW2 [Off, , After Touch Lock]


and2(SW1/2)andRealTimeKnobs58.These
settingsaremadeindependentlyforeachProgram. Mode [Toggle, Momentary]
ThisassignsafunctiontotheSW2switch.The
functionsthatyoucanassigntotheSW2switcharethe
18a: Panel Switch Assign sameasfortheSW1switch,withtheexceptionthatthe
ThesesettingscontrolthefunctionalityofSW1and SW1switchsSW1Mod.:CC#80assignmentisreplaced
SW2. bySW2Mod.:CC#81.

SW1 [Off, , After Touch Lock]


ThisassignsafunctiontotheSW1switch.Theon/off
18b: Modulation Knob Assign
statuscanalsobememorized.Whenyouchangethe Thesesettingsassignfunctions(mainlyMIDIcontrol
assignment,theswitchissettotheOffcondition. changes)torealtimemodulationknobs58.Fora
Foracompletelistofthepossibleassignments,please completelistofthepossibleassignments,pleasesee
seeSW1/2Assignmentsonpage 1033. RealtimeKnobs58Assignmentsonpage 1034.
Thefunctionsyouassignherewillapplywhenyou
Mode [Toggle, Momentary] operaterealtimemodulationknobs58.
Thisspecifiesthemodeofon/offwhentheSW1switch
ispressed.
Toggle:ThestatewillalternatebetweenOnandOff
eachtimeyoupresstheSW1switch.
Momentary:ThestatewillremainOnonlywhileyou
continueholdingdowntheSW1switch.

46
Program P1: Basic/Vector 19: Set Up Pads

Knob 5 [Off, , MIDI CC#119] 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite


Programonpage 142.
Knob 6 [Off, , MIDI CC#119]
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Knob 7 [Off, , MIDI CC#119] ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
Knob 8 [Off, , MIDI CC#119]
CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
t 18: Page Menu Commands SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.

19: Set Up Pads


19PMC

19a

Thereareeightvelocitysensitivetriggerpadsbelow Formoreinformation,includingstepbystep
theLCDscreen.Theselooklikedrummachinepads, instructionsandusagetips,seeDrum&ChordPads
andplayingdrumsoundsiscertainlyoneuseforthem. onpage 53oftheOperationGuide.
However,theycanalsoplayuptoeightnotechordson
anysoundnotjustdrums.Thepadsevenremember 19a: Pads
thevelocitiesoftheindividualnoteswithinthechord,
aswellasthenotesthemselves.Thesesettingsare Pad 1
storedindependentlyforeachProgram.
Inadditiontoplayingsoundsdirectly,thepadsare Notes 18 [Off, C1G9 / 001127]
alsousedtoselectchordsforChordmode.Formore Theseparametersletyoueditthe8notesassignedto
information,seeUsingChordmodeonpage 54of eachpad,alongwithaseparatevelocityforeachnote.
theOperationGuide. Toplayfewerthan8notes,justsettheunwantednotes
toOff.
Assigning notes to the pads
Off:Selectthistodisablethenote.
Youcanassignnotestothepadsdirectlyfromthe
keyboardandfrontpanelcontrols,withoutusingthis C1G9:Thissetsthenotenumber.
pageatall.Alternatively,youcanenternotesand 001127:Thissetsthenotesvelocityvalue.Formore
velocitiesusingtheparametersonthispage. informationonpadsandvelocity,pleaseseePad
Regardlessofhowthenoteswerefirstassigned,you Mode:FixedVelocityvs.VelocitySensitive,below.
canedittheirvalueshere.

47
Program mode: HD-1

Pad Mode: Fixed Velocity vs. Velocity Sensitive Formoredetailedinstructions,pleaseseeDrum&


Eachpadstoresavelocitylevelforeachofits8notes. ChordPadsonpage 53oftheOperationGuide.
ThePADMODEbutton,totherightofthepads,
controlswhetherornotthepadsrespondtohowhard
Pads 28
youplay.ItssettingisstoredwitheachProgram, ThesearethesameasforPad1,asdescribedabove.
Combi,andSong.
InFixedVelocitymode,thepadsalwaysusetheir t 19: Page Menu Commands
storedvelocitysettings,regardlessofhowhardyou
play. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
InVelocitySensitivemode,hittingthepadvery
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
stronglyproducesthepresetvelocities.Whenyouplay
commandsonpage 142.
moresoftly,thepresetvelocitiesarescaleddown
accordingly,maintainingthebalancebetweenthenotes 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
inthechord. Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Assigning notes and chords to pads ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Youcanassignsinglenotesandchordstothepadsin 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
threedifferentways. CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
Play the notes, and then press CHORD ASSIGN 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
1. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes. SwapOscillatoronpage 148.

2. PresstheCHORDASSIGNbutton. 4:CopyPadSetup.Formoreinformation,see
CopyPadSetuponpage 148.
3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketoassignthe
notes.
Thatsit!Thenotesarenowassignedtothepad.

Press CHORD ASSIGN, and then play notes


Thismethodletsyoucreateachordoutofwidely
spacednotes,evenifyoucantplayallofthenotes
simultaneously.
1. PresstheCHORDASSIGNbutton.
2. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes.
Youcanplayasinglenote,orasimplechord.
Ifyoulike,youcanalsoplayupto8notesasalegato
phrase.Aslongasyoutakecarethatthenotesoverlap
eachother,theentirephrasewillberecordedasa
singlechord.Youcantakeaslongasyouliketoplay
thephrase.
3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketoassignthe
notes.
Afterpressingthepad,youredone!

Edit notes and velocities using the LCD


Youcanedittherecordednotesandvelocitiesusing
theonscreenparameters.Ifyoulike,youcanalso
enternewnotesthisway.Formoreinformation,please
seePad1,above.

Copying and Merging Pads


Justasyoucanassignnotestoapadbyplayingthem
onthekeyboard,youcanpressapadtocopyits
assignednotestoanotherpad.
Themethodissimilartosteps13above;pressthepad
thatyouwanttocopy,andthenpresstheCHORD
ASSIGNswitch.Thenpressthecopydestinationpad;
theassignmentswillbecopied.
Youcanalsousethistocombinetheassignmentsof
twoormorepads,uptoamaximumofeightnotes.To
doso,justpressallofthecopyfrompads
simultaneously,andthenproceedasabove.

48
Program P2: OSC/Pitch 21: OSC1 Basic

Program P2: OSC/Pitch


Thesepagescontrolthefirstandmostbasicelements Setthebasicpitchofthesound,includingthe
ofHD1ssounds:theMultisamplesthattheoscillators octave,finetuning,andsoon.
play,andthepitchatwhichitplaysthem.Forinstance, Controlpitchmodulationfromawidevarietyof
youcan: sources,suchasJSX,theribbon,LFOs,andthe
SelectMultisamplesandWaveSequencesforSingle PitchEG.
andDoublePrograms,orDrumKitsforDrum NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingleor
Programs. Drums,onlyOscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepages
Setupvelocitysplits,crossfades,andlayersfor forOscillator2sfilterswillbegrayedout.
SingleandDoublePrograms.

21: OSC1 Basic


21PMC

21b

21a

21c

21d

HD1ssoundsarebasedonsamples,andthispagelets Tune [1200+1200]


yousetupallofthebasicsamplerelatedsettings. Thisadjuststhepitchincents,overarangeof1
Amongotherthings,youcan: octave.Acentis1/100ofasemitone.
SelectMultisamplesand/orWaveSequencesforthe
Oscillator(inaSingleorDoubleProgram),orselect Frequency Offset [10.0Hz +10.0Hz]
theDrumKitforaDrumProgram Thisadjuststhepitchbyincrementsof0.1Hz.
SettheOscillatorsbasicpitch FrequencyOffsetisdifferentfromTuneinthat,when
usedtodetunethetwooscillators,itcancreatea
Createvelocitysplitsandcrossfadesbetween constantbeatfrequencyacrosstherangeofthe
Multisamplesand/orWaveSequences keyboard.

21a: OSC1 Frequency 21b: Note-On Control


Octave [2[32], 1[16], +0[8], +1[4]] Delay [0000ms5000ms, KeyOff]
ThissetsthebasicpitchoftheOscillator,inoctaves. Usethistocreateadelaybetweenthetimethatyou
Thedefaultis+0[8].Thestandardoctaveofa pressakey,andthetimethatthenoteactuallysounds.
multisampleis+0[8].
ThisismostusefulinDoublePrograms,fordelaying
Transpose [12+12] oneoscillatorinrelationtotheother.
Thisadjuststhepitchinsemitones,overarangeof1
octave.

49
Program mode: HD-1

KeyOffisaspecialsetting.Insteadofdelayingthe Type [Off, Multisample, Wave Sequence]


soundbyaparticularamountoftime,thesoundwill ThisselectswhetherMS1willplayaMultisample,a
playassoonasyoureleasethekey.Youcanusethisto WaveSequence,ornothingatall.
createtheclickheardwhenaharpsichordnoteis
released,forinstance. TheTypeselectionaffectsthechoicesshowninthe
BankandMultisamplemenus.
Ingeneral,whenyouusetheKeyOffsetting,itsalso
besttosettheoscillatorsAmpEGSustainLevelto0. Bank (Multisample) [ROM MonoEXs Stereo]
Mode [Key, Key + Damper] ThismenuwillappearonlyiftheTypeissetto
Multisample.
Normally,youplaynotessimplybypressingkeyson
thekeyboard.Inspecialcases,however,youcanset TherearethreemaintypesofBanks:ROM,RAM,and
thisparametersothatyoumustfirstbeholdingdown EXs.Foreachtype,youcanalsochoosebetween
thedamperpedal,andthenpressakey,inorderto lookingatmonoandstereoMultisamples.Notethat
playanote.Forinstance,thiscanbeusefulwhen stereoMultisampleswillrequiretwiceasmanyvoices
modelingthebehaviorofapianosoundboard. asmonoMultisamples.
Keyisthenormalmode. ROMMultisamplesarethebuiltinfactorysounds,
andarealwaysavailable.
WhenyouselectKey+Damper,noteswillonlysound
ifthedamperpedalisbeinghelddown.Whenthe RAMMultisamplesincludeAkai,AIFForWAVfiles
damperpedalisreleased,allnoteswillbestopped loadedfromdisk,andsamplescreatedinSampling
eveniftheyarestillbeinghelddown. mode.
EXsMultisamplebanksarePCMexpansionsets
createdespeciallyfortheOASYS.Eachhasitsown
21c: OSC1 Multisample/Wave Sequence uniquenumber;forinstance,theROMExpansionis
Theparametersinthissectionwillchangedepending EXs1,andtheConcertGrandPianoexpansionisEXs2.
onthesettingoftheOscillatorModeparameter. OnlythecurrentlyloadedEXsbankswillappearon
thismenu.
InSingleandDoublemodes,eachOscillatorcanplay
uptofourMultisamplesorWaveSequences.InDrum Bank (Wave Sequence) [INT, U-AG]
mode,thereisoneOscillator,anditplaysasingle
ThismenuwillappeariftheTypeissettoWave
DrumKit.
Sequence.
Multisamples, Wave Sequences, and Drum Kits INTWaveSequencesarethebuiltinfactorysounds.
Multisamples,DrumKits,andWaveSequencesallow Youcanoverwritethemifyouwish,butdoingsomay
youtoplaysamplesindifferentways. changethesoundsoftheProgramsandCombisin
BanksINTAE.
Multisampleslayoutoneormoresamplesacross
thekeyboard.Forinstance,averysimpleguitar UAthroughUGareuserbanks,forstoringsounds
Multisamplemighthavesixsamplesoneforeach thatyoucreateyourself,optionalsoundbanksfrom
string. Korg,orthirdpartysoundlibraries.
WaveSequencesplaybackaseriesofdifferent Multisample/Wave Sequence Select [List]
Multisamplesovertime.TheseMultisamplesmay
ThisparameterletsyouselectaMultisampleorWave
crossfadetocreatesmooth,evolvingtimbres,or
Sequence,dependingontheTypesetting.
changeabruptlytocreaterhythms.
SomeMultisamplesmayhaveanupperlimitto
Asthenamesuggests,DrumKitsareoptimizedfor
theirkeyboardrange,overwhichtheymaynot
playingdrumsamples.
produceanysound.
Velocity splits, crossfades, and layers ToselectaMultisampleorWaveSequence:
Asmentionedabove,unlessyoureinDrummode, 1. PresstheMultisample/WaveSequenceSelect
eachOscillatorhasfourvelocityzones,namedMS1 popupbuttontoopenthemenu.
(High)throughMS4(Low).Eachofthesezonescan
Withinthewindow,ROMMultisamplesareorganized
playeitheraMultisampleoraWaveSequence,andhas
bycategories;WaveSequencesareorganizedbybank;
separatesettingsforLevel,StartOffset,andsoon.
andEXsandRAMMultisamplesappearasa
Eachofthezonescanfadeintothenext,tocreate continuouslist.
smoothervelocitytransitions.Zonescanevenbe
2. ForROMMultisamplesorWaveSequences,use
layeredtogether,twoatatime.
thetabstoselectacategoryorbank.
MS1 (High) 3. SelectaMultisampleorWaveSequencefromthe
list.
Thesearethesettingsforthefirstandhighestvelocity
zone. 4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection,or
presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutmakinga
Ifyouwanttocreateasimplesetupwithonlyasingle change.
MultisampleorWaveSequence,justsetupMS1as
desired,andthensettheBottomVelocityto1andthe
XfadeRangeto0.

50
Program P2: OSC/Pitch 21: OSC1 Basic

MultisampleROMMonoSelectmenu

Tab

Scroll bar

Multisample ROM/EXs Mono/Stereo Select menu IfBankissettoRAMStereo,onlythestereo


IfBankissettoROMorEXsMono,thelistshowsallof Multisampleswillappear.However,theywillstillbe
themonoMultisamplesintheBank.IftheBank listedasseparateleftandrightMultisamples.Selecting
containsstereomultisamples,youllalsoseetheleft eithertheleftorrightchannelswillselectthestereo
andrightchannelsasseparate,monomultisamples, pair.
withLandRappendedtotheendofthename. Wave Sequence Select menu
IfBankissettoROMorEXsStereo,onlystereo Usethetabstoselectabank,andthenselectaWave
multisampleswillbeshown. Sequence.PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyour
selection,orpresstheCancelbuttontoreverttothe
Multisample RAM Mono, RAM Stereo Select menu
previoussetting.
IfBankissettoRAMMono,thelistshowsallofthe
monoMultisamplesintheBank.IftheBankcontains
stereomultisamples,youllalsoseetheleftandright
channelsasseparate,monomultisamples,withLand
Rappendedtotheendofthename.

WaveSequenceSelectmenu

Tab

Scroll bar

51
Program mode: HD-1

Reverse [Off, On] WhenvelocitiesarewithintheXfadeRange,the


Thisletsyouplaytheselectedmultisamplebackwards, Oscillatorwillusetwiceasmuchpolyphonyasit
withoutlooping.Reverseappliesonlyto wouldnormally.
Multisamples;whentheTypeissetWaveSequence, Note:Youcanonlyfadebetweentwozonesatonce.
thisisgrayedout.
Note:IftheindividualsampleswithinaMultisample
arealreadysettoReverse,theywillstillplayin Select
reverse,regardlessofthissetting.
On(checked):TheMultisamplewillplaybackin Xfade Range = 20 84
reverse. Curve = Linear

Off(unchecked):TheMultisamplewillplayback Bottom Velocity = 64


normally.

Level [0127]
Thissetsthebasicvolumelevelofthemultisample.
TheAmpsectioncanmodifythisbasiclevel
extensivelywithenvelopes,LFOs,keyboardtracking,
andothermodulation;formoreinformation,see Curve [Linear, Power, Layer]
ProgramP4:Amp/EQ,onpage 74.
Thiscontrolsthevolumecurveofthecrossfade.Linear
Dependingonthemultisample,highLevelsettings andPower(shortforEqualPower)letyoufinetune
maycausedistortionwhenplayingmanynotesata thewaythatthetwoMultisamplesmixtogether;one
time.Ifthisoccurs,lowertheLevel. ortheothermaybemoreappropriateforagivenpair
WithRAMMultisamples,eachSamplealsohasa ofMultisamples.Layer,truetoitsname,letsyoulayer
+12dBoption.Ifthisisturnedon,theSamplewill thetwoMultisamplestogetherwithoutany
playbackapproximately12dBlouder.Youcan crossfading.
configurethisparameterforeachSampleinSampling CrossfadeCurves
mode.

Start Offset [Off, 1st8th] Linear


MS2
Inadditiontosimplystartingplaybackfromthe
beginning,ROMandEXsMultisamplescanhaveupto MS1
8differentpreprogrammedalternatestartingpoints.
Volume
Similarly,RAMMultisamplescanplayeitherfromthe Xfade
beginningofthewaveform,orfromtheloopstart
Velocity
point.
StartOffsetappliesonlytoMultisamples;whenthe
TypeissetWaveSequence,thisisgrayedout.
Power
Start Offsets: ROM and EXs Multisamples MS2

WithROMandEXsMultisamples,theStartOffset
MS1
specifieswhethertousethenormalstartpoint(Off),or
touseoneofthealternatestartpoints(1st8th). Volume

SomeROMandEXsMultisamplesmayhavefewer Xfade
than8preprogrammedpoints,inwhichcaseonlythe Velocity
availablepointscanbeselected.

Start Offsets: RAM Multisamples


WithRAMMultisamples,onlyOffand1stare Layer
MS2
available.Offusesthenormalstartpoint,and1stuses
theloopstartinstead.2ndthrough8thwillbegrayed MS1
out.
Volume
Bottom Velocity [1127] Xfade
ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheMultisample Velocity
orWaveSequencewillsound.MS1sBottomVelocity
canbeequalto,butnotlowerthan,thanthatofMS2. Linearmeansthatthetwosampleswilleachbeat50%
oftheirfullvolumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.
Xfade Range [Off, 1127] Sometimes,thismaycreateadipinthevolumelevel;if
ThissetstherangeofvelocitiesoverwhichMS1will so,tryusingPowerinstead.
fadeintoMS2,goingupfromtheBottomVelocity.
Forinstance,iftheBottomVelocityissetto64,andthe
XfadeRangeissetto20,MS2willstarttofadeinat
velocitiesof84andbelow.
52
Program P2: OSC/Pitch 21: OSC1 Basic

Power,shortforEqualPower,meansthatthetwo Thesevelocityzonestakeprecedenceoverthevelocity
sampleswilleachbeataround70%oftheirfull settingsfortheindividualMS14.
volumeinthemiddleofthecrossfade.Sometimes,this
maycreateabumpinthevolumelevel,inwhichcase Top [001127]
youmighttryselectingLinearinstead. ThissetsthehighestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator
LayermeansthatthetwoMultisampleswillbelayered willsound.
together,bothatfullvolume,fortheentirerangeofthe Note:TheTopvelocitymustbegreaterthantheBottom
crossfade. velocity.

MS2 (Mid Hi), MS3 (Mid Lo), and MS4 Bottom [001127]
(Low) ThissetsthelowestvelocityatwhichtheOscillator
willsound.
Thesearethesettingsforthesecond,third,andfourth
velocityzones.TheparametersforMS2andMS3are Entering velocity values from the keyboard
exactlythesameasthoseforMS1(High),above. Youcanentervelocityvaluesdirectlybyplayingthem
TheparametersforMS4arealsosimilartothosefor onthekeyboard.Todoso:
MS1,exceptthatMS4hasnosettingsforBottom 1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters.
Velocity(whichisalwaysfixedat1),XfadeRange,or
Curve. 2. HolddowntheENTERkey.
3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe
keyboardatthedesiredvelocity.
21d: OSC 1 Velocity Zone
Inadditiontosettingthevelocityzonesforeachofthe
fourMultisamplesinasingleOscillator,youcanalso
sethighandlowvelocitiesforeachofthetwo
Oscillatorsasawhole.
21PMC

21e

21f

TheseparametersappearwhentheOscillatorModeis Transpose [12+12]


settoDrumKit. Thisadjuststhelocationoftheinstrumentsinthe
selecteddrumkit.Unlessyouneedtochangethis,
21e: Drum Kit Frequency leaveitat0.

Octave [2[32], 1[16], +0[8], +1[4]] Tune [1200+1200]


Thisadjuststhepitchinoctaveunits.Whenusinga Thisadjuststhepitchinonecentunits.
drumkit,settheOctaveto8. ThepitchofeachdrumkitcanbeadjustedinGlobal
Wheneditingadrumprogram,youmustsetthis P5:Drumkit.
parameterto8.Withothersettings,thesoundsof
thedrumkitwillbeassignedtothewrongnotesof
thekeyboard.
53
Program mode: HD-1

Delay [0ms5000ms, KeyOff]


t 21: Page Menu Commands
Usethistocreateadelaybetweenthetimethatyou
pressakey,andthetimethatthenoteactuallysounds. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
KeyOffisaspecialsetting.Insteadofdelayingthe
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
soundbyaparticularamountoftime,thesoundwill
commandsonpage 142.
playassoonasyoureleasethekey.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Ingeneral,whenyouusetheKeyOffsetting,itsalso
Programonpage 142.
besttosettheoscillatorsAmpEGSustainLevelto0.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
21f: Drum Kit
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
Drum Kit [I-0039, U-A0015, U-B0015, CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
U-C0015, U-D0015, U-E0015, 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
U-F0015, U-G0015, GM08] SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
Thisselectsadrumkit. 4:SampleParameters.Formoreinformation,see
For000(A/B)143(User),youcanuseGlobalP5:Drum SampleParametersonpage 149.
Kittoedittheinstrumentassignments.

22: OSC1 Pitch


22PMC

22a

22b

22d

22c

ThispagecontainsallofthesettingsforOscillator1s
pitchmodulation.Forexample,youcan: 22a: Pitch
SetuppitchbendfrombothJoystickX(with Pitch Slope [1.0+2.0]
separatesettingsforbendingupandbending
Normally,thisshouldbesettothedefaultof+1.0.
down)andtheribboncontroller.
Positive(+)valuescausethepitchtoriseasyouplay
UsePitchSlopetocontrolhowthepitchchanges
higheronthekeyboard,andnegative()valuescause
whenyouplayupanddownthekeyboard.
thepitchtofallasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
SetupPortamento.
Whenthisissetto0,playingdifferentnotesonthe
AssignAMSmodulationforpitch. keyboardwontchangethepitchatall;itwillbeasif
Setupinitialamountsofpitchmodulationfromthe yourealwaysplayingC4.Thiscanbeusefulforspecial
PitchEGandLFO1/2,aswellasAMSmodulation effectssounds,forinstance.
ofLFOandEGamounts.

54
Program P2: OSC/Pitch 22: OSC1 Pitch

PitchSlope,pitch,andnote
22b: Pitch EG
+2
Pitch Intensity [12.00+12.00]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectofthePitchEGon
+1 Oscillators1sfrequency,inhalfsteps,beforeanyAMS
modulation.
2oct
1oct
0
ThePitchEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to
1oct 99.WhentheIntensityissettoapositive(+)value,
positivevaluesfromtheEGraisethepitch,and
1 negativevalueslowerthepitch.
WhentheIntensityissettoanegative()value,the
C4 C5 Note on keyboard
effectoftheEGisreversed;positiveEGvaluesmean
lowerpitches,andnegativeEGvaluesmeanhigher
Ribbon [12+12] pitches.
Youcanusetheribboncontrollerforpitchbend.This AMS (Pitch EG) [List of AMS Sources]
parametersetstherangeoftheribbonspitchbend,in
semitones. ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
amountofthePitchEGappliedtothepitch.
Positive(+)valuesmakethepitchrisewhenyoupress
theribboncontrollertotherightofcenter,and ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
negative()valueswillcausethepitchtofall. Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.

Forexample,withasettingof+12,pressingthefar Intensity [12.00+12.00]


rightedgeoftheribboncontrollerwillraisethepitch ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitchEG
oneoctave,andpressingthefarleftedgewilllowerthe AMSmodulation.TheAMSmodulationandtheinitial
pitchbyoneoctave. IntensityareaddedtogethertodeterminethePitch
Withasettingof12,theeffectisreversed;pressingon EGsfinaleffect.
therightedgewilllowerthepitch,andpressingonthe Withpositive(+)values,greatermodulationwill
leftwillraisethepitch. increasetheeffectofthePitchEG,asshowninexample
Whenyouliftoffoftheribbon,thepitchwillsnapback Bbelow.
tothecenter(unlessyoureusingtheSW1/2Ribbon Withnegative()values,greatermodulationwill
Lockfeature).So,bytappingontherightedgeofthe introducetheoppositeeffectofthePitchEGlike
ribbonandthenreleasingquickly,youcancreate invertingthepolarityoftheenvelope.Youcanusethis
guitarhammeroneffects. inseveraldifferentways:
JS (+X) [60+12] Youcansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththe
Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbend,in Intensityparameter,andthenreducethisamount
semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheright.For withAMS.Inthiscase,thefinaleffectoftheEGis
normalpitchbend,setthistoapositivevalue. simplydiminished,andnotactuallyinverted,as
showninexampleC.
Forexample,ifyousetthisto+12andmovethe
joystickallthewaytotheright,thepitchwillriseone YoucanalsosettheAMSIntensityamounttobe
octaveabovetheoriginalpitch. greaterthantheinitialIntensity.Inthiscase,theEG
willhaveapositiveeffectwithlowmodulation
JS (X) [60+12] amounts,andaninvertedeffectathigher
Thissetsthemaximumamountofpitchbend,in modulationamountsasshowninexampleD.
semitones,whenyoumovethejoysticktotheleft.For PitchEGAMS
normalpitchbend,setthistoanegativevalue.
A. Original EG B. Intensity = +12.00
Forexample,ifyousetthisto60andmovethe
joystickallthewaytotheleft,thepitchwillfallfive
octavesbelowtheoriginalpitch.Youcanusethisto Change
to Pitch
createguitarstyledownwardswoops.

AMS (Pitch) [List of AMS Sources]


C. Intensity = 3.00 D. Intensity = 12.00
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthepitch.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Change
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
to Pitch
Intensity [12.00+12.00]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthepitch
modulation,insemitones.
22c: LFO1/2
ForexampleifyousetAMStoAfterTouchandthen
pressdownonthekeyboard,thepitchwillriseifthis LFO1andLFO2canbothmodulatethepitch.Youcan
parameterissettoapositive(+)value,orfallifthis controlthestrengthofeachLFOsmodulationinthree
parameterissettoanegative()value. differentways:

55
Program mode: HD-1

SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingthe Enable [Off, On]


LFO1/2Intensityparameters. On(checked):TurnsonPortamento,sothatpitch
UseJS+YtoscaletheamountoftheLFO. glidessmoothlybetweennotes.
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamounttheLFO. Off(unchecked):TurnsoffPortamento.Thisisthe
Youcanuseeachofthesemethodsforeachofthetwo defaultstate.
LFOs.Theresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethe Fingered [Off, On]
totalLFOeffect.
ThisparameterallowsyoutocontrolPortamento
LFO1 throughyourplayingstyle.Whenitsenabled,playing
legatowillturnonPortamento,andplayingdetached
LFO1 Intensity [12.00+12.00] willturnitoffagain.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonthepitch, ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnable
insemitones,beforeanyJS+YorAMSmodulation. isturnedon.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO. On(checked):TurnsonFingeredPortamento.

JS+Y Intensity (LFO1 JS+Y Int.) [12.00+12.00] Off(unchecked):TurnsoffFingeredPortamento.


Movingthejoystickupfromthecenterdetent Mode [Constant Rate, Constant Time]
position,awayfromyourself,producestheJS+Y ConstantRatemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake
controller.Youcanusethistoscaletheamountofthe thesameamountoftimetoglideagivendistancein
LFOappliedtothepitch.Thisparametersetsthe pitchforinstance,onesecondperoctave.Putanother
maximumamountofLFOmodulationaddedbyJS+Y, way,glidingseveraloctaveswilltakemuchlongerthan
insemitones. glidingahalfstep.
Asthisvalueisincreased,movingthejoystickinthe ConstantTimemeansthatPortamentowillalwaystake
+YdirectionwillcausetheOSC1LFO1toproduce thesameamountoftimetoglidefromonenoteto
deeperpitchmodulation. another,regardlessofthedifferenceinpitch.Thisis
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO. especiallyusefulwhenplayingchords,sinceitensures
Youcanalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountofthe thateachnoteinthechordwillenditsglideatthe
LFO,assetbyLFO1Intensity,above.Forexample: sametime.
1. SetLFO1Intensityto+7.00. Time [000127]
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthe Thiscontrolstheportamentotime.Highervaluesmean
pitch,bendingitbyaperfect5th. longertimes,forslowerchangesinpitch.
2. SetJS+YIntensityto7.00. ThisoptionisonlyavailablewhenPortamentoEnable
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickup,theeffectoftheLFO isturnedon.
willfadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayatthe
topofitsrange,theLFOwillbecompletelycancelled Assigning SW1 or SW2 to Portamento On/Off
out. Youcanusethetwoassignableswitches,SW1and
SW2,toturnportamentoonandoff.
AMS (LFO1) [List of AMS Sources]
Todoso:
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
amountoftheLFOappliedtopitch. 1. GototheProgramP1SetUpControllerspage.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation 2. UnderPanelSwitchAssign,seteitherSW1orSW2
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. toPortamentoSW(CC#65).
Now,theselectedswitchwillenableanddisable
Intensity [12.00+12.00] Portamento.ItwillalsosendtheMIDIPortamento
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFOAMS controller,CC#65.
modulationforpitch. EvenifyoudontassignSW1/2toPortamento,you
Forexample,ifAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive canstilluseMIDIController#65toturnPortamento
settingsmeanthataftertouchwillincreasetheamount onandoff.
ofpitchmodulationfromLFO1.

LFO2 t 22: Page Menu Commands


TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothosefor ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
LFO1.Formoreinformation,seethedescriptions numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
underLFO1,above. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
22d: Portamento
Programonpage 142.
Portamentoletsthepitchglidesmoothlybetween 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
notes,insteadofchangingabruptly. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
CopyOscillatoronpage 148.

56
Program P2: OSC/Pitch 25: OSC2 Basic

3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
SwapOscillatoronpage 148.

25: OSC2 Basic


ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsforOscillator2.It TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
isavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder21:OSC1Basic,onpage 49.
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.

26: OSC2 Pitch


ThispagecontrolsthepitchsettingsforOscillator2.It TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
isavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder22:OSC1Pitch,onpage 54.
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.

29: Pitch EG
29PMC

29a

29b

29c

29d

ThePitchEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreate ThesinglePitchEGissharedbybothOscillator1
complex,timevaryingchangestothepitchof andOscillator2.
Oscillators1and2.Theparametersonthispage TheSustainlevelisalways0.
controltheshapeoftheEG.Forinstance,youcan:
TheLevelmodulationhastwoAMSsourcesinstead
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsand ofone,andtheTimemodulationhasoneAMS
timesofeachsegment. sourceinsteadofthree.
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,for
subtlecontroloverthesoundoftheEG. Pitch EG is also an AMS source
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes. YoucanusethePitchEGasanAMSsourceto
modulateotherparameters,justlikethekeyboard
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestart
trackingandLFOs.SimplyselectthePitchEGinthe
theEG.
AMSlistforthedesiredparameter.
TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthepitch,
usethePitchEGparametersonthePitchModpage,as
describedunder22b:PitchEG,onpage 55.

Differences from the other EGs


ThePitchEGisdifferentfromtheFilterandAmpEGs
inseveralways:

57
Program mode: HD-1

Attack [99+99]
29a: EG Reset
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
AMS (EG Reset AMS) [List of AMS Sources]
Break [99+99]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestart
Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendof
point.Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFO
theDecaytime.
totriggertheEGinarepeatingrhythm.Thisresetisin
additiontotheinitialnoteon,whichalwayscausesthe Release [99+99]
EGtostart.
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. Time
Threshold [99+99] Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset. EG Value Actual Time
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjustthe
00 0.667 ms
exactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbe
reset,effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstother 10 10 ms
rhythmiceffects. 20 44 ms
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen 30 104 ms
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.When
thethresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhen 40 224 ms
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards. 50 464 ms
Note:withsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFO 60 944 ms
speeds,theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextreme
70 1.8 seconds
valuesof+99or99.Inthiscase,settingtheThreshold
tothesevaluesmaycauseinconsistentbehavior,or 80 3.8 seconds
maymeanthattheEGdoesntresetatall.Ifthis
90 10.9 seconds
happens,reducetheThresholduntiltheEGtriggers
consistently. 99 87.3 seconds

Attack [0099]
29b: Envelope
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStart
PitchEG leveltotheAttacklevel.

Attack Break Sustain Level


Theminimumattacktimeis2/3ofamillisecondas
Level Level (Always 0) fastasthemostpunchyofclassicanalogsynths.
Start Release
Level Level
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansetthe
Startlevelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstart
Change to instantaneouslyatitsmaximumvalue.
Pitch
Time

Attack Decay Slope Release


Decay [0099]
Time Time Time Time
ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevel
Note-on or reset Note-off totheBreaklevel.

Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymoving Slope [0099]


fromoneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,and ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromthe
thenmovingtoanotherleveloveranotherperiodof BreakleveltotheSustainlevel(whichforthePitchEG
time,andsoon. isalways0).OnceitreachestheSustain,theEGwill
Theparametersbelowletyousetfourlevels,the staythereuntilnoteoff,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
amountoftimeittakestogofromeachofthelevelsto Release [0099]
thenext,andtheshape(fromlineartocurved)ofeach
transition. ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromthe
SustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
Level
Curve
Eachofthefourlevelscanbeeitherpositiveor
negative. Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraight
Positivelevelswillmakethepitch(orotherAMS lines.Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelyto
destination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue; bemadeoutofcurves.
negativelevelswillmakeitgodown.
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchange
Notethat,unliketheFilterandAmpEGs,thePitch quicklyatfirst,andthenslowdownasitapproaches
EGsSustainLevelisalways0. thenextpoint.Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,
linearsegments.
Start [99+99]
ThissetstheinitialEGlevel,atnoteon.

58
Program P2: OSC/Pitch 29: Pitch EG

Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurved PitchEGLevelModulation
shapesnaturally.TheOASYSgoesastepfurtherthan
vintagesynths,however,andletsyoucontrolthe
amountofcurvatureseparatelyforeachofthefour
envelopesegments.
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremain
thesame.However,greatercurvaturewilltendto Original Shape Positive AMS on Start,
soundfaster,becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyat Attack, and Break
thebeginning.
PitchEGCurve

Curve = 0 (Linear)
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log) Negative AMS on Start, Positive AMS on Start and Break,
Attack, and Break Negative AMS on Attack

Note:OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo
points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.This
includesboththetimeofthesegment,andthelevel
reachedattheendofthesegment.

Curve = 0 (Linear) Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)


Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecay
time,youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecay
timeortheBreaklevel.
Different curve settings for up and down ThisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,Attack
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare level,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthatare
suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegments alreadysounding,unlesstheEGisthenrestartedvia
whichgodown. EGReset.
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor AMS1 [List of AMS Sources]
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGs
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments,
Levelparameters.
suchasDecayandRelease.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Attack [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthe
transitionfromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel. Start [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Decay [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] modulationfortheStartlevel.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthe Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand
transitionfromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel. setStartto+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplay
Slope [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] harder.IfyouinsteadsetStartto99,theStartlevel
willdecreaseasyouplayharder.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthe
transitionfromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel Attack [99+99]
(whichforthePitchEGisalways0). ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Release [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] modulationfortheAttacklevel.

ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe Break [99+99]


transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheBreaklevel.
29c: Level Modulation AMS2
ThesesettingsletyouusetwodifferentAMSsourcesto
ThisselectsthesecondAMSsourceforcontrollingthe
controltheLevelparametersoftheEG.Foreachofthe
EGsLevelparameters.TheStart,Attack,Decay,and
twoAMSsources,theStart,Attack,Decay,andBreak
Breaklevelssharethissource,buteachhasitsown
levelseachhavetheirownmodulationintensities.
modulationintensity.TheparametersofAMS2are
Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels, identicaltothoseofAMS1,above.
youcancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestothe
EGshape,asshownbelow.
29d: Time Modulation
ThesesettingsletyouuseanAMSsourcetocontrolthe
TimeparametersoftheEG.TheAttack,Decay,Slope,
andReleasetimessharethisAMSsource,buteachhas
itsownmodulationintensity.

59
Program mode: HD-1

PitchEGTimeModulation

AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value

Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off

Attack= + Attack= + Attack=


Decay= + Decay= + Decay=
Slope= + Slope= + Slope=

Softly played note. Strongly played note. Strongly played note.


Original Shape. Times are longer. Times are shorter.
Reaches Sustain Reaches Sustain
more slowly. more quickly.

AMS [List of AMS Sources]


ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbe
usefulhere,forinstance.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.

Attack [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacktime.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand
setAttackto+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlonger
athighervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,the
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvaluefor
instance,whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8will
maketheAttacktimealmosttwiceaslong,anda
settingof8willcuttheAttacktimealmostinhalf.

Decay [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheDecaytime.

Slope [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheSlopetime.

t 29: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
SwapOscillatoronpage 148.

60
Program P3: Filter 31: Filter1

Program P3: Filter


Filteringcanmakesubtleordramaticchangestothe Setupfiltermodulation,includingkeyboard
oscillatorstimbre.Eachoscillatorhastwomultimode tracking,thefilterenvelope,LFOmodulation,and
resonantfilters,AandB,aswellasadedicatedfilter AMScontrol.
envelopeandkeyboardtrackinggenerator. NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,
Thesepagesletyoucontrolallaspectsofthefilters. onlyOscillator1sfiltersareactive;thepagesfor
Amongotherthings,youcan: Oscillator2sfilterswillbegrayedout.
Makebasicsettingsforeachoscillatorsfilters,
includingrouting,modes,cutoff,resonance,etc.

31: Filter1
31PMC

31a

31b

31c

Thispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsfor Serial.ThisusesbothFilterAandFilterB.The
Oscillator1sFilterAandFilterB.Forexample,you oscillatorfirstgoesthroughFilterA,andthenthe
can: outputofFilterAisprocessedthroughFilterB.
Setupthefilterstoproduceasingle12dB/octfilter, Parallel.ThisalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.The
dual12dB/octfiltersineitherserialorparallel oscillatorfeedsbothfiltersdirectly,andtheoutputsof
routing,orasingle24dB/octfilter. thetwofiltersarethensummedtogether.
SeteachofthetwofilterstoLowPass,HighPass, 24dB/oct.Thismergesbothfilterstocreateasingle4
BandPass,orBandRejectmodes. pole,24dB/octavefilter(12dBforBandPassandBand
Setthecutoff,resonance,andinputandoutput Reject).IncomparisontoSingle,thisoptionproducesa
levelsofeachfilter,includingmodulationof sharperrolloffbeyondthecutofffrequency,aswellas
resonanceandoutputlevel. aslightlymoredelicateresonance.Manyclassicanalog
synthsusedthisgeneraltypeoffilter.
When24dB/octisselected,onlythecontrolsforFilter
31a: Filter Routing Aareactive;thecontrolsforFilterBwillbegrayedout.
Filter Routing [Single, Serial, Parallel, 24dB/oct]
Eachoscillatorhastwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.
Thisparametercontrolswhetheroneorbothofthe
filtersareused,andifbothareused,itcontrolshow
theyareconnectedtoeachother.
Single.ThisusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole,
12dB/octavefilter(6dBforBandPassandBandReject).
Whenthisoptionisselected,thecontrolsforFilterB
willbegrayedout.
61
Program mode: HD-1

SerialandParallelRouting Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBand
Passfiltertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonograph
sounds.Withhigherresonancesettings,itcancreate
buzzyornasaltimbres.
Oscillator Filter A (Low Pass) Filter B (High Pass)
BandReject.Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotchfilter
cutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe
cutofffrequency.Trymodulatingthecutoffwithan
LFOtocreatephaserlikeeffects.
FilterTypesandCutoffFrequency

Low Pass
Filter A (Low Pass)
Oscillator
Filter B (High Pass)

High Pass

12db/oct/24db/oct
Band Pass

Low Pass:
12dB/oct

Band Reject

Low Pass:
24dB/oct
Cutoff Frequency

Bypass [Off, On]


ThisletsyoubypassFilterAcompletely.
31b: Filter A
IfBypassisOff,FilterAfunctionsnormally.
Filter Type [Low Pass, High Pass, WhenBypassisOn,FilterAhasnoeffectontheinput
Band Pass, Band Reject] signal.
Thefilterwillproduceverydifferentresults
Frequency [0099]
dependingontheselectedfiltertype.Theselections
willchangeslightlyaccordingtotheselectedFilter ThiscontrolsthecutofffrequencyofFilterA,in
Routing,toshowthecorrectcutoffslopeindBper incrementsof1/10ofanoctave.Thespecificeffectof
octave. thecutofffrequencywillchangedependingonthe
selectedFilterType,asdescribedabove.
LowPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich
arehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe Input Trim [0099]
mostcommontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright
Thisadjuststhevolumelevelattheinputtothefilter.If
timbressounddarker.
younoticethatthesoundisdistorting,especiallywith
HighPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich highResonancesettings,youcanturntheleveldown
arelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto here,orattheOutputLevel.
maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy.
Note:thefilterwillnotclipinternally,sothereisno
BandPass.Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,both differencebetweenadjustingtheInputTrimandthe
highsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff OutputLevel.Eitherofthesecontrolswillallowyouto
frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow minimizeclippinglaterinthesignalchain,suchas
frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramatically mayoccurintheDrivesectionandinsomeeffects.
dependingonthecutoffsettingandtheoscillators
multisample.

62
Program P3: Filter 31: Filter1

Resonance

Low resonance value High resonance value

Resonance [0099]
31c: Filter B
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe
cutofffrequency. FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissetto
SerialorParallel.Otherwise,theparametersinthis
Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and
sectionwillbegrayedout.
frequenciesbeyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminish
smoothly. TheparametersforFilterBareidenticaltothosefor
FilterA.Formoreinformation,seethedescriptions
Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbre
underFilterA,above.
ofthefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormore
extreme.
Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbeheardasa t 31: Page Menu Commands
separate,whistlingpitch. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,see numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
KeyFollow,onpage 66. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
AMS (Resonance) [List of AMS Sources]
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontrolthe Programonpage 142.
Resonanceamount.ForalistofAMSsources,see
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
page 1021. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
Intensity [99+99] CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheResonance 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
modulation. SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
Forexample,ifVelocityhasbeenselected,changesin
keyboardvelocitywillaffecttheresonance.With
positive(+)values,theresonancewillincreaseasyou
playmorestrongly,andasyouplaymoresoftlythe
resonancewillapproachthelevelspecifiedbythe
Resonancesetting.Withnegative()values,the
resonancewilldecreaseasyouplaymorestrongly,and
asyouplaymoresoftlytheresonancewillapproach
thelevelspecifiedbytheResonancesetting.
Theresonancelevelisdeterminedbyaddingthe
ResonanceandIntensityvalues.

Output Level [0099]


ThiscontrolstheoutputlevelofFilterA.Youcanuse
thistobalancethevolumesofFiltersAandBwhenthe
RoutingissettoParallel,ortoturndownthevolume
toavoidclippinglaterinthesignalchain.

AMS (Output Level) [List of AMS Sources]


Thisselectsamodulationsourcetocontroltheoutput
levelofFilterA.ForalistofAMSsources,see
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
page 1021.

Intensity [99+99]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheoutput
levelmodulation.

63
Program mode: HD-1

32: Filter1 Modulation


32PMC

32a

32b

32c

ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sfilter
modulation.Amongotherthings,youcan: 32a: Keyboard Track
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapes,and Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplay
controlhowthetrackingaffectsfiltercutoff. higherpitches.Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingre
createsthiseffectbyincreasingthecutofffrequencyof
ControltheeffectoftheFilterEnvelopeonfilter
alowpassfilterasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard.
cutoff.
Usually,someamountofkeytrackingisnecessaryin
AssignAMSmodulationforfiltercutoff. ordertomakethetimbreconsistentacrosstheentire
FilterBisavailablewhentheFilterRoutingissetto range.
SerialorParallel.Otherwise,theparametersforFilter
Bwillbegrayedout.

Filter Keyboard Tracking

At the Center Key, key tracking does not affect the filter

Ramp values

+99
+99
+50
00
Ramp values
50
Change to +99 Ramp = +99
0 99
Filter Cutoff
Ramp = 50
99

99

Low Break: C2 Center: F3 High Break: F#5

64
Program P3: Filter 32: Filter1 Modulation

TheOASYSkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuchmore Entering notes from the keyboard


complex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferentratesof
changeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard. Youcanenternotenumbersdirectlybyplayingthem
Forinstance,youcan: onthekeyboard.Todoso:

Makethefiltercutoffincreaseveryquicklyoverthe 1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters.
middleofthekeyboard,andthenopenmore 2. HolddowntheENTERkey.
slowlyornotatallinthehigheroctaves. 3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe
Makethecutoffincreaseasyouplayloweronthe keyboard.
keyboard. KeyboardTrackShapeandIntensity
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike
effects. Intensity = +99 (Original Shape)

How it works: Keys and Ramps


Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps,
orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.The
bottomandtopkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopof Intensity = +50 (Less Effect)
theMIDIrange,respectively.Youcansettheother
threekeysnamedLowBreak,Center,andHigh
Breaktobeanywhereinbetween.
ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchange
betweeneachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLow Intensity = 0 (No Effect)
CenterRampissetto0,thevaluewillstaythesame
betweentheLowBreakkeyandtheCenterkey.
Youcanthinkoftheresultingshapeasbeingliketwo
foldingdoorsattachedtoahingeinthecenter.Atthe Intensity = 99 (Inverted)
Centerkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtrackinghas
noeffect.Thetwofoldingdoorsswingoutfromthis
centerpointtocreatechangesinthehigherandlower
rangesofthekeyboard.

Intensity to A [99+99]
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwill Low Break Key Center Key High Break Key
affectFilterAscutofffrequency.Theoveralleffectof
theKeyboardTrackisacombinationofthisIntensity
valueandtheoverallKeyboardTrackshape.
Ramp
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtracking
Withpositivevalues(+),theeffectwillbeinthe
outputincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenter
directionspecifiedbykeyboardtracking;iftheramp
Key;negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases.
goesup,thefiltercutoffwillincrease.
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegative
Withnegativevalues(),theeffectwillbeinthe
rampsettingswillchangedependingonwhetherthe
oppositedirection;iftherampgoesup,thefiltercutoff
rampistotheleftorrightoftheCenterKey.
willdecrease.
BottomLowandLowCenter:negativerampsmake
Intensity to B [99+99] thekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplay
Thiscontrolshowmuchthekeyboardtrackingwill loweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
affectFilterBscutofffrequency. outputgohigher.
CenterHighandHighTop:negativerampsmakethe
Key keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayhigher
Low Break [C1G9] onthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutput
goup.
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwolower
rampsthehingeofthelowerdoor. Theeffectonthefiltercutoffisacombinationofthe
rampvalues,assetbelow,andtheIntensitytoAandB
Center [C1G9] parameters.WhenIntensityissetto+99,arampof50
Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtrackingthemain changesthefilterfrequencyby1octaveforevery
hinge.Atthiskey,thekeyboardtrackinghasno octaveofthekeyboard,andarampof+99changesthe
effectonthefiltercutoff,oronanyAMSdestinations. frequencyby2octavesforeveryoctaveofthe
keyboard.
High Break [C1G9]
Bottom-Low [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher
rampsthehingeoftheupperdoor. ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDI
noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey
track,usenegativevalues.

65
Program mode: HD-1

Low-Center [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]


32b: Filter EG
ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenter
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues. TheFilter1EGmodulatestheFilterAandBcutoff
frequenciesovertime.Youcancontrolhowstrongly
Center-High [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] theEGwillaffectthefiltersinthreedifferentways:
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak SetaninitialamountofEGmodulation,usingthe
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues. IntensitytoAandBparameters.
High-Top [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] UsevelocitytoscaletheamountoftheEGapplied
ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthe tothefilter.
topoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,use UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamountoftheEG
positivevalues. appliedtothefilter.
Youcanuseallthreeoftheseatonce,andtheresults
+Inf and Inf ramps areaddedtogethertoproducethetotalEGeffect.
+InfandInfarespecialsettingswhichcreateabrupt
TosetuptheEGitself,includingattackandrelease
changesforsplitlikeeffects.Whenarampissetto+Inf
times,levels,andsoon,see34:Filter1EG,on
orInf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgotoitsextreme
page 69.
highestorlowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
+InfandInfRamps Velocity to A [99+99]
Thisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountofthe
FilterEGappliedtoFilterA.
Ramp = +Inf VelocitycontrolofFilterEG

In all examples below, Intensity to A = +50

A. Original EG B. Velocity to A = +50

Ramp = 50 Original
Filter Cutoff

Ramp = Inf
C. Velocity to A = 25 D. Velocity to A = 99

Low Break Center High Break Original


Filter Cutoff

Note:ifyousettheCenterHighrampto+InforInf,
theHighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly, Withpositive(+)values,playingmorestronglywill
ifyousettheLowCenterrampto+InforInf,the increasetheeffectoftheFilterEG,asshownin
BottomLowrampwillbegrayedout. exampleBabove.
Key Follow Withnegative()values,playingmorestronglywill
introducetheoppositeeffectoftheFilterEGlike
TocreatetheclassicKeyFolloweffect,inwhichthe
invertingthepolarityoftheenvelope.Youcanusethis
filterfrequencytracksthepitchofthekeyboard:
inseveraldifferentways:
1. SettheFilterFrequencyto30.
Youcansetaninitialpositiveamountwiththe
2. SettheKeyboardTrackIntensityto+99. IntensitytoA/Bparameters,andthenreducethis
3. SettheBottomLowandLowCenterrampsto50. amountwithvelocity.Inthiscase,thefinaleffectof
4. SettheCenterHighandHighToprampsto+50. theEGissimplydiminished,andnotactually
inverted,asshowninexampleCabove.
5. SettheCenterKeytoC4.
YoucanalsosettheVelocitytoA/Bamountssothat
ThesettingsfortheLowBreakandHighBreakkeys
theyaregreaterthantheinitialamountsof
dontmatterinthiscase.
IntensitytoA/B.Inthiscase,theEGwillhavea
Filter Keyboard Track is also an AMS positiveeffectatlowvelocities,andaninverted
effectathighvelocitiesasshowninexampleD.
source
YoucanusethekeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto
Velocity to B [99+99]
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand Thisletsyouusevelocitytoscaletheamountofthe
LFOs.SimplyselectFilterKeytrackintheAMSlistfor FilterEGappliedtoFilterB.Formoreinformation,see
thedesiredparameter. VelocitytoA,above.

Intensity to A [99+99]
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilter
Ascutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMS
modulation.

66
Program P3: Filter 32: Filter1 Modulation

TheFilterEGsshapecanswingallthewayfrom+99to Filter B
99.Positivevaluesincreasethecutofffrequency,and
negativevaluesdecreasethecutofffrequency.For TheparametersforFilterBareidenticaltothosefor
instance,seethegraphicVelocitytoA,above.The FilterA.Formoreinformation,seethedescriptions
EGshapeinexampleArisesupatfirst,andthenfalls underFilterA,above.
below0towardstheend.
WhenIntensitytoAissettoapositive(+)value,EGs t 32: Page Menu Commands
effectwillmatchitsshape.WhentheEGrisesabove0,
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
thecutofffrequencywillincrease.
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Withnegative()values,theeffectwillbeinthe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
oppositedirection;whentheEGrisesabove0,thefilter commandsonpage 142.
cutoffwilldecrease.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Intensity to B [99+99] Programonpage 142.
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheFilterEGonFilter 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Bscutofffrequency,beforeanyvelocityorAMS ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
modulation.Formoreinformation,seeIntensityto 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
A,above. CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
AMS (Filter EG) [List of AMS Sources] 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
amountoftheFilterEGappliedtoFiltersAandB.The
twofiltersshareasingleAMSsource,withseparate
intensitysettings.Otherwise,theAMSmodulationwill
workinthesamewayastheVelocitytoAparameter,
describedabove.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.

Intensity to A [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMS
modulationforFilterA.

Intensity to B [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheEGAMS
modulationforFilterB.

32c: Filter A/B Modulation


ThissectionletsyouassignanytwoAMSsourcesto
controlFilterA,andanothertwoAMSsourcesto
controlFilterB.Thismodulationisaddedtothebasic
FilterAandBcutofffrequencies,assetontheFilter1
page.

Filter A
AMS1 [List of AMS Sources]
Thisselectsthefirstmodulationsourceforcontrolling
FilterAscutofffrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,
seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
page 1021.

Intensity (AMS1) [99+99]


ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS1.

AMS2 [List of AMS Sources]


Thisselectsthesecondmodulationsourcefor
controllingFilterAscutofffrequency.ForalistofAMS
sources,seeAlternateModulationSource(AMS)List
onpage 1021.

Intensity (AMS2) [99+99]


ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofAMS2.

67
Program mode: HD-1

33: Filter1 LFO Modulation


33PMC

33a

33b

LFO1,LFO2,andtheCommonLFOcanallmodulate Intensity to B (LFO1) [99+99]


FilterAandBscutofffrequencies.Youcancontrolthe ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterBs
strengthofeachLFOsmodulationinthreedifferent cutofffrequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation.
ways,independentlyforeachfilter:
SetaninitialamountofLFOmodulation,usingthe JSY Intensity to A (LFO1) [99+99]
IntensitytoAandBparameters. Movingthejoystickdownfromthecenterdetent
UseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFO. position,towardsyourself,producestheJSY
controller.Youcanusethistoscaletheamountofthe
UseanyAMSsourcetoscaletheamounttheLFO. LFOappliedtoFilterA.
Youcanuseeachofthesemethodsforeachofthethree Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO.
LFOs,anddososeparatelyforbothFilterAandFilter Youcanalsousethistoreducetheinitialamountofthe
B.Theresultsareaddedtogethertoproducethetotal LFO,assetbyIntensitytoA,above.Forexample:
LFOeffect.
1. SetIntensitytoAto+50.
TheLFOwillnowhaveafairlystrongeffectonthe
33a: LFO 1/2 filtercutoff.

LFO1 2. SetJSYIntensitytoAto50.
Now,ifyoumovethejoystickdown,theeffectofthe
Intensity to A (LFO1) [99+99] LFOwillfadeaway.Whenthejoystickisallthewayat
ThiscontrolstheinitialeffectoftheLFOonFilterAs thebottomofitsrange,theLFOwillbecompletely
cutofffrequency,beforeanyJSYorAMSmodulation. cancelledout.
Negative()settingswillinvertthephaseoftheLFO. JSY Intensity to B (LFO1) [99+99]
Youcanproduceinterestingeffectsbyusingthesame
ThisletsyouuseJSYtoscaletheamountoftheLFO
LFOtomodulatetwodifferentparameters(suchas
appliedtoFilterB.
FilterAandFilterB),butwithonesettoapositive
intensity,andtheothersettoanegativeintensity. AMS (LFO1) [List of AMS Sources]
LFOmodulationofFilterCutoff ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
amountoftheLFOappliedtoFiltersAandB.Thetwo
filtersshareasingleAMSsource,butwithseparate
intensitysettings.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Low setting High setting

68
Program P3: Filter 34: Filter1 EG

Intensity to A [99+99] NotethatwhileLFO1andLFO2areseparateforeach


ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS voice,theCommonLFOissharedbyallvoicesinthe
modulationforFilterA. Program.Thismakesitusefulwhenyouwantallofthe
voicestohaveanidenticalLFOeffect.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive
settingsmeanthataftertouchwillincreasetheamount
ofLFO1appliedtoFilterA. t 33: Page Menu Commands
Intensity to B [99+99] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
modulationforFilterB.
commandsonpage 142.
LFO 2 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothosefor
LFO1.Formoreinformation,seethedescriptions 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
underLFO1,above. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
33b: Common LFO
3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
TheparametersfortheCommonLFOareidenticalto SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
thoseforLFO1.Formoreinformation,seethe
descriptionsunderLFO1,above.

34: Filter1 EG
34PMC

34a

34b

34c

34d

TheFilterEG,orEnvelopeGenerator,letsyoucreate TocontrolhowmucheffecttheEGhasonthefilters,
complex,timevaryingchangestothecutoff usetheFilterEGparametersontheFilterModpage,as
frequenciesofFiltersAandB.Theparametersonthis describedunder32b:FilterEG,onpage 66.
pagecontroltheshapeoftheEG.Amongotherthings,
youcan: Filter EG is also an AMS source
CreatethebasicEGshapebysettingthelevelsand YoucanusetheFilterEGasanAMSsourceto
timesofeachsegment. modulateotherparameters,justlikethekeyboard
trackingandLFOs.SimplyselecttheFilterEGinthe
ControlthecurvatureofeachEGsegment,for
AMSlistforthedesiredparameter.
subtlecontroloverthesoundoftheEG.
SetupcomplexmodulationofEGlevelsandtimes.
SetupanAMSsource,suchasanLFO,torestart
theEG.

69
Program mode: HD-1

Attack [99+99]
34a: EG Reset
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
AMS (EG Reset) [List of AMS Sources]
Break [99+99]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestart
Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendof
point.Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFO
theDecaytime.
totriggertheEGinarepeatingrhythm.Thisresetisin
additiontotheinitialnoteon,whichalwayscausesthe Sustain [99+99]
EGtostart.
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntil
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. noteoff,unlessitisresetviaAMS.
Threshold [99+99] Release [99+99]
ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset. ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheReleasetime.
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjustthe
exactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbe Time
reset,effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstother
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow:
rhythmiceffects.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen EG Value Actual Time
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.When 00 0.667 ms
thethresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhen
10 10 ms
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards.
20 44 ms
Note:withsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFO
speeds,theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextreme 30 104 ms
valuesof+99or99.Inthiscase,settingtheThreshold 40 224 ms
tothesevaluesmaycauseinconsistentbehavior,or
maymeanthattheEGdoesntresetatall.Ifthis 50 464 ms
happens,reducetheThresholduntiltheEGtriggers 60 944 ms
consistently.
70 1.8 seconds
80 3.8 seconds
34b: Envelope
90 10.9 seconds
FilterEG
99 87.3 seconds
Attack Break Sustain
Level
Level Level
Attack [0099]
Start Release
Level Level ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStart
leveltotheAttacklevel.
Change to
filter cutoff Theminimumattacktimeis2/3ofamillisecondas
Time
fastasthemostpunchyofclassicanalogsynths.
Attack Decay Slope Release
Time Time Time Time
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansetthe
Note-on or reset Note-off
Startlevelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstart
instantaneouslyatitsmaximumvalue.
Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymoving Decay [0099]
fromoneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,and
thenmovingtoanotherleveloveranotherperiodof ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevel
time,andsoon. totheBreaklevel.

Theparametersbelowletyousetfivelevels,the Slope [0099]


amountoftimeittakestogofromeachofthelevelsto ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromthe
thenext,andtheshape(fromlineartocurved)ofeach BreakleveltotheSustainlevel.Onceitreachesthe
transition. Sustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff
(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
Level
Eachofthefivelevelscanbeeitherpositiveor
Release [0099]
negative. ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromthe
SustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
Positivelevelswillmakethecutofffrequency(orother
AMSdestination)goupfromitsprogrammedvalue;
Curve
negativelevelswillmakeitgodown.
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis
Start [99+99] manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraight
ThissetstheinitialEGlevel,atnoteon. lines.Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelyto
bemadeoutofcurves.

70
Program P3: Filter 34: Filter1 EG

Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchange FilterEGLevelModulation
quicklyatfirst,andthenslowdownasitapproaches
thenextpoint.Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,
linearsegments.
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurved
shapesnaturally.TheOASYSgoesastepfurtherthan
vintagesynths,however,andletsyoucontrolthe
Original Shape Positive AMS on Start,
amountofcurvatureseparatelyforeachofthefour Attack, and Break
envelopesegments.
FilterEGCurve

Curve = 0 (Linear)
Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
Negative AMS on Start, Positive AMS on Start and Break,
Attack, and Break Negative AMS on Attack

Once an EG segment begins, it cant be modulated


OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo
points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.This
includesboththetimeofthesegment,andthelevel
Curve = 0 (Linear) Curve = 10 (Exp/Log) reachedattheendofthesegment.
Forinstance,iftheEGisinthemiddleoftheDecay
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremain time,youcannolongermodulateeithertheDecay
thesame.However,greatercurvaturewilltendto timeortheBreaklevel.
soundfaster,becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyat
thebeginning. Asanotherexample,letssaythatyouveassignedthe
CommonLFOtomodulateBreakLevel.TheLFOmay
Different curve settings for up and down bemovingallthetime,buttheBreakLevelisonly
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare affectedbytheLFOsvalueattheinstantthatthe
suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegments Decaysegmentstarts.Afterthat,thelevelisfixed.
whichgodown. Finally,thisalsomeansthatmodulatingtheStartlevel,
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor Attacklevel,orAttacktimewillnotaffectnotesthat
upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a arealreadysounding,unlesstheEGisthenresetvia
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments, AMS.
suchasDecayandRelease.
AMS [List of AMS Sources]
Attack [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] SelectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthe parameters.
transitionfromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel. ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Decay [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthe Start [99+99]
transitionfromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheStartlevel.
Slope [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthe
setStartto+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplay
transitionfromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
harder.IfyouinsteadsetStartto99,theStartlevel
Release [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)] willdecreaseasyouplayharder.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe Attack [99+99]
transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacklevel.
34c: Level Modulation
Break [99+99]
ThesesettingsletyouuseanyAMSsourcetocontrol ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
theLevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,and modulationfortheBreaklevel.
BreaklevelsshareasingleAMSsource,butcaneach
havedifferentmodulationintensities.
Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels,
youcancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestothe
EGshape,asshownbelow.

71
Program mode: HD-1

Decay [99+99]
34d: Time Modulation
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsources modulationfortheDecaytime.
tocontroltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachof
thethreeAMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,and Slope [99+99]
Releasetimeseachhavetheirownmodulation ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
intensities. modulationfortheSlopetime.
FilterEGTimeModulation
Release [99+99]
AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off modulationfortheReleasetime.

AMS2 and AMS3


TheseselectthesecondandthirdAMSsources,
Attack=+, Decay=+, Attack=+, Decay=+, Attack=, Decay=, respectively,forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.
Slope=+, Release=+ Slope=+, Release=+ Slope=, Release=
EachhasitsownintensitiesforAttack,Decay,Slope,
Softly played note. Stongly played note. Stongly played note.
Original Shape Times are longer. Times are shorter. andRelease.TheparametersofbothAMS2andAMS3
Reaches Sustainmore Reaches Sustainmore areidenticaltothoseofAMS1,above.
slowly. quickly.

AMS1 [List of AMS Sources] t 34: Page Menu Commands


SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbe numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
usefulhere,forinstance. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
Attack [99+99]
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
modulationfortheAttacktime.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
setAttackto+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlonger
athighervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,the 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities. SwapOscillatoronpage 148.

WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvaluefor 4:SyncBothEGs.Formoreinformation,seeSync
instance,whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8will BothEGsonpage 149.
maketheAttacktimealmosttwiceaslong,anda
settingof8willcuttheAttacktimealmostinhalf.

35: Filter2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasicfiltersettings.It TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
isavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder31:Filter1,onpage 61.
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.

36: Filter2 Modulation


ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfiltermodulation.Itis TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder32:Filter1Modulation,on
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout. page 64.

37: Filter2 LFO Modulation


ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sLFOfiltermodulation. TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
ItisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder33:Filter1LFOModulation,on
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout. page 68.

38: Filter2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sFilterEG.Itis Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto

72
Program P3: Filter 38: Filter2 EG

TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
asdescribedunder34:Filter1EG,onpage 69.

73
Program mode: HD-1

Program P4: Amp/EQ


Oscillators1and2haveseparatecontrolsforvolume Setthepanpositionandpanmodulation.
(alsocalledamplitude,orampforshort),pan,and Controlamplevelandmodulation,including
Drive,aswellasdedicatedampenvelopesand keyboardtracking,theampenvelope,LFO
keyboardtrackinggenerators.Additionally,both modulation,andAMScontrol.
OscillatorsshareathreebandEQ.
SetupthethreebandTrackEQ.
Thesepagesletyoucontrolalloftheserelated
parameters.Amongotherthings,youcan: NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,
onlyOscillator1samp,pan,anddriveparametersare
SetuptheDrivercircuit,whichaddssaturationand active;thepagesforOscillator2willbegrayedout.
bassboosttothetimbre.

41: Amp1/Driver1
41PMC

41a

41b

41c

ThispagecontrolsthebasicsettingsfortheAmp/EQ Drive [0099


section.Here,youcan: Thiscontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthe
SetuptheDrivercircuit. timbre.Lowsettingswillproducemildsaturation,and
Settheinitialvolumelevel. highersettingscreatemoreobviousdistortion.

Controlthepanpositionandpanmodulation. Often,itsusefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwith
theDrive.
Note:evenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,the
41a: Driver Drivercircuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisa
TheDriveraddssaturationandoverdrivetothesound, completelypristinesound,usetheBypasscontrol
foreverythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrastic instead.
distortion.Unlikeanoverdriveeffect,theDriver
AMS (Drive) [List of AMS Sources]
processeseachvoiceindividually,sothetimbrestays
thesameregardlessofhowmanyvoicesarebeing ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
played. Driveamount.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work
togethertocreatetheoverallDrivereffect.Drive Intensity [99+99]
contributesedgeandbite,andLowBoostprovidesthe
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
bodyaswellasboostingthebass.
modulationforDrive.
Bypass [Off, On]
WhenBypassisOn,theDriveriscompletelyremoved
fromthesignalpath.

74
Program P4: Amp/EQ 41: Amp1/Driver1

Low Boost [0099] YoucanalsocontrolpanviaMIDIPan(CC#10).A


ThislowfrequencyEQcontrolsthebodycharacterof CC#10valueof0or1placesthesoundatthefarleft,
thesound.ThespecificEQfrequenciesaffectedwill 64placesthesoundatthelocationspecifiedbythe
changewiththeDrivesetting. Panparameter,and127placesthesoundatthefar
right.
Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso
intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter. Note:youcanselectRandompanonlyfromtheon
screenUI,andnotfromMIDIortheControlsurface.
AMS (Low Boost) [List of AMS Sources]
AMS (Pan) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolthe
LowBoostamount.ForalistofAMSsources,see ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatePan.Foralist
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston ofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulationSource
page 1021. (AMS)Listonpage 1021.

Intensity [99+99] Intensity [99+99]


ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationforLowBoost. modulationforPan.
Forexample,ifPanissettoC064andAMSissetto
NoteNumber,positive(+)intensitieswillcausethe
41b: Amp Level soundtomovetowardtherightasyouplayhigher
Amp Level [000127] thanC4,andtowardtheleftasyouplaylowerthanC4.

ThiscontrolsthebasicvolumelevelofOscillator1, Negative()intensitieswillhavetheoppositeeffect.
beforekeyboardtracking,velocity,andother Use DKit Setting [Off, On]
modulation.
ThisoptionisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorMode
The Control Surface and volume issettoDrums.
YoucancontroltheOscillatorvolumedirectlyfromthe UnlikestandardPrograms,DrumKitscanhavea
ControlSurfacesliders.Thisisaseparateparameter,in differentpansettingforeverynote.Thisparameterlets
additiontoAmpLevel.Todoso: youchoosewhethertousetheDrumKitpansettings,
1. PresstheControlSurfaceTimbre/Trackbutton. ortousetheProgramspansettinginstead.
2. MoveSlider1tosetthevolumeforOscillator1, On(checked):TheProgramwillusetheDrumKits
andSlider2forOscillator2. pernotepansettings;panAMSwillstillapply.Thisis
thedefaultsetting.
MIDI and volume Off(unchecked):TheProgramwillignoretheDrum
YoucancontroltheProgramsoverallvolumevia Kitssettings,andusetheProgrampaninstead.
MIDIusingbothVolume(CC#7)andExpression AllkeysofthedrumkitwillusethePan(41c)setting.
(CC#11).Whenusedoneatatime,thetwo
controllersworkinexactlythesameway:aMIDI
valueof127isequaltotheAmpLevelsetting,and t 41: Page Menu Commands
lowervaluesreducethevolume. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
IfbothCC#7andCC#11areusedsimultaneously, numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
theonewiththelowervaluedeterminesthe shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
maximumvolume,andtheonewiththehigher commandsonpage 142.
valuescalesdownfromthatmaximum.Thisis 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
controlledontheglobalMIDIchannel. Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
41c: Pan ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
Pan [Random, L001C064R127]
CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
ThiscontrolsthestereopanofOscillator1.Asettingof
3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
L001placesthesoundatthefarleft,C064inthecenter,
SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
andR127tothefarright.
WhenthisissettoRandom,thepanpositionwillbe
differentforeachnoteon.
YoucanalsosetthePandirectlyfromtheControl
Surfaceknobs.Todoso:
1. PresstheControlSurfaceTimbre/Trackbutton.
2. SettheMIXERKNOBSswitchtoINDIVIDUAL
PAN.
3. MoveKnob1tosetthepanforOscillator1,and
Knob2tosetthepanforOscillator2.

75
Program mode: HD-1

42: Amp1 Modulation


42PMC

42a

42b

42c

ThispagecontainsthesettingsforOscillator1sAmp theMIDIrange,respectively.Youcansettheother
levelmodulation.Amongotherthings,youcan: threekeysnamedLowBreak,Center,andHigh
Setupcomplexkeyboardtrackingshapestocontrol Breaktobeanywhereinbetween.
theAmplevel. ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchange
AssignAMSmodulationfortheAmplevel. betweeneachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLow
CenterRampissetto0,thevaluewillstaythesame
ControltheeffectoftheLFOsontheAmplevel. betweentheLowBreakkeyandtheCenterkey.
Thetotaleffectsofthemodulationcanincreasethe Youcanthinkoftheresultingshapeasbeingliketwo
volumetoamaximumoftwotimeslouderthanthe foldingdoorsattachedtoahingeinthecenter.Atthe
AmpLevelsetting. Centerkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtrackinghas
noeffect.Thetwofoldingdoorsswingoutfromthis
42a: Keyboard Track centerpointtocreatechangesinthehigherandlower
rangesofthekeyboard.
Keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythevolumeasyou
playupanddownthekeyboard.Usually,some Key
amountofkeytrackingisnecessaryinordertomake
thevolumeconsistentacrosstheentirerange. Low Break [C1G9]
OASYSskeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwolower
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeover rampsthehingeofthelowerdoor.
uptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance,
Center [C1G9]
youcan:
Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtrackingthemain
Makethevolumeincreaseveryquicklyoverthe hinge.Atthiskey,thekeyboardtrackinghasno
middleofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemore effectonthevolume,oronanyAMSdestinations.
slowlyornotatallinthehigheroctaves.
Makethevolumeincreaseasyouplayloweronthe High Break [C1G9]
keyboard. Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher
Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike rampsthehingeoftheupperdoor.
effects.
Entering notes from the keyboard
How it works: Keys and Ramps Youcanenternotenumbersdirectlybyplayingthem
Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps, onthekeyboard.Todoso:
orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.The 1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters.
bottomandtopkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopof 2. HolddowntheENTERkey.

76
Program P4: Amp/EQ 42: Amp1 Modulation

3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe Center-High [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]


keyboard. ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues.
Ramp
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtracking High-Top [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]
outputincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenter ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthe
Key;negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases. topoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,use
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegative positivevalues.
rampsettingswillchangedependingonwhetherthe Ramp Change in level
rampistotheleftorrightoftheCenterKey.
-Inf Silent in one half-step
BottomLowandLowCenter:negativerampsmake
99 Silent in one whole-step
thekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplay
loweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe 95 Silent in one octave
outputgohigher. 48 Silent in two octaves
CenterHighandHighTop:negativerampsmakethe
25 Silent in four octaves
keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayhigher
onthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutput 00 no change
goup. +25 x2 in four octaves

Differences from other Keyboard Tracks +50 x2 in two octaves

ThereareseveraldifferencesbetweentheAmp +99 x2 in one octave


keyboardtrackingandtheFilterandCommon +Inf x2 in one half-step
keyboardtracking.
Forexample,theresultsoftheRampvaluesare +Inf and Inf ramps
different.AsshowninthegraphicAmpKeyboard
+InfandInfarespecialsettingswhichcreateabrupt
Tracking,below,negativeslopesaremoresteepthan
changesforsplitlikeeffects.Whenarampissetto+Inf
positiveslopes.
orInf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgotoitsextreme
Also,theampdoesnothaveseparatecontrolof highestorlowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
Intensity.Instead,Intensityisalwaysfixedatthe
maximumamount,allowingkeyboardtrackingto Whenarampissetto+Inf,thekeyboardtrackingwill
gotoitshighestvalue(doubletheprogrammed
changethevolumefromcompletesilencetotwiceas
volume)overasinglehalfstep.
loudastheprogrammedlevel.
Similarly,whenarampissettoInf,thekeyboard
Bottom-Low [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] trackingwillgotoitslowestvalue(completesilence)
ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDI overasinglehalfstep.
noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey Note:ifyousettheCenterHighrampto+InforInf,
track,usenegativevalues. theHighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,
Low-Center [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] ifyousettheLowCenterrampto+InforInf,the
BottomLowrampwillbegrayedout.
ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenter
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.

Amp Keyboard Tracking

Ramp values: +99 +50 +25


Louder x2

Change to
No change
Volume

Silence
Ramp values: 99 97 95 48 25

Low Break: D1 Center: G2 High Break: C4

77
Program mode: HD-1

Amp Keytrack is also an AMS source AMS (LFO1) [List of AMS Sources]
YoucanusethekeyboardtrackingasanAMSsourceto ThisselectsanAMSmodulationsourcetoscalethe
modulateotherparameters,justliketheenvelopesand amountoftheLFO1appliedtotheAmplevel.
LFOs.SimplyselectAmpKeytrackintheAMSlistfor ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
thedesiredparameter. Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.

Intensity [99+99]
42b: Amp Modulation ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheLFO1AMS
YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelbybothvelocityand modulationfortheAmplevel.
anAMSsource. Forexample,ifAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive
ThismodulationscalesthebasicAmplevelandAmp settingsmeanthataftertouchwillincreasetheamount
EGlevelparameters.Theresultingvolumeis ofLFO1appliedtotheAmplevel.
determinedbymultiplyingthevolumechangesofthe
ampEGbyothervaluessuchasAMS.Iftheseoriginal LFO2
levelsarelow,themaximumvolumeavailablewith TheparametersforLFO2areidenticaltothosefor
modulationwillalsobereduced. LFO1.Formoreinformation,seethedescriptions
Velocity Intensity [99+99] underLFO1,above.

Withpositive(+)values,thevolumewillincreaseas
youplayharder. t 42: Page Menu Commands
Withnegative()values,thevolumewilldecreaseas ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
youplayharder. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
VelocitymodulationofAmplevel,withAmpEG shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Volume Programonpage 142.
Time Time 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Low velocity High velocity ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
AMS [List of AMS Sources] CopyOscillatoronpage 148.

ThisselectsanyAMSmodulationsourcetocontrolthe 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
Amplevel.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.

Intensity [99+99]
Thiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofthe
modulation.
Forexample,ifAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive(+)
valuesofthisparameterwillmakethevolumeincrease
whenyoupressdownonthekeyboard.
Notethatiftheothermodulationsettingshavealready
raisedthevolumetoitsmaximumlevel(doublethe
AmpLevelandAmpEGlevelsettings),thevolume
cannotbeincreasedanyfurther.
Withnegative()valuesofthisparameter,thevolume
willdecreasewhenpressureisappliedtothe
keyboard.

42c: LFO 1/2


YoucanmodulatetheAmplevelwithbothLFO1and
LFO2.

LFO1
Intensity (LFO1) [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionofLFO1seffect
ontheoscillatorsvolume.
Negative()valueswillinverttheLFOwaveform.

78
Program P4: Amp/EQ 43: Amp1 EG

43: Amp1 EG
43PMC

43a

43b

43c

43d

Theseparametersletyoucreatetimevaryingchanges
inthevolumeofoscillator1. 43b: Envelope
Theseparametersspecifyhowtheamp1EGwill
43a: EG Reset changeovertime.
AmpEG
AMS (EG Reset) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheEGtothestart Start Attack Break Sustain
Level Level Level Level
point.Forinstance,youcanuseatemposyncedLFO
totriggertheEGinarepeatingrhythm.Thisresetisin
Volume
additiontotheinitialnoteon,whichalwayscausesthe
EGtostart.
Time
Note:OncetheAmpEGisinitsReleasesegment,it
Attack Decay Slope Release
cannotbereset.(Otherwise,thesoundmightkeep Time Time Time Time
playingforever!)
Note-on or reset Note-off
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.

Threshold [99+99] Level


ThissetstheAMSlevelwhichwilltriggertheEGreset. Start [0099]
Amongotherthings,youcanusethistoadjustthe
Thissetstheinitialvolumelevelatnoteon.
exactpointinanLFOsphaseatwhichtheEGwillbe
reset,effectivelycontrollingitsgrooveagainstother Attack [0099]
rhythmiceffects.
ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheAttacktime.
Whenthethresholdispositive,theEGtriggerswhen
passingthroughthethresholdmovingupwards.When Break [0099]
thethresholdisnegative,theEGtriggerswhen Break,shortforBreakPoint,setsthelevelattheendof
passingthroughthethresholdmovingdownwards. theDecaytime.
Note:withsomeLFOshapes,andwithfasterLFO
Sustain [0099]
speeds,theLFOmaynotalwaysreachtheextreme
valuesof+99or99.Inthiscase,settingtheThreshold ThissetsthelevelattheendoftheSlopetime.Onceit
tothesevaluesmaycauseinconsistentbehavior,or reachestheSustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntil
maymeanthattheEGdoesntresetatall.Ifthis noteoff(unlessitisresetviaAMS).
happens,reducetheThresholduntiltheEGtriggers
consistently.

79
Program mode: HD-1

Time AmpEGCurve
Highervaluesmeanlongertimes,asshownbelow.
EG Value Actual Time Curve = 0 (Linear)

00 0.667 ms Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)

10 10 ms
20 44 ms
30 104 ms
40 224 ms
50 464 ms
Curve = 0 (Linear) Curve = 10 (Exp/Log)
60 944 ms
70 1.8 seconds
Different curve settings for up and down
80 3.8 seconds
Youmayfindthatdifferentamountsofcurvatureare
90 10.9 seconds suitableforsegmentswhichgoupandsegments
99 87.3 seconds whichgodown.
Forinstance,acurveof3isagooddefaultsettingfor
Attack [0099] upwardsegments,suchasAttack.Ontheotherhand,a
curveof6ormoreisgoodfordownwardsegments,
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromtheStart
suchasDecayandRelease.
leveltotheAttacklevel.
Theminimumattacktimeis2/3ofamillisecondas Attack [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
fastasthemostpunchyofclassicanalogsynths. ThissetsthecurvatureoftheAttacksegmentthe
Forthefastestpossibleattacktime,youcansetthe transitionfromtheStartleveltotheAttacklevel.
Startlevelto+99;inthiscase,theEGwillstart
Decay [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
instantaneouslyatitsmaximumvalue.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheDecaysegmentthe
Decay [0099] transitionfromtheAttackleveltotheBreaklevel.
ThissetsthetimeittakestomovefromtheAttacklevel
Slope [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
totheBreaklevel.
ThissetsthecurvatureoftheSlopesegmentthe
Slope [0099] transitionfromtheBreakleveltotheSustainlevel.
ThissetshowlongtheEGtakestomovefromthe
Release [0 (Linear), 19, 10 (Exp/Log)]
BreakleveltotheSustainlevel.Onceitreachesthe
Sustainlevel,theEGwillstaythereuntilnoteoff ThissetsthecurvatureoftheReleasesegmentthe
(unlessitisresetviaAMS). transitionfromtheSustainleveltotheReleaselevel.

Release [0099]
43c: Level Modulation
ThissetshowlongittakestheEGtomovefromthe
Sustainleveltosilence. ThesesettingsletyouuseanyAMSsourcetocontrol
theLevelparametersoftheEG.TheStart,Attack,and
Curve BreaklevelsshareasingleAMSsource,butcaneach
Forthesakeofsimplicity,mostofthediagramsinthis havedifferentmodulationintensities.
manualshowenvelopesasbeingmadeoutofstraight Byusingdifferentsettingsforeachofthethreelevels,
lines.Inactuality,though,envelopesaremorelikelyto youcancausebothsubtleanddramaticchangestothe
bemadeoutofcurves. EGshape,asshownbelow.
Inotherwords,eachsegmentslevelwillchange AmpEGLevelModulation
quicklyatfirst,andthenslowdownasitapproaches
thenextpoint.Thistendstosoundbetterthanstraight,
Volume Volume
linearsegments.
Classicanalogsynthenvelopesmadethesecurved Time Time

shapesnaturally.TheOASYSgoesastepfurtherthan Original Shape Positive AMS on Start,


vintagesynths,however,andletsyoucontrolthe Attack, and Break
amountofcurvatureseparatelyforeachofthefour
envelopesegments.
Volume Volume
Whenyouchangethecurvature,theEGtimesremain
thesame.However,greatercurvaturewilltendto Time Time
soundfaster,becausethevaluechangesmorequicklyat Negative AMS on Start, Positive AMS on Start and Break,
thebeginning. Attack, and Break Negative AMS on Attack

80
Program P4: Amp/EQ 45: Amp2/Driver2

Once an EG segment begins, it cant be modulated ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation


OncetheEGhasstartedasegmentbetweentwo Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
points,thatsegmentcannolongerbemodulated.This Attack [99+99]
includesboththetimeofthesegment,andthelevel
reachedattheendofthesegment. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacktime.
Formoreinformation,seeOnceanEGsegment
begins,itcantbemodulatedonpage 71. Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand
setAttackto+99,theAttacktimewillgetmuchlonger
AMS [List of AMS Sources] athighervelocities.IfyouinsteadsetAttackto99,the
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsLevel Attacktimewillgetmuchshorterathighervelocities.
parameters. WhentheAMSsourceisatitsmaximumvaluefor
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation instance,whenVelocityisat127asettingof+8will
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. makethesegmenttimealmosttwiceaslong,anda
settingof8willcutthesegmenttimealmostinhalf.
Start [99+99]
Decay [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheStartlevel. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheDecaytime.
Forexample,ifyousettheAMSsourcetoVelocityand
setStartto+99,theStartlevelwillincreaseasyouplay Slope [99+99]
harder.IfyouinsteadsetStartto99,theStartlevel ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
willdecreaseasyouplayharder. modulationfortheSlopetime.
Attack [99+99] Release [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
modulationfortheAttacklevel. modulationfortheReleasetime.
Break [99+99] AMS2 and AMS3
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMS
TheseselectthesecondandthirdAMSsources,
modulationfortheBreaklevel.
respectively,forcontrollingtheEGsTimeparameters.
EachhasitsownintensitiesforAttack,Decay,Slope,
43d: Time Modulation andRelease.TheparametersofbothAMS2andAMS3
areidenticaltothoseofAMS1,above.
ThesesettingsletyouusethreedifferentAMSsources
tocontroltheTimeparametersoftheEG.Foreachof
thethreeAMSsources,theAttack,Decay,Slope,and t 43: Page Menu Commands
Releasetimeseachhavetheirownmodulation
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
intensities.
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
AmpEGTimeModulation shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
AMS=Velocity, Intensity = a positive (+) value

Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off Note-on Note-off


0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Attack= +, Decay= +, Attack= +, Decay= +, Attack=, Decay=, 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
Slope= +, Release= + Slope= +, Release= + Slope=, Release=
CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
Softly played note. Strongly played note. Strongly played note.
Original Shape. Times are longer. Times are shorter. 3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
Reaches Sustain Reaches Sustain
more slowly. more quickly. SwapOscillatoronpage 148.
4:SyncBothEGs.Formoreinformation,seeSync
BothEGsonpage 149.
AMS1 [List of AMS Sources]
SelectsthefirstAMSsourcetocontroltheEGsTime
parameters.VelocityandKeyboardTrackcanbothbe
usefulhere,forinstance.

45: Amp2/Driver2
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sbasiclevel,pan,and TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
driversettings.ItisavailableonlywhentheOscillator asdescribedunder41:Amp1/Driver1,onpage 74.
ModeissettoDouble;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayed
out.

81
Program mode: HD-1

46: Amp2 Mod.


ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampmodulation.Itis TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder42:Amp1Modulation,on
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout. page 76.

47: Amp2 EG
ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sampEG.Itisavailable TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
onlywhentheOscillatorModeissettoDouble;ifnot, asdescribedunder43:Amp1EG,onpage 79.
thepagewillbegrayedout.

49: EQ
49PMC

49a

ThisthreebandEQ,withsweepablemid,issharedby Bypasscanbeconvenientforcomparingtheresultsof
bothoftheProgramsoscillators. theEQwiththeoriginalsignal.
InCombisandSequences,eachtimbreandtrackhasits Input Trim [0099]
ownindividualEQ.YoucanimporttheProgramsEQ
settingsintoTracksandTimbresbyusingtheCombi ThiscontrolsthevolumelevelgoingintotheEQ.
andSequenceAutoLoadProgramEQoptions. HighsettingsoftheLow,Mid,andHighGaincontrols
cancausesubstantialincreasesintheoveralllevel.You
cancompensateforthisbyturningdowntheinput
49a: 3 Band Parametric EQ trim.
Inadditiontousingtheonscreenparameters,youcan
Low Gain [18.0+18.0dB]
alsousethefrontpanelControlSurfacetosetupmost
oftheEQparameters(everythingexceptforBypass). Thiscontrolsthegainofthe80HzLowShelfEQ,in
Todoso: incrementsof0.5dB.
1. PresstheControlSurfaceTimbre/Trackbutton. Mid Frequency [100Hz10.00kHz]
2. SettheMIXERKNOBSswitchtoChannelStrip. ThissetsthecenterfrequencyfortheMidsweepEQ.
3. SettheTrim,LowGain,MidFreq,MidGain,and
HighGainusingtheknobs. Mid Gain [18.0+18.0dB]
ThiscontrolsthegainoftheMidSweepEQ,in
Bypass [On, Off] incrementsof0.5dB.
WhenBypassischecked,alloftheEQwillbedisabled,
includingtheInputTrim.

82
Program P4: Amp/EQ 49: EQ

High Gain [18.0+18.0dB]


Thiscontrolsthegainofthe10kHzHighShelfEQ,in
incrementsof0.5dB.

t 49: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
SwapOscillatoronpage 148.

83
Program mode: HD-1

Program P5: LFO


EachoftheOscillatorshastwoLFOs,whichyoucan ThetwoOscillatorsalsoshareasingleCommonLFO,
usetomodulatethefilter,amp,pitch,andmanyother similartotheglobalLFOonsomevintageanalog
parameters. synths.
Thesepagesletyousetupalloftheparametersforall
fiveLFOs.

51: OSC1 LFO1


51PMC

51a

51b

51c

ThispagehasallofthecontrolsforthefirstLFOof
Oscillator1.Forinstance,youcan: 51a: OSC 1 LFO 1
SelecttheLFOsbasicwaveform,andmodifyit Waveform [TriangleRandom6 (Continuous)]
withtheShapeparameter.
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform,asshowninthe
ControltheLFOsfrequency,andassignAMS graphicbelow.
controllerstomodulatethefrequency.
Mostofthewaveformsshouldbeselfexplanatory,but
UsetheKeySyncparametertochoosewhetherthe afewwillbenefitfrommoredetails:
LFOrunsseparatelyforeachvoice,oris
Guitarisintendedforguitarvibrato,anditsshapeis
synchronizedacrossallofthevoices
specificallytunedforthispurpose.Thewaveformis
UsetheFadeandDelayparameterstocontrolhow positiveonly,sothatwhenusedforpitch,itwillonly
longtheLFOwaitstostartafternoteon,and bendup,andnotdown.
whetheritstartsabruptlyorfadesinslowly.
Random1(S/H)generatestraditionalsampleandhold
SettheLFOtosynctoMIDItempo. waveforms,inwhichthelevelchangesrandomlyat
fixedintervalsoftime.

LFO Waveforms

Random1 Random4
Triangle Guitar Step Triangle-4
(S/H) (Continuous)
Exponential Random2 Random5
Saw Step Triangle-6 (Continuous)
Triangle (S/H)
Exponential Random3 Random6
Square Step Saw-4 (Continuous)
Saw Down (S/H)
Exponential
Sine Step Saw-6
Saw Up

84
Program P5: LFO 51: OSC1 LFO1

Random2(S/H)randomizesboththelevelsandthe ByusingAMSmodulation,youcanalsogetspeeds
timing. muchfasterandmuchslowerthanareavailable
Random3(S/H)generatesapulsewavewithrandom throughthisbasicsetting.
timing.Itstheoppositeoftraditionalsampleandhold; Frequency Value Frequency in Hz
thetimingvaries,butthelevelsdont.
00 0.014 Hz
Random46(Continuous)aresmoothedversionsof
10 0.112 Hz
Random13,withrampsinsteadofsteps.Youcanuse
themtocreatemoregentlerandomvariations. 20 0.422 Hz

Start Phase [180+180, Random] 30 0.979 Hz

Thiscontrolsthephaseofthewaveformatthestartof 40 1.79 Hz
thenote,instepsof5degrees. 50 2.84 Hz
IfKeySyncisOff,theStartPhasewillapplyonlyto 60 4.14 Hz
thefirstnoteofthephrase.
70 5.69 Hz
Shape [99+99] 80 7.49 Hz
Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Asyou
90 9.53 Hz
canseeinthegraphicbelow,thiscanmakethe
waveformseithermoreroundedormoreextreme.It 99 26.25 Hz
canalsobeusefultoemphasizecertainvalueranges, 99 + Fine 99 32 Hz
anddeemphasizeothers.
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangleLFO Frequency Fine [0099]
tomodulatefiltercutoff.IfShapeemphasizesthehigh ThisallowsyoutocontroltheLFOfrequencywith
valuerange,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthe greaterprecision,givingyou98additionalstepsfor
higherfrequencies.Ifitemphasizesthelowrange,the eachstepofthemainFrequencyparameter.
filterwillspendmoretimeatthelowerfrequencies.
Whenthisissetto00,theLFOspeedisassetbythe
LFOShape
Frequencyparameter.
+99 Whenthisissetto99,itsthesameasincreasingthe
mainFrequencyvalueby1.
0
Stop [Off, On]
99
On(checked):WhenStopisOn,theLFOdoesnot
advancenormally,andtheFrequencyparametersare
Shape = 0 (original waveform) ignored.Instead,theLFOsimplygenerateitsveryfirst
Shape = +99 value(asdeterminedbythecombinationofthe
Waveform,StartPhase,Shape,andOffset),andthen
Shape = 99
holdsthatvalueuntiltheendofthenote.
Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3 YoucanusethisinconjunctionwiththeRandom
waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or waveformstocreatestatic,randommodulation,with
99.Whentheseareselected,Shapeisgrayedout. thevaluechangingonlyatnoteon.
Off(unchecked):WhenStopisOff,theLFOwill
AMS (Shape) [List of AMS Sources]
functionnormally.
Thisselectsamodulationsourceforcontrollingthe
LFOsShape.Modulatingtheshapecandramatically Key Sync [Off, On]
altertheeffectoftheLFOtryitout! On(checked):WhenKeySyncisOn,theLFOstarts
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation eachtimeyoupressakey,andanindependentLFO
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. runsforeachnote.Thisisthenormalsetting.
Off(unchecked):WhenKeySyncisOff,theLFO
Intensity [99+99]
startsfromthephasedeterminedbythefirstnotein
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheShape thephrase,sothattheLFOsforallnotesbeingheldare
modulation. synchronizedtogether.TheFadeandDelaysettings
willonlyapplytothefirstnotesLFO.
Frequency [0099]
ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeany NotethatevenifKeySyncisOff,eachnotesLFO
modulation.Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds,as speedmaystillbedifferentifyoumodulatethe
showninthetablebelow. Frequencybynotenumber,velocity,keyscaling,or
othernotespecificAMSsources.

85
Program mode: HD-1

Offset [99+99]
51b: Frequency Modulation
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsare
centeredaround0,andthenswingallthewayfrom Youcanusetwoalternatemodulationsources(AMS)
99to+99.ThisparameterletsyoushifttheLFOup toadjustthespeedoftheLFO.
anddown,sothatforinstanceitscenteredon50,and
thenswingsfrom49to+149.
AMS1 (Frequency) [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstmodulationsourcefortheLFOs
Forexample,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOfor
frequency.ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternate
vibrato.IftheOffsetis0,thevibratowillbecentered
ModulationSource(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
onthenotesoriginalpitch,bendingitbothupand
down. NotethatyoucanuseLFO2tomodulateLFO1s
frequency.
IftheOffsetis+99,ontheotherhand,thevibratowill
onlyraisethepitchabovetheoriginalnote. Intensity [99+99]
Offsetsettingsandpitchchangeproducedbyvibrato ThissetstheinitialamountofAMS1.TheIntensity
ModAMSthenaddstothisinitialamount.
Offset = 99 Offset = 0 Offset = +99
WhenAMS1isatitsmaximumvalue(forinstance,
Pitch whenthejoystickispushedallthewayup),theAMS
affectsthefrequencyasshownbelow:
Intensity Change to LFO Frequency
TheoneexceptiontothisistheGuitarwaveform, +99 64x
whichisdesignedtoemulatebendingastringona
+82 32x
guitarsothatthepitchonlygoesup,andnotdown.
Becauseofthis,thewaveformiscenteredon50,and +66 16x
Faster
noton0.Ofcourse,youcanalwaysuseanegative +49 8x
Offsettoshiftitbackdownbelow0again!
+33 4x
SinceOffsetaffectstheoutputvaluesoftheLFO,its
importanttonotethatitaffectsthesignalafterthe +16 2x
Shapefunction,asshownbelow: 16 1/2x
LFOSignalFlow 33 1/4x

Waveform Shape Offset 49 1/8x


Slower
66 1/16x
82 1/32x
99 1/64x

Intensity Mod AMS [List of AMS Sources]


Fade [0099]
ThisselectsasecondaryAMSmodulationsourceto
TheLFOcanfadeingradually,insteadofsimply scaletheintensityofAMS1.
startingimmediatelyatfullstrength.Thisparameter
specifiesthetimefromwhentheLFObeginstoplay ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
untilitreachesitsmaximumamplitude. Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.

IftheDelayparameterisbeingused,thenthefadewill Intensity [99+99]


beginafterthedelayiscomplete. ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheIntensity
WhenKeySyncisOff,thefadewillapplyonlytothe ModAMS.EvenifthemainAMS1Intensityissetto0,
firstnoteinthephrase. IntensityModAMScanstillcontrolthefinalamountof
AMSAoverthefull+/99range.
LFOFadeandDelay
Forexample,ifAMS1issettothePitchEG,and
Delay Fade IntensityModAMSissettoAfterTouch,positive
settingsmeanthataftertouchwillincreasetheintensity
ofthePitchEGmodulationofLFOFrequency.

AMS2 (Frequency) [List of AMS Sources]


Thisselectsthesecondmodulationsourceforthe
Note-on Note-off LFOsfrequency.ForalistofAMSsources,see
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
Delay [0099] page 1021.

ThissetsthetimefromnoteonuntiltheLFOstarts. Intensity [99+99]


WhenKeySyncisOff,thedelayappliesonlytothe ThiscontrolstheamountofmodulationfromAMS2.
firstnoteofthephrase.

86
Program P5: LFO 52: OSC1 LFO2

Times [0132]
51c: Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync
ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For
MIDI/Tempo Sync [Off, On] instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and
Timesissetto3,theLFOwillcycleoveradotted
On(checked):TheLFOwillsynchronizetothesystem
eighthnote.
tempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDIClock.
TheLFOspeedwillbecontrolledbytheBaseNoteand
Timesparameters,below.AllsettingsforFrequency t 51: Page Menu Commands
andFrequencyModulationwillbeignored.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Off(unchecked):TheFrequencysettingswill numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
determinethespeedoftheLFO,andthetempo shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
settingswillhavenoeffect. commandsonpage 142.
Base Note [r w ] 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
ThissetsabasicrhythmicvaluefortheLFOspeed, Programonpage 142.
relativetothesystemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
32ndnotetoawholenote,includingtriplets.Itapplies ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
onlywhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn.
2:SwapLFO1&2.Formoreinformation,see
SwapLFO1&2onpage 150.

52: OSC1 LFO2


ThisisOscillator1ssecondLFO.Itsparametersare
exactlythesameasthoseforthefirstLFO,asdescribed
under51:OSC1LFO1onpage 84exceptthatLFO1
cannotmodulateLFO2.

55: OSC2 LFO1


ThispagecontrolsOscillator2sfirstLFO.Itis TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto asdescribedunder51:OSC1LFO1onpage 84.
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.

56: OSC2 LFO2


ThispagecontrolsOscillator2ssecondLFO.Itis
availableonlywhentheOscillatorModeissetto
Double;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
Itsparametersareexactlythesameasthoseforthefirst
LFO,asdescribedunder51:OSC1LFO1on
page 84exceptthatLFO1cannotmodulateLFO2.

87
Program mode: HD-1

59: Common LFO


59PMC

59a

59b

59c

Thisisasingle,freerunningLFO,globalforallvoices Shape [99+99]


intheProgramlikethemodulationLFOsinsome Shapeaddscurvaturetothebasicwaveform.Formore
vintageanalogsynths. details,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1Shape,on
Differences from LFO1/2 page 85.

TheCommonLFOstartsrunningassoonasyouselect Note:ShapedoesnotaffecttheSquareandRandom3
theProgram,andonlyresetswhenyoutellittodoso waveforms,sincetheirvaluesarealwayseither+99or
explicitlyviatheResetSourcecontrol,below.Thisis 99.
differentfromLFO1/2sKeySyncparameter,which
AMS (Shape) [List of AMS Sources]
resetswheneverallnotesarereleased.
Thisselectsamodulationsourceforcontrollingthe
TheCommonLFOspersistencecanbehandyifyou LFOsShape.Modulatingtheshapecandramatically
wanttocreateaconstantrhythmwithanLFO,and altertheeffectoftheLFOtryitout!
thenplayunderneaththatrhythmwithoutre
triggeringit.Forinstance,youcanuseaMIDI ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
controllerinyoursequencertoresettheCommonLFO Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
everyfewbars,regardlessofwhatnotesarebeing
Intensity [99+99]
played.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheShape
TheCommonLFOhasmostofthesamecontrolsas modulation.
LFO1/2.However,itdoesnotincludetheDelay,Fade,
andKeySyncsettings,sincetheseonlymakesensefor Frequency [0099]
pervoiceLFOs. ThiscontrolsthespeedoftheLFO,beforeany
modulation.Highervaluesmeanfasterspeeds.Fora
59a: Common LFO completedescription,pleaseseetheentryunderLFO1
Frequency,onpage 85.
Waveform [TriangleRandom6 (Continuous)]
Frequency Fine [0099]
ThisselectsthebasicLFOwaveform.Foracomplete
listofthewaveformsandmoredetails,pleaseseethe ThisallowsyoutocontroltheLFOfrequencywith
entryunderLFO1Waveform,onpage 84. greaterprecision,givingyou98additionalstepsfor
eachstepofthemainFrequencyparameter.
Start Phase [180+180, Random] Whenthisissetto00,theLFOspeedisassetbythe
TheResetSource,describedabove,letsyouresetthe Frequencyparameter.
CommonLFO.ThisisthephasefromwhichtheLFO Whenthisissetto99,itsthesameasincreasingthe
willstartwhenitisreset. mainFrequencyvalueby1.

88
Program P5: LFO 59: Common LFO

Stop [Off, On]


On(checked):WhenStopisOn,theLFOdoesnot
advance,andtheFrequencyparametersareignored.
Instead,theLFOsimplygenerateasinglevaluewhen
theProgramisselected,andthenholdsthatvalueuntil
youselectanotherProgram,oruntilyouresettheLFO
viaAMS.
Note:thisisdifferentfromLFO1/2,inwhichthevalue
isresetwitheverynoteon.
YoucanusethisinconjunctionwiththeRandom
waveformstocreatestatic,randommodulation,with
thevaluechangingonlywhenyoufirstselectthe
Program.
Off(unchecked):WhenStopisOff,theLFOwill
functionnormally.

Reset AMS [List of AMS Sources]


ThisselectsanAMSsourcetoresettheLFOtotheStart
Phase.TheLFOresetswhentheAMSvaluepassesthe
halfwaymark:+50formostAMSsources,or64for
MIDIcontrollers.
TocreateaneffectsimilartothepervoiceLFOsKey
SyncOffsetting,setthistoGate1+Damper.

Offset [99+99]
Bydefault,almostalloftheLFOwaveformsare
centeredaround0,andthenswingallthewayfrom
99to+99.ThisparameterletsyoushifttheLFOup
anddown,sothatforinstanceitscenteredon50,and
thenswingsfrom49to+149.
Foracompletedescription,pleaseseetheentryunder
LFO1Offset,onpage 86.

59b: Frequency Modulation


TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequency
ModulationsettingsforLFO1,asdescribedunder5
1b:FrequencyModulation,onpage 86.

59c: Frequency MIDI/Tempo Sync


TheseparametersareidenticaltotheFrequency
MIDI/TempoSyncforLFO1,asdescribedunder51c:
FrequencyMIDI/TempoSync,onpage 87.

t 59: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.

89
Program mode: HD-1

Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track


EachOscillatorhastwoAMSMixers,whicharesimple Thesepagesletyoucontrolallofthesemodulation
butpowerfultoolsforcombiningandmodifyingAMS sources.
signals. NotethatwhentheOscillatorModeissettoSingle,
ThetwoOscillatorsalsosharetwoCommonkeyboard onlyOscillator1sAMSMixersareactive;thepagesfor
trackinggenerators,inadditiontothededicated Oscillator2willbegrayedout.
keyboardtrackingfortheFilterandAmp.

61: OSC 1 AMS Mixer


61PMC

61a

61b

TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone,
orprocessanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomething 61a: AMS Mixer 1
new.
Mixer Type [A+B, Amt AxB, Offset, Smoothing,
Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether, Shape, Quantize, Gate]
oruseoneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother.
Thiscontrolsthetypeofprocessingperformedby
YoucanalsousethemtochangetheshapesofLFOs
AMSMixer1.EachoftheMixerTypesisdiscussedin
andEGsinvariousways,modifytheresponseof
detailoverthenextseveralpages.
realtimecontrollers,andmore.
A+BaddstwoAMSsourcestogether.Formore
TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMS
information,seeA+Bonpage 91.
sources,justliketheLFOsandEGs.
AmtAxBscalestheamountofoneAMSsourcewith
Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputsto
theother.SeeAmtAxBonpage 91formoredetails.
theAMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance,
ifyouuseLFO1asaninputtoaAMSMixer,youcan Offsetaddsorsubtractsaconstantvaluetoorfroman
usetheprocessedversionoftheLFOtocontrolone AMSsource.Formoreinformation,seeOffseton
AMSdestination,andtheoriginalversiontocontrol page 92.
another. Smoothingcreatesmoregentletransitionsbetween
Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether, values,smoothingoutabruptchangessuchasaquick
byusingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2. moveonajoystickorasharpedgeonanLFO.For
details,seeSmoothingonpage 93
ShapeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.Foranin
depthdescription,seeShapeonpage 93.
Quantizeturnssmoothtransitionsintodiscretesteps.
SeeQuantizeonpage 94formoreinformation.

90
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track 61: OSC 1 AMS Mixer

GatechoosesbetweentwoAMSinputs(orfixed AMS B Amount [99+99]


values)basedonathirdAMSsource.SeeGateon ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSB
page 95formoreinformation. input.

A+B Amt A x B
AMSMixer,Type=A+B AMSMixer,Type=AxB

Amt A
AMS A Output

AMS B
AMS A
Output
AMS B
Amt B Amt A

Amt B ThisMixerTypeusesAMSBtoscaletheamountof
AMSA.Forinstance,youcancontroltheamount
A+BmergestwoAMSsourcesintoone.Thiscanbe LFO1withtheFilterEG,orcontroltheamountofthe
handywhenyouneedtoaddonemoremodulation PitchEGwiththeribbon.
sourcetoaparameter,butyouvealreadyusedupall AMSMixerAmtAxBexample
oftheavailableAMSslots.
Forinstance,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOto
modulateFilterResonance,andthenyoudecidethatit AMS A: LFO
wouldbeinterestingtoscalethatparameterwithan
EGaswell.ResonancehasonlyasingleAMSinput,
butyoucaneasilymergetheLFOandtheEGtogether
usingtheA+BAMSMixer:
AMS B: EG
1. AssigntheLFOtoAMSA.
2. AssigntheEGtoAMSB.
3. AssigntheAMSMixerastheFilterResonance
AMSsource.
AMSMixerA+Bexample Amt A*B Output

AMS A: LFO
AMS A [List of AMS Sources]
ThisselectsthefirstAMSsource,whichcanthenbe
scaledbyAMSB.ForalistofAMSsources,see
AMS B: EG
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
page 1021.

AMS A Amount [99+99]


ThiscontrolstheinitialamountofAMSA,before
A+B Output modulationfromAMSB.InputfromAMSBthenadds
tothisinitialamount.
EvenifAmountAissetto0,AMSBcanstillcontrol
AMS A [List of AMS Sources] thefinalamountofAMSAoverthefull+/99range.
ThisselectsthefirstAMSinput. AMS B [List of AMS Sources]
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation ThisselectsthesecondAMSsource,toscalethe
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. amountofAMSA.ForalistofAMSsources,see
AlternateModulationSource(AMS)Liston
AMS A Amount [99+99]
page 1021.
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSA
input. AMS B Amount [99+99]
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheAMSB
AMS B [List of AMS Sources]
modulationofAMSA.
ThisselectsthesecondAMSinput.
Forexample,ifAMSAissettoLFO1andAMSBis
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation settotheFilterEG,positivesettingsmeanthattheEG
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021. willincreasetheamountofLFO1.

91
Program mode: HD-1

Tips for using Amt A x B AMSMixerOffsetexamples

Using SW 1/2 to turn an AMS source on and off AMS A: LFO


YoucanuseAmtAxBtogateanAMSsource: +99
1. SetAMSAtothedesiredsource,andsetAMSA
0
Amountto0.
2. SetAMSBtoSW1or2,andAMSBAmountto 99
+99.
Now,SW1or2willturnAMSAonandoff. Offset = +50, Amount = 50
Muting individual Wave Sequence steps with SW1 +99
YoucanuseAMSMixersinconjunctionwiththeAMS
0
outputsofWaveSequences.Forinstance,youcanuse
SW1toturnoneormorestepsofaWaveSequenceon 99
oroff.Todothis:
1. IntheOscillatorwhichusestheWaveSequence,
Offset = 99, Amount = +199
setanAMSMixertoAmtA*B.
2. IntheAMSMixer,setAMSAtoWaveSequence +99

AMSOutput2. 0
InthesameAMSMixer:
99
3. SetAMSBtoSW1.
4. SetAMSAAmountto0. Clipped
5. SetAMSBAmountto+99. at Output

Now,SW1willgateWaveSequenceAMSOutput2.
Next,intheWaveSequence:
AMS A [List of AMS Sources]
6. Forthestep(s)youdliketomute,settheAMS ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobeoffset.
Output2to+99.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Leaveallotherstepssetto00.
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
BackintheOscillatorwhichusestheWaveSequence:
AMS A Amount [199+199]
7. SettheAmpAMSsourcetotheAMSmixeryou
setupinstep1,above. ThiscontrolsthebasiclevelofAMSA.
8. SettheAMSIntensityto99. +199doublestheoriginalsignallevel,while199
doublesthelevelandinvertsthephase.Thevaluesare
Now,whenSW1isOn,thestepsyousetupin(6)will
clippedonlyattheoutput;internally,theycanbe
bemuted.
greaterthanthenormalrangeof99to+99.
WhenSW1isOff,theyllsoundnormally.
AMS A Offset [199+199]
ThiscontrolstheamountofoffsetforAMSA.
Offset
SettingOffsetto+199shiftsanAMSinputof99allthe
AMSMixer,Type=Offset wayto+99.InconjunctionwithhighAmountvalues,
thiscanbeusefulforcreatingclippedshapes,suchas
Amt A Offset A
showninthelastoftheAMSMixerOffsetexamples,
above.
AMS A Output
Tips for using Offset
Thissimpleprocessoraddsaconstantpositiveor Converting from bipolar to unipolar
negativeoffsettoanAMSsource,andalsoallowsyou YoucanusetheOffsetfunctiontoconvertabipolar
todoublethegain.Amongotherthings,youcanuse AMSsource(bothnegativeandpositive),suchasan
thistoconvertabipolarAMSsource(bothnegative LFO,toaunipolarsignal(positiveonly).Todoso:
andpositive)toaunipolarsource(positiveonly),or
viceversa. 1. SelecttheLFOastheAMSAinput.
2. SettheAMSAAmountto50.
ThiscutstheoverallleveloftheLFOinhalf,sothat
insteadofswingingbetween99and+99,itonly
swingsbetween50and+50.
3. SettheAMSAOffsetto50.
ThisshiftstheLFOsignalup,sothatitnowswings
between0and+99.

92
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track 61: OSC 1 AMS Mixer

Converting from unipolar to bipolar ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation


Similarly,youcanconvertaunipolarAMSsource Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
(positiveonly),suchasaknob,joystick,etc.,toa AMS A Attack [00+99]
bipolarsignal(bothnegativeandpositive).Todoso:
Thiscontrolstheattacktimeofthesmoother,orhow
1. SelecttheAMSsourceastheAMSAinput. longittakesthesmoothertoreachanew,highervalue.
2. SettheAMSAAmountto+199. HigherAttacksettingsmeanlongertimes.
ThisdoublestheoverallleveloftheAMSsource,so
DependingonhowquicklytheAMSinputvalueis
thatinsteadofrangingfrom0to+99,itnowgoesfrom
changing,highAttacksettingsmaymeanthatthe
0to+199.
valueisneverquitereached,asshowninAMSMixer
3. SettheAMSAOffsetto100. Shapeexamples,above.
ThisshiftstheAMSsignaldown,sothatitrangesfrom
AMS A Decay [00+99]
99to+99.
Thiscontrolsthedecaytimeofthesmoother,orhow
longittakesthesmoothertoreachanew,lowervalue.
Smoothing
HigherDecaysettingsmeanlongertimes.
ThisMixerTypesmoothsouttheAMSinput,creating
moregentletransitionsbetweenvalues.Youhave
separatecontroloftheamountofsmoothingduring Shape
theattack(whenthesignalisincreasing)anddecay ThisMixerTypeaddscurvaturetotheAMSinput.
(whenitsdecreasing). Shapecancreatecustomcontrollercurves,suchas
ThehighertheAttackandDecaysettings,themore exponentialjoystick,logarithmicvelocity,andsoon.It
thattheinputwillbesmoothed. canalsoaltertheshapeofprogrammablemodulation
sources,suchasEGsandLFOs.
Lowsettingsprovidesubtlecontrollersmoothing,
creatingmoregradualaftertouch,forinstance.Higher Note:ShapeonlyaffectsAMSsignalswhichalready
settingscreateautofadeeffects,transformingaquick havesomeamountofslope,suchasEGs,triangleand
gestureintoalongerfadeinand/orfadeoutevent. sineLFOs,andsoon.Itdoesnotaffectsignalswhich
onlycontainabrupttransitions,suchassquarewaves.
Smoothingcanalsobeusedtoaltertheshapeof
programmablemodsources,suchasLFOsandEGs. AMS A [List of AMS Sources]
Forinstance,youcanturnablipintoasimple
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobeshaped.
envelopeshape,asshownbelow.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
AMSMixerSmoothingexamples
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Original AMS A: Smoothing with Long Attack Mode [Symmetric, Asymmetric]
and Short Release:
ThisselectswhetherShapewillproduceoneortwo
curves.ThegraphicAMSMixerShapeexamples
mayhelptovisualizehowthisworks.
Asymmetricwillproduceasinglecurve,extending
from99to+99.
Smoothing with Short Attack & Long Release:
Symmetricwillproducetwomatchingcurves
extendingoutwardsfrom0to99and+99,
respectively.

AMS A [List of AMS Sources]


ThisselectstheAMSsourcetobesmoothed.

HeresahandychartwhichshowstheresultsofShapewiththedifferentsettingsandinputtypes:
Mode Input Shape Result
Positive (+) emphasizes upper value range
Unipolar
Negative (-) emphasizes lower value range
Symmetric emphasizes both upper and lower value ranges,
Positive (+)
Bipolar and de-emphasizes the center
Negative () emphasizes center value range, around 0
Positive (+) emphasizes extreme upper range, with offset
Unipolar
Negative () emphasizes extreme lower range, with offset
Asymmetric
Positive (+) emphasizes upper value range
Bipolar
Negative () emphasizes lower value range

93
Program mode: HD-1

Shape [99+99] Withunipolarsources,itsalmostalwaysbettertouse


Thiscontrolstheamountofcurvature,andwhetherthe theSymmetricmode.TheAsymmetricmodecan
curvesareconcaveorconvex.Asyoucanseeinthe causeoffsetsandotherstrangeresults.
graphicexamples,theshapewilltendtoemphasize
certainvalueranges,anddeemphasizeothers. Quantize
Forexample,letssaythatyouareusingatriangle
ThisMixerTypechangestheinputfromacontinuous
LFO,throughShape,tomodulatefiltercutoff.IfShape
signalintoaseriesofdiscretesteps.Insteadofmoving
emphasizesthehighvaluerange,thefilterwillspend
smoothlybetweenvalues,itwillsnapimmediately
moretimeatthehigherfrequencies.Ifitemphasizes
fromonevaluetoanother.
thelowrange,thefilterwillspendmoretimeatthe
lowerfrequencies. YoucanusethistochangetheshapeofLFOsorEGs,or
toforceacontrollertolandonafewspecificvalues.
AMSMixerShapeexamples
AMSMixerQuantizeexamples
Bipolar Triangle Wave
Asymmetric Unipolar (e.g., JS+Y) Bipolar (e.g., LFO)

+99 +99
Original 0
0
AMS A
99
99

Symmetric +99
Quantize 0
+99
Steps = 8
0 99

99
+99
Quantize 0
Bipolar Sawtooth Wave Steps = 16
Asymmetric Symmetric 99

+99
AMS A [List of AMS Sources]
0
ThisselectstheAMSinputsourcetobequantized.
99
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
Unipolar Triangle Wave
Asymmetric Symmetric AMS A # Of Steps [232]
(not recommended) Thiscontrolstheseverityoftheeffect.Thelowerthe
numberofsteps,themoresteppytheoutputwillbe.
+99
Forinstance,whenthisissetto2,therewillbesteps
0
at0,50,and99.WithabipolarAMSinput,therewill
99 alsobestepsat50and99.
Asanotherexample,whenitissetto5,therewillbe
Shape = 0 (original waveform) stepsat0,20,40,60,80,and99(aswellas20,40,60,
Shape = +99 80,and99forbipolarinputs).
Shape = 99
Tips for using Quantize
Bipolar and Unipolar AMS sources Quantized Ribbon Pitch Bend
TounderstandShape,ithelpstounderstandthe YoucaneasilyusetheRibbontocreatequantizedpitch
differencebetweenbipolarandunipolarAMSsources. bend,forfretdraggingeffects,brassrips,andmore.To
Bipolarsourcescanswingallthewayfrom99to+99, doso:
with0inthemiddle.MostLFOsarebipolar,for 1. SelecttheAMSMixerastheOscillatorPitchAMS
instance;soisPitchBend. input.
Generally,bipolarAMSsourceswillworkbetterwith 2. SetthePitchAMSIntensitytoanyexacthalfstep
theAsymmetricmode,butSymmetricmayalso value,suchas+5.00,+7.00,etc.
produceinterestingresults. 3. SettheRibbonamountto0.00.
Unipolarsourcesonlygofrom0to99,with50inthe 4. IntheAMSMixer,selecttheRibbonasAMSA.
middle.MIDIcontrollers,suchasJS+Y(CC#1),areall
5. SettheAMSA#ofStepstothesamenumberyou
unipolar.Inpractice,EGsareusuallyprogrammedto
usedinStep2.
beunipolar,eventhoughtheFilterandPitchEGsdo
allowbothpositiveandnegativelevels.

94
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track 61: OSC 1 AMS Mixer

Now,playingtheRibbonwillcreatequantizedpitch Gate Output


bends.JSXwillstillproducesmoothpitchbends,as
usual,soyoucanusebothtechniquestogether. IfthevalueoftheControlSourceislessthanthe
Threshold,theGateoutputsthepresetvalueorAMS
sourceselectedunderBelowThreshold.
Gate IfthevalueoftheControlSourceisgreaterthanor
AMSMixer,Type=Gate equaltotheThreshold,theGateoutputsthepreset
valueorAMSsourceselectedunderAt&Above
Control Threshold.

Below Threshold [Fixed Value, AMS A]


Fixed Value
Below ThisselectswhetherBelowThresholdusesapreset
AMS value,ortheselectedAMSsource.

Fixed Value Fixed Value [-99+99]


At & Above
AMS Thisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhenthe
ControlSourceislessthantheThreshold.Thisonly
ThisMixerTypeletsyousetuptwodifferentAMS applieswhenBelowThresholdissettoFixedValue.
sources(orfixedAMSamounts),andthenswitch
AMS A [List of AMS Sources]
betweenthetwousingathirdAMSsource.
ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughthe
Itssimilartoanaudiogatewithasidechain,butwith
GatewhentheControlSourceislessthanthe
evenmoreflexibilitysinceyougettochoosewhat
Threshold.ThisonlyapplieswhenBelowThreshold
happenswhenthegateisclosed(belowthethreshold),
issettoAMSA.
aswellaswhenitsopen(abovethethreshold).
Youcanalsochoosewhetherthegatewillbeableto At & Above Threshold [Fixed Value, AMS B]
openandclosecontinuouslyinresponsetothecontrol ThisselectswhetherAt&AboveThresholdusesa
source,orwhetheritonlyopensorclosesatthe presetvalue,ortheselectedAMSsource.
beginningofthenote,andthenstaysthatwayoverthe
notesentireduration. Fixed Value [-99+99]
YoucanusetheGateto: Thisletsyousetaspecificvaluetobeusedwhenthe
ControlSourceisgreaterthanorequaltothe
Useafootswitch(orothercontroller)toapply Threshold.ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&Above
pitchbendorothereffectstosomenotes,butnotto ThresholdissettoFixedValue.
others
Applycontrollerstoaparameteronlyafterthe AMS B [List of AMS Sources]
controllerreachesacertainthresholdforinstance, ThisletsyousetanAMSsourcetopassthroughthe
useVelocitytocontrolharmonicsintheSTR1,but GatewhentheControlSourceisgreaterthanorequal
onlyonceVelocityisgreaterthan90 totheThreshold.ThisonlyapplieswhenAt&Above
Useajoystick,switch,orothercontrollertoswitch ThresholdissettoAMSB.
betweentwodifferentLFOs(oranytwoAMS
sources)
Tips for using Gate
Selective pitch-bend, using a switch
Gate Control
YoucanuseControlatNoteOnOnlytoapplyaneffect
Source [List of AMS Sources] tosomenotes,butnotothers,basedonthestateofan
ThisselectstheAMSsourcetocontrolthegate. AMSsourceatthestartofthenote.Forinstance:
1. SettheControlSourcetoAssignableFootSwitch
Control at Note-On Only [Check-box]
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn(checked).
Whenthisisenabled(checked),thevalueofthe
3. SettheThresholdto50.
ControlSourceatnoteonwillselecttheoutput
(BelowThresholdorAt&AboveThreshold).The 4. SetBelowThresholdtoaFixedValueof00.
selectedoutputwillthenremainactivethroughoutthe 5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoAMSB:Ribbon
durationofthenote,regardlessofanysubsequent (CC#16).
changeintheControlSourcesvalue. 6. OnthePitchModpage,assigntheAMSMixerto
Notethattheoutputvalueitselfcancontinueto controlthepitch.
change;onlytheselectionofBeloworAt&Aboveis 7. AlsoonPitchMod,setthestandardRibbon
fixed. amountto0.
Threshold [-99+99] Thisway,onlytheAMSMixersprocessedversionof
theRibbonwillaffectthepitch.
ThissetsthevalueoftheControlSourceatwhichthe
gateopensorcloses. 8. Withthefootswitchoff,playachord,andholdit
throughstep9.
9. Pressdownonandholdthefootswitch,andthen
playanewnoteabovethechord.

95
Program mode: HD-1

10.Usetheribbontobendthepitchofthenewnote. Generating a static value


Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played Sometimes,itcanbehandytohaveapresetvalueasan
beforeyoupressedonthefootswitch)willnot. AMSsource.TheGateisonewaytocreatethis.Todo
so:
Selective pitch-bend, using only the joystick
1. SetbothBelowThresholdandAt&Above
YoucanalsouseasingleAMSsourceasboththe
ThresholdtoFixedValue,andenterthesame
ControlSourceandavaluesource:
valueintoeach.
1. SettheControlSourcetoJSX. Now,theAMSmixerwillalwaysgeneratethisstatic
2. SetControlAtNoteOnOnlytoOn(checked). value.
3. SettheThresholdto00.
4. SetBelowThresholdtoAMSA:JSX. 61b: AMS Mixer 2
5. SetAt&AboveThresholdtoaFixedValueof00.
ThisisthesecondAMSMixerforOscillator1.The
6. OnthePitchModpage,assigntheAMSMixerto parametersareexactlythesameasthoseforAMS
controlthepitch. Mixer1,asdescribedunder61a:AMSMixer1on
7. AlsoonPitchMod,setthestandardJS+XandJSX page 90.
amountsto0.
Thisway,onlytheAMSMixersprocessedversionof t 61: Page Menu Commands
thejoystickwillaffectthepitch.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
8. Withthejoystickinthecenter,playachord,and numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
holditthroughstep9. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
9. Bendthejoysticktotheleft,andthenplayanew commandsonpage 142.
noteabovethechord.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
10.Usethejoysticktobendthepitchofthenewnote. Programonpage 142.
Thenewnotewillbend,buttheoriginalchord(played 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
beforeyoubentthejoystickdown)willnot.This ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
methodisparticularlygoodforbendingthetopnoteof
achorduptopitch. 2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
CopyOscillatoronpage 148.
3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
SwapOscillatoronpage 148.

65: OSC 2 AMS Mix


ThispagecontrolsthetwoAMSMixersforOscillator
2.TheseareavailableonlywhentheOscillatorMode
issettoDouble;ifnot,thepagewillbegrayedout.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforOscillator1,
asdescribedunder61:OSC1AMSMixer,on
page 90.

96
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track 69: Common Keyboard Track

69: Common Keyboard Track


69PMC

69a

69b

ThetwoOscillatorssharetwoCommonkeyboard CommonKeyboardTracking
trackinggenerators,inadditiontoeachOscillators
dedicatedkeyboardtrackingfortheFilterandAmp. At the Center Key, the AMS value is always 0.
YoucanusetheseCommonkeytracksasAMSsources
AMS Ramp:
formodulatingmostAMSdestinations.
+99 +99
TheCommonKeyTrackparametersaresharedbythe +50
entireProgram,buttheactualAMSvaluesare Ramp = +99 00
Ramp:
calculatedindividuallyforeachvoice. +99 50
0
99
What does Keyboard Tracking do? 99 Ramp = 50

Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingletsyouvarythe
modulationamountasyouplayupanddownthe 99
keyboard.Thiscanbeusefulformakingthetimbre AMS
consistentacrosstheentirerange,oradjusting
parametersaccordingtopitch.
Low Break Center High Break
TheOASYSkeyboardtrackingcanbefairlycomplex,if
desired.Youcancreatedifferentratesofchangeover
uptofourdifferentpartsofthekeyboard.Forinstance, How it works: Keys and Ramps
youcan:
Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps,
Makethemodulationincreaseveryquicklyover orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.The
themiddleofthekeyboard,andthenincreasemore bottomandtopkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopof
slowlyornotatallinthehigheroctaves. theMIDIrange,respectively.Youcansettheother
Makethemodulationincreaseasyouplayloweron threekeysnamedLowBreak,Center,andHigh
thekeyboard. Breaktobeanywhereinbetween.

Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchange
effects. betweeneachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLow
CenterRampissetto0,thevaluewillstaythesame
betweentheLowBreakkeyandtheCenterkey.
Youcanthinkoftheresultingshapeasbeingliketwo
foldingdoorsattachedtoahingeinthecenter.Atthe
Centerkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtrackinghas
noeffect.Thetwofoldingdoorsswingoutfromthis
centerpointtocreatechangesinthehigherandlower
rangesofthekeyboard.

97
Program mode: HD-1

ThetablebelowshowshowtherampsaffecttheAMS
69a: Keyboard Track 1 output:

Key Ramp value AMS change


Inf goes to 99 in 1 half-step
Low Break [C1G9]
99 20 per octave
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwolower
rampsthehingeofthelowerdoor. 50 10 per octave

Center [C1G9] 0 no change

Thissetsthecenterofthekeyboardtrackingthemain +50 +10 per octave


hinge.Atthiskey,thekeyboardtrackinghasno +99 +20 per octave
effectontheAMSdestinations.
+Inf goes to +99 in 1 half-step
High Break [C1G9]
Thissetsthebreakpointnotebetweenthetwohigher +Inf and Inf ramps
rampsthehingeoftheupperdoor. +InfandInfarespecialsettingswhichcreateabrupt
changesforsplitlikeeffects.Whenarampissetto+Inf
Entering notes from the keyboard orInf,thekeyboardtrackingwillgotoitsextreme
Youcanenternotenumbersdirectlybyplayingthem highestorlowestvalueoverthespanofasinglekey.
onthekeyboard.Todoso: +InfandInfRamps
1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters.
2. HolddowntheENTERkey.
3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe Ramp = +Inf
keyboard.

Ramp
Positiverampvaluesmeanthatthekeyboardtracking
outputincreasesasyouplayfartherfromtheCenter
Key;negativerampvaluesmeanthatitdecreases. Ramp = 50
Becauseofthis,themeaningsofpositiveandnegative
rampsettingswillchangedependingonwhetherthe
Ramp = Inf
rampistotheleftorrightoftheCenterKey.
BottomLowandLowCenter:negativerampsmake
thekeyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplay Low Break Center High Break
loweronthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmakethe
outputgohigher.
Note:ifyousettheCenterHighrampto+InforInf,
CenterHighandHighTop:negativerampsmakethe theHighTopparameterwillbegrayedout.Similarly,
keyboardtrackingsoutputgodownasyouplayhigher ifyousettheLowCenterrampto+InforInf,the
onthekeyboard,andpositiverampsmaketheoutput BottomLowrampwillbegrayedout.
goup.

Bottom-Low [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] 69b: Keyboard Track 2


ThissetstheslopebetweenthebottomoftheMIDI ThisisthesecondCommonkeyboardtracking
noterangeandtheLowBreakkey.Fornormalkey generator.
track,usenegativevalues.
Itsparametersareexactlythesameasthosefor
Low-Center [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] KeyboardTrack1,asdescribedunder69a:Keyboard
ThissetstheslopebetweentheLowBreakandCenter Track1onpage 98.
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usenegativevalues.

Center-High [Inf, 99+99, +Inf]


t 69: Page Menu Commands
ThissetstheslopebetweentheCenterandHighBreak ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
keys.Fornormalkeytrack,usepositivevalues. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
High-Top [Inf, 99+99, +Inf] commandsonpage 142.
ThissetstheslopebetweentheHighBreakkeyandthe 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
topoftheMIDInoterange.Fornormalkeytrack,use Programonpage 142.
positivevalues.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
CopyOscillatoronpage 148.

98
Program P6: AMS Mixer/Common Key Track 69: Common Keyboard Track

3:SwapOscillators.Formoreinformation,see
SwapOscillatoronpage 148.

99
Program mode: HD-1

Program P7: KARMA


ThispagesletyoucontroltheProgramsKARMA Normally,whenyouselectanewProgram,its
settings.InProgrammode,youcanuseoneKARMA KARMAsettingswillbeloadedaswell.Insomecases,
Module(ModuleA). however,youmaywishtotryoutdifferentPrograms
whilekeepingtheKARMAsettingsthesame.
Turning KARMA on and off
TheGlobalBasicpageLoadKARMASettingswhen
KARMAcanbeenabledordisabledforthecurrent changingparametersletyouselectbetweenthesetwo
ProgrambyusingthefrontpanelKARMAON/OFF behaviors.ThereareseparatesettingsforPrograms,
switch.YoucanalsotemporarilydisableKARMAfor Combis,andSongs.Tosetthisup:
allPrograms,Combinations,andSongsbyusingthe
GlobalAllKARMAOffparameter.Formore 1. GototheGlobalBasicpage.
information,seeAllKARMAOffonpage 701. 2. UnderLoadKARMAsettingwhenchanging,set
theProgramscheckboxasdesired.
Linking KARMA settings to Program changes
ChecktheboxtoloadtheindividualPrograms
KARMAsettingscanbesavedindividuallyforeach KARMAsettings.
Program.ThisincludesalloftheKARMArelated
frontpanelbuttons,sliders,andknobs,aswellasthe UnchecktheboxtokeepKARMAsettingsthesame,
onscreenparameters. evenwhenchangingPrograms.
Formoreinformation,seetheGlobalparameterLoad
KARMAsettingswhenchangingonpage 701.

71: GE Setup/Key Zones


71PMC

71a

ThispageletsyouselecttheGEusedbytheKARMA
Module,andsetuptheKeyZoneinwhichitoperates. 71a: Program Name, Load GE Options,
KARMA T.Sig, Tempo
Bank [INTAF, GM, g(19), g(d), USERAG]
Bank Type [HD-1, EXi]
Program [0127 (INT and USER Banks),
1128 (GM Banks)]
Thesearethecurrentbank,banktype(HD1orEXi),
andProgram.Formoreinformation,see11a:
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 33.

100
Program P7: KARMA 71: GE Setup/Key Zones

Tab
Preset
GE Bank

User
GE Bank

RTC Model
Name

q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] *MadebyKarmaLab(http://www.karmalab.com).


ThisisthecurrentTempo.Formoreinformation,see MacintoshandWindowsaresupported.English
11a:ProgramNameandTempoonpage 33. versiononly.

Load GE Options [Dialogue] GE Bank Select [PresetUSER-L]


Theseoptionsletyouspecifywhetherthevaluesand ThisselectstheGEbank.ThePresetbankispartofthe
assignmentsfortheKARMASLIDERSandSWITCHES systemsoftware;Userbankscanbeloadedfromdisk.
willbesetautomatically,beinitialized,orbepreserved Formoreinformation,seeGESelect,above.
whenyouselectaGE. GE Category Select [ArpeggioReal-Time]
Foradetaileddescriptionofthisparameter,pleasesee ThisletsyouselectaGEbycategory,fromArpeggio
LoadGEOptionsonpage 7. throughRealTime.Formoreinformation,pleasesee
06b:GESelectonpage 8.
KARMA T.Sig (Time Signature)
[GE/TS, 1/416/4, 1/816/8, 1/1616/16] RTC Model [List of RTC Models]
Thisspecifiesthetimesignatureofthephrasesor ThisshowstheGEsRTCModel,asspecifiedinternally
patternsgeneratedbytheKARMAModules.The foreachpresetGE.Formoreinformation,seeRTC
internaltimesignatureofthephraseorpatternis Modelonpage 198oftheOperationGuide.
determinedbytheGE,butyoucansetthisparameter
tochangethetimesignature. Key Zone
GE/TS:Theinitialtimesignaturespecifiedbyeach TheKARMAModuleiscontrolledbyinputnotedata
KARMAModulewillbeused. innumerousways,includingthevariationofphraseor
1/416/16:Specifythedesiredtimesignature.In patternproducedbytheGE,bytrigger,andbychord
CombinationandSequencermodes,thiswillchange detection.
thetimesignatureforallfourKARMAModules. Hereyoucanspecifytherangeofnotedata(KeyZone)
thatwillcontroltheKARMAModule.
GE Setup
Note:withintheKeyZonespecifiedBottomandTop
GE Select [Preset 00002047, USER-A ValueswillbeinputintotheKARMAfunction,while
U-A000...U-A127, ..., USER-L U-L000...U-L127] notesoutsidetheKeyZonemaybeusedforother
functions,orechoedthru.
ThisselectstheGEfortheKARMAmodule.Thereare
atotalof3,584tochoosefrom:2,048presetGEs,and Note:InProgrammode,allMIDIdatafortheKARMA
1,536rewritableUserGEs(12banksof128each). ModuleistransmittedandreceivedontheGlobal
MIDIchannel(Global21).
PresetGEsarepartofthesystemsoftware.
UserGEsmaybeincludedwithnewbanksofsounds, Bottom (Key Zone Bottom) [C1G9]
andcanalsobecreatedusingKARMAOASYS Specifiesthebottomkey(lowerlimit)oftheKeyZone.
software(dedicatedsoftwarefortheOASYS*).For
moreinformationonloadingUserGEs,seeLoad Top (Key Zone Top) [C1G9]
.KGEonpage 773. Specifiesthetopkey(upperlimit)oftheKeyZone.
Note:Theseparameterscanalsobesetbyholding
downtheEnterswitchandpressinganote.

101
Program mode: HD-1

Thru In Zone [Off, On]


t 7-1: Page Menu Commands
On(checked):NotedatafromkeyswithintheKey
ZonewillbeinputtotheKARMAModule,andwill ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
alsobeinputdirectlytothetonegenerator. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
WhenyouplayakeywithintheKeyZone,thephrase
commandsonpage 142.
orpatterngeneratedbytheKARMAModulewill
sound,aswillthenoteitself. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
Off(unchecked):Onlythephraseorpatterngenerated
byKARMAwillsound.KeysplayedwithintheKey 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Zonewillnotsound. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
Transpose In Zone [36+36]
seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
Specifiesthetransposesettingappliedtonotedata
fromwithintheKeyZone. 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
Makethissettingifyouwishtoapplyatransposition page 151.
insemitonestepstothepitchofnotesplayedfromthe
keyboardwhenThruInZoneisOn(checked). 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Sceneonpage 151.
Thru Out Zone [Off, On] 5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
On(checked):NotedatafromkeysoutsidetheKey Sceneonpage 151.
Zonewillbeinputdirectlytothetonegenerator.(They 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
willnotbeinputtotheKARMAModule,sincetheyare seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
outsidethekeyzone.)Whenyouplaykeysoutsidethe
keyzone,thetonegeneratorwillsound.
Off(unchecked):Thetonegeneratorwillnotsound
evenifyouplaykeysoutsidetheKeyZone.

Transpose Out Zone [36+36]


Specifiesthetransposesettingappliedtonotedata
fromkeysoutsidetheKeyZone.
Makethissettingifyouwishtoapplyatransposition
insemitonestepstothepitchofnotesplayed
conventionallyfromthekeyboardwhenThruOut
ZoneisOn(checked).
Youcouldselectabassprogramandmakethesettings
shownbelow.
Example
UsingtheKARMAModuletocontrolthebasslinein
thelowerrangeofthekeyboard,andplayinginreal
timeintheupperrange.

Key Zone Bottom Key Zone Top

KARMA Module Key Zone

Thru In Zone Thru Out Zone


Transpose In Zone Transpose Out Zone

Playing in real-time
Bass line
Tone generator

Module Zone Display

Asolidblueline(greenwhileyoureeditingthekey
zone)indicatesthespecifiedKeyZone.
NotesandmessagesfromtheMIDIINconnector
withinthiszonewillbeinputtotheKARMAModule.

102
Program P7: KARMA 72: MIDI Filter/CC Offset

72: MIDI Filter/CC Offset


72PMC

72a

72b

72c

InthispageyoucanmakeMIDIrelatedsettingsforthe WhentheKARMAfunctionison,theMIDIcontrol
KARMAfunction.Youcanspecifythefollowing datareceivedbytheKARMAModulewillbe
settings. transmittedtothetonegeneratorwithoutchange.
MIDIfilteringfortheKARMAmodule Dependingonthesesettings,youcan(forexample)
makesettingssothatthedamperpedalisenabled
MIDIcontrolchangemessagestransmittedwhen whentheKARMAModuleisoff,anddisabledwhenit
theKARMAfunctionisturnedon(CCOffset ison.(Seethediagrambelow,KARMA
parameters) Receive/TransmitFilter.)
ThesesettingsdonotaffecttheDynamicMIDI(77)
72a: Program Name and Tempo settings.IfyouhavespecifiedMIDIcontroldataas
theDynamicMIDIsource,itwillbevalidregardless
Bank [INTAF, GM, g(19), g(d), USERAG] ofthesesettings.
Bank Type [HD-1, EXi] After Touch [Off, On]
Program [(0127 (INT and USER Banks), SpecifieswhetherMIDIaftertouchmessageswillbe
1128 (GM Banks)] echoedtothetonegenerator.

q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT] Pitch Bend [Off, On]


Thesearethecurrentbank,banktype(HD1orEXi), SpecifieswhetherMIDIpitchbendmessageswillbe
Program,andTempo.Formoreinformation,see11a: echoedtothetonegenerator.
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 33. Damper (CC#64) [Off, On]
SpecifieswhetherMIDIcontrolchangemessage#64
72b: MIDI Filter Sustain(damperpedal)willbeechoedtothetone
generator.
Receive MIDI Filter
JS+Y (JS+Y CC#01) [Off, On]
Thisspecifieswhetherfilterswillbeappliedtothe
MIDIcontroldatareceivedbytheKARMAModule SpecifieswhetherMIDIcontrolchangemessage#1
beforeitispassedon(echoed)tothetonegenerator. (internaljoystick+Ydirection,specifiedasthe
assignmentofarealtimecontrolknob,orVectorCC
On(checked):ThecorrespondingMIDIdatawillbe control)willbeechoedtothetonegenerator.
echoedtothetonegenerator.
Off(unchecked):ThecorrespondingMIDIdatawill
notbeechoedtothetonegenerator.

103
Program mode: HD-1

KARMA function
KARMA Module
MIDI IN Receive MIDI
Filter

Transmit MIDI Tone


GE
Filter generator

OASYSs controllers Dynamic MIDI

JS-Y (JS-Y CC#02) [Off, On] WhentheKARMAfunctionisonandtheKARMA


SpecifieswhetherMIDIcontrolchangemessage#2 Moduleisproducingpitchbenddata,thepitch
(internaljoystickYdirection,specifiedasthe bendrangeoftheprogramwillbecontrolledas
assignmentofarealtimecontrolknob,orVectorCC follows.
control)willbeechoedtothetonegenerator. ThepitchbendrangespecifiedwithinKARMAGE
willautomaticallybetransmittedfromtheKARMA
Ribbon (CC#16) [Off, On] Module,andsetwithintheprogram.Thisensures
SpecifieswhetherMIDIcontrolchangemessage#16 thatthepitchbenddataproducedbytheGEofthe
(internalribboncontroller,specifiedastheassignment KARMAwillfunctioncorrectly.Atthistime,the
ofarealtimecontrolknob,orVectorCCControl)will pitchbenddataproducedwhenyouoperatethe
beechoedtothetonegenerator. joystickwillautomaticallybeoptimizedsothatit
willproducethesamebendeffectasiftheKARMA
Other CC [Off, On] wereoff(inmostcases).
SpecifieswhetherMIDIcontrolchangemessagesother
thantheabovewillbeechoedtothetonegenerator. CCA/CCB [Off, On]
SpecifieswhethertotransmitthevariousMIDI
Transmit MIDI Filter messagesgeneratedbyCCA/CCBoftheGEselected
SpecifieswhetherfilteringwillbeappliedtotheMIDI bytheKARMAModule.
controldataproducedbytheGEselectedforthe HoweverifCCA/CCBareproducingpitchbend
KARMAModule.(Seethediagramonthepreceding messages,thesesettingswillbeignored,andthe
page,KARMAReceive/TransmitFilter.) GEBendsettingwillbeused.
On(checked):ThecorrespondingMIDIdatawillbe Envelope1/Envelope2/Envelope3 [Off, On]
transmittedfromtheKARMAModule.
SpecifieswhethertotransmitthevariousMIDI
Off(unchecked):ThecorrespondingMIDIdatawill messagesorotherfunctionsgeneratedbyEnvelope1,
notbetransmittedfromtheKARMAModule. Envelope2,andEnvelope3oftheGEselectedbythe
Note:TheGEcanalsoautomaticallyproducepitch KARMAModule.
bendandvarioustypesofcontrolchangemessagesin IfEnvelope1,Envelope2,orEnvelope3are
additiontonotedata.Threeenvelopegeneratorscan producingpitchbendmessages,thesesettingswill
alsobeusedtoapplytimevariantchangetovelocity, beignored,andtheGEBendsettingwillbeused.
tempo,duration,andvariouscontrolchangessuchas
pitchbend,JS+Y(CC#1)etc. GE Notes [Off, On]
Thedatathatisoutputwilldependonthesettingsof SpecifieswhethertheMIDInoteon/noteoffmessages
theparametersfortheselectedGE.Forexample, generatedbytheKARMAModulewillbetransmitted.
transmitting/filteringpitchbendwillproducenoresult Note:Thissettingletsyoumutethenotephrases
iftheGEhasnotbeendesignedtoproducepitchbend generatedbytheKARMAModule,anduseonlythe
data.Formoreinformation,pleaseseetheVoice controldatageneratedfromtheKARMAModule(e.g.,
NameListonpage 1099. pan,filtercutoff,resonance)toapplymodulationto
phrasesorchordsyouyourselfplayonthekeyboard.
Pitch Bend [Off, On]
SpecifieswhethertotransmittheMIDIpitchbend WaveSeq [Off, On]
messagesgeneratedbytheGEselectedforthe Specifieswhetherthewavesequencedata
KARMAModule. (multisamplenumber)generatedbytheKARMA
Note:Thissettingalsoappliestothepitchbend Modulewillbetransmitted.
messagesthatmaybeproducedbyCCA,CCB,
Envelope1,Envelope2,andEnvelope3.

104
Program P7: KARMA 73: Module Parameters-Control

Value [000127]
72c: CC Offset
Specifiesthevalueofthemessagethatwillbe
WhentheKARMAfunctionisturnedon,MIDIcontrol transmitted.
changemessagescanbetransmittedtothetone
ThiswillhavenoeffectifCCNumberisOff.
generator.Makethesesettingswhenyouwishto
controltheprogramsoundoreffectsetc.whenthe
KARMAfunctionisturnedon. t 7-2: Page Menu Commands
YoucanassignuptofourMIDIcontrolchangesfor ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
eachKARMAModule. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
1, 2, 3, 4 commandsonpage 142.
CC Number [Off, MIDI CC# 00MIDI CC# 95] 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
SelectstheMIDIcontrolchangemessagethatwillbe Programonpage 142.
transmitted. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Thevalueofthetransmittedmessageisspecifiedby ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Value. 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
IftheKARMAON/OFFswitchison,thespecified seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
MIDIcontrolchangemessagewillbetransmitted 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
whenyouselectaprogramwhoseKARMA information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
ON/OFFswitchisturnedon.IftheselectedGE page 151.
producesthecontrolchangespecifiedhere,the 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
effectofthecontrolchangeproducedbytheGEwill Sceneonpage 151.
begivenpriority.
5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Note:TheMIDIcontrolchangemessagesspecified Sceneonpage 151.
herefortransmissionandtheMIDIcontrolchange
messagesproducedbytheselectedGEwhenthe 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
KARMAON/OFFswitchisOnwillbereset seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
automaticallywhentheKARMAON/OFFswitchis
turnedoff.

73: Module Parameters-Control


73PMC

73a

73b

HereyoucansetKARMAModuleControlparameters. Specifythetransposition,range,andchord
NotethatinProgrammode,youcanuseoneKARMA inversionforphrasesandchordsgeneratedbythe
Module(ModuleA). KARMAmodule
Youcanmakethefollowingsettings: ControltheclockthatoperatestheKARMAmodule
105
Program mode: HD-1

Convertordeletethenotedatageneratedbythe
KARMAmodule. Force Range = Lowest

73a: Program Name and Tempo Input Notes

Fordescriptionsoftheseparameters,pleasesee72a:
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. Force Range = Higest

73b: Module Parameter-Control


Control
Transpose [36+36] Theinputnoteswillbeforcedtoarangenearthe
Controlsthepitchofthephrasesorchordsproduced middleoctave(C3B3).TheForceRangeWrap
bytheKARMAModule,insemitonesteps. parameterwillbecomeavailable(seebelow),and
ThenotedatafromthekeyboardortheMIDIIN specifiesthescalestepatwhichawraparoundwillbe
connectorwillbeinputtotheKARMAModule.(+ performed.Forexample,ifForceRangeWrap=7:G,
Program71a:Bottom(KeyZoneBottom,Top(Key ifthepitchofthelowestnoteisCtoF#,itwillbe
ZoneTop))Hereyoucantransposethepitch(in placedinthe4thoctavewiththeothernotesgrouped
semitonesteps)ofthenotedatathatisinputtothe aboveit.IfthepitchofthelowestnoteisaGtoB,it
KARMAModule. willbeplacedinthe3rdoctave,withtheothernotes
groupedaboveit.Playingthesamechord
Force Range [Off, Lowest, Highest, chromaticallyupthekeyboardwillwraparound
C3B3[1], C3B3[2]] whenthescalestepoftherootofthechordis
Controlsthepitchrangeofthephrasesorchords determinedtobeG,droppingthenotesdownan
producedbytheKARMAModule,inrelationshipto octave.Thisessentiallymaintainstheinversionthe
theareaofthekeyboardthatisplayed. chordwasplayedwithnotesmayalsoextendintothe
5thoctaveor3rdoctave.
NotedatafromthekeyboardortheMIDIINconnector
willbeinputtotheKARMAModule(+Bottom(Key Thisiseffectivewhenyouwishtoproducephrasesor
ZoneBottom,Top(KeyZoneTop)(71b), patternshavingasimilarinversiontowhatwas
Transpose73a).Hereyoucanmakesettingssothat played,butinafixedrangeregardlessofwhereyou
thenotedatainputtotheKARMAModuleisrestricted areplayingonthekeyboard.Thebehaviorissimilarto
toaspecificrange. anautoaccompanimentpattern,inthatnomatter
whereyouplayonthekeyboard,theresultisinthe
Off:TheinputnoteswillbesenttotheKARMA sameoctave.
Moduleasplayed,withnofurtheralteration.
C3B3[2]:Theinputnoteswillbeforcedtoarange
Lowest:Theinputnoteswillbeforcedtoarange withinthecenteroctave(C3B3).becauseofthis,the
withinoneoctaveofthelowestnote,andduplicate chordinversionwillchangesignificantly;forexample,
pitchesarediscarded.Usefulforeliminating thebassnotemaychange.Thisiseffectivewhenyou
inversionssothatachordvoicedindifferentways wanttoabsolutelylimittheinputnotestoaspecific
producesidenticalresults. octave.
IfyouplayachordofE2,E4,G#4,B4,andD#5(i.e.,E Playedonkeyboard:
Maj7)onthekeyboard,theinputnoteswillallbe
transposedtobewithinanoctaveofthelowestnote Playchordsintheorderof
(E2):E2,G#2,B2,andD#3. E4G#4B4D#5(EMaj7firstinversion)
Highest:Theinputnoteswillbeforcedtoarange G#4B4D#5E5(EMaj7secondinversion)
withinoneoctaveofthehighestnote,andduplicate B4D#5E5G#5(EMaj7thirdinversion)
pitchesarediscarded.Usefulforeliminating
inversionssothatachordvoicedindifferentways D#5E5G#5B5(EMaj7fourthinversion)
producesidenticalresults. C3B3[1]
IfyouplayachordofE2,E4,G#4,B4,andD#5(i.e.,E Resultingtransposedinputnotes:
Maj7)onthekeyboard,theinputnoteswillallbe
E3G#3B3D#4(EMaj7firstinversion)
transposedtobewithinanoctaveofthehighestnote
(D#5):E4,G#4,B4,andD#5. G#2B2D#3E3(EMaj7secondinversion)
Playedonkeyboard: B2D#3E3G#3(EMaj7thirdinversion)
E2E4G#4B4D#5(playanEMaj7chord) D#3E3G#3B3(EMaj7fourthinversion)
Resultingtransposedinputnotes: C3B3[2]
Lowest:inputnotestransposedtoE2G#2B2D#3 Resultingtransposedinputnotes:
Highest:inputnotestransposedtoE4G#4B4D#5 D#3E3G#3B3(EMaj7/D#)
C3B3[1]:allnotesnear4thoctave(maintaininversion) D#3E3G#3B3(EMaj7/D#)
D#3E3G#3B3(EMaj7/D#)

106
Program P7: KARMA 73: Module Parameters-Control

D#3E3G#3B3(EMaj7/D#) RootPositionalsohasasimilareffectonhowthe
(allidentical) DrumPatternsaretransposed,butonlyifDrum
TrackKeyboardison.Formoreinformation,see
Force Range = C3-B3[1] DrumGrouponpage 1003.
AlsowhentheGETypeisGeneratedDrum,ifusing
Input Notes arpeggiatedpitchbending(basedontheNoteSeries),
theresultingpitchbenddatawillbeaffectedaswell.
Formoreinformation,seeBendGrouponpage 999.
Force Range = C3-B3[2] WhentheGETypeisRealtime,thisparameterhas
noeffectunlessyouareusingDynamicMIDItoDirect
IndextheNoteSeries(seeDynamicMIDISources&
Destinationsonpage 1038).
Note:whenRootPositionisturnedonforanyNote
TypeexceptRegular(i.e.Scalic,Scalic2,Chromatic,
WholeToneetc.),thebehaviorisveryconsistent:the
Force Range Wrap [CB] scalespecifiedbytheNoteTypeisplaceinroot
positionbeforeapplyingtherestoftheNoteSeries
WhenForceRange(above)issettoC3B3[1],this
parameterstocreatetheNoteSeries.
parametersetsthehighestscalestepforthechords
rootnote,afterwhichtherangemodifiedinputnotes However,whenRootPositionisturnedonforNote
willbedroppeddownanoctaveinordertostay TypeRegular,thebehaviorisabitdifferent,and
centeredaroundthe4thoctave.Forexample,ifthe requiressomeexplanation,asbelow.
valueisF#,thenstartingwithGthenoteswillbe Iftheinputnotesspananoctaveorless,theeffectis
droppeddownanoctave. verypredictable,andsimilartotheeffectwhenNote
FIG.4showsanexamplewhereaMaj7chordina TypeisanyothersettingbesidesRegular.
varietyofvoicingsisplayedthrough7scaletones,i.e. Iftheinputnotesspananoctaveorless:
CMaj7,DMaj7,EMaj7,FMaj7,GMaj7etc.SinceForce
RangeWrap=F#,theresultinginputnotesdrop Input Sort is: Result on Input Notes before replication:
downanoctavestartingwiththeGMaj7chord.This Notes placed in root position for chord, in
Up
allowsyoutokeepaGEinaspecificrangeregardless octave of lowest note, sorted in up direction
ofwhereachordisplayedonthekeyboard,butto Notes placed in root position for chord, in
adjustatwhichpointitdropsdownanoctave. Down
octave of lowest note, sorted in down direction

Force Range = C3-B3[1] As Played Notes are arranged so the first note is the root
Input Notes
Force Range Wrap = F# Random pitch class.

Iftheinputnotesspanmorethananoctave,theeffect
islesspredictable.IftheInputSort=Up,AsPlayed,
orRandom,thefirstnoteofeachreplicationwillbethe
rootpitchclass(meaningthattheNoteSerieswillstart
withtherootnote,i.e.ifthekeyofthechordisD,the
firstnotewillbeaD).IftheInputSort=Down,then
Note:NotavailableunlessForceRangeissetto
thelastnoteofeachreplicationwillbetherootpitch
C3B3[1].
class.However,noteslowerthantherootnotewillstill
Root Position [Off, On] beallowed,since,afterall,thepurposeofNoteType
=Regularistocollectthenotesasplayed.Forexample,
ThephrasesandpatternsproducedbyaKARMA
withInputSort=Up,ifyouplayG2C4E4G4
ModulearegeneratedbyaGE(GeneratedEffect).In
(Cmaj/G),thenoteswillbeorderedsothataCisfirst,
mostcases,thisisdonebasedonaNoteSeries.When
butthelowGwillstillbepresentineachreplication.
RootPositionisOn(checked),theNoteSerieswillbe
createdinrootposition,regardlessoftheinversionof Iftheinputnotesspanmorethananoctave:
thechord,basedonchordrecognition.Inotherwords,
Input Sort is: Result on Input Notes before replication:
whenthisisOff(unchecked),ifyouplayCMaj/E,the
NoteSerieswillstartfromEandcontinueup,orifyou Notes are arranged so the first note is the
Up,
playCMaj/G,theNoteSerieswillstartwithG.By root pitch class (i.e. if the key of the chord is
As Played
usingRootPositionOn(checked),youcanmake D, the first note will be a D). Notes lower than
Random
the root note will still be allowed.
surethatanyinversionofachordendsupthesame.
Forexample,CMaj/EandCMaj/Gwillbothbethe Notes are arranged so the last note is the
sameasCMaj,andtheNoteSerieswillstartfromaC. Down root pitch class. Notes lower than the root
ThiscanallowaGEtobehavemorepredictablywith note will still be allowed.
allinversionsofachord.(SeeNoteSeriesGroupon
NotethatForceRangemaybeappliedin
page 956.)
conjunctionwithRootPosition.Forexample,with
Note:WhentheGETypeisGeneratedDrum,the anyForceRangesettingotherthanOff,theeffectsof
notescomefromDrumPatternsandnottheNote RootPositionwithNoteType=Regularbecome
Series.Thedrumpatternscanbeusedtogenerate
melodies,inadditiontodrumandpercussiongrooves.

107
Program mode: HD-1

quitepredictable,asspansgreaterthananoctaveare 1st:Whenyouinputachordfromthekeyboard,the
essentiallycompressedintooneoctavebeforegoing firststepofthephraseorpatternwillsound.When
intotheNoteSeriessection. youoperatethecontroller,thephraseorpatternwill
continueadvancing.
Clock Advance Chord1:Whenyouinputachordfromthekeyboard,
Hereyoucanmakesettingsfortheclockthatwill thefirstseveralstepsofthephraseorpatternwill
operatetheKARMAModule.Byusingthesesettings sound,accordingtothenumberofnotesthatyou
inconjunctionwiththeDynamicMIDI(Program77) input.Whenyouoperatethecontroller,thephraseor
function,youcanuseManualAdvancebyoperating patternwillcontinueadvancing.
controllerssuchasthejoystickornotesfromthe Chord2:Whenyouinputachordfromthekeyboard,it
keyboardtotriggertheclockthatoperatesthe willsoundinthesamewayasforChord1.However,
KARMAModule,causingthephraseorpatternto thephraseorpatternwillplayfromthebeginningof
advanceunderyourcontrol. thepatternwhenyouoperatethecontroller.
Mode [Auto, Dyn, Auto+Dyn1, Auto+Dyn2] Chord3:Whenyouinputachordfromthekeyboard,it
Auto:TheKARMAModulewilloperateaccordingto willsoundinthesamewayasforChord1.However,
theTempo(Program11a)setting.IfMIDIClock thephraseorpatternwillstartfromthesecondstep
(Global21a)isExternal,theKARMAModulewill whenyouoperatethecontroller.Whensimulating
operateinsynchronizationwiththeMIDIclockfrom acousticguitarfingerpicking,thisallowsyoutocreate
theExternalMIDIdevice.Normallyyouwillselect anaturalconnectionbetweentheplayedchordandthe
Auto. fingerpickingsoundedbythecontroller.

Dyn:TheclockbywhichtheKARMAModulewill Velocity Sense Bottom [001127]


operatecanbetriggeredbyoperatingthejoystickor ThisisvalidwhenModeisDyn,Auto+Dyn1orAuto
othercontrolleraccordingtotheDynamicMIDI +Dyn2.IftheDynamicMIDISourceisNoteor
(Program77)setting,causingthephraseorpatternto Velocity,thephrasewillbeproducedbyapplyingthe
advance,notebynote.(SetDynamicMIDIDestination velocityofeachManualAdvancetriggerthatisinput
toClockAdvance.) totheKARMAModuletothenotesastheyare
Youcaninputachordfromoneareaofthekeyboard, generated.Thisparameterspecifiesthelowerlimitofa
andusenotesfromanotherareaofthekeyboardto scaledrangethatthevelocityisadjustedbybefore
advancethroughthearpeggiopattern. beingapplied.
Auto+Dyn1:TheKARMAModulewilloperate Withasettingof001,thevelocitydatawillbeinputto
accordingtobothAutoandDyn. theKARMAModulewithanunmodifiedrangeof1
Auto+Dyn2:TheKARMAModulewilloperate 127(fullsensitivity).
accordingtobothAutoandDyn,exceptthatatrigger Withasettingof064,velocitydataintherangeof1
receivedfromDynamicMIDIwillmomentarilystop 127willbescaledtotherangeof64127beforeitis
theautomaticadvancementuntiltheKARMAModule inputtotheKARMAModule(halfsensitivity).
playbackisrestarted.
Note Map
Size [ 3, r3, r, x3, x, x., e3, e, e., q3, q, Event]
TheNoteMapParametersallowafinalnoteshaper
ThisisvalidwhenModeisDyn,Auto+Dyn1orAuto tobeappliedattheendoftheKARMAnotegeneration
+Dyn2.Itspecifiestheunitbywhichthephraseor process.Implementedasalargegrid(128x129),it
patternwillbeadvancedwhenthecontrolleris allowsanyincomingMIDInotegeneratedbyKARMA
operated. (0127)toberemappedtoanyotherMIDInote(0127),
3q:Thephraseorpatternwillbeadvancedbythe orfilteredout(removed).Therefore,adiagonalline
specifiednotevalue,synchronizedtotherhythmofthe representslinear/nochange,andwhatgoesinis
phraseorpattern.DependingontheinternalGE whatcomesout.
RhythmParameters,thismayresultinnonotes,1note, Youcanuseittoremapdrumkitsfromonesetofdrum
orseveralnotesforaaparticulartrigger. soundstoanother,removeorsubstitutedifferentdrum
Event:Thephraseorpatternwillbeadvancedbyone soundswithinthesamekit,removecertainpitches
noteoronechord,ignoringtherhythmofthephraseor frommelodicoutput,constrainoutputpitchesto
pattern.Eachtriggerwillproducethenextnoteor variousscales,limitnotesgeneratedthruMelodic
chordinthephrase. Repeattocertainpitches,andmore.Formore
information,seeRepeat(MelodicRepeat)Groupon
Chord Trigger Mode [Off, 1st, Chord1, page 994.
Chord2, Chord3]
Eachprogram,combination,orsongcontainsasingle
ThisisvalidwhenModeisDyn,Auto+Dyn1or usertable.namedCustom.Thesettingsofthis
Auto+Dyn2.Itspecifieshowachordwillbesounded singletablearestoredinsidetheprogram,
whenthatchordisinputfromthekeyboard. combination,orsong.Additionally,thereareanumber
Off:Therewillbenosoundwhenyouinputachord oftablesstoredinglobalmemory,withpredefined
fromthekeyboard.Thisisanalogoustoaguitarist functions,thatcanbeselectedforusebyanyModule.
changingchordsinthelefthand.Thephraseorpattern ThesametablecanbeappliedtomultipleModulesat
willsoundfromthefirststepwhenyouoperatethe thesametime.AllModulescanrunthroughthesingle
controller.

108
Program P7: KARMA 73: Module Parameters-Control

Customtableatthesametime,orbeassignedtoutilize However,ifyouplaytheinputchordanoctavelower,
variousGlobalNoteMaps,inanycombination. thenoteswouldgothroughtheoctaveofthetable
belowMiddleC,andwouldnothavetheremoved
Mode (Note Map Mode) [Off, On-Main, note.Thisallowsyoutosetupdifferentmapsforeach
On-Repeat, On-All] octave,yethavethetabletrackyourchordchanges
Selectsoneofseveraldifferentmodesofoperation, withineachoctave.
controllingwhetherallnotesgeneratedbyKARMAor Note:Thewaythatthisparameterworksisaffectedby
asubsetofthosenotesaremodifiedbythespecified KbdTrack(C2Ref),below.
NoteMapTable.
Off:Thetableisinactiveandnofilteringorremapping Keyboard Track (C2 Ref)
isdone. (Note Map Kbd Track) [Off, On]
OnMain:Thetableisusedtomaporfilternotesbeing SelectswhethertheNoteMapTablewilltrackyour
generatedfromtheNoteSeriesorDrumPattern(s),but chordchangesacrosstheentirekeyboard,with
notanynotesgeneratedasaresultoftheMelodic referencetoC2.
Repeatparameters. WhenChordTrackisalreadyturnedon,settingKbd
OnRepeat:Thetableisusedtomaporfilternotes TracktoOn(checked)providestheadditional
beinggeneratedasaresultoftheMelodicRepeat functionalityoftrackingthetabletothelowestnoteof
parameters,butnotthemainnotesgeneratedbythe theinputchord(withreferencetoC2),nomatter
NoteSeriesorDrumPattern(s).Forexample,thiscan whereitisplayed.Inotherwords,anychordplayedin
beusedtothinoutrepeatsorlimitstrangenotesin anyoctavewillbetransposedsoitendsupwithits
DrumPatternsfromtransposedrepeats,without lowestnoteintheC2octavebeforebeingrunthrough
affectingthemainnotes. thetable,andreturnedtothecorrectoctaveafter.Asan
example,assumeyouplayaninputchordinthekeyof
Formoreinformation,seeRepeat(MelodicRepeat) CintheC2octave(lowestoctaveofa61note
Grouponpage 994. keyboard).Ifyouremovethe3rd(forexample)which
OnAll:Thetableisusedtomaporfilterallnotes isE2,playingachordanywhereonthekeyboardwill
beinggeneratedbythemodule. havethelowestnoterunthroughthetableatC2and
hencekeeptheexactsametablemappingforany
Table (Note Map Table) [Custom, chord,removingthethirdinanykey,inanyoctave.
Gtable 1Maj 7 -> oct] Thisallowsyoutosetupcomplexmelodicmaps
SelectstheCustomtable(usertable)oroneofthe spanningseveraloctavesifdesired,andthenhave
GlobalNoteMapTables. themtrackyourchordsalloverthekeyboard.
Note:YoucaneditacustomtableinProgram79: Note:NotavailableunlessChordTrackissettoOn
Name/NoteMap.(See79c:NoteMaponpage 125.) (checked).

Transpose (Note Map Transpose) [12+12] Note Map Table Display


ThisallowsyoutosetupaFixedNoteTranspose ThisdisplaysasmallgraphicofthecurrentNoteMap
Map,withoutChordTrackorKeyboardTrack(C2 TableselectedfortheModule.ChangingtheNote
Ref),andthenapplyanoffsettotransposeittoother MapTablesetting(directlyorviaRealTime
keys.Inotherwords,youcansetupafixedmapso ParameterControl)causestheselectedtabletobe
thatnomatterwhatyouplay,itcomesoutinC displayed.
Mixolydian.Then,youcansettheNoteMapTranspose
to+2,anditwouldbeDMixolydian,etc.
TheTransposeparameterisonlyavailablewhen
ChordTrackisOff(unchecked).

Chord Track (Note Map Chord Track) [Off, On]


SelectswhethertheNoteMapTablewilltrackyour
chordchangeswithintherangeofasingleoctave. ThevariousNoteMapTablescanbeviewedfullsize
ontheNoteMapPage(79c).
TablesusethekeyofCasareference.Asanexample,
assumeyouplayaCChordthatgeneratesaCMajor Whenyoupressthedisplay,youwillmovetothenote
arpeggio(CEGetc.)intheMiddleCoctave(C4to maptableforthesamemoduleintheNoteMaptabof
C5).YoueditthatoctaveinthenoteMapEditorto theName/NoteMappage.
haveno3rd(E4removed).
WithChordTracksettoOff(unchecked),playinga t 7-3: Page Menu Commands
Dchordwouldexhibitnochangednotes,because
thereisnoE4inthearpeggio.WithChordTrackset ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
toOn(checked),theDchordwouldsoundthesameas numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
theCchord(no3rd),exceptitwouldbeinthekeyofD. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
WhenOn(checked),allchordsplayedintheMiddleC commandsonpage 142.
octavewouldhavetheir3rdremoved. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.

109
Program mode: HD-1

1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. Sceneonpage 151.
2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation, 5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150. Sceneonpage 151.
3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
page 151.

74: Module Parameters-Trigger


74PMC

74a

74b

HereyoucansetKARMAModuleTriggerparameters. Off(unchecked):Triggeringwilloccurinstantlyatthe
InProgrammode,youcanuseoneKARMAModule momentyouplaythekeyboardoractivateatrigger
(ModuleA). throughDynamicMIDI.
Youcanmakethefollowingsettings. Quantize Window [x! q ]
Timingcorrectionandlatchoperationfortriggers Specifythemetricdivisionbywhichinputnotedata
SettingsfortheenvelopegeneratorsinsidetheGE fromthekeyboardorDynamicMIDIwillbequantized
beforetriggeringtheModuleandthestartofthe
phrase.
74a: Program Name and Tempo
16thtripletQuarter:Specifythetimewindowasa
Fordescriptionsoftheseparameters,pleasesee72a: notevalueintervalrelativetothetempo.Fortriplet
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. basedpatterns,youmayneedtoselectoneofthe
tripletbasedsettingsifyouintendtoretriggeroffthe
beat.
74b: Module Parameters-Trigger
Note:WhenQuantizeTriggerisOn(checked),
Control triggeringatatimingthatiswithina32ndnoteofthe
QuantizeWindowsettingwillbeconsideredlate
Quantize Trig/Window (shownbythepinkcolorinthediagramabove),and
willcausetheplaybacktobeginimmediatelywhile
Quantize Trigger [Off, On] bringingtheModuleintosyncwithotherrunning
Quantize(correct)thetimingoftheModules ModulesortimebasedfeaturessuchastheDrum
triggeringcausedbyinputnotedatafromthe TrackandRPPR.Ifthetriggerislaterthanthis(shown
keyboardorDynamicMIDI. bytheyellowcolorinthediagramabove),playback
On(checked):Triggertimingwillbequantizedtothe willstartatthenextmetricdivisioncorrespondingto
metricunitspecifiedbytheWindowsetting,relative theQuantizeWindow.
tothebasictempo.

110
Program P7: KARMA 74: Module Parameters-Trigger

Update On Release [Off, On] 1st(1stOnlyUntilModuleStops+DynamicMIDI):


Allowsthereleaseofindividualinputnotestoremove AfterKARMAfunctionisturnedon,onlythefirst
thosenotesfromthenotesgoingtotheGE,thereby noteonwillcausetriggering.Subsequentnoteonswill
changingtheeffecttouseonlythosenotesstillbeing notcausetriggering.
held. Thisisusefulfordrumgroovesandphraseswhereyou
Off(unchecked):Releasingsomenoteswhileholding donotwantsubsequentchordchangestorestartthe
otherscausesnochangetotheinputsourcematerial, phrase.
andthereforenochangeintheGeneratedEffect.Thisis Dyn(DynamicMIDI):Triggeringwillbeproducedby
themostsmoothandnaturalway,andsimilartomost operatingthecontrollerspecifiedbyDynamicMIDI
advancedautoaccompanimentkeyboards. (Program77).Inthiscase,noteonswillnotcause
On(checked):Notesthatarereleasedareremoved triggering.
fromtheinputsourcematerial,therebychangingthe Note:Withanyofthesesettings,thetriggerwillbe
effecttouseonlythosenotesstillbeingheld.Thisis appliedbyoperationsofthecontrollerspecifiedfor
typicallythewaysimplearpeggiatorswork,especially DynamicMIDI(Program77),ifDestinationissetto
iftheirlatchmodeisturnedoff. TriggerNotes&Envs,TriggerNote(seeDynamic
MIDISources&Destinationsonpage 1038).
Delay
Note Latch [Off, On]
Delay Start [Off, Fixed, 34x1] Specifieswhetherthephraseorpatternwillcontinue
Specifythedelayfromwhenthetrigger(bynotedata) whenyoureleaseyourhandfromthekeyboard(latch
isinput,untilthephraseorpatternstarts. on)orwhetherthephraseorpatternwillstop(latch
34x1:Specifythedelaytimeasanotevalueinterval off).InProgrammode,turnthisOn(checked)anduse
relativetothetempo. theLATCHswitchtocontrollatchon/off.

Fixed:Thedelaytimewillbespecifiedintimeunits Off(unchecked):Latchwillbeoffregardlessofthe
(ms).SetthetimeinDelayStartFixed. LATCHswitchon/offstatus.
On(checked):TheLATCHswitchwillcontrollatch
Delay Start Fixed [0000 ms 5000 ms] on/off.
ThisisvalidifDelayStartissettoFixed.SetDelay WhentheLATCHswitchisoff(LEDdark),latchisoff.
Startinmsunits.Thedelayspecifiedherewill
remaingconstant,evenwhenthetempoischanged. WhentheLATCHswitchison(LEDlit),latchison.
Note:InCombinationandSequencermode,uptofour
Note KARMAModulescanbeused.Inthesemodes,you
canturnNoteLatchon/offindependentlyforeach
Note Trigger [Any, AKR, 1st, Dyn] KARMAModule.IfyouuseCopyKARMAModule
Any(AnyNote+DynamicMIDI):Everynoteonwill tocopyKARMAModulesettingsfromthesemodesto
causetriggering;i.e.,eachnoteonwillcausethe aprogram,theremaybecasesinwhichthesetting
phraseorpatterntorestartfromthebeginning. herewillbeoff,sothatlatchonwillnotoccurevenif
AKR(1stNoteAfterKeyRelease+DynamicMIDI): youturnontheLATCHswitch.Insuchcases,turnthis
Triggeringwilloccurwhenthefirstnoteonoccurs on.
fromastateinwhichnokeysareon.Triggeringwill
notoccurifevenonenoteisbeingpressed.By Envelope1, Envelope2, Envelope3
changingthechordyouplayonthekeyboardwhile EachGEprovidesthreeEnvelopes.Theycanproduce
holdingatleastonenote,youcanchangethenotesof timevariantcontrolofvelocity,tempo,duration,pitch
thephraseorpatternwithouttriggering. bend,andvariouscontrolchanges.

111
Program mode: HD-1

Youcanspecifytriggeringconditionsandlatch Theenvelopecanbesettorepeatasaloopaspartof
conditionsforeachofthethreeEnvelopesoftheGE, theGE.Aloopedenvelopewillbecontrolledas
separatelyfromtheNoteTriggerandLatch(although follows.
manytimesyouwillwantthemtobethesame.) ForSus1andRel1,theenvelopewillcontinue
IftheselectedGEdoesnotuseEnvelopes,these repeatingaslongasthekeyisheld.
settingswillhavenoeffect.Forinformationon ForSus2andRel2,theenvelopewillcontinue
specificGEs,pleaseseetheVoiceNameListon repeatingevenifthekeyisreleased.
page 1099.

Envelope Trigger [Any, AKR, 1st, Dyn] t 7-4: Page Menu Commands
Any(AnyNote+DynamicMIDI):Everynoteonwill
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
causetriggering;i.e.,eachnoteonwillcausethe
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
envelopetostartfromthebeginning.
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
AKR(1stNoteAfterKeyRelease+DynamicMIDI): commandsonpage 142.
Triggeringwilloccurwhenthefirstnoteonoccurs
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
fromastateinwhichnokeysareon.Retriggering
Programonpage 142.
willnotoccurifevenonenoteisbeingpressed.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
1st(1stOnlyUntilModuleStops+DynamicMIDI):
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
AfterKARMAisturnedon,onlythefirstnoteonwill
causetriggering.Subsequentnoteonswillnotcause 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
triggering. seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
Dyn(DynamicMIDI):Triggeringwillbeproducedby 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
operatingthecontrollerspecifiedbyDynamicMIDI information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
(Program77).Inthiscase,noteonswillnotcause page 151.
triggering. 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
Note:Foranyofthesesettings,triggeringwillbe Sceneonpage 151.
appliedbyoperationsofthecontrollerspecifiedfor 5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
DynamicMIDI,ifDestinationissettoTrigger Sceneonpage 151.
Notes&Envs,TriggerEnv1TriggerEnv3.
6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
Envelope Latch [Off, Sus1, Rel1, Sus2, Rel2] seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
Off:Theenvelopewillnotbelatched.Whenallkeys
arereleasedoraDynamicMIDItriggerisreleased
(noteoff),theenvelopewillmovetotherelease
segment.
Sus1:Oncetheenvelopeisstarted,itwillproceed
throughattackdecaysustainrelease.Ifnote
offoccursbeforetheenvelopereachesthesustainlevel,
theenvelopewillnotbeginthereleaseimmediately
butwaituntilafterreachingthesustainlevel.Evenin
thecaseofanoteforwhichthenoteon/offintervalis
short,theenvelopewillproceedthroughattack
decaysustainreleaseasifthekeywasbeingheld
foralongertime.Iftheenvelopereachesthesustain
levelbeforereceivingnoteoff,itwillholdatthe
sustainlevel(thesameoperationasfortheOffsetting).
Ifthenoteoffoccursaftertheenvelopereachesthe
sustainlevel,theenvelopewillbeginthereleasewhen
noteoffoccurs(thesameoperationasfortheOff
setting).
Rel1:Oncetheenvelopehasstarted,itwillproceed
throughattackdecayrelease,regardlessofwhen
thenoteoffoccurs.Evenifakeyisbeingpressed,the
envelopewillignoresustain,andwillproceed
immediatelytotherelease.
Sus2:Theenvelopewillignorenoteoff,andwill
proceedthroughattachdecaysustain.Therefore,
thissettingwillneverreachthereleaseportion.Other
operationisthesameasforSus1.
Rel2:ThesameoperationasRel1,exceptwillignore
noteoffforthepurposeoflooping,asexplainedbelow.

112
Program P7: KARMA 75: GE Real-Time Parameters

75: GE Real-Time Parameters


75PMC

75a

75b

HereyoucanedittheRealTimeparametersoftheGE EachoftheGERealTimeParametershasabasicvalue,
selectedfortheKARMAModule.ByassigningGE acontrollerassignmentwithpolarity,andminimum
parameterstoKARMARealTimeControls,youcan andmaximumvalues(forsettingtherangeofthe
controlthephraseorpatterninrealtimewhileyou selectedcontroller).WhenyouselectanewGE,the
play. basic,minimum,andmaximumvalueswillberesetto
thevaluessavedintheGE,andthecontroller
assignmentwillbesettothedefaultsfortheGEsRTC
75a: GE Number & Name, RTC Select, Model.
and Tempo FordetailsontheindividualGERealTime
GE Number & Name parameters,pleaseseetheKARMAGEguideon
[0000: Arp Model 01 Up/Dn page 949.
2047: Tempo Env Repeats] MIN (Minimum Value) [5000+5000]
ThisshowstheGEselectedfortheModule.Formore Thissetstheparametervaluewhentheselected
information,pleasesee06b:GESelectonpage 8. controllerisatitsminimumpointforinstance,when
asliderisatthebottomofitsthrow.Notethatyoucan
GE RTC Select [116, 1732]
reversetheactionofthecontrollerbysettingthistobe
ThisswitchestheGErealtimeparameterdisplay. higherthantheMAXvalue,below.
116:GEparameters116willbedisplayed. TheavailablevalueswilldependontheGERealTime
1732:GEparameters1732willbedisplayed. parameter.

q (Tempo) [40.00240.00, EXT] MAX (Maximum Value) [5000+5000]


Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTempoonpage 5. Thissetstheparametervaluewhentheselected
controllerisatitsmaximumpointforinstance,when
asliderisatthetopofitsthrow.
75b: GE Real-Time Parameters
TheavailablevalueswilldependontheGERealTime
GE Parameter 0132 [Parameter Name] parameter.
EachGEhasupto32presetparametersforcontrolling VALUE [5000+5000]
thephraseorpattern,referredtoasGERealTime
ThissetsthebasicvalueoftheGEparameter,which
Parameters(orGERTP).Thespecificparameters,and
correspondstothecenterpositionofthecontroller.It
theavailablevalueranges,willvarydependingonthe
mustbewithintheMINandMAXvalues.
selectedGE.

ASSIGN [---, Slider18, Slider (SW)18, HereyoucanassignthecontrollerfortheGEReal


SW18, DynaMIDI18] Timeparameter.

113
Program mode: HD-1

ByassigningGERealTimeParametertoKARMA Turningtheslidertowardtheminimumwill
RealTimeControls,theycanbecontrolledinrealtime produceavalueof+0000.Turningittocenteror
whileyouplay. maximumwillproduceavalueof+0100.
:Noassignment. SW18:Theparameterwillbeassignedtoswitch18.
Theminimumisoff,andthemaximumison.
Slider18:AssigntheparametertoKARMASLIDERS
18.Thesliderwillcontinuouslycontrolthevalue. Note:thecorrespondencebetweentheKARMA
SLIDERS,SWITCHESandMIDIcontrolchange
Forexample,letsassumethattheRhythmSwing%
messagescanbespecifiedinGlobalP31:
parameteroftheselectedGEissettoaMINof+0000,
Controller/Scale,Controller.ForSW18andSlider
andaMAXof+0100.
(SW)18,aMIDIcontrolchangemessagevalueof
IfyousetValue:+0050,Assign:Slider1,and lessthan64willbeoff,and64orgreaterwillbe
Polarity:+ on.
Slider1atthecenterpositionwillproduceavalue DynaMIDI18:ThiscorrespondstoDynamicMIDI
of+0050.Atminimumthevaluewillbe+0000,and 18.
atmaximumthevaluewillbe+0100.Turningthe
SelectthisifyouwishtocontrolaGEparameterusing
Sliderfromcentertowardtheminimumwillcontrol
thecontrollerselectedforSourceinDynamicMIDI(7
thevaluefrom+0050+0000,andturningitfrom
8).(SettheDynamicMIDIDestinationtoRTParams
centertowardthemaximumwillcontrolthevalue
Control.)
from+0050+0100.
IfyousetValue:+0080,Assign:Slider1,and POLARITY [+, ]
Polarity:+ Thissetsthepolarityoftheselectedcontroller.
Slider1atthecenterpositionwillproduceavalue +:InthecaseofSlider18,movingdownfromthe
of+0080.Atminimumthevaluewillbe+0000,and centerwillmovethevaluetowardstheMinimum
atfarmaximumthevaluewillbe+0100.Turningthe setting,andmovingupfromthecenterwillmove
sliderfromcentertowardtheminimumwillcontrol towardstheMaximumsetting.InthecaseofSlider
thevaluefrom+0080+0000,andturningitfrom (SW)18,thebottomofthesliderthrowwillbe
centertowardthemaximumwillcontrolthevalue Minimum,andthetopwillbeMaximum.Inthe
from+0080+0100. caseofSW18,theparameterwillbeMaximum
Slider(SW)18:AssigntheparametertoKARMA whentheLEDislit.
SLIDER18.TheSliderwillswitchthevaluebetween :InthecaseofSlider18,movingdownfromthe
minimumandmaximumonly.Theminimumtocenter centerwillmovethevaluetowardstheMaximum
rangeoftheSliderisoff,andthecentertomaximumis setting,andmovingupfromthecenterwillmove
on. towardstheMinimumsetting.InthecaseofSlider
IfyousetValue:+0050,Assign:Slider(SW)1, (SW)18,thebottomofthesliderthrowwillbe
andPolarity:+ Maximum,andthetopwillbeMinimum.Inthe
caseofSW18,theparameterwillbeMaximum
whentheLEDisdark.
75PMC

75c

114
Program P7: KARMA 75: GE Real-Time Parameters

Scene Status
75c: Scenes
Displaysinformationrelatedtoupcomingscene
HereyoucansetaSceneChangeQuantizeWindow changes.WhenusingtheSceneChangeQuantize
thatcontrolsatimeintervalforwhenthescene Windowwithlongersettingssuchas1,2or4bars,you
changeswilloccur,andviewinformationabout canselectascenechangeseveralbeatsormorein
upcomingscenechanges. advanceofwhenyouwantittooccur.TheControl
SurfaceandSceneMatrixwillchangetothenewscene
Scene Change Quantize Window immediately,butinternallythescenechangewillnot
[x! q, 1 Bar4 Bars] occuruntilthespecifiedtimeintervalhaselapsed.The
Specifythemetricdivisionbywhichscenechanges SceneStatusareadisplaysamessageindicatinga
willbequantized.Dependingonthesetting,thismay pendingscenechange,fromthecurrentscenetothe
delaythescenechangefromoccurringuntilthenext newscene.Youcanusethistocancelapending
beat,nextbar,orseveralbarslater. scenechangeifdesired.Forexample,ifyouareon
x!q :Specifythetimewindowasanotevalue Scene2andyouselectScene8,themessage2>8
intervalrelativetothetempo.Fortripletbased willbedisplayed.TheSceneMatrixandControl
patterns,youmayneedtoselectoneofthetriplet SurfaceimmediatelychangetoScene8,butinternally
basedsettingsifyouintendtoperformscenechanges thescenechangehasnotyetoccurred.Youcanreselect
offthebeat. Scene2andtherebycanceltheupcomingscene
change.
1Bar4Bars:Specifythetimewindowasabarvalue
relativetothetempo,andthetimesignatureofthe Note:ifyouhaveselectedascenechangeinadvance,
PerformanceortheModulesGE. andithasnotyetoccurred,theControlSurfaceand
variouseditingpagessuchastheKARMAGEPage06
Note:iftheKARMAT.Sig(TimeSignature)issetto andtheControlSurfaceRT/KARMAPage09dwill
somethingotherthan0GE/TS,thenthespecified showthenewscenesparameters.Editingthemwhile
TimeSignatureiswhatwillbeusedtocalculatethebar thescenechangeispendingwillactuallybeeditingthe
lengths.IftheKARMAT.Sigissetto0GE/TS upcomingscene,andyouwillnothearanychanges
(meaningthattheModulesGEusesitsownstored untilthescenechangehasactuallyoccurred.
internaltimesignature),thenthebarlengthisbasedon
theinternalstoredtimesignatureoftheGE.Formore
information,seeKARMAT.Sig(TimeSignature)on t 7-5: Page Menu Commands
page7.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
Note:Scenechangesselectedatatimingthatiswithin numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
a32ndnoteoftheSceneChangeQuantizeWindow shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
settingwillbeconsideredlate(shownbythepink commandsonpage 142.
colorinthediagramabove),andwillcausethescene
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
changetooccurimmediately.Ifthescenechangeis
Programonpage 142.
laterthanthis,itwillbeconsideredearly(shownby
theyellowcolorinthediagramabove),andwilloccur 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
atthenextmetricdivisioncorrespondingtotheScene ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
ChangeQuantizeWindow.(Duetospace,notall 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
settingsareshowninthediagram.) seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
q (Tempo) [40.00240.00, EXT] 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeTempoonpage 5.
page 151.

115
Program mode: HD-1

4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
Sceneonpage 151. seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Sceneonpage 151.

76: Perf Real-Time Parameters


76PMC

76a

76b

HereyoucanassigncontrollerstoKARMA Real-Time Parameters 18


PerformanceRealTimeParameters(Perf.RTP)outside
oftheGERealTimeParametersthatcontrolthe Group [Off, PE, Mix, Control, Trigger,
internalsettingsoftheGE.Examplesincludethe Key Zones, Random Seeds]
KARMAKeyZoneparameters(Program71b)and Selectsthegroupofparametersthatyouwishto
KARMAControlandTriggerparameters(Program7 chooseaParameterfrom.TheKARMAparameters
3,74). aredividedintosixgroups.
ByassigningthesetoKARMASLIDERS18and
KARMASWITCHES18etc.,youcancontrolthemin Parameter [---, Time Signature
realtimewhileyouplay. Retrigger Each Time]
InPerfRealTimeParameters18,ifyouselecta Indicatestheparameterthatyouwishtoassign.The
parameterbyGroupandParameterandOn parametersthatcanbeselectedwilldifferaccordingto
(checked)ModuleA,thatparametercanno theGroupsetting,above.
longerbeeditedasaKARMAKeyZoneparameter
Min (Minimum Value) [8192+8192]
(Program71b)orKARMAControlandTrigger
parameter(Program73,74). Thissetstheparametervaluewhentheselected
controllerisatitsminimumpointforinstance,when
asliderisatthebottomofitsthrow.Notethatyoucan
76a: Program Name and Tempo reversetheactionofthecontrollerbysettingthistobe
higherthantheMAXvalue,below.
Fordescriptionsoftheseparameters,pleasesee72a:
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. Theavailablevalueswilldependontheselected
parameter.Whenaparameterisselected,the
minimumparametervaluewillbesetasthedefault.
76b: Perf Real-Time Parameters
Max (Maximum Value) [8192+8192]
Youcansetup8differentPerformanceRealTime
Parameters,eachofwhichhasanidenticalsetof Thissetstheparametervaluewhentheselected
parameters,asdescribedbelow. controllerisatitsmaximumpointforinstance,when
asliderisatthetopofitsthrow.Theavailablevalues
willdependontheselectedparameter.

116
Program P7: KARMA 76: Perf Real-Time Parameters

Value [8192+8192] +0000:Off


SpecifiesthevalueoftheselectedKARMAparameter. +0001:Lowest
IfyouturnonA(ModuleA)andselectParameter, +0002:Highest
thiswillbesetasthecurrentvalueoftheparameter
(setin73and74).Thevalueyouspecifyherewillbe +0003:C3B3[1]
thecentervaluewhenyouuseAssigntocontrolthe +0004:C3B3[2]
parameterfromaKARMASLIDER,etc.Thevaluewill
Formoreinformation,seeForceRangeonpage 106.
notbeavailablewhenassigningtoSwitchesorSlider
(SW). Force Range Wrap [+0000+0011]
A ( Module A) [Off, On] AssignstheForceRangeWrap(Program73b)
function.
SpecifiesthemoduletowhichthesettingsofRTParm
18willapply.InProgrammode,onlyoneKARMA +0000:C0011:B
Module(ModuleA)canbeused.ThusinProgram Formoreinformation,seeForceRangeWrapon
mode,youcanturntheRTParm18settingson/off. page 107.
On(checked):RTParmsettingswillbevalid.
Root Position [+0000, +0001]
Off(unchecked):RTParmsettingswillbeignored.
AssignstheRootPosition(Program73b)function.
Assign [---, Slider18, Slider (SW) 18, +0000:Off
SW18, DynaMIDI18] +0001:On
Assignstheselectedparametertoacontroller.Ifyou
Formoreinformation,seeRootPositiononpage 107.
assignaparametertoKARMARealTimeControls,
youcancontrolitinrealtimewhileyouplay. Clock Advance Mode [+0000+0003]
Formoreinformation,seeASSIGNonpage 113. AssignstheMode(ClockAdvanceMode)(Program
73b)function.
Polarity [+, ]
+0000:Auto
Specifiesthepolarityusedwhenyouoperatethe
KARMARealTimeControlsthatyouselectedfor +0001:Dyn
Assign. +0002:Auto+Dyn1
Formoreinformation,pleaseseePOLARITYon +0003:Auto+Dyn2
page 114.
Formoreinformation,seeModeonpage 108.
Group: PE (Performance) Clock Advance Size [+0000+0011]
Time Signature [+0000+0048] AssignstheSize(ClockAdvanceSize)(Program7
3b)function.
AssignstheKARMAT.Sig(Program71a)function.
+0000+0010:r3q
+0000:Off
+0011:Event
+0001+0048:Correspondsto1/416/16.
Formoreinformation,seeSizeonpage 108.
Formoreinformation,seeKARMAT.Sig(Time
Signature)onpage 101. CA Vel. Sensitivity [+0001+0127]
IfyouselectTimeSig.asaparameterfor AssignstheVelocitySenseBottom(Program73b)
assignment,youwillnotbeabletosetA(Parm function.
ModuleA).
Formoreinformation,seeVelocitySenseBottomon
Group: Mix page 108.

Transpose [0036+0036] CA Chord Trigger Mode [+0000+0004]


AssignstheTranspose(Program73b)function. AssignstheChordTriggerMode(Program73b)
Controlthetranspositioninsemitonesteps. function.
+0000:Off
Transpose Octave [0036+0036]
AssignstheTranspose(Program73b)function. +0001:1st
Controlthetranspositioninoctavesteps. +0002:Chrd1

Transpose Octave/5th [0036+0036] +0003:Chrd2

AssignstheTranspose(Program73b)function. +0004:Chrd3
Controlthetranspositioninstepsofanoctaveanda Formoreinformation,seeChordTriggerModeon
fifth. page 108.

Group: Control Note Map Mode [+0000+0003]


AssignstheMode(NoteMapMode)(Program73b)
Force Range [+0000+0004] function.
AssignstheForceRange(Program73b)function.
+0000:Off

117
Program mode: HD-1

+0001:OnMain Delay Start [+0000+0025]


+0002:OnRepeat AssignstheDelayStart(Program74b)function.
+0003:OnAll +0000:Off
Formoreinformation,seeMode(NoteMapMode) +0001:Fixed
onpage 109. +0002+0025:r34xw
Note Map Table [+0000+0064] Formoreinformation,seeDelayStartonpage 111.
AssignstheTable(NoteMapTable)(Program73b)
Delay Start ms [+0000+5000]
function.
AssignstheDelayStartFixed(Program74b)
+0000:Custom function.
+0001+0064:GlobalTables1Maj7>oct SeeDelayStartFixed+p.111
Formoreinformation,seeTable(NoteMapTable)on
page 109. Note Trigger [+0000+0003]
AssignstheNoteTrigger(Program74b)function.
Note Map Transpose [0012+0012]
+0000:Any
AssignstheTranspose(NoteMapTranspose)
(Program73b)function. +0001:AKR
Formoreinformation,seeTranspose(NoteMap +0002:1st
Transpose)onpage 109. +0003:Dyn
Note Map Chord Track [+0000, +0001] Formoreinformation,seeNoteTriggeronpage 111.
AssignstheChordTrack(NoteMapChordTrack) Note Latch [+0000, +0001]
(Program73b)function.
AssignstheNoteLatch(Program74b)function.
+0000:Off
+0000:Off
+0001:On
+0001:On
Formoreinformation,seeChordTrack(NoteMap
Formoreinformation,seeNoteLatchonpage 111.
ChordTrack)onpage 109.
Env1 Trigger [+0000+0003]
Note Map Kbd Track [+0000, +0001]
AssignstheKeyboardTrack(NoteMapKbdTrack) Env2 Trigger [+0000+0003]
(Program73b)function.
Env3 Trigger [+0000+0003]
+0000:Off
AssignstheEnvelopeTrigger(Program74b)
+0001:On functions.
Formoreinformation,seeKeyboardTrack(C2Ref) +0000:Any
(NoteMapKbdTrack)onpage 109.
+0001:AKR
Group: Trigger +0002:1st
+0003:Dyn
Quantize Trigger [+0000, +0001]
AssignstheQuantizeTrigger(Program74b) Formoreinformation,seeEnvelopeTriggeron
function. page 112.

+0000:Off Env1 Latch Mode [+0000+0004]


+0001:On Env2 Latch Mode [+0000+0004]
Formoreinformation,seeQuantizeTriggeron
page 110. Env3 Latch Mode [+0000+0004]
AssignstheLatch(Program74b)function.
Quantize Window [+0000+0005]
+0000:Off
+0000+0005:16thtriplettoQuarterNote
+0001:Sus1
AssignstheQuantizeWindow(Program74b)
parameter.Formoreinformation,seeQuantize +0002:Rel1
Windowonpage 110. +0003:Sus2
Update On Release [+0000, +0001] +0004:Rel2
AssignstheUpdateOnRelease(Program74b) Formoreinformation,seeEnvelopeLatchon
function. page 112.
+0000:Off Group: Zone
+0001:On
Thru Inside Zone [+0000, +0001]
Formoreinformation,seeUpdateOnReleaseon
page 111. AssignstheThruInZone(Program71a)function.

118
Program P7: KARMA 76: Perf Real-Time Parameters

+0000:Off Transpose Octave/5th Out Thru [0036+0036]


+0001:On AssignstheTransposeOutZone(Program71a)
Formoreinformation,seeThruInZoneonpage 102. function.Thiscontrolsthetranspositionofnotedata
fromthekeyboardoutsidetheKeyZone,inunitsofan
Thru Outside Zone [+0000, +0001] octaveandafifth.
AssignstheThruOutZone(Program71a)function.
Group: Random
+0000:Off
+0001:On Start Seed [-81920+8191]
AssigntheStartSeed(Program78b)function.
Formoreinformation,seeThruOutZoneon
page 102. +0000:Random
Otherthan+0000:AnydesiredStartSeedvalue.
Key Zone Bottom [+0000+0127]
However,youcannotselectvaluesoutsidetherangeof
AssignstheBottom(KeyZoneBottom)(Program7 8192to+8191whenchangingthevalueinthisway.
1a)function.
Formoreinformation,seeStartSeedonpage 122.
+0000+0127:C1G9(correspondstonotenumbers)
Note:IftheStartSeedvalueissettoavalueoutside
Formoreinformation,seeBottom(KeyZone ofthisrangewhenyoufirstassignitasaRTParameter,
Bottom)onpage 101. itwillbelimitedtoeitherendoftherange.
Key Zone Top [+0000+0127] Freeze Loop Length [+0000+0032]
AssignstheTop(KeyZoneTop)(Program71a) AssignstheFreezeLoopLength(Program78b)
function. function.Thisspecifiesthenumberofmeasures(bars)
+0000+0127:C1G9(correspondstonotenumbers) inthephrasesthatarerepeatedlygeneratedbythe
KARMAModule.Afterbeingtriggered,theModule
Formoreinformation,seeTop(KeyZoneTop)on
willgenerateaphraseofthenumberofmeasuresyou
page 101.
specifyhere,andwillthenrepeatthatphrase.
Transpose In Thru [0036+0036]
Freeze Loop Length + Reset [+0000+0032]
AssignstheTransposeInZone(Program71a)
LikeFreezeLoopLength,above,thisalsoassignsthe
function.Thiscontrolstranspositionofthenotedata
FreezeLoopLength(Program78b)function.
fromthekeyboardwithintheKeyZone,insemitone
However,whenthisisused,andtheStartSeedissetto
steps.
someothervaluethan0:Random,changingtheFreeze
Formoreinformation,seeTransposeInZoneon LoopLengthtoanyvalueexcept0:Offwillresetthe
page 102. StartSeedinternallytotheindicatedvalue,thereby
restoringtheoriginalphraseatthenextdownbeat
Transpose Out Thru [0036+0036]
withoutretriggeringitfromthekeyboard.
AssignstheTransposeOutZone(Program71a)
Normally,ifyouweregeneratingarandomizedriff
function.Thiscontrolsthetranspositionofnotedata
fromaparticularStartSeedvalue,settingFreezeLoop
fromthekeyboardoutsidetheKeyZone,insemitone
Lengthto0:Offwouldcausethephrasetocontinue
units.
randomizingfromitscurrentinternalposition.Ifyou
Formoreinformation,seeThruOutZoneon thensettheFreezeLoopLengthtosomeothervalue
page 102. than0:Off,therebyloopingthephrase,itdoesnot
automaticallyresettheStartSeeduntilyouretriggerit
Transpose Octave In Thru [0036+0036]
fromthekeyboard(dependingonTriggersettings).By
AssignstheTransposeInZone(Program71a) usingFreezeLoopLength+Reset,achangeinthe
function.Thiscontrolsthetranspositionofnotedata FreezeLoopLengthcanadditionallyresettheinternal
fromthekeyboardwithintheKeyZone,inoctave StartSeedandthereforegeneratethesamephraseas
units. before,allowinginstantaneousswitchingbetween
randomizedandpresetphrases.
Transpose Octave Out Thru [0036+0036]
AssignstheTransposeOutZone(Program71a) Retrigger Each Time [+0000, +0001]
function.Thiscontrolsthetranspositionofnotedata AssignstheRetriggerEachTime(Program79b)
fromthekeyboardoutsidetheKeyZone,inoctave function.
units.
+0000:Off
Transpose Octave/5th In Thru [0036+0036] +0001:On
AssignstheTransposeInZone(Program71a) Formoreinformation,seeRetriggerEachTimeon
function.Thiscontrolsthetranspositionofnotedata page 124.
fromthekeyboardwithintheKeyZone,inunitsofan
octaveandafifth.

119
Program mode: HD-1

2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
t 7-6: Page Menu Commands seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu page 151.
commandsonpage 142.
4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite Sceneonpage 151.
Programonpage 142.
5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see Sceneonpage 151.
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.

77: Dynamic MIDI


77PMC

77a

77b

DynamicMIDIletsyouusethisinstruments Dynamic MIDI 18


controllersandMIDIcontrolmessagestocontrol
specificKARMAfunctions. Input (Input Module) [A]
YoucantakeadvantageofthistocontrolKARMAin InProgrammodethisisfixedatA.Thisisbecause
variouswayswhileyouplay.Forexample,youcanuse onlyKARMAModuleAisused.Thissettingcannotbe
noteonstoadvancetheKARMAclock(Manual changed.
Advance),orajoysticktoTriggerthestartofthe
patterns.YoucanuseafootpedaltocontrolAuto Source [Off, JS+Y (CC#01)
Transpose,oradamperpedaltocontroltheKARMA Velocity Outside Zone]
Latchsettings. Indicatesthecontrolleroraction.thatwillbethe
DynamicMIDIsource.Formoreinformation,see
DynamicMIDISources&Destinationsonpage 1038.
77a: Program Name and Tempo
Bottom (Range Bottom) [000127]
Fordescriptionsoftheseparameters,pleasesee72a:
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. Specifiesthelowerlimitforthevaluecontrolledby
Source.IfSourceisShortNote,NoteNo.,WhiteNote,
orBlackNote,thenumericvaluecorrespondstothe
77b: Dynamic MIDI notenumbersC1G9.
Youcansetup8differentDynamicMIDIroutings,
eachofwhichhasanidenticalsetofparameters,as
describedbelow.

120
Program P7: KARMA 77: Dynamic MIDI

Top (Range Top) [000127] ForexampleifyousetPolarityto+andtheSourceis


Specifiestheupperlimitforthevaluecontrolledby KARMASLIDER1,movingtheSlider1fromminto
Source.IfSourceisShortNote,NoteNo.,WhiteNote, maxwillchangethevaluefrom0127.Ifyouset
orBlackNote,thenumericvaluecorrespondstothe Polarityto,thesameSlider1movementwillchange
notenumbersC1G9. thevaluefrom1270.

Action (Source Action) [Momentary, Toggle,


Continuous]
t 7-7: Page Menu Commands
SpecifiestheoperationmodeforDynamicMIDI. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Momentary:Theparameterwillbecontrolledasa shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
momentaryswitch.ForexampleifSourceisJS+Y commandsonpage 142.
(CC#01),theparameterwillnormallybeoff,andwill
beonwhenyoumovethejoystick. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
Note:IfPolarityis+andthesourcecontrollervalueis
lessthanorequaltotheBottomsetting,thedestination 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
willbeoff.Ifthecontrollervalueisgreaterthanor ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
equaltotheTopsetting,itwillbeon. 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
Example seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.

WhenBottom:000andTop:127 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
Thecontrollervalueandtheon/offstatusarerelatedas page 151.
follows.
4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
000127:onat127 Sceneonpage 151.
127000:offat000 5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
Toggle:Theparameterwillbecontrolledasatoggle Sceneonpage 151.
switch.Forexample,ifSourceisJS+Y(CC#01),moving 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
ittothetopandreleasingitonetimewillturnthe seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
destinationon,andmovingittothetopandreleasing
itagainwillturnthedestinationoff.IfPolarityis+,on
andoffwillalternateeachtimethesourcecontroller
valueexceedstheTopvalueafterhavingpassed
throughtheBottomvalue.
Example
WhenBottom:0andTop:127
Thecontrollervalueandtheon/offstatusarerelatedas
follows.
000127:onoffat127
127000127:offonat127
(127001127:nochange)
Continuous:Theparameterwillbecontrolled
continuously,overtherangespecifiedbyBottomand
Top.Forexample,ifbottomis25andTopis100,the
destinationvaluewillbesmoothlyoperatedwhenthe
controllersvaluemovesbetween25and100.Values
outsidethatrangewillcausenofurtherchange.
Note:Theoperatingmodesthatcanbeselectedare
limitedbytheDestination.Formoreinformation,
seeDynamicMIDISources&Destinationson
page 1038.

Destination [Off, RT Params ControlBuffer Latch]


SelectstheDynamicMIDIControldestination
function.Formoreinformation,seeDynamicMIDI
Destinationsonpage 1040.

Polarity [+, , +/, /+]


SpecifiestheDynamicMIDIpolarity.

121
Program mode: HD-1

78: Random Seeds


78PMC

78a

78b

TheRandomSeedspageallowsyoutocontrolsomeof 0:Random:Adifferentphrasewillbegeneratedeach
therandomizablecharacteristicsofaModulesGE. timethetriggeroccurs.WithintheKARMAModule,a
Youcanfreeze(capture)theendlesslyvaryingphrases differentStartSeedvalueisspecifiedrandomlyeach
generatedbyKARMAsrandomizefeatures. timethetriggeroccurs.
AnyvalueotherthanRandom:Thesamephrasewill
begeneratedeachtimethetriggeroccurs.Different
78a: Program Name and Tempo valuesfortheStartSeedparameterwillproduce
Fordescriptionsoftheseparameters,pleasesee72a: differentphrases,butthesamephrasewillalwaysbe
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. generatediftheStartSeedvalueisthesame.

How the Start Seed value affects the phrase


78b: Start Asanexample,wewilluseProgramINTF099:Widow
ByusingtheCaptureRandomSeed(+p.151),Start MakertoseehowdifferentStartSeedsettingswill
Seed,andFreezeLoopLengthparameters,youcan affectthephrase.
looparandomlychangingphrase,orplaythesame 1. InProgrammode,selectINTF099:WidowMaker.
phraseeachtimeyoutriggerit.Thesecapabilitiesare ThisisanEXiProgram,usingtwoAL1stocreatea
collectivelycalledFreezeRandomize.Youcanalso leadsynthsound.KARMAisprogrammedtoplaya
storeaProgramorCombinationwiththesesettings,so phrase.
thatitwillalwaysplaythesamerandomizedphraseor
patternwhenyoufirstcallitup. 2. TurnonthefrontpanelKARMAON/OFFswitch.
3. PresstheCommonbutton,toseetheEXiCommon
NotallGEshavebeenprogrammedtoutilizethe
pages.
KARMAfunctionsrandomizationcapabilities.Ifno
randomizationhasbeenprogrammedaspartofthe 4. SelecttheP78:RandomSeedspage.
GE,changingtheseparameterswillappeartohave 5. PresstheCommonbuttontoaccessthe74:
noeffect. ModuleParametersTriggerpage,andsetNote
TriggertoAny.
Start Seed [21474836480:
Random+2147483647]
SpecifiestheseedthatisusedbytheKARMAModule
togeneratetherandomphrase.
Note:Seedisthesourcedatafromwhichthe
randomizationsarecreated.StartSeedistheseed
thatwillbeusedeachtimeatriggeroccurs.

122
Program P7: KARMA 78: Random Seeds

Formoreinformation,seeCheckingtheFreeze
Randomizefunction,andperformingCapture
RandomSeedonpage 152.

Freeze Loop Length [Off, 0132]


Specifiesthenumberofmeasuresinthephrasesthat
arerepeatedlygeneratedbytheKARMAModule.
Afterbeingtriggered,themodulewillgeneratea
phraseofthenumberofmeasuresyouspecifyhere,
andwillthenrepeatthatphrase.IfyousetthistoOff,
thephrasewillnotberepeated.
Thetablebelowandtheexplanationsthatfollow
describehowvariouscombinationsofStartSeedand
FreezeLoopLengthsettingswillaffectthephraseor
6. TurnthefrontpanelKARMALATCHswitchon. controldatathatisrandomlygeneratedbythe
7. Gotothe78:RandomSeedspage. KARMAModuleeachtimetriggeringoccurs,
accordingtotheGEsettingsyouareusing.
8. MakesurethattheKARMAmodulesStartSeed
valueis0:Random. 1. StartSeed:0:Random,FreezeLoopLength:
Off(unchecked)
IfStartSeedisotherthan0:Random,setitto
0:Random. Thephrasewillchangerandomlyeachtime
triggeringoccurs.Eachtimethephraserepeats,it
willchangerandomly.Forexample,supposethere
isaGEthat,ifyouinputCDEF,willrandomly
varytheorderofnotes,andrepeatedlyplayfour
notesineachmeasure.WhenyoutriggerthisGE,it
producesnotesinarandomorderof(forexample)
CDEF,CCDF,FDCE.Whenyoutrigger
thisGEagain,itproducesadifferentrandomphrase
of(forexample)EDCC,CCDD,CDCE.
2. StartSeed:anyvalue,FreezeLoopLength:Off
Eachtimetriggeringoccurs,thesamephrasewillbe
generated.DifferentStartSeedvaluescause
differentphrasestobegenerated.Thephrasewill
changerandomlyeachtimeitrepeats,butthesame
phrasewillalwaysbegeneratedeachtimeyou
TheKARMAmodulewillgeneratealeadsynth
retriggerwithagivenStartSeedvalue.Thislets
phrase.
youselectanydesiredoneofmorethanfourbillion
9. Usepad1toproduceatriggerseveraltimesata (!)differentphrasevariations.Forexample,suppose
fixedinterval(oneortwoseconds).Whendoing thereisaGEthat,ifyouinputCDEF,will
so,payattentiontothephrasethatbegins randomlyvarytheorderofnotes,andrepeatedly
immediatelyaftertriggering.Adifferentphrase playfournotesineachmeasure.Whenyoutrigger
willbeginplayingeachtimetriggeringoccurs. thisGE,itproducesnotesinarandomorderof(for
10.SetStartSeedtoanyvalueotherthan0:Random. example)CDDC,DCEC,DECD.Evenif
Forthisexample,wellsetitto+1. youtriggerthisGEagain,itreproducesthesame
11.Asyoudidinstep4,triggerpad1severaltimes, phraseofCDDC,DCEC,DECD.Ifyou
andpayattentiontothephrasethatbegins changetheStartSeedvalue,adifferentphrase
immediatelyaftertriggering.Thesamephrase willbegenerated;forexample,EECD,DCCC,
willbeginplayingeachtimetriggeringoccurs. EEEE.
12.SetStartSeedtoavalueotherthan+1,and 3. StartSeed:0:Random,FreezeLoopLength:
repeattheactionsyouperformedinstep4. 132
ThephrasewillbedifferentthanwhenStartSeed Thephrasewillchangerandomlyeachtime
was+1,butthesamephrasewillbeginplayingeach triggeringoccurs.However,thatphrasewillloop
timetriggeringoccurs. (repeat)forthenumberofmeasuresyouspecifiedin
FreezeLoopLength.Thesamephrasewill
Note:IfyousetStartSeedto0:Random,andexecute
continueloopinguntilyoutriggertheGEagain.
CaptureRandomSeed(+p.151)aftertriggering,the
WhenyoutriggertheGEagain,adifferentphrase
StartSeedvaluethatwasinternallysetwithinthe
willloop.Forexample,supposethereisaGEthat,if
moduleatthetimeoftriggeringwillbespecifiedhere.
youinputCDEF,willrandomlyvarytheorderof
Whilelisteningtothephrasesthatchangerandomlyat
notes,andrepeatedlyplayfournotesineach
eachtrigger,youcanexecutethiswhenyouheara
measure.IfyousetFreezeLoopLengthto1
phrasethatyouwanttoreproduce.Inconjunctionwith
(measure)andtriggerthisGE,thesamefournotes
theFreezeLoopLengthandRetriggerEachTime
willcontinuelooping(e.g.,FEDC,FEDC,FE
settings,youcanalsoloopaphrasethatyoulike.
DC,).Whenyoutriggeritagain,adifferent

123
Program mode: HD-1

phrasewillloop(e.g.,DDCC,DDCC,DDC 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
C,).(+RetriggerEachTimeonpage 119) seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
4. StartSeed:anyvalue,FreezeLoopLength: 3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
132 information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
Thesamephrasewillplayeachtimeyoutriggerthe page 151.
GE.Thatphrasewillloopforthenumberof 4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
measuresyouspecifiedinFreezeLoopLength. Sceneonpage 151.
Forexampleifyouselectaprogramorcombination,
5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
andmakethesesettingsforaKARMAModulethat
Sceneonpage 151.
generatesrandomchangeseachtimeitistriggered,
theexactsamephrasewillloopeverytime.The 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
phrasethatisloopedwillbedifferentifyouchange seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
theStartSeedvalue.Forexample,supposethere
isaGEthat,ifyouinputCDEF,willrandomly
varytheorderofnotes,andrepeatedlyplayfour
notesineachmeasure.IfyousetFreezeLoop
Lengthto1(measure)andtriggerthisGE,the
samefournoteswillloop(e.g.,DEEC,DEEC,
DEEC,).EvenifyoutriggertheGEagain,the
samephrase(DEEC,DEEC,DEEC,)will
bereproduced.IfyouchangetheStartSeedvalue,
adifferentphrase(e.g.,CCEE,CCEE,CCEE,
)willloop.(+RetriggerEachTimeon
page 119)

Retrigger Each Time [Off, On]


WhensettoOn(checked),everytimethespecified
looplengthiscompleted,thePhasePattern,Envelopes,
andIndexeswillretriggerasifthekeyboarditselfwas
retriggered.Thismeansthatthenotesinthephrase
willberestartedaccordingtotheNoteTriggersettings
(+NoteTriggeronpage 111)andtheapplicable
internalsettingsoftheGE,andanyenvelopeswillbe
retriggeredaccordingtotheEnvelopeTrigger/Latch
settings(+ EnvelopeTriggeronpage 112,
EnvelopeLatchonpage 112)
WhenOff(unchecked),theoveralllengthofthe
internalGEPhasePatterncontrolswhentheloopwill
beretriggered.Forexample,ifthePhasePatternis8
bars,andtheFreezeLoopLengthissetto2bars,
thentherandomizationswillresetevery2bars
(controllingtherhythmandmovementofnotes,for
example),butthemelodyandenvelopesmaynot
triggerfromthebeginninguntilevery8barsis
completed.(+CheckingtheFreezeRandomize
function,andperformingCaptureRandomSeedon
page 152)
NotavailableunlessFreezeLoopLengthissetto
somethingotherthanOff(unchecked).
Note:Insomecases,thetwosettingsmaysoundthe
same,dependingontheinternalsettingsoftheGE.

t 7-8: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.

124
Program P7: KARMA 79: Name/Note Map

79: Name/Note Map


79PMC

79a

79b

79c

HereyoucanassignthenamesforKARMASLIDERS
18andKARMASWITCHES18,viewGlobalNote 79c: Note Map
MapTables,andedittheCustomNoteMapTable NoteMapsallownotesbeinggeneratedbytheGEto
storedwiththeProgram. beselectivelyremappedtoothernotes,orremoved
completely(changedintorests).Hereyoucanview
79a: Program Name and Tempo GlobalNoteMapTables,andedittheCustomNote
MapTablethatisstoredwitheachProgram.TheNote
Fordescriptionsoftheseparameters,pleasesee72a: MapTableisassignedinModuleParametersControl:
ProgramNameandTempoonpage 103. NoteMap(+p.108).

Table [Custom, Global 164]


79b: Module A Thereare64GlobalNoteMapTablesprovidedinthe
HereyoucanassignthenamesforKARMASLIDERS systemwhichcannotbeedited,andprovideawide
18andKARMASWITCHES18. varietyofpresetnoteremappingfunctions.Thereis
alsoasingleCustomNoteMapTablestoredineach
TheRTCModelsincludeappropriatenamesforthe
Program,Combi,andSequence.
slidersandswitches.However,youmaywishtoedit
thenamesifyoumodifythecontrolassignments,or WhenTable=Custom,youcanedittheCustom
createnewones. TableusingtheInandOutparametersbelow.
WhenTableisoneofthe64GlobalTables,you
Slider1Slider8 [000: (no name) cannoteditit.
571: Waveform Select [16]]
In (Note In) [C-1G9]
SelectsthenamefortheKARMASLIDERS.
Specifiesanotenumber(ofdatabeinggeneratedby
Switch1Switch8 [000: (no name) theGE)thatyouwanttomaptoadifferentnoteorto
571: Waveform Select [16]] remove(changetoarest).
SelectsthenamefortheKARMASWITCH. Note:WhenInisselected,youcanholddownthe
Note:TheSliderandSwitchnamescanalsobe ENTERswitchandpressanoteonthekeyboardtoset
automaticallyassignedtonewcontrolassignments theInfieldtothatnote.
usingthePageMenuAutoAssignKARMARTC
Namecommand.Formoreinformation,seeAuto
AssignKARMARTCNameonpage 143.

125
Program mode: HD-1

79c

Out (Note Out) [Remove, C-1G9]


t 7-9: Page Menu Commands
Specifywhatwillbedonewiththenoteyouspecified
intheInfield. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Remove:ThenotespecifiedbyInwillberemoved
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
fromtheoutputdata(andchangedtoarest).
commandsonpage 142.
C1G9:ThenotespecifiedbyInwillbeconverted
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
tothenotenumberyouspecifyhere,andsenttothe
Programonpage 142.
tonegenerator.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
Note:WhenOutisselected,youcanholddownthe
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
ENTERswitchandpressanoteonthekeyboardtoset
theOutfieldtothatnote. 2:CopyKARMAModule.Formoreinformation,
seeCopyKARMAModuleonpage 150.
Table GridThisareagraphicallyshowstheoverallIn
3:InitializeKARMAModule.Formore
andOutsettingsinvisualform.
information,seeInitializeKARMAModuleon
Thehorizontalaxis(Xaxis)correspondstothe page 151.
incomingnotenumbers,andtheverticalaxis(Yaxis)
4:CopyScene.Formoreinformation,seeCopy
correspondstotheoutgoingnotenumbers.Thenote
Sceneonpage 151.
transmittedforeachreceivednoteisshownbythe
lightbluepixels.Notesthatarebeingremovedfrom 5:SwapScenes.Formoreinformation,seeSwap
theincomingdataareshowninyellowpixelsinthe Sceneonpage 151.
bottomRemoverow.Astraightdiagonalline 6:CaptureRandomSeed.Formoreinformation,
representsnochange(whatgoesinispassedthrough seeCaptureRandomSeedonpage 151.
withoutmodifications).
7:AutoAssignKARMARTCName.Formore
Youcanusethe buttonslocatedbelowthe information,seeAutoAssignKARMARTC
graphictochangetheInnotenumberupordown. Nameonpage 143.
Octave Replicate [Off, On] 9:CopyNoteMape.Formoreinformation,see
WhenOn(checked),anyeditthatyoumakewithinan CopyNoteMaponpage 143.
octavewillbemadeineveryoctave.Thisismainlyfor
applyingthetabletoMelodicGEs,whereyouwantto
dosomethinglikeremoveeveryminorthird,remap
everyfourthtoafifth,etc.,andhavethatchangetake
placeineveryoctave.

Reset [button]
Restoresthecurrenttabletolinear/nochange(a
diagonalline).

126
Program P8: Insert Effect 81: Routing

Program P8: Insert Effect


Thesepagesletyoucanmakesettingsfortheinsert Makedetailedsettingsforinserteffects
effects.Forinstance,youcan: MakecommonLFOsettingsforeffects
Sendtheoutputofaoscillatortoaninserteffect Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
Routeasoundtoaninserteffect page 787.

81: Routing
81PMC

81a

81b

81c

81d 81e
81f

Use Dkit Setting [Off, On]


81a: Routing Map
ThisisshownifOscillatorModeissettoDrums.If
Thisgraphicshowsanoverviewoftheinserteffects, OscillatorModeissettoSingleorDouble,thissetting
includingtheroutingoftheoscillatorstotheeffects, isignored.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeOscillator
theeffectsnamesandon/offstatus,chainingbetween Modeonpage 33.
theeffects,andtheoutputbustowhichtheinsert
On(checked):TheBusSelect,FXControlBus,Send1,
effectsarethemselvesrouted.
andSend2settings(Global53b)foreachkeyofthe
Thispageletsyouadjusttheroutingoftheoscillators selecteddrumkitwillbeused.Checkthissettingifyou
totheinserteffects.Toadjusttheothersettingsshown wanttoapplyanindividualinserteffecttoeachdrum
inthisgraphic,see85:InsertFX,asdescribedon instrument,ortosendindividualdruminstrumentsto
page 130. AUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL).
Tip:Inmostpreloadeddrumkits,thedrum
81b: Program Information & Use DKit instrumentshavethesameBusSelectsettings
accordingtotheirtype,asfollows.
Bank [(INTAINTG, USERAUSERG)]
SnaresIFX1
Program Name [000127/001128: Name] KicksIFX2
Tempo ( q ) [040.00240.00, EXT] TomsIFX3
Thisareadisplaysinformationabouttheprogram CymbalsIFX4
selectedforediting,includingtheProgramBank, Percussion,etc.IFX5
number,andname,andthetempousedforLFOs,
Off(unchecked):TheBusSelect,(81c)FXControl
effects,andKARMA.
Bus,(81d),81f:OSCMFXSendOSCMFXSend
settingswillbeused.Alldruminstrumentswillbesent
tothespecifiedbus.

127
Program mode: HD-1

UseDkitSetting=On

81c: Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.Out Assign) 81e: REC Bus


All OSCs to [L/R, IFX112, 18, 1/27/8, Off] All OSCs to [Off, 14, 1/2, 3/4]
Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforoscillators1and2. Thesesettingssendtheoutputoftheoscillator1,2to
L/R:TheoscillatorswillbeoutputtotheL/Rbus. theRECbusses(fourmonochannels:1,2,3,4).
NormallyyouwillchooseL/R. TheRECbussesarededicatedinternalbussesfor
IFX112:OutputtotheIFX112busses. recording,usedforsamplinginthevariousmodesor
forrecordingaudiotracksinSequencermode.
18:Theoscillatorwillbeoutputinmonofromthe
correspondingAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL). InProgrammode,youcanresampleyourkeyboardor
KARMAperformance,orsampleanexternalaudio
1/27/8:Theoscillatorwillbeoutputinstereo signalfromtheAUDIOINPUTjacks.
accordingtoitspansetting(41c,45:Amp/Driver2)
fromthecorrespondingAUDIOOUTPUT Inorderforyoutosample,SourceBusmustbesettoa
(INDIVIDUAL)pair. RECbus.

Off:TheoscillatorwillnotbeoutputfromtheL/Rbus, NormallyyouwillsetSourceBustoL/Rsothatyou
IFX112busses,orIndividual18busses.Choosethe cansamplethesignaloftheL/Rbusline,suchasyour
Offsettingifyouwanttheprogramoscillatoroutputof keyboardorKARMAperformance.However,youcan
thetimbretobeconnectedinseriestoamastereffect. useaRECbusifyouwanttosampleonlyanaudio
UseSend1(toMFX1)andSend2(toMFX2)tospecify inputwhileperformingonthekeyboardorKARMA
thesendlevels. functionwhicharebeingoutputviaLandR.If
desired,multipleaudioinputscanbemixedtoaREC
bus,orthedirectsignalfromanaudioinputcanbe
81d: FX Control Bus mixedtoaRECbusalongwiththesoundfroman
inserteffectandsampled.Formoreinformation,see
All OSCs to [Off, 1, 2] thediagramSourceBus=RECBus1/2onpage 16.
Sendstheoutputoftheoscillator1,2toanFXControl Off:ThesignalwillnotbesenttoaRECbus.Normally
bus(twochannelstereoFXCtrl1or2). youwillleavethisoff.
UsetheFXControlbusseswhenyouwantaseparate 14:Theoutputoftheoscillator1,2willbesenttothe
soundtocontroltheaudioinputofaneffect.Youcan correspondingRECbus.ThePansetting(41c,45:
usetwoFXControlbusses(eachisatwochannel Amp/Driver2)ofeachoscillatorwillbeignored,and
stereobus)tocontroleffectsinvariousways. thesignalwillbesentinmonaural.
Formoreinformation,pleaseseeFXControlBuses 1/2,3/4:Theoutputoftheoscillator1,2willbesentin
onpage 790. stereotothecorrespondingpairofRECbusses.The
signalissentinstereotoRECbusses1/2or3/4
accordingtothePansetting.

128
Program P8: Insert Effect 81: Routing

81f: OSC MFX Send


OSC1 Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputof
oscillator1willbesenttomastereffect1.Thisapplies
onlywhenBusSelect(81c)issettoL/RorOff.
IfBusSelectissettoIFX1IFX12,thesendlevelsto
mastereffects1and2aresetbySend1andSend2(8
5a)afterpassingthroughIFX112.

OSC1 Send2 (to MFX2) [000127]


Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputof
oscillator1willbesenttomastereffect2(seeOSC1
Send1(toMFX1)).

OSC2 Send1 (to MFX1) [000127]


OSC2 Send2 (to MFX2) [000127]
Setsthevolume(sendlevel)atwhichtheoutputof
OSC2willbesenttomastereffects1and2.These
parameterswillbevalidwhenOscillatorModeisset
toDoubleandBusSelectissettoL/RorOff.
Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolSend1
andSend2.Thesecanalsobecontrolledfromthemixer
sectionofthefrontpanel,orfromtheP0Control
SurfacepageoftheLCDscreen.Herestheprocedure
foreditingthesesettingsfromthefrontpanel.
1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXER
TIMBRE/TRACKswitchtoturniton(lit).
2. PresstheMIXERKNOBSswitchtoselect
CHANNELSTRIP.
3. UsetheMIXERSELECT12switchestoselectthe
oscillatorwhosesendlevelsyouwanttoadjust.
4. UseFXSEND1(knob7)andFXSEND2(knob8)
tocontrolthesendlevels.
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoL/Ror
OFF,thiswillcontrolOSC1Send1(toMFX1)and
OSC2Send2(toMFX2).
IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoIFX1
12,thiswillcontrolSend1andSend2(P8InsertFX
page).
CC#93controlsOSC1/2sSend1level,andCC#91
controlstheSend2level.Thesearecontrolledonthe
globalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Theactual
sendlevelisdeterminedbymultiplyingthese
valueswiththesendlevelsofeachoscillator.

t 81: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
3:SwapInsertEffects.Formoreinformation,see
SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.

129
Program mode: HD-1

85: Insert FX
85PMC

85b

85a

Note:thedisplayedvaluesareroundedtotheclosest
85a: Effect/EXi Fixed Resource Meter 1%,buttheinternalvalueshaveamuchfiner
resolution.Thismeansthatyoumaysometimesaddan
Background information
effect,butseenochangeintheresourcemeter.
Mosthardwaresynthesizersofferasingle,fixed
FXshowsthepercentageofthetotalprocessingpower
methodofsynthesis,apredeterminednumberof
beingusedfortheIFX,MFX,andTFX.Thiswillvary
voices,andafixedamountofeffectsprocessingpower.
dependingonthespecificeffectsbeingused.
OASYSisdifferent;ithasnofixedsynthesismethod,
anditsharesitsprocessingpowerbetweenvoicesand IfaneffecthasbeenassignedtoanIFX,MFX,orTFX,it
effects. willtakeupthesameamountofprocessingresources
evenifitisturnedOfforbypassed.Ifyouwanttofree
Thisflexibilitymeansthatthesystemcandeliver
uptheprocessingresources,changetheselectionto
powerwhereyouneeditthemost.Forinstance,one
000:NoEffect.
Programmayneedabunchofvoiceslayeredtogether,
butnotmanyeffects;anothermightneedcomplex EXiFIXEDshowsthepercentageofthetotal
effectsprocessing,butnotasmanyvoices.Inboth processingpowerusedforthefixedcomponentsofEXi
cases,OASYSwillautomaticallydivideitsprocessing instruments.FixedmeansthatpartoftheEXistarts
powerappropriately. usingprocessingpowerassoonastheEXiisloaded,
beforeplayinganynotes;thisincludesthebuiltin
Unlikemostcomputerbasedsystems,OASYSalso
effectsoftheCX3,forexample.
monitorstheoverallprocessingpower,reducingthe
overallnumberofvoicesifnecessary,tomakesurethat OnlysomeEXiincludefixedcomponents;forinstance,
thereareneverproblemswiththeaudio. theCX3does,buttheAL1doesnot.Forinformation
onotherEXi,seetheirindividualdocumentation.
Normally,youshouldntneedtothinkaboutthisatall;
itwilljusthappenautomatically.Sometimes,however, FormoreinformationonEXifixedresources,please
itcanbeconvenienttoknowhowthesystemis seeCX3&STR1:LimitationsonEXifixedresources
allocatingitsresources.Thatswhatthismeterisfor. onpage 382.

The resource meter FREEFORVOICESshowsthepercentageofthetotal


processingpowerremainingaftertheFXandEXifixed
TheresourcemetershowshowtheOASYSprocessing components.Thispowerisavailableforplaying
powerisbeingused,asanapproximatepercentageof synthesizervoices.
thetotalavailablepower.Therearethreemain
categories:FX,EXiFixed,andFreeforVoices. WhenFreeforVoicesisat100%,youcanachievethe
maximumpolyphonyforinstance,172voicesofthe
HD1,96voicesoftheAL1,or172voicesoftheCX3.
WhenmoreeffectsorEXifixedresourcesarebeing
used,polyphonywillbereducedaccordingly.

130
Program P8: Insert Effect 85: Insert FX

Category/IFXSelectmenu

Note:Aswiththemeterasawhole,thenumbershown Ifthisisoff,theinputwillsimplybepassedtothe
inFREEFORVOICESisonlyanapproximation.For output.(When000:NoEffectisselected,theresno
example,ifFREEFORVOICESisshowing98,the differencebetweenOnandOff.)
maximumpolyphonyfortheHD1maynotbeexactly Thesettingwillalternatebetweenonandoffeachtime
172 0.98(approximately168). youpressthebutton.
Themaximumpolyphonywillalsodependonvarious Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanuseMIDICC
otherparameters;formoreinformation,seeAnote #92(ontheglobalMIDIChannel)toturnallinsert
aboutpolyphonyonpage 33. effectsoff.Avalueof0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof
1127restoretheoriginalsetting.
85b: IFX Chain to [IFX2IFX12]
Hereyoucanchoosethetypeofeachinserteffect1 Youcanchainuptotwelveinserteffectstogetherin
through12,itson/offstatus,chaining,andadjustthe series,tocreatemorecomplexeffects.Setupthechain
postIFXmixersettings.Forinserteffects,thedirect usingthisparameter,andthenenableitusingthe
sound(Dry)isalwaysstereoinandout.The Chaincheckbox,below.
input/outputconfigurationoftheeffectsound(Wet)
Effectsmustbechainedinascendingnumericorder.
dependsontheeffecttype.Formoreinformation,
Forexample,IFX1canbechainedtoanyofIFX2
pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1IFX12)onpage 794.
throughIFX12,andIFX2canbechainedtoIFX3
IFX1 throughIFX12.
Youcanchaintwoormoreeffectsintothesamedown
IFX1 [000185] streameffect.Forinstance,bothIFX1andIFX2canbe
Thisselectstheeffecttypeforinserteffect1. chainedtoIFX6.

Category/IFX Select menu Effectscanalsojoinachaininthemiddle.Forinstance,


youcanchainIFX3toIFX4toIFX9,andthenchain
Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/IFX IFX2toIFX9aswell.
Selectmenuwillappear,lettingyouselecteffectsby
category.Usethetabstoselectacategory,andthen ThePan(CC#8),BusSelect,RECBus,andSend1/2
selectaneffectwithinthatcategory.PresstheOK settingsapplyonlytothelasteffectinthechain.
buttontoexecuteyourselection,orpresstheCancel However,anyeffectinthechaincanbesenttotheFX
buttontocancel. Controlbuses.

IFX1 On/Off [Off, On] Chain [Off, On]


Thisenablesthechain,assetupbytheChainto
parameter,above.

Pan (CC#8) (Post IFX Pan) [L000C064R127]


Switchestheinserteffecton/off.
Specifiesthepanningimmediatelyaftertheinsert
effect.
YoucanuseCC#8tocontrolthis.
131
Program mode: HD-1

Bus Sel. (Bus Select) [L/R, 18, 1/27/8, Off] IFX2: Chain to [IFX3IFX12]
Specifiesthebustowhichthesignalwillbesent
IFX3: Chain to [IFX4IFX12]
immediatelyaftertheinserteffect.
L/R:ThesignalwillbesenttotheL/Rbus,which IFX4: Chain to [IFX5IFX12]
passesthroughTFX1and2andthengoestothemain
IFX5: Chain to [IFX6IFX12]
L/Routputs.Thisisthedefaultsetting.
18:Thesignalwillbesent,inmono,totheselected IFX6: Chain to [IFX7IFX12]
individualoutput.
IFX7: Chain to [IFX8IFX12]
1/27/8:ThesignalwillbepannedbythePan(CC#8)
setting,andsentinstereototheselectedpairofaudio IFX8: Chain to [IFX9IFX12]
outputs.
IFX9: Chain to [IFX10IFX12]
Off:Thesignalwillnotbesentdirectlytotheoutputs.
Thissettingisusefulifyouwantto: IFX10: Chain to [IFX11IFX12]
UseSend1or2toroutethesignalentirelythrough
IFX11: Chain to [(IFX12)]
themastereffects,withoutsendingthedrysignalto
theoutputs. Thesespecifythechaindestinationforeachinsert
effect.IfChainisenabled,theinserteffectwillbe
UsetheFXControlBustoroutethesignaltoan connectedinseriestotheIFXspecifiedbytheChainto
effectssidechain,suchasagateorvocoder, setting.
withoutbeinghearddirectlyattheoutputs.
UsetheRECBustorecordthesignal,without Chain [Off, On]
routingthesignaldirectlytotheoutputs. Specifieswhetherinserteffectswillbeconnectedin
series.
FX Control Bus [Off, 1, 2]
IftheChaincheckboxison,thisinserteffectwillbe
ThissendsthepostIFXsignaltotheFXControl connectedinseriestotheinserteffectselectedby
busses.Formoreinformation,see81d:FXControl Chainto.ThisisnotavailableforIFX12.
Busonpage 128.
Tip:IfyoumovefromthispagetotheP8IFX112
REC Bus [Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1/2, 3/4] page,theIFXyouchooseherewillbeselected.
SendsthepostIFXsignaltotheRECbusses.Formore
information,seeSee81e:RECBusonpage 128.If t 85: Page Menu Commands
youwanttoresampleviatheRECbusses,setthe
samplingSourceBus(08d)toREC1/2orREC3/4. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Send1 [000127] shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
Send2 [000127]
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
TheseadjustthelevelatwhichthepostIFXsignalis
Programonpage 142.
senttomastereffects1and2.ThisisvalidifBusSelect
(85a)issettoL/RorOff. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Note:YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolSend1
andSend2.(See81f:OSCMFXSendonpage 129) 2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
YoucanuseCC#93tocontroltheSend1level,and
CC#91tocontroltheSend2level.TheglobalMIDI 3:SwapInsertEffects.Formoreinformation,see
channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a)is SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
usedforthesemessages. 4:InsertIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeInsert
IFXSlotonpage 154.
IFX212
5:CutIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeCutIFX
Hereyoucanspecifyeachinserteffectseffecttype, Slotonpage 155.
on/offstatus,chaining,andmixersettingsfollowing
theinserteffect.WiththeexceptionofChaintoand 6:CleanUpIFXRoutings.Formoreinformation,
Chain,theparametersarethesameasforIFX1.See seeCleanUpIFXRoutingsonpage 156.
IFX1onpage 131.

132
Program P8: Insert Effect 86: Track View

86: Track View


85b 86PMC

11a

86a

86b

86a: Track View


Thisshowstheoscillator1,2outputandinserteffect
routing.
Theselectedslotisshownindarkblue.Inthe
Selectedareabelow,youcanspecifytheEffect
TypeandOn/Offstatus.TheInsertIFXSlotand
CutIFXSlotpagemenucommandswillapplytothe
slotyouselecthere.
ThefollowingdiagramshowstheIFXassignedtoeach
IfyoumovefromthispagetotheP8IFX112page,
keyofadrumkitwhenOscillatorModeissetto
theIFXyouchooseherewillbeselected.
DrumsforanHD1ProgramandUseDKitSettingis
Inthefollowingdiagram,theAudioInshownbelow turnedon.
IFX10andIFX11indicatestheinserteffectsthrough
Inthisexample,youcanseethatIFX1,2,3,4,and5are
whichAudioInput14andS/P DIFL/Rarepassing.
eachusedbyakeyinthedrumkit(showninlight
Inthisexample,youcanseethatAudioInput14and blue).IfyoupressanIFXthatisbeingused,thateffect
S/P DIFL/RarepassingthroughIFX11andIFX12. willbeshowninthelinebelow.
OUTPUTshowstheBusSelectsettingthatfollows
theinserteffects.Thistellsyouwheretheaudiosignal
isbeingoutput.

86b: Selected t 86: Page Menu Commands


HereyoucanspecifytheEffectTypeandOn/Off ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
statusoftheinserteffectslotselectedbyTrackSelect. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
(86a:TrackView,above) shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite Programonpage 142.

133
Program mode: HD-1

1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see 4:InsertIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeInsert
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. IFXSlotonpage 154.
2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see 5:CutIFXSlot.Formoreinformation,seeCutIFX
CopyInsertEffectonpage 153. Slotonpage 155.
3:SwapInsertEffects.Formoreinformation,see 6:CleanUpIFXRoutings.Formoreinformation,
SwapInsertEffectonpage 154. seeCleanUpIFXRoutingsonpage 156.

87: IFX 112


87PMC

87a

87b

Thispageletsyoueditthedetailedparametersofthe IFX1 On/Off [Off, On]


twelveinserteffects.UsethetabsatlefttoselectIFX1
throughIFX12.
Toselectdifferenteffectstypes,usetheInsertFXor
TrackViewpages.Formoreinformation,see85: Thisturnstheinserteffectonandoff.Itislinkedwith
InsertFXonpage 130and86:TrackViewon theon/offsettingintheInsertFXpage.
page 133.
P (Effect Preset) [P00, P0115, U0015, --------]

Effects Modulation: Dmod EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthe


Mosteffectshaveoneormoreparameterswhichcan settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16
bemodulatedinrealtime.IntheOASYS,thisiscalled userpresetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15re
DynamicModulation,orDmodforshort. writablefactorypresets.

ForacompletelistofDmodsources,seeDynamic Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program,
ModulationSourceListonpage 1030. Combi,Sequence,andSampling),andsetsofpresets
canbesavedtoandloadedfromdisk.
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledon
theglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Formore Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically
information,seeDynamicmodulation(Dmod)and storedwiththeProgramyoudontneedtostorethem
TempoSynchronizationonpage 789. asanEffectPreset.Presetsjustmakeiteasiertoreuse
yourfavoritesettings.
Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhile
87a: IFX1 workingonaparticularProgram,andthenlateruse
Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheinserteffect thesameEffectPresetinadifferentProgram,Combi,
youselectedintheP8InsertFXpage.Usethetabsat orSong.
thelefttoselectIFX112.

134
Program P8: Insert Effect 87: IFX 112

P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare
recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFX
page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere.
P01P15:ThesecontainpresetdatathatKorgplansto
provideinthefuture.Werecommendthatyoustore
yoursettingsinU00U15.
U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyour
ownsettings.
:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen
selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect,
writtenaProgram,orselectedanewProgram.
Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveany
effect.
Note:Programssavetheeffectsparametersettings,but
theydontsavethenumberoftheselectedEffect
Preset.IfyouselectanEffectPreset,andthensavethe
Program,theEffectPresetsettingwillrevertto
.

Using Effect Presets


1. SelectaneffectintheInsertFXpage.
2. TheP00:InitialSetsettingswillberecalled.
P(EffectPreset)willindicate.
3. UseP(EffectPreset)toselectaneffectpreset:
P00P15orU00U15.
Thestoredparameterswillberecalled.Notethat
thiswilloverwriteallparametersoftheeffect.
4. Edittherecalledparametersasdesired.
5. Ifyouvecomeupwithsettingsyoulikeandwant
tosavethemasanewpreset,usetheSavetoUser
Presetmenucommand.

IFX1 Parameters
ThistabshowstheparametersforIFX1,asselectedon
theP8:InsertFXpage.
Fordetailsonthespecificparametersofeacheffect,
pleaseseeInsertEffects(IFX1IFX12)onpage 794.

87b: IFX212
ThesetabsshowtheparametersforIFX212,as
selectedontheP8:InsertFXpage.Theyhavethesame
controlsasdescribedunder87a:IFX1,above.

t 87: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
3:SwapInsertEffects.Formoreinformation,see
SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.
4:WriteFXPreset.Formoreinformation,see
WriteFXPresetonpage 158.

135
Program mode: HD-1

89: Common FX LFO


89PMC

89a

89b

ThetwoCommonFXLFOsallowyoutosynchronize Frequency [0.0220.00 Hz]


LFObasedmodulationformultipleeffects,suchas ThisspecifiesthefrequencyoftheCommonFXLFO.
phasers,flangers,filters,andsoon. HighervaluesmaketheLFOfaster.
TheCommonLFOscontrolonlythefrequency,MIDI
synchronization,andresetoptions;eachindividual MIDI/Tempo Sync [Off, On]
effectstillhasitsownsettingsfortheLFOwaveform On(checked):TheLFOwillsynchronizetothesystem
andphase. tempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDIClock.
Withintheindividualeffects,youcanchoosewhether TheLFOspeedwillbecontrolledbytheBaseNoteand
touseoneoftheCommonLFOs,ortousethe Timesparameters,below.AllsettingsforFrequency
individualeffectsfrequency,sync,and/orresetsettings andFrequencyModulationwillbeignored.
instead.ThisisdoneviatheeffectsLFOType Off(unchecked):TheFrequencysettingswill
parameter;selectIndividualtousetheeffectssettings, determinethespeedoftheLFO,andthetempo
orCommon1or2tousetheCommonLFOs. settingswillhavenoeffect.
Dmod(DynamicModulation)iscontrolledonthe BPM [MIDI, 40.00240.00]
globalMIDIchannelspecifiedinGlobalmodeP1.
Base Note [r w ]
89a: Common FX LFO1 ThissetsabasicrhythmicvaluefortheLFOspeed,
relativetothesystemtempo.Thevaluesrangefroma
Sync (Reset) [Off, On] 32ndnotetoawholenote,includingtriplets.Itapplies
ThisspecifieswhethertheCommonFXLFOwillbe onlywhenMIDI/TempoSyncisOn.
reset. Times [0132]
Ifthisison,operatingtheSource(below)willresetthe ThismultipliesthelengthoftheBaseNote.For
phaseoftheLFO. instance,iftheBaseNoteissettoasixteenthnote,and
Source (Dmod Source) [List of Dmod Sources] Timesissetto3,theLFOwillcycleoveradotted
eighthnote.
IfSync(Reset)ison,thisselectstheDmodsource
thatwillresettheCommonLFO.Foracompletelistof
Dmodsources,seeDynamicModulationSourceList 89b: Common FX LFO2
onpage 1030.
TheparametersareidenticaltothoseforCommonFX
Thiswillbeoffwhenthemodulationsource LFO1,asdescribedunder89a:CommonFXLFO1
specifiedbySourcehasavaluebelow64,andon onpage 136.
whenthevalueisabove64.TheLFOwillbereset
whenthisvaluerisesfromalevelbelow64toalevel
higherthan64.

136
Program P8: Insert Effect 89: Common FX LFO

Common FX LFO
LFO Type = Common1

Common FX LFO1 Stereo Flanger

Frequency[Hz] Waveforem = Triangle


Reset Generate original LFO waveform Phase Offset = 0 [deg]

Stereo Phaser

Waveforem = Sine
Phase Offset = 0 [deg]

Stereo Auto Pan

Waveforem = Sine
Phase Offset = +90 [deg]

t 89: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyInsertEffect.Formoreinformation,see
CopyInsertEffectonpage 153.
3:SwapInsertEffects.Formoreinformation,see
SwapInsertEffectonpage 154.

137
Program mode: HD-1

Program P9: Master/Total Effect


Hereyoucanmakesettingsforthemastereffectsand Makedetailedsettingsformastereffectsandtotal
totaleffects.Forinstance,youcan: effects
Routeasoundtoanmastereffectsandtotaleffects Formoreinformation,pleaseseeEffectGuideon
page 787.

91: Routing
85b 91PMC

11a

91a

91b

91c

Hereyoucanspecifythetypeofmastereffectsand selectaneffectwithinthatcategory.PresstheOK
totaleffects,andturnthemon/off. buttontoexecuteyourselection,orpresstheCancel
ThemastereffectsaresenttotheL/Rbus.Thetotal buttontocancel.
effectsareinsertedintotheL/Rbus. MFX1 On/Off [Off, On]

91a: MFX1, 2
Themastereffectdoesnotoutputthedirectsound
(Dry).AdjusttheReturn1andReturn2return Switchesthemastereffect1on/off.Whenoff,the
levelstoreturnthesignaltotheL/Rbusandmixit outputwillbemuted.Thiswillalternatebetweenon
withtheL/Rbussignal. andoffeachtimeitispressed.

Themastereffectsarestereoin/out,butdependingon Separatelyfromthesettingshere,youcanuse
theselectedeffecttype,theoutputmaybemonaural. controlchange#94toturnmastereffects1and2off.
SeeIn/Outonpage 794. Avalueof0turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127
restoretheoriginalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannel
MFX1 specifiedbyMIDIChannel(Global11a)isused
forthismessage.
MFX1 [000185]
Return 1 [000127]
Thisselectstheeffecttypeformastereffect1.Youcan
useanyoftheavailableeffects,withoutlimitation.If Thisspecifiesthereturnlevelfromthemastereffectto
youchoose000:NoEffect,theoutputfromthemaster theL/Rbus(afterwhichitpassesthroughTFX1and2,
effectismuted. andissentfromL/MONOandR).

Category/MFX Select menu


Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/MFX
Selectmenuwillappear,lettingyouselecteffectsby
category.Usethetabstoselectacategory,andthen

138
Program P9: Master/Total Effect 91: Routing

Category/MFXSelectmenu

MFX2 Thetotaleffectsarestereoinandstereoout,butthe
outputmaybemonauraldependingonthetypeof
MFX2 [000185] effectyouselect.(SeeIn/Outonpage 794.)

MFX2 On/Off [Off, On] TFX1


Return 2 [000127] TFX1 [000185]
Theseparametersspecifytheeffecttypeformaster Thisselectstheeffecttypefortotaleffect1.Youcanuse
effect2,itson/offstatus,andthereturnlevelfrom anyoftheavailableeffects,withoutlimitation.
mastereffect2totheL/Rbus.SeeMFX1onpage 138.
Category/TFX Select menu
Chain: Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,theCategory/TFX
Selectmenuwillappear,lettingyouchooseeffecttypes
Chain On/Off [Off, On]
bycategory.Usethetabstoselectaneffectcategory,
On(checked):Chain(seriesconnection)willbeturned andthenchooseaneffectwithinthatcategory.Press
onforMFX1andMFX2. theOKbuttontoexecuteyourchoice,orpressthe
Cancelbuttontocancel.
Chain Direction [MFX1->MFX2, MFX2->MFX1]
SpecifiesthedirectionoftheconnectionwhenMFX1 TFX1 On/Off [Off, On]
andMFX2arechained.
MFX1MFX2:ConnectfromMFX1toMFX2.
MFX2MFX1:ConnectfromMFX2toMFX1.
Thisturnstotaleffect1on/off.Ifthisisoff,theinput
Chain Level [000127] willbepasseddirectlythrough.Thesettingwill
alternatebetweenon/offeachtimeyoupressthis.
WhenchainisOn,thissetsthelevelatwhichthe
soundissentfromthefirstmastereffecttothenext Separatelyfromthissetting,youcanusecontrol
mastereffect. change#95toturnbothtotaleffectsoff.Avalueof0
turnsthemoff,andvaluesof1127restorethe
originalsetting.TheglobalMIDIchannelspecified
91b: TFX1, 2 byMIDIChannel(Global11a)isusedforthis
Thesearetheparametersfortotaleffect1and2,which message.
areplacedatthefinalstageoftheL/Rbus.After
passingthroughthetotaleffects,thesoundisoutputto TFX2
AUDIOOUTPUT(MAINOUT)L/MONOandR. TFX2 [000185]
Forthetotaleffects,thedirectsound(Dry)isalways
stereoin/out.Theinput/outputconfigurationofthe TFX2 On/Off [Off, On]
effectsound(Wet)willdependontheselectedeffect Theseparametersspecifytheeffecttypeandon/off
type. statusfortotaleffect2.SeeTFX1onpage 139.

139
Program mode: HD-1

91c: Master Volume t 91: Page Menu Commands


Master Volume [000127] ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
Thisspecifiesthefinalleveloftheaudiooutputthat
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
haspassedthroughtotaleffects1and2,andoutput
commandsonpage 142.
fromAUDIOOUTPUT(MAINOUT)L/MONOandR.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Note:Youcancontrolthemastervolumefromthe
Programonpage 142.
controlsurface.Youcanalsocontrolthissettingfrom
theP0ControlSurfacepage. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNMIXER
TIMBRE/TRACK,MIXERAUDIOorR.TIME 2:CopyMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
KNOBS/KARMAswitchtoturniton(lit). CopyMFX/TFXonpage 157.
2. UsetheMIXVOLUMESMASTERsliderto 3:SwapMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
controlthelevel. SwapMFX/TFXonpage 158.

92: MFX1
92PMC

92a

MFX1 On/Off [Off, On]


Effects Modulation: Dmod
Mosteffectshaveoneormoreparameterswhichcan
bemodulatedinrealtime.IntheOASYS,thisiscalled
DynamicModulation,orDmodforshort. Thisturnsmastereffect1on/off.Itislinkedwiththe
ForacompletelistofDmodsources,seeDynamic on/offsettingintheP9Routingpage.
ModulationSourceListonpage 1030.
P (Effect Preset) [P00, P0115, U0015, --------]
Effectdynamicmodulation(Dmod)iscontrolledon
theglobalMIDIChannel(Global11a).Formore
information,seeDynamicmodulation(Dmod)and
TempoSynchronizationonpage 789. Thisselectstheeffectpreset.Formoreinformation,
pleaseseeP(EffectPreset)onpage 134.

92a: MFX1 MFX1 Parameters


Hereyoucanedittheparametersoftheeffectyou Hereyoucanedittheparametersofthemastereffect
chooseforMFX1intheP9Routingpage. selectedintheP9Routingpage.
Fordetailsonthemastereffects,pleaseseeMaster
Effects(MFX1,2)onpage 807.
140
Program P9: Master/Total Effect 93: MFX2

1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
t 92: Page Menu Commands ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+ 2:CopyMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese CopyMFX/TFXonpage 157.
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
3:SwapMFX/TFX.Formoreinformation,see
commandsonpage 142.
SwapMFX/TFXonpage 158.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
4:WriteFXPreset.Formoreinformation,see
Programonpage 142.
WriteFXPresetonpage 158.

93: MFX2

94: TFX1

95: TFX2
ThesepagesletyouedittheparametersofMaster
Effect2andTotalEffects1and2.Toselectdifferent
effectstypes,usetheRoutingpage,asdescribedunder
91:Routingonpage 138.
TheparametersforMFX2,TFX1,andTFX2arethe
sameasforMFX1.Formoreinformation,see92:
MFX1onpage 140.

141
Program mode: HD-1

Program: Page Menu Commands


TheupperlineofthedialogshowstheBank,number,
ENTER + 0-9: shortcuts for menu andProgramname.
commands Ifyouwishtomodifytheprogramname,pressthetext
Eachpagehasasetofmenucommands,which editbuttontomovetothetexteditdialogbox,and
provideaccesstodifferentutilities,commands,and enterthedesiredprogramname.
options,dependingonthepageyourecurrentlyon. 2. InCategoryandSubCategory,specifythe
Youcanusethemenucommandsentirelyfromthe categoryoftheprogramthatyouarewriting.
touchscreen,bypressingthemenubuttoninthe
ThecategorycanbeusedtofindthisProgramwhen
upperrighthandcornerofthescreenandthen
selectingaprograminProgram,Combination,or
selectinganoptionfromthemenuthatappears.
Sequencermodes.
Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownunique
Note:YoucaneditthesecategorynamesintheGlobal
menucommands,themenusarestandardizedasmuch
ProgramCategorypage.Formoreinformation,see3
aspossible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthe
1:ProgramCategoryonpage 720.
firstmenuiteminProgram,Combination,and
Sequencemodes. 3. PressToProgramtospecifythedestination
Bankandnumber.
Youcantakeadvantageofthisstandardizationby
usingashortcuttoaccessanyofthefirsttenmenu YoucanalsousetheBANKINTAUSERGswitchesto
items: selectabank.
1. HolddowntheENTERkey. Important:HD1Programscanonlybewrittento
HD1Banks,andEXiProgramscanonlybewritten
2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadto
toEXiBanks.Formoreinformationonthedefault
selectthedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0.
Banktypes,andonhowtochangethem,pleasesee
Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1for ProgramBankContentsonpage 3,and
thesecond,andsoon. ChangingtheBankTypeforUSERAGon
Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff page 3.
(suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthe 4. ToWritetheProgram,presstheOKbutton.To
commandcallsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappear cancel,presstheCancelbutton.
ontheLCD,andyoucanproceedjustasifyoud
selectedthecommandfromthetouchscreen. Saving edits to GM Programs
YoucaneditGMPrograms,butyoumustthensave
themtoaBankotherthanINTG;theGMPrograms
Write Program themselvescannotbeoverwritten.
ThiscommandwritesaneditedProgramintothe Shortcut: SEQUENCER REC/WRITE
OASYSinternalmemory.Itisavailableoneverypage
inProgrammode. YoucanalsousetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEbutton
toquicklyupdatethecurrentProgram,usingthe
WriteProgramletsyou: existingname,bank,number,andcategory.Todoso:
Saveyouredits 1. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEbutton.
RenametheProgram TheUpdateProgramdialogwillappear.
AssigntheProgramtoaCategory 2. PressOKtowritetheprogram.
MarktheProgramasaFavorite
CopytheProgramtoadifferentBankandnumber
Exclusive Solo
BesuretoWriteanyProgramthatyouwishtokeep.
AneditedProgramcannotberecoveredifyoudo ThiscommandisavailableoneverypageinProgram
notwriteitbeforeturningoffthepowerorselecting mode.
anotherProgram. ThemenusExclusiveSoloparameteraffectstheway
1. SelectWriteProgramtoopenthedialogbox. thatSoloworks.WhenExclusiveSoloisOff
(unchecked),youcansolomultipleTracksandinputs
atonce.
WhenExclusiveSoloisOn(checked),onlyoneMIDI
Track,HDRTrack,orAudioInputcanbesoloedata
time.Inthismode,pressingaSoloswitch
automaticallydisablesanyprevioussolos.
Onmostpages,youcanalsotoggleExclusiveSoloby
holdingENTERandpressing1onthenumeric
keypad.
FormoreinformationonSolo,pleasesee:
Programmode:Soloonpage 21

142
Program: Page Menu Commands Auto Assign KARMA RTC Name

Combinationmode:Soloonpage 391 WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theselectedtablewill


Sequencemode:Soloonpage 495 becopiedtothecustomnotemap.

Auto Assign KARMA RTC Name Optimize RAM


ThiscommandisavailableontheKARMAGEtabof OptimizeRAMisavailableontheAudioIn/Sampling
thePlaypage,andtheName/NoteMaptabofthe tabofthePlaypage.
KARMApage. Insomecases,especiallyifyouvebeenloadingand
AutoAssignKARMARTCNamewillautomatically deletingdifferentSamplesandMultisamples,the
assignappropriatenamestotheKARMASlidersand internalmemorycanbecomefragmented.
Switches,basedontheGERealTimeparametersand Fragmentedmeansthattherearechunksofdata
PerformanceRealTimeparameterstowhichtheyare scatteredthroughoutthephysicalRAM,liketoyblocks
assigned.YoucanusethiswhencreatingnewKARMA scatteredacrossafloor.Whilethememoryisnt
functionassignments,oreditingexistingones. completelyfull,someofitcantbeusedjustlikeits
Thenamesareselectedfromalistof400options,such difficulttowalkacrossamessyfloor.
asRhythmSwing%andRhythmComplexity. TheOptimizeRAMcommandcleansupthefloor,so
1. ChooseAutoAssignKARMARTCNameto tospeak.Itcollectsallofthedataintoasingle,
openthedialogbox. continuousareaofmemory,sothattheremainingfree
spacecanbeusedmoreefficiently.
2. Toexecutethecommand,presstheOKbutton.To
cancelwithoutexecuting,presstheCancelbutton. Ifyourunoutofmemory,tryusingthiscommand;it
mayfreeupsomeextraspace.
Pleasebeawarethatevenwithunedited,factory
preloadedProgramsorCombinations,executing YoucanchecktheremainingamountofRAMin
thiscommandmayassignnamesthataredifferent Samplingmode,onthemainRecordingpage,under
fromthosecurrentlyspecified. FreeSampleMemory/Locations.Formore
information,pleaseseeRAMonpage 630.
1. SelectOptimizeRAMtoopenthedialogbox.
Copy Note Map
Thiscommandcopiessettingsfromapresettableor
fromthecustomnotemapofaspecifiedprogram,
combination,orsongtothecurrentlyselectedcustom
notemap.
1. ChooseCopyNoteMaptoopenthedialogbox.
2. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand,or
presstheCancelbuttontocancelwithout
executing.

Auto Optimize RAM


IfAutoOptimizeRAM(Global01d)isenabled,you
dontneedtousetheOptimizeRAMcommand;
instead,RAMwillbeoptimizedautomatically.

2. UsetheFromfieldtospecifythecopysource
notemaptable.
Select Sample No.
ChooseCustomifyouwanttocopyfromthecustom SelectSampleNo.isavailableontheAudio
notemapusedbyadesiredprogram,combination,or In/SamplingtabofthePlaypage,whenthesampling
song. SaveToparameterissettoRAM.
Choosethedesiredtableifyouwanttocopyfroma Thisspecifiesthesamplenumberintowhichthe
presettable. sampleddatawillbewritten.Youcanalsospecify
whetherthesamplewillautomaticallybeconvertedto
Note:Bydefault,theTablesettingisselectedinthe
aprogramaftersampling.
CopyNoteMapFromfield.Ifyouwanttocopya
presettable,itsagoodideatoverifyandselectthe 1. ChooseSelectSampleNo.toopenthedialogbox.
tablethatyouwanttocopytothecustomnotemap
beforeyouchoosethiscommand.
3. IfyouvespecifiedCustom,selectthecopysource
mode,bank,andnumber.Youcanalsoselectthe
bankbypressingtheBANKSELECT[A][G]
switches.
4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyNoteMap
command,orpresstheCancelbuttonifyoudecide
nottoexecute.

143
Program mode: HD-1

SetOriginalKey(Sampling01b)tospecifythe
locationoftheoriginalkey.Themultisamplewill
createanIndex(Sampling01b)withthiskeyasthe
TopKey(Sampling01b).TheOriginalKeywill
incrementbyoneaftersampling,andthenexthigher
notewillbeassignedthenexttimeyousample.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoapplythesettingsyou
made,orpresstheCancelbuttontoreturntothe
statepriortoaccessingthisdialogbox.

Select Directory
SelectDirectoryisavailableontheAudioIn/Sampling
tabofthePlaypage,whenthesamplingSaveTo
2. InSampleNo.,specifythewritingdestination parameterissettoDISK.
samplenumber. Whensamplingtodisk,thisletsyousetthedisk,
Bydefault,thiswillbethelowestnumberedvacant directory,andfilenamefortheresultingWAVEfile.
samplenumber.Ifyouselect:NoAssign ThisdialogalsoletsyouauditionWAVEfilesdirectly
orasamplenumberthatalreadycontainsdata,the fromthedisk;youcanusethisasashortcut,insteadof
datawillautomaticallybesampledintothelowest usingthesimilarfunctioninDISKmode.
vacantsamplenumber.Ifyouaresamplingin
stereo,Mode(08c),specifySampleNo.(L)and Specifying the save destination for a WAVE file
SampleNo.(R). 1. SelecttheSelectDirectorycommandtoopenthe
3. SetAuto+12dBOn. dialogbox.
On(checked):+12dB(Sampling21d)will 2. UsethepopupbuttonlocatedattheleftofDrive
automaticallybeturnedonforsamplesyourecord. selecttoselectthewritingdestinationdrivefor
Samplesforwhich+12dBisonwillplayback sampling.
approximately+12dBlouderthanifthissettingwere 3. UsetheOpenandUpbuttonstomovetothe
off. desireddirectory.
WhenyouresampleaperformanceinProgram, 4. InName,specifyanamefortheWAVEfilethat
Combination,orSequencermodes,youshould willbewrittenduringsampling.
normallysetRecordingLeveltoabout0.0(dB),sothat IfyoucheckTakeNo.,thefilewillbesavedwithatwo
itwillbeashighaspossiblewithoutclipping. digitTakeNo.addedtotheendofthefilename.This
Whenyouresample,thesoundwillberecordedatthe numberwillautomaticallyincrementeachtimeyou
optimumlevelforsampleddata,buttheplaybacklevel sample.Thisisconvenientwhenyouaresampling
atplaybackwillnotbeasloudasitwasduringthe repeatedly,sinceeachsamplewillbesavedwithits
resamplingprocess(if+12dB(Sampling21d)isoff). ownfilename.
Insuchcases,youcanchecktheAuto+12dBOncheck IfTakeNo.isnotchecked,youcaninputuptoeight
boxwhenyouresample,sothat+12dBwill charactersinName.IfTakeNo.ischecked,youcan
automaticallybeon,makingthesampleplaybackat inputuptosixcharacters.
thesamelevelaswhenitwasresampled.
5. PresstheDonebuttontocompletethesettings.
Inthesemodes,thepowerondefaultsareRecording
Levelsetto0.00(dB)andAuto+12dBOnturnedon.If Playing back a WAVE file
youresampleaperformanceinoneofthesemodes 1. SelecttheSelectDirectorycommandtoopenthe
withthesesettings,thesamplewillplaybackatthe dialogbox.
samelevelatwhichitwasresampled.
2. UseDriveSelectandtheOpenandUpbuttonsto
TheAuto+12dBOnsettingismadeindependentlyfor selectthedriveanddirectory,andselecttheWAVE
Program,Combination,Sequencer,andSampling file(48kHz)thatyouwanttoplay.
modes.
3. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchor
4. Converttospecifieswhetherthesamplewill Playbutton.
automaticallybeconvertedintoaprogramassoon
TheselectedWAVEfilewillbeplayed.
asithasbeensampled.Thisisconvenientwhen
youwanttohearthesoundimmediatelyafter 4. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchor
sampling. Stopbuttononceagaintostopplayback.
IfyouchecktheProgramcheckbox,thesamplewill IftheWAVEfileismono,thesamesoundwillbe
automaticallybeconvertedintoaprogram. outputtoL/R.
Attheright,setProgramandMStospecifythe
programnumberandmultisamplenumberforthe
Auto Sampling Setup
convertedprogram.
AutoSamplingSetupisavailableontheAudio
In/SamplingtabofthePlaypage.

144
Program: Page Menu Commands Auto Sampling Setup

SelectDirectory

ThiscommandautomaticallyconfigurestheProgram
modesamplingrelatedparameters,makingiteasyfor
youtosampleanexternalaudiosourceortoresample
yourperformanceasyouplayaProgram.Youcanalso
usethiscommandtoinitializethesamplingsettings.
AfterusingAutoSamplingSetup,youcanfurther
adjustanyofthesettingstosuityourneedsas
describedintheNoteparagraphsofeachsection.
Whenyouexecutethiscommand,theapplicable
parameterswillbesetautomatically.Youcannotuse
theCOMPAREbuttontorecalltheprevious
settings.
1. SelectAutoSamplingSetuptoopenthedialog PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheInitializeoperation,
box. orpresstheCancelbuttonifyoudecidenottoexecute.
2. Pressaradiobuttontoselectthetypeofsettings Formoreinformation,seeAutomaticallyset
youwanttomake. parametersandtheirvaluesonpage 147.
Initialize:Initializesthesamplingrelatedparameters Resample Program Play
totheirdefaultstate.
IfyouselectedResampleProgramPlay:
ResampleProgramPlay:Setsthesamplingrelated
parameterstoallowyoutoplayaProgramand
resampleyourperformance.
RECAudioInput:Setsthesamplingrelated
parameterssothatyoucansampleanexternalaudio
source.Withthesesettings,youcanplayaProgram
whilesampling,butonlytheexternalinputwillbe
recorded.
3. Thesesettingswilldependonthechoiceyou
makeinstep2.

Initialize
IfyouselectedInitialize:
1. UseSavetotoselecteitherRAMorDISKasthe
destinationtowhichtheresampleddatawillbe
written.
IfyouchooseRAM,thesampleddatawillbewritten
intoRAM.IfyouchooseDISK,thesampleddatawill
besavedtodiskasaWAVEfile.

145
Program mode: HD-1

2. IfyouselectedRAMforSaveto,youcanalso IfyouselectedRECAudioInput:
specifywhetherthesamplewillbeautomatically 1. UseSourceAudiotoselecttheexternalaudio
convertedtoaprogramafterresampling.Ifyou inputsource.
wanttoconvertthesample,checktheConvertto
Programoption,anduseProgramtospecifythe Analog1/2:Selectstheanalogaudiosourceconnected
desiredconvertdestinationprogram. totheAUDIOINPUT1andAUDIOINPUT2jacks.
3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteResampleProgram Analog3/4:Selectstheanalogaudiosourceconnected
Play.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel totheAUDIOINPUT3andAUDIOINPUT4jacks.
button.(SeeAutomaticallysetparametersand S/P DIF:Selectsthedigitalaudiosourceconnectedto
theirvaluesonpage 147) theS/P DIFjack.
Notea:Resample)Toresample,executeResample 2. UseMonoL/MonoR/Stereotospecifywhether
ProgramPlay.ThenpressSAMPLINGRECandthen theinputsourceismonoorstereo.
SAMPLINGSTART/STOP,andplaytheprogramfrom
MonoL:SettingswillbemadeforsamplingtoL
thekeyboardetc.SinceTrigger(08c)issettoNote
MONOfromInput1(ifyouveselectedAnalog1/2)or
On,samplingwillbeginatthefirstnoteon.When
fromInput3(ifyouveselectedAnalog3/4).
youvefinishedplaying,presstheSAMPLING
START/STOPswitchtostopresampling. MonoR:SettingswillbemadeforsamplingtoR
MONOfromInput2(ifyouveselectedAnalog1/2)or
Noteb:Checkthesampleddata)Verifythatyour
fromInput4(ifyouveselectedAnalog3/4).
performancewasresampledcorrectly.Ifyouexecuted
withSavetoRAMandConverttoProgram Stereo:SettingswillbemadeforsamplingInput1/2or
checked,selecttheprogramyouspecifiedasthe 3/4instereo.
convertdestinationandplaytheC2noteofthe 3. UseSavetotospecifythewritingdestination
keyboardtohearthesample.Ifyoudidntcheck forthesampleddata.RAMwillwritethedatainto
ConverttoProgram,useSamplingmodetoselect RAMmemory.DISKwillcreateaWAVEfileofthe
thesampleandlistentoit. sampleddata,andsaveittodisk.
IfyouselectedSaveto:DISK,usethepagemenu 4. IfyouveselectedSavetoRAM,youcanspecify
command08C:SelectDirectorytoheartheresults. whetherthesamplewillautomaticallybe
convertedtoaprogram.Ifyouwantthesampleto
Specify the writing destination beconvertedtoaprogram,checkConvertto
Whensavingthesampletodisk,youcanusethemenu ProgramandusetheProgramfieldtospecify
commandSelectDirectorytospecifythediskand theconvertdestinationprogram.
foldertowhichthesamplewillbestored.Formore 5)Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffecttothe
information,pleaseseeSelectDirectoryonpage 144. externalaudioinputsourcewhileyousample,use
Noted:Samplingtrigger)YoucanusetheTrigger IFXtoselecttheinserteffectyouwanttouse.
(08c)settingtochangethewayinwhichsampling Turnthisoffifyoudontwanttouseaninserteffect.
willbestarted. 6)PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteRECAudioInput.
Notee:Samplingmultiplesourcessimultaneously)If Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel
youwanttosimultaneouslysamplebothanexternal button.(SeeAutomaticallysetparametersand
audiosourcefromAUDIOINPUTtogetherwithyour theirvaluesonpage 147)
ownplayingonaprogram,gototheSamplingpage, Note:Tosample,executeRECAudioInput,thenpress
andsettheInput14settingBus(IFX/Indiv.)Select SAMPLINGREC,andthenSTART/STOPtobegin
toL/R,andtheSourceBustoL/R. sampling.(ThisisbecauseTriggerissettoSampling
Notef:IfyouexecuteAutoSamplingSetupwithSave STARTSW.)Whenyourefinished,pressthe
toRAMandtheConverttoProgramoption SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostopsampling.
checked,andyoucontinuesampling,eachsuccessive Ifyouwanttosamplewhilemonitoringthe
samplewillbeautomaticallyassignedtoC2,C#2,D2, performancegeneratedbytheKARMAfunction,check
tocreateamultisample.Anewmultisamplewillbe LatchandstartsamplingwhiletheKARMA
createdthenexttimeyouexecuteAutoSampling functionisplaying.
Setupandstartsampling.
Note:IfyouvesetSourceAudiotoS/P DIF,use
REC Audio Input SystemClock(Global02a)tochangethesystem
clock.
Note:Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffecttotheinput
sourcewhileyousample,makethefollowingsettings.
IntheProgramP0SamplingpageInput14,S/P DIF
L/R,useBus(IFX/Indiv.)SelecttochooseIFX1
IFX12,choose1/2astheRECBusfollowingtheinsert
effectyoureusing,andsetSourceBustoREC1/2.
Foradditionalinformation,refertoNoteb)f)inIf
youselectedResampleProgramPlay.

146
Program: Page Menu Commands Copy Tone Adjust

Automatically-set parameters and their values


Copy Tone Adjust
3.Auto
2.REC Resampl CopyToneAdjustisavailableontheControlSurface
1. pagewhenCONTROLASSIGNissettoTONE
Parameter Audio e
Initialize ADJUST.
Input through
IFX ThiscommandreplacesthecurrentToneAdjust
Analog, (Source Analog,
settingswiththoseofanyotherProgram,Combination
Input (Input Source) : Timbre,orSongTrack.
S/P DIF*1 Audio)*2 S/P DIF*1
Level 127 1. SelectCopyToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.

Pan L000
Input1 : Bus Select Off (IFX)*3 Off
Send1 000
Send2 000
Level 127
Pan R127
Input2 : Bus Select Off (IFX)*3 Off
Send1 000
2. UseFromtoselectthecopysourcemode,bank,
Send2 000 andnumber.
Source Bus L/R YoucanusethefrontpanelBANKkeystoselectthe
Trigger Sampling START SW desiredbank.
Recording 3. IntheTimbrefield(ifyouveselecteda
Setup : Metronome
Off Combination)orTrackfield(ifyouveselecteda
Precount
Song),selecttheTimbreorTracktocopyfrom.
Resample Manual Manual Auto
4. SelecteitherAllorAssignmentsOnlytospecify
Save to RAM (Save to) (Save to) theToneAdjustparametersyouwanttocopy.
Sample (Source All:ThiscopiesboththeToneAdjustparameter
LMONO Stereo
Mode Audio)*4 assignmentsandvalues.
Sample AssignmentsOnly:ThiscopiesonlytheTone
REC Sample Maximum
Time: RAM Adjustparameterassignments,withoutthevalues.
Setup :
Sample 4min 5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyTone

Time: DISK 59.999sec Adjustcommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonif
Recording
youdecidetocancel.
+0.0 +0.0 12.0
Level [dB]
REC Sample Auto +12dB
Off Off On Reset Tone Adjust
Preference : On
ResetToneAdjustisavailableontheControlSurface
Bus Select
(P8 Routing) All OSCs to L/R L/R (IFX)
pagewhenCONTROLASSIGNissettoTONE
: ADJUST.
ThiscommandresetstheToneAdjustsettingsforallof
:Notsetautomatically theKnobs,Switches,andSliderstotheirdefault
Valuesenclosedinparentheses()areautomatically values.
setaccordingtothesettingsyoumakeinthedialog 1. SelectResetToneAdjusttoopenthedialogbox.
box.
*1:SettingsforAnalog,S/P DIF(Input1and
Input2)aremadeautomatically.
*2:Theinputsourcesetting(Input1andInput
2)youspecifiedforSourceAudiointhedialog
boxwillbesetautomatically.
*3:IfSourceAudioisMonoLthiswillbeL 2. UsetheTofieldtospecifyhowtheKnob18,
Mono,ifMonoRthiswillbeRMono,andifStereo SW116,Slider18,andMasterSliderparameters
thiswillbeStereo. willbereset.
*4:WhenSaveto:RAM,andConvertto AllOff:AllwillberesettoOff.
Programischecked. DefaultSetting:Theparameterswillberesettothe
defaultvaluesfortheapplicabletypeofprogram
(HD1,AL1,CX3).

147
Program mode: HD-1

3. ToexecutetheResetToneAdjustcommand,press 1. SelectCopyVectorEnvelopetoopenthedialog
theOKbutton.Toexitwithoutresettingthe box.
controls,presstheCancelbutton.

Copy Oscillator
CopyOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunderthe
Basic/Vector,OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQ,andAMS
Mix/CommonKeyTrackpages.
Thiscommandisusedtocopythesettingsfromone
oscillatortoanother.
1. SelectCopyOscillatortoopenthedialogbox. 2. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthemode,bank,and
numberofthedesiredcopysource.Youcanpress
aBANKkeytoselectthedesiredbank.
ThiscommandcopiestheparametersoftheP1
VectorEnvelopepageofthecorrespondingmode.
Note:Inordertoreplicatethewayinwhichthe
relativevolumeofoscillatorsiscontrolledbythe
vectorandvectorenvelopeoftheprogramselected
foracombinationtimbreoraMIDIsongtrack,turn
ontheEnableProgramVectorVolumecheckboxin
theVectorControlVolumepage.ToreplicatetheCC
2. UsetheFromfieldtoselecttheoscillatorthat controleffects,turnontheEnableProgramVector
youwanttocopy. CCcheckboxintheVectorControlCCpage.
3. UseProgramtoselectthebankandnumberof Usethiscommandwhenyouwanttocopythe
thecopysourceprogram.YoucanpressaBANK PositionorTime/Tempoofavectorenvelopein
SELECTswitchtoselectthedesiredbank. ordertocreateanenvelopethatproducesthesame
Note:IfyoureeditinganHD1Program,youcant movement.
selectEXiPrograms,andviceversa. 3. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand,or
4. IfyoucheckToneAdjusttoo,theToneAdjust presstheCancelbuttontocancel.
settingswilltemporarilybeturnedoff,andfrom
thecopysourceToneAdjustsettings,the
Commonportionandtheassignmentsandcurrent Copy Pad Setup
valuesofthecorrespondingOSCportionwillbe
copied. CopyPadSetupisavailableonthePadstabofthe
Basic/Vectorpage.
IfToneAdjusttooisunchecked,theToneAdjust
settingswillbemaintained. Thiscommandcopiesthepadsettingsofthespecified
Program,Combination,orSong.
5. InTo,specifythecopydestinationoscillator.
1. SelectCopyPadSetuptoopenthedialogbox.
6. ToexecutetheCopyOscillatorcommand,press
theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.

Swap Oscillator
SwapOscillatorisavailableonallofthetabsunder
theBasic/Vector,OSC/Pitch,Filter,Amp/EQ,andAMS
Mix/CommonKeyTrackpages.
Thiscommandexchangesthesettingsofoscillators1
and2.
1. SelectSwapOscillatortoopenthedialogbox.
2. ToexecutetheSwapOscillatorcommand,press
theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. 2. UsetheFromfieldtoselectthemode,bank,and
ThiscanbeselectedonlyifOscillatorMode(11a)is numberofthedesiredcopysource.Youcanalso
Double. selectBanksviathefrontpanelBANKSELECT
buttons.
IfyoupresstheSetToCurrentbutton,thecurrently
Copy Vector Envelope selectedmode,bank,numberandpad(editcell)
willautomaticallybeassignedtotheFromfield.
CopyVectorEnvelopeisavailableontheVector
Thisisusefulwhenyouretryingoutotherpad
EnvelopetaboftheBasic/Vectorpage.
settingsandwanttotemporarilycopypreviously
Thiscommandcopiesvectorenvelopesettingsfrom editedpadsettingstoanothervacantpad.
thespecifiedprogram,combination/timbre,orsong.

148
Program: Page Menu Commands Sample Parameters

3. Selectthecopysourcepadnumber.Ifyouwantto thesameastheindexLevelparameterinSampling
copyallsettingsforpads18,checktheAlloption. mode;editsherewillaffectthevaluesshownin
4. UsetheTofieldtospecifythecopydestination Samplingmode,andviceversa.
pad. EachSamplealsohasa+12dBsetting,asconfiguredin
Note:Executingthiscommandwillcopythenote Samplingmode;ifthisison,theSamplewillplayback
numberandvelocityvalue.TheMIDIchannelisnot approximately12dBlouder.
copied.
Cutoff [-99+00+99]
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyPad
Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theOscillatorsfilter
Setupcommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonto
cutoffsettings.
cancel.
Resonance [-99+00+99]
Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theOscillatorsfilter
Sample Parameters
resonancesettings.
SampleParametersisavailableontheOSC1/2Basic
pages. Pitch [-64.00+00.00+63.00]
Thiscommandletsyouadjustvariousparametersfor Thisadjuststheplaybackpitchinonecentsteps.A
theindividualsampleswithinaRAMmultisample, settingof+12.00raisesthepitchoneoctave,anda
includingvolumelevel,cutoff,resonance,pitch,EG settingof12.00lowersthepitchoneoctave.Thisisthe
attackanddecay,driveandlowboost,andEQgains. sameastheindexPitchparameterinSamplingmode;
editsherewillaffectthevaluesshowninSampling
TheSampleParameterscommandisavailableonlyif mode,andviceversa.
youveselectedaRAMMultisample;itisnotavailable
forROMMultisamples,WaveSequences,orDrum Attack [-99+00+99]
Kits. Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theattacktimesofthe
Whenyouvefinishededitingtheparameters,pressthe filterEGandampEG.
Donebutton.PleasenotethatCompareisnotavailable
foreditsmadeinthisdialogbox. Decay [-99+00+99]
Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theattacktimesofthe
Note:TheSampleParameterssettingsapply
filterEGandampEG.
everywherethattheMultisampleisused,andnotjust
tothecurrentProgram.IfanotherProgramusesthe Driver [-99+00+99]
sameMultisample,itwillalsobeaffectedbyany
Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theOscillatorsDriver
changesthatyoumakehere.
setting.IftheDrivercircuitisbypassed,thiswillhave
noeffect.

Low Boost [-99+00+99]


Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theOscillatorsLow
Boostsetting.IftheDrivercircuitisbypassed,thiswill
havenoeffect.

LEQ Gain [-36dB+00+36dB]


Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theProgramsLowEQ
gainsetting.IftheEQisbypassed,thiswillhaveno
effect.

MEQ Gain [-36dB+00+36dB]


Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theProgramsMidEQ
gainsetting.IftheEQisbypassed,thiswillhaveno
Index [001128] effect.
AnIndexisakeyzoneinaMultisample,includinga
singleSampleandallofitsassociatedparameters.This HEQ Gain [-36dB+00+36dB]
isthecurrentlyselectedIndex. Thisaddsto,orsubtractsfrom,theProgramsHighEQ
Thenumberfollowing/isthetotalnumberof gainsetting.IftheEQisbypassed,thiswillhaveno
indexesinthecurrentMultisample. effect.

Sample [000]
ThisisthenumberandnameoftheIndexsSample. Sync Both EGs
SyncBothEGsisavailableontheFilter1/2EGand
Level [-99+00+99]
Amp1/2EGpages.
ThisadjuststhevolumeoftheSample,relativetothe
Oscillatorssettings.Negative()valueswilldecrease ThisoptionallowsyoutoedittheEGsofOscillator1
thelevels,andpositive(+)valueswillincreasethe andOscillator2together.Whenitischecked,editing
levels.Asettingof+99willdoublethevolume.Thisis theFilterEGofeitherOscillator1or2willchangeboth
FilterEGssimultaneously.Similarly,editingtheAmp
EGofeitherOscillatorwillchangebothAmpEGs.

149
Program mode: HD-1

ThisoptionisavailableonlywhentheOscillatorMode 6. Ifyouwanttocopythenoteandvelocitysettings
issettoDouble. ofpads18,turnPadson.
1. SelectSyncBothEGs. 7. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCopyKARMA
TheLCDscreenwillindicateSyncBothEGs,and Modulecommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonif
thetwoEGswillbesynchronized. youdecidetocancel.

Settings copied by Copy KARMA Module


Whencopyingfromaprogram
IfGERTPControlSetting&ScenesandPerf.RTP&
PanelSettingsareOff(checked),thefollowing
contentiscopied.
2. IfyounolongerwanttheEGstobesynchronized, TheGEselectedbythecopysourceKARMA
selectSyncBothEGsonceagain. module.
TheindicationwilldisappearfromtheLCDscreen.
SettingsoftheKARMAmoduleparameters(73:
ModuleParameterTrigger,74:Module
ParameterControl).
Swap LFO 1&2
75:GERTPpageMIN,MAX,andVALUE
SwapLFO1&2isavailableonalloftheLFOpages, settings.
exceptfortheCommonLFOtab.
IfyouturnGERTPControlSetting&ScenesOn
ThiscommandcopiesthesettingsofLFO1toLFO2, (checked)
andviceversa.
InadditiontothecontentcopiedwhenGERTP
Note:IfLFO2isbeingusedtomodulateLFO1,this ControlSetting&ScenesisOff(unchecked),the
commandwillerasethatmodulationrouting(sincethe followingcontentiscopied.
LFOscannotmodulatethemselves).
75:GERTPpageASSIGNandPOLARITY
Afteropeningthedialogbox,presstheOKbuttonto settings.
swaptheLFOsettings,orpresstheCancelbuttonto
Thesceneselectedinthemasterbuffer,the
closethedialogboxwithoutmakinganychanges.
KARMACONTROLSsliderandKARMASWITCH
settingsofeachscene(06d:RealtimeControlsand
09f:R.TimeKnobs/KARMAsettings).
78:Name/NoteMapcontrollernamesettings.
IfyouturnPerf.RTP&PanelSettingOn
(checked)
InadditiontothecontentcopiedwhenPerf.RTP&
PanelSettingsisOff(unchecked),thefollowing
Copy KARMA Module contentiscopied.
CopyKARMAModuleisavailableonallofthe Temposetting.
KARMApages,aswellastheKARMAGEtabofthe TimeSignaturesetting.
Playpage. KARMAON/OFFswitchsetting.
ThiscommandcopiesthesettingsoftheKARMA KARMALATCHswitchsetting.
Moduleusedbyaspecifiedprogram,combination,or
song. 76:PerfRealTimeParameterspagesettings.
1. SelectCopyKARMAModuletoopenthedialog 77:DynamicMIDIpagesettings.
box. Whencopyingfromacombinationorsong
2. InFrom,selectthecopysourcemode,bank,and IfGERTPControlSetting&ScenesandPerf.RTP&
number. PanelSettingsareOff(unchecked)whenyoucopy
YoucanusethefrontpanelBANKSELECTswitchesto fromacombinationorsong,thefollowingcontentis
selectthebank. copied.
3. Ifyouselectedacombinationorsongasthecopy TheGEselectedforthecopydestinationKARMA
source,selectthemodulefromwhichyouwantto module(includingtheGErealtimeparameters).
copy. KARMAmoduleparameters(73:Module
4. Asappropriateforthecontentthatyouwantto ParameterTrigger,74:ModuleParameter
copy,turnGERTPControlSetting&ScenesOn Control).
(checked). 75:GERTPpageMIN,MAX,andVALUE
Formoreinformation,seeSettingscopiedbyCopy settings.
KARMAModule,below.
IfyouturnGERTPControlSetting&ScenesOn
5. Ifyouwanttocopyperformancerealtime (checked)
parameters,DynamicMIDI,andfrontpanel InadditiontothecontentcopiedwhenGERTP
settings,turnPerf.RTP&PanelSettingsOn ControlSetting&ScenesisOff(unchecked),the
(checked). followingcontentiscopied.
150
Program: Page Menu Commands Initialize KARMA Module

75:GERTPpageASSIGNandPOLARITY InadditiontotheparametersinitializedwiththeOff
settings. (unchecked)setting,thefollowingparameterswillalso
TheKARMACONTROLSsliderandKARMA beinitialized.
SWITCHsettingsofeachsceneinthecopysource 75:GERealTimeParameterspageASSIGN
buffer,andthecurrentlyselectedscene. (Off)andPOLARITY(+).
78:Names/NoteMapcontrollernamesettings. KARMACONTROLSsliderandKARMASWITCH
IfyouturnPerf.RTP&PanelSettingOn settingsineachscene(064/0).
(checked) KARMACONTROLSsliderandKARMASWITCH
InadditiontothecontentcopiedwhenPerf.RTP& names(noname).
PanelSettingsisOff(unchecked),thefollowing IfyouinitializewithPerf.RTP&PanelSettings
contentiscopied. turnedOn(checked)
Temposetting. InadditiontotheparametersinitializedwiththeOff
TimeSignaturesetting. (unchecked)setting,thefollowingparameterswillalso
beinitialized.
KARMAON/OFFswitchsetting.
76:PerfRealTimeParameterspageparameters.
KARMALATCHswitchsetting.
77:DynamicMIDIpageparameters.
KARMAModuleControlswitchsetting.
76:PerfRealTimeParameterspagesettings.
77:DynamicMIDIPagesettings. Copy Scene
TheInputChannelandOutputChannel CopySceneisavailableonalloftheKARMApages,as
(Combination/SequencerP71)settingsofa wellastheKARMAGEtabofthePlaypage.Itsalso
combinationorsongarenotcopied. availableontheControlSurfacepage,when
CONTROLASSIGNissettoRealTime
Knobs/KARMA.
Initialize KARMA Module ThiscommandcopiessettingsfortheKARMAScenes.
InitializeKARMAModuleisavailableonallofthe Youcanusethiscommandwhenyouwanttomake
KARMApages,aswellastheKARMAGEtabofthe settingsforascenebasedontheotherscenesettings
Playpage. youedited,orviceversa.

ThiscommandsetstheKARMAModulesparameters 1. ChooseCopyScenetoopenthedialogbox.
totheirdefaultvalues. 2. InFrom:selectthescenethatyouwishcopy.
TheGEselectionwillnotbeinitialized.TheGE 3. InTo:selectthecopydestinationscene.
parameterValueswillbesettothedefaultvalues 4. Toexecutethecopy,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel
thatarepresetfortheselectedGE. withoutexecuting,presstheCancelbutton.
1. SelectInitializeKARMAModuletoopenthe
dialogbox.
2. Asappropriateforthesettingsyouwantto
Swap Scene
initialize,youcanturnon(check)theGERTP SwapSceneisavailableonalloftheKARMApages,as
Controlsettings&Scenesand/orPref.RTP& wellastheKARMAGEtabofthePlaypage.Itsalso
PanelSettingoptions. availableontheControlSurfacepage,when
Formoreinformation,seeSettingsinitializedby CONTROLASSIGNissettoRealTime
InitializeKARMAModule,below. Knobs/KARMA.
3. Toinitializethesettings,presstheOKbutton.To Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)thesettingsoftwo
cancelwithoutinitializing,presstheCancel KARMAScenes.
button. 1. ChooseSwapScenetoopenthedialogbox.
Settings initialized by Initialize KARMA Module 2. InSource1andSource2,selecttwoKARMA
Scenes.thatyouwishtoswap.
IfyouinitializewiththeGERTPControlSettings&
ScenesandPref.RTP&PanelSettingoptions 3. Toexecutetheswap,presstheOKbutton.To
turnedOff(unchecked),thefollowingparameterswill cancelwithoutexecuting,presstheCancelbutton.
beinitialized.
714moduleparameters. Capture Random Seed
75:GERealTimeParameterspageMIN,
CaptureRandomSeedisavailableonallofthe
MAX,andVALUE(theywillreturntothe
KARMApages,aswellastheKARMAGEtabofthe
valuespresetbytheGE).
Playpage.
TheGEselectionwillnotbeinitialized.
TheStartSeedisthesourceoftherandomnessofthe
IfyouinitializewithGERTPControlSettings& phrasegeneratedbytheKARMAModule.Formore
ScenesturnedOn(checked) information,seeStartSeedonpage 119.

151
Program mode: HD-1

Whenyouarelisteningtotherandomlychanging
phrasesgeneratedeachtimeaKARMAModuleis
triggered,andyouhearaphrasethatyouwouldliketo
reproduceconsistentlyeachtimeyoutriggerthatGE,
youcanexecutethiscommandtocapturetheseedthat
resultedinthatphrase.
Formoreinformation,seeCheckingtheFreeze
Randomizefunction,andperformingCapture
RandomSeedonpage 152.
1. SelectCaptureRandomSeedtoopenthedialog
box.

2. TurnthefrontpanelKARMAON/OFFswitchon.
3. PresstheCommonbuttontoaccessthe74:
ModuleParametersTriggerpage,andsetNote
TriggertoAny.

2. Ifyouareinamodethatcanusemorethanone
KARMAModule(CombinationorSequencer
modes),useTo:toselectthemoduleforwhich
youwanttocapturetheseedvalue.
IfyouselectAD,theseedvaluewillbecaptured
forthatKARMAModule.IfyouselectAll,theseed
valueswillbecapturedforallfourKARMA
Modules.
InProgrammode,thisisfixedatA.
3. ToexecutetheCaptureRandomSeed,pressthe
OKbutton.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,pressthe
Cancelbutton.
IftheStartSeedparameter(+p.122)ofthe
4. TurnthefrontpanelKARMALATCHswitchon.
KARMAModuleforwhichyouexecuteCapture
RandomSeedisassignedasaPerfRealTime 5. UseapadorthekeyboardtotriggerGE0267:
Parameter(+p.116),amessageofCouldnot ImprovLeadfortheKARMAModule.
executeCaptureRandomSeedbecausetheselected ThephrasegeneratedbythisGEwillalwayschange
StartSeedisassignedasanRTParmwillbe randomly(eachtimeyoutriggerit,oreachtimethe
displayed,andCaptureRandomSeedwillnotbe phraseisrepeated).
executed.(PresstheOKbuttontoclosethe 6. SelecttheProgramP78:RandomSeedspage.
message.)
IfyousettheTo:fieldofthedialogboxtoALL
(Combination,Sequencermode)toexecuteCapture
RandomSeedforallKARMAModules,Capture
RandomSeedwillbeexecutedonlyfortheKARMA
ModuleswhoseStartSeedparameterisnot
assignedasanPerfRealTimeParameter.Ifthe
StartSeedparameterofanyKARMAModuleis
assignedasaPerfRealTimeParameter,Capture
RandomSeedwillnotbeexecutedforthose
KARMAModules.

Checking the Freeze Randomize function, and


performing Capture Random Seed
ByusingtheCaptureRandomSeed,StartSeed(7
7. SetStartSeedto1(+0000000001).
8b),andFreezeLoopLength(78b)settings,youcan
looparandomlychangingphraseasdesired,or RetriggertheChordtrigger.Eachtimeitwillplay
generatethesamephraseeachtimeyoutriggertheGE. thesamerandomizedphrase;however,ifyouletit
continue,itwillalwaysmakenewrandomizations
Procedure asitgoesalong.
AnexampleoftheprocedureinProgrammodeis 8. SetFreezeLoopLengthto2(2bars).
shownbelow. Now,every2bars,itwillloopandrepeattheexact
1. InProgrammode,selectNTF099:WidowMaker. sameseriesofrandomizationsthatisspecifiedby
StartSeed1.However,thisparticularGEhasa

152
Program: Page Menu Commands Copy Insert Effect

PhasePatternof8steps(bars),soitmaynotsound Example:CaptureRandomSeedhassetStartSeedtoa
alwaysasifitisrestartingevery2bars,becauseof valueof+0254861235
theinternalsettingsofthePhasePattern.Itwill
repeatthesamerandomizations,butnotnecessarily
restarttherifffromthebeginning.However,this
canalsobeusefulforgettingthesamerhythmand
notemovements,withalongerevolvingphrase.
9. SetRetriggerEachTimetoOn(checked).
Now,every2bars,thePhasePatternisrestarted
also,inconjunctionwiththeFreezeLooplength,
andthephrasebecomesasimple2barloop.
10.SetStartSeedbackto0:Random.
Retriggerthephrasebypressingapadorplaying
thekeyboard.Acompletelynewrandomized
phrasewillbegeneratedeachtimeyoutrigger,but
every2barsitwillloopandrepeatuntilyoutrigger
itagain. Note:Seedisthesourcedatafromwhichthe
randomizationsarecreated.TheSeedofthephrase
11.NowsetRetriggerEachTimebacktoOff
beingloopedisautomaticallysetinternallywithinthe
(unchecked).
KARMAModuleastheStartSeed.TheStartSeed
Onceagain,eventhoughtherandomizationsare isusedeachtimetheGEistriggered.Thismeansthat
beingrepeatedevery2bars,the8stepGEPhase eachtimeyoutriggertheGE,aspecificSeedis
Patternallowslongerevolvingphrasestobe alwaysusedtogeneratethephrase.
created.
16.PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtotemporarily
12.SettheFreezeLoopLengthparameter. turnofftheKARMAfunction.Thenpressthe
Ifyousetthisto132,thephrasewillloopforthe KARMAON/OFFswitchonceagaintoturnthe
specifiednumberofmeasures.Forthisexample,set KARMAfunctionbackon.
thisto2andsettheRetriggerEachTimetoOn 17.Inthesamewayasinstep2,usethepador
(checked).Withthissetting,therandomphrasewill keyboardtotriggertheKARMAModule.
freezetoatwomeasurephrase.Youcanusethisto
Thephrasethatwasloopedinstep11willbe
loopaphraseduringaliveperformance.
reproducedeachtimethemoduleistriggered.You
13.Inthesamewayasinstep2,usethepador cannowsavetheProgramandrecallthisphraseat
keyboardtotriggertheKARMAModule. anytime.
14.Whenyouhearaphraseyouwanttobeplayed
eachtimeyoutriggertheGE,executeCapture
RandomSeed.PressthePageMenubuttonand Copy Insert Effect
chooseCaptureRandomSeedfromthepage
CopyInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
menu.
Thiscommandcopieseffectssettingsfromwithinthe
currentProgram,fromotherPrograms,Combinations,
orSongs,orfromthecurrentSamplingmodesettings.
ToexecutetheCopyInsertEffectcommand,pressthe
OKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
Ifyourecopyingfromamastereffect,theresultwill
notbeidenticalduetodifferencesintheroutingand
levelsettingsofthemastereffects.
15.Whenthedialogboxappears,presstheOK
button.
TheStartSeedparameterwillautomaticallybeset
totheinternalvalueneededtoreproducethe
phrase.

153
Program mode: HD-1

From (Mode) [Program, Combination, AlloftheparametersshownontheIFX112pageswill


Song, Sampling Mode] becopied.
ThisselectswhetheryoullcopyfromaProgram,a OtherIFXslotparameterswillnotbeaffected,
Combination,aSong,orthecurrentSamplingMode includingPan,Sends1and2,Chain,RECBus,andFX
settings. ControlBus.
1. SelectSwapInsertEffecttoopenthedialogbox.
From (Bank and Number) [Bank and Number]
ForProgramsandCombis,thisselectstheBankand
Numberfromwhichtocopy.Whenthisparameteris
selected,youcanalsousethefrontpanelBANK
buttonstoselectBanks.

Set to Current [button]


PressingtheSetToCurrentbuttonsetstheFromfields 2. InSource1andSource2,selecteachofthe
tothecurrentlyselectedmode,bank,number,andIFX inserteffectsthatyouwishtoswap.
slot. 3. ToexecutetheSwapInsertEffectcommand,press
Thiscanbeuseful,forinstance,forbackingupthe theOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton.
currentIFXsettingstoavacantIFXslot.Youcanthen
tryoutothereffectssettings,andstillbeabletoreturn
totheprevioussettingsifnecessary. Insert IFX Slot
(Effects slot select) [IFX 112, MFX 1&2, InsertIFXSlotisavailableontheRoutingandInsert
TFX 1&2] FXtabsoftheIFXpage.
Selectwhichoftheeffectsyouwishtocopy. ThiscommandinsertsanIFXslot.
Youcanalsocopyfromamastereffectandtotaleffect. Slotslocatedaftertheinsertedlocationwillbe
relocateddownwardifavacantslotexists.Atthistime,
All [check-box] Chain,Pan(CC#8),RECBus,FXControlBus,Send
Whenthisisenabled,thesettingsofallinserteffects 1/2,andCtrlCh(onlyforCombiandSEQ)willalsobe
(thecontentsoftheInsertFXpageandtheeffect relocated.
parametersofIFX112,butnotCtrlCh)willbecopied. ThiscommandalsoprovidesanAutoRoutingoption
thatautomaticallyadjustsrelatedparametersinorder
All Used [check-box]
topreservethepreviouslyexistingrouting.
Whenthisisenabled,onlytheinserteffects(IFX112)
Thiscommandisconvenientwhenyouwanttoaddan
thatareactuallyusedbythecopysourcewillbe
effectwithinachainofinserteffects.
copied.
1. IntheInsertFXpage,selecttheIFXslotinfrontof
Inthecopydestination,theeffectsettingswillbe
whichyouwanttoinsertaneffect.
copiedintovacantslots(i.e.,slotswith000:NoEffect,
unlesstheyexistwithinachain)startingwiththeinsert Inthisexample,IFX1IFX2IFX3IFX4IFX5
effectspecifiedbytheTofield. arechained,andwearegoingtoinsertaslotinfront
ofIFX3sothatwecanaddanotherIFX.
To [IFX 112]
Thisselectstheinserteffectcopydestination.

Post IFX Mixer Settings [check-box]


Whenthisischecked,thePan,BusSel.,CtrlBus,REC
Bus,andSends1and2settingsthatfollowthecopy
sourceinserteffectwillalsobecopied.
Whenthisisnotchecked,onlytheeffecttypeandits
parameterswillbecopied.

Copying 000: No Effect


Copyingasingleeffectsetto000:NoEffectwillnot
work:nodatawillbecopied.
IfeitherAllorAllusedisselected,and000:No
Effectexistswithinachain,itwillbecopied.
However,iftheentirechainconsistsof000:No 2. Alternatively,youcaninsertaneffectslotfrom
Effect,nothingwillbecopied. withintheTrackViewpage.
Selecttheinserteffectslotinfrontofwhichyou
wanttoinsertaneffect.
Swap Insert Effect
SwapInsertEffectisavailableonalloftheIFXpages.
Thiscommandexchangestheeffects,andtheirinternal
parameters,betweentwoIFXslots.

154
Program: Page Menu Commands Cut IFX Slot

DontusetheInsertIFXSlotcommand.Instead,
removetheunwantedIFXslotbychangingthe
Chaintosettings,orbyusingtheCopyIFXor
SwapIFXcommands.
AutoChain:on:IftheIFXyouveinsertedislocated
withinachain,theChainsettingwillautomatically
beturnedonfortheinsertedIFXsothatitwillbe
chainedwiththeprecedingandfollowingIFX.
IftheIFXyouveinsertedisnotinsideachain,Auto
Chaindoesnothing.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheInsertIFXSlot
command,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.
IftherearenotenoughIFXunitstoinsert,pressing
theOKbuttonwillsimplyexitthecommand
withoutdoinganything.
Note:InCombiorSeqmodes,thisTrackViewpage
isaconvenientwaytochecktheIFXthatare Inthisexample,000:NoEffectwillbeinsertedinto
chainedforeachtimbreortrack,andtheInsertFX IFX3whenyouexecutethecommand.Theeffects
commandcanbeusedinthispageaswelltoeditthe thatwereatIFX3IFX5willberelocatedtoIFX46,
effectsettingsofeachtimbreortrack.Whenyoudo resultinginachainconsistingofIFX1IFX6.
so,theroutingwillbeadjustedautomaticallysothat
thesettingsofothertimbresortrackswillremain
thesame.
3. SelectInsertIFXSlottoopenthedialogbox.

4. UsetheTofieldtospecifytheIFXnumberat
whichyouwanttoinsertaslot.(TheIFXyou
selectedinstep1or2willbeshownhereasthe
default.)
SpecifytheAutoRoutingandAutoChain
options.Normallyyouwillleavetheseon.
AutoRouting:Thisautomaticallyadjuststhe
followingparametersinordertopreservethe 6. Forthenewlyinsertedslot,turntheOn/Off
currentlyexistingrouting. settingOn.Thenselectandeditthedesiredeffect.
Routing:BusSelect
RoutingPageMenu:DKitPatch(Combi/SEQ)
Cut IFX Slot
Auto Routing always enabled on the Track View
CutIFXSlotisavailableontheRoutingandInsertFX
page
tabsoftheIFXpage.
YoucantchangetheAutoRoutingsettingifyouve
ThiscommandremovesanIFXslot,andmovesthe
executedtheInsertIFXSlotcommandfromtheTrack
otherIFXupwardstofillinthegapconvenientwhen
Viewpage.Thecommandwillalwaysbeexecuted
youwanttoremoveaneffectthatyourenotusing.
withthisoptionOn.
WhentheIFXaremovedupwards,alloftheirrelated
Drum Kits not supported by Auto Routing settingsarecopiedaswell.ThisincludesChain,Pan,
DrumKitscanstoreseparateBusSelectsettingsfor RECBus,FXControlBus,Sends1and2,and(for
eachkey.BecausethesesettingsarestoredintheDrum CombisandSongsonly)CtrlCh.
Kit,andnottheProgram,theAutoRoutingoption ThiscommandalsoprovidesanAutoRoutingoption
cantcorrectthem. thatautomaticallyadjustsrelatedparametersinorder
DrumKitProgramswillusetheseseparateBusSelect topreservethepreviouslyexistingrouting.
settingsiftheIFXRoutingpagesUseDKitSetting 1. IntheInsertFXpage,selecttheinserteffectslot
parameteristurnedOn. thatyouwanttoremove.
Inthiscase,youhavetwooptions.Either: Inthisexample,IFX1IFX2IFX3IFX4IFX5are
UseAutoRouting,andthenmanuallyadjustthe chained,andwearegoingtoremovetheIFX3slot.
BusSelectsettingsforeachkeyoftheDrumKitto Youcanalsoperformthisoperationfromwithinthe
matchthenewIFXslotarrangement. TrackViewpage.Selecttheinserteffectslotthatyou
or: wanttoremove.

155
Program mode: HD-1

Drum Kits not supported by Auto Routing


DrumKitscanstoreseparateBusSelectsettingsfor
eachkey.BecausethesesettingsarestoredintheDrum
Kit,andnottheProgram,theAutoRoutingoption
cantcorrectthem.
DrumKitProgramswillusetheseseparateBusSelect
settingsiftheIFXRoutingpagesUseDKitSetting
parameteristurnedOn.
Inthiscase,youhavetwooptions.Either:
UseAutoRouting,andthenmanuallyadjustthe
BusSelectsettingsforeachkeyoftheDrumKitto
matchthenewIFXslotarrangement.
or:
DontusetheCutIFXSlotcommand.Instead,
removetheunwantedIFXslotbychangingthe
Chaintosettings,orbyusingtheCopyIFXor
SwapIFXcommands.
2. SelectCutIFXSlottoopenthedialogbox.

Clean Up IFX Routings


CleanUpIFXRoutingsisavailableontheInsertFX
andTrackViewtabsoftheIFXpage.
ThiscommandautomaticallyrearrangesunusedIFX
slotssothattheyareconsecutive.Italsorearranges
3. SpecifythenumberoftheIFXyouwantto effectsinadiscontinuouschainsothattheyare
remove. consecutive.Relatedparametersareautomatically
(TheIFXyouselectedinstep1or2willbeshown adjustedinordertopreservetheexistingroutings.
hereasthedefault.) IfeditinganIFXchainresultsinunusedslots,orifthe
4. SpecifytheAutoRoutingoption.Normallyyou connectionsinachainhavebecomedisorganized,you
willleavethison. canexecutethiscommandtocleanuptherouting.
AutoRouting:Thisautomaticallyadjuststhe 1. AccesstheInsertFXpage.
followingparametersinordertopreservethe Inthisexample,IFX1IFX5IFX11IFX12are
currentlyexistingrouting. chained,andtheremainingslotsareallvacant.
Routing:BusSelect
RoutingPageMenu:DKitPatch(Combi/SEQ)
YoucantchangetheAutoRoutingoptionifyouve
executedtheCutIFXSlotcommandfromthe
TrackViewpage.Thecommandwillalwaysbe
executedwiththisoptionOn.
5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCutIFXSlot
command,orpresstheCancelbuttontocancel.

2. Alternatively,youcanexecutethiscommandfrom
theTrackViewpage.

156
Program: Page Menu Commands Copy MFX/TFX

Iftheprogramusesadrumkit,andtheRouting
pageUseDKitSettingison,youmayhaveto
changetheBusSelectsettingforeachkeyofthe
drumkitinordertoreproducethepreviousrouting
status.
Insuchcases,dontusetheCleanUpIFX
Routingscommand.Instead,rearrangetheIFX
slotsbymakingtheappropriateChaintosettingsor
byusingtheCopyInsertEffectorSwapInsert
Effectcommands.

Copy MFX/TFX
CopyMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX
pages.
3. SelectCleanUpIFXRoutingstoopenthedialog
Thiscommandletsyoucopyanydesiredeffectsettings
box.
fromProgram,Combination,Song,orSamplingmode.
1. SelectCopyMFX/TFXtoopenthedialogbox.

4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheCleanUpIFX
Routingscommand,orpresstheCancelbuttonif
youdecidetocancel.

2. InFrom,selectthecopysourcemode,bank,and
number.
YoucanalsousetheBANKSELECTswitchesto
selectthedesiredbank.
IfyoupresstheSetToCurrentbutton,the
currentlyselectedmode,bank,number,and
MFX/TFX(editcell)willautomaticallybeassigned
totheFromfield.Thisisusefulwhenyoure
tryingoutothereffectsettingsandwantto
temporarilycopypreviouslyeditedMFX/TFX
settingstoanothervacanteffectslot.
3. Selecttheeffectthatyouwanttocopy.
Youcancopyfromaninserteffectbyselecting
IFX112.
Ifyoucopyfromaninserteffect,theresultmaynot
beexactlythesame,duetodifferencesinrouting
andlevelsettings.
Inthisexample,thediscontinuouschain
IFX1IFX5IFX11IFX12hasbeenreorganized IfyouselectMFX1orMFX2,theReturnlevelwillbe
intoIFX1IFX2IFX3IFX4,andthevacantslots copiedatthesametime.
(000:NoEffect,unlesslocatedwithinachain)have Youcancopysettingsfromatotaleffectbyselecting
beenrearrangedconsecutively. TFX1orTFX2.
Atthistime,thefollowingparametersare IfyoucheckAllMFXs,allmastereffectsettingswill
automaticallyadjustedtomaintaintheexisting becopied.
routings. IfyoucheckAllTFXs,alltotaleffectsettingswillbe
Routing:BusSelect copied.MasterVolumesettingswillnotbecopied.
RoutingPageMenu:DKitPatch(Combi/Seq) 4. InTo,specifythecopydestinationmaster
effectsortotaleffects.
5. ToexecutetheCopyMaster/TotalEffectcommand,
presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancel
button.

157
Program mode: HD-1

Swap MFX/TFX
SwapMFX/TFXisavailableonalloftheMFX/TFX
pages.
Thiscommandswaps(exchanges)settingsbetween
MFX1,MFX2,TFX1,andTFX2.
1. SelectSwapMFX/TFXtoopenthedialogbox.

2. UseSource1andSource2toselectthemaster
effect(s)ortotaleffect(s)thatyouwanttoswap.
3. ToexecutetheSwapMaster/TotalEffect
command,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,press
theCancelbutton.

Write FX Preset
WriteFXPresetisavailableonalloftheeffects
parametereditingpages,includingIFX112,MFX1
and2,andTFX1and2.
1. SelectWriteFXPresettoopenthedialogbox.

2. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetextedit
dialogbox,andinputanamefortheeffectpreset.
3. UsetheTofieldtoselectthewritingdestination.
WerecommendthatyouuseU00U15.
4. PresstheOKbuttontowritetheuserpreset,or
presstheCancelbuttonifyoudecidetocancel.
Note:InDiskmodeyoucansaveorloadeffectpreset
settingsonexternalmedia.

158
Program mode: EXi

EXi Program P0: Play


ThisisthemainpageofProgrammodeforEXi
Programs.Amongotherthings,youcan:
SelectPrograms
Jumpdirectlytothemaineditingpages
MakebasiceditstoKARMA
Setuptheaudioinputsandresamplingoptions
Usethecontrolsurface

EXi Common parameters


EXi,orExpansionInstruments,extendthecapabilities
ofOASYSbyaddingnewsynthesistechnologies.Out
ofthebox,OASYScomeswiththreeEXi:theAL1
analogmodelingsynthesizer,theCX3modeled
tonewheelorgan,andtheSTR1PluckedString.
OASYSalsocurrentlyincludesthreeoptionalEXi:the
MS20EXandPolysixEXanalogmodelingsynths,and
theMOD7WaveshapingVPMsynthesizer.w
YoucancombineanytwoEXiwithinanEXiProgram.
EachEXimayhaveitsown,verydifferentparameters,
whichyoucanaccessviatheEXi1andEXi2buttonsat
thebottomofthescreen.
AllEXiProgramsalsoincludeastandardpaletteof
capabilities,includingeffects,KARMA,keytracking,
andtheCommonLFOandCommonStepSequencer.
Thesestandardparametersareavailableinthepages
undertheCommonbutton,andaredescribedinthis
chapter.

Auto Song Setup


TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrent
ProgramorCombinationintoaSong,andthenputs
theOASYSinrecordreadymode.
Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhile
youreplaying,youcanusethisfunctiontostart
recordingimmediately.Todoso:
1. HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe
SEQUENCERREC/WRITEkey.
TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillopenandaskAre
yousure?
2. PressOK.
YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode,andwill
beintherecordreadystate.
3. PresstheSTART/STOPkeytostartthesequencer
andbeginrecording.

159
Program mode: EXi

01: Main
01PMC

01a

01b Common

q (Tempo) [040.00240.00, EXT]


01a: Bank, Program, and Category
ThisisthetempoforthecurrentProgram,which
Select appliestoKARMA,temposyncedLFOs,Step
Bank [INT-F, USER-AG] Sequencers,temposyncedeffects,andsoon.

ThisisthebankofthecurrentProgram.EXiPrograms EXTmeansthatthetempowillsynctoexternalMIDI
canbestoredinbankINTF,orinanyoftheUSER clocks.YoullseethisiftheGlobalMIDIpageMIDI
banks,aslongastheirtypeissettoEXi.(Formore ClockparameterissettoExternalMIDI,orifitssetto
informationonsettingtheUSERbanktype,see AutoandtheOASYSiscurrentlyreceivingMIDI
ChangingtheBankTypeforUSERAGonpage 3.) clocks.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeMIDIClock
(MIDIClockSource)onpage 710.
YoucanselectBankseitherviatheonscreenmenu,or
byusingthefrontpanelBankbuttons. 040.00240.00allowyoutosetaspecifictempoin
BPM,with1/100BPMaccuracy.Inadditiontousing
Program Select [000127, Name] thestandarddataentrycontrols,youcanalsojustturn
ThisisnameandnumberofthecurrentProgram. theTEMPOknob,orbyplayingafewquarternoteson
Whenthisparameterisselected,youcanselect theTAPTEMPObutton.
ProgramsusingtheInc andDec buttons,
numericbuttons09,ortheValuedial. 01b: Overview and Page Jump
YoucanalsousethepopupProgramandCategory
Thissectionshowsanoverviewofthemostimportant
menustoselectProgramsfromtheLCD.Formore
settingsfortheProgramstwoEXiinstruments,along
details,pleaseseeProgramSelectonpage 160
withsomeoftheimportantCommonparameters.The
Note:Onthispageonly,theVALUEsliderfunctionsas specificparameterswillvary,dependingonwhichEXi
amodulationsourcewhichmeansthatyoucantuse arebeingused.Parametersthatyoumayseeinclude
ittoselectPrograms. oscillatorsettings,filtersettings,EGs,LFOs,step
sequencers,drawbarsettings,andsoon.Seethe
Favorite [Off, On] individualEXidocumentationfordetails.
ThisbuttonmarkstheProgramasafavorite,which
Thegraphicsgiveyouaquickwaytocheckallofthese
makesiteasytofindintheBank/ProgramSelectand
settingsataglance.Theyalsoletyoujumpinstantlyto
Category/ProgramSelectdialogs.
anyofthedisplayedparameters.Justtouchoneofthe
NotethatyoumustwritethePrograminordertosave graphics,andyoulljumptothepagecontainingits
changestothissetting. parameters.Forinstance,ifyoutouchtheFilterEG
graphic,youllgototheFilterEGpage.

160
EXi Program P0: Play 06: KARMA GE

Common PressthisareatojumptotheEQpage.

Thegraphicsalongtherightsideofthescreenshow IFX, MFX/TFX


themostimportantCommonparameters,whichare PresstheIFXareatojumptotheIFXRoutingpage.
sharedbybothEXiintheProgram.Thissectionwill
alwaysshowthesameparameters,regardlessofwhich PresstheMFX/TFXareatojumptotheMFXRouting
EXiarebeingused. page.

Common Voice Assign Mode KARMA GE Name


ThisshowsthevoiceassignmodeoftheProgram ThisshowsthenameoftheselectedKARMAGE.
eitherPOLYorMONO. PressthisareatojumptotheGESetup/KeyZones
PressthisareatojumptotheProgramBasicpage. page.

Common Step Sequencer


t 01: Page Menu Commands
ThisshowsagraphicoverviewoftheCommonStep
Sequencer. ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
PressthisareatojumptotheCommonStepSequencer
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
page.
commandsonpage 142.
Common LFO Graphic 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
ThisshowsthewaveformoftheCommonLFO. Programonpage 142.
PressthisareatojumptotheCommonLFOpage. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
3 Band EQ Graphic
Thisshowsthemidsweepable3bandEQ.

06: KARMA GE
ThispageletsyoumakebasicadjustmentstoKARMA. FormoredetailededitingofKARMAparameters,see
ItworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1 ProgramP7:KARMAonpage 100.
Programs;formoreinformation,see06:KARMA
GEonpage 7.

07: Controller View/Effects


Thispageshowsthefunctionsassignedtothephysical ItworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1
controllers,includingthevectorjoystick,SW1and2, Programs;formoreinformation,see07:Controller
andknobs58.Italsoincludesanoverviewofallofthe View/Effectonpage 11.
effects,andletsyouadjusttheWet/DryBalances
separatelyfortheIFX,MFX,andTFX.

08: Audio Input/Sampling


Thispageletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,effects ItworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1
sends,andbussingfortheaudioinputs,including Programs;formoreinformation,see08:Audio
analoginputs14andS/P DIFL/R.Italsocontrolsthe Input/Samplingonpage 12.
samplingrelatedsettingsforProgrammode.

09: Control Surface


TheControlSurfaceisthesetof9sliders,8knobs,and ControltheProgramsEQsettingsandMaster
16switchestotheleftoftheLCDdisplay.Itlookslikea EffectsSendlevels
mixer,butitcandootherthingsaswell,including ModulatesoundsandeffectsusingtheRealTime
editingsounds,controllingKARMA,andsending Knobs
MIDImessagestoexternaldevices.
ControlKARMA,andselectKARMAscenes,using
Thispageshowsyouthecurrentvaluesforeachofthe theslidersandswitches
sliders,knobs,andbuttons,alongwithinformation
aboutwhattheyarecontrolling.Forinstance,youcan: EditsoundsusingToneAdjust

AdjustthevolumeandpanforEXiinstruments1 Assignsliders,knobs,andswitchestodifferent
and2 ToneAdjustparameters

161
Program mode: EXi

Otherthantheexceptionsnotedbelow,itworksalmost
exactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1Programs,
substitutingEXi1/2forOSC1/2.Formoreinformation,
see09:ControlSurfaceonpage 18.

0-9e: RT/KARMA (Real Time


Knobs/KARMA)
RealtimeKnobs14havededicatedfunctions:Cutoff,
Resonance,FilterEGIntensity,andFilterRelease.EXi
instrumentswillsupportthesefunctionsasmuchas
possible,dependingupontheirarchitecture.
Forinstance,theAL1andSTR1supportallofthese
controls.TheCX3,ontheotherhand,hasnofiltersor
EGs,andsoitdoesnotsupportthematall.Fordetails
onotherEXi,pleaseseetheirdocumentation.

0-9f: Tone Adjust


ThefirstgroupofToneAdjustparametersarethe
Commonset,whichaffectbothEXi1andEXi2.For
moredetails,andacompletelistoftheparameters,
pleaseseeCommonToneAdjustParameterson
page 28.
SomeEXiinstrumentsmaynotsupportallofthe
CommonToneAdjustparameters.Fordetails,please
seetheindividualEXimanuals.
AftertheCommonparameters,theitemsinthelistwill
varydependingontheEXibeingused.Formore
information,pleasesee:
AL1:ToneAdjust,onpage 214.
CX3:ToneAdjust,onpage 236.
STR1:ToneAdjust,onpage 282.
MS20EX:ToneAdjust,onpage 309.
PolysixEX:ToneAdjust,onpage 325.
MOD7:ToneAdjustonpage 375.
OtherEXiinstrumentswillhavetheirownsetof
parameters,asdescribedintheirdocumentation.
ForthesenonCommonparameters,youhave
independentcontrolsforbothEXi1andEXi2evenif
theybothusethesameEXi.Forinstance,ifbothEXi
aresettousetheAL1,theycanstillhaveseparate
ToneAdjustsettingsfortheirLFOs,oscillators,andso
on.

162
EXi Program P4: Basic/Vector 41: Program Basic

EXi Program P4: Basic/Vector


ThesepagescontrolthebasicelementsoftheProgram, SetupVectorfadesbetweenEXi1andEXi2
alongwiththeVectorsynthesisfeatures.Forinstance, SetupVectorCCstomodulateProgramandEffects
youcan: parameters
SelecttheEXiinstrumentswhichformthebasisof ProgramtheVectorEnvelopetomovetheVector
theProgramssound positionautomatically

41: Program Basic


41PMC

41a 41b

41c

41d 41e

41f

41h
41g

Thispagecontainsallofthebasicsettingsforthe YoucanselecteitheroneortwoEXisfortheProgram.
Program.Amongotherthings,youcan: UnlikeHD1Programs,thereisnosettingforSingleor
SelecttheEXiinstrumentswhichformthebasisof Double.IftherearetwoEXis,itdoesntmatterwhich
theProgramssound EXiisinwhichslot.Youcanevenselectonlyasingle
EXi,butplaceitinthesecondslot.
SettheProgramtoplaypolyphonicallyor
monophonically
CreateakeyboardsplitbetweenEXi1andEXi2
41b: EXi 2
SelecttheProgramsscale EXi 2 Instrument Type [List of installed EXi]
ThisisthesecondEXislotfortheProgram.
41a: EXi 1
41c: Voice Assign Mode
EXi 1 Instrument Type [List of installed EXi]
ThisisthemostbasicsettingfortheEXiProgram.EXi Voice Assign options may vary with different EXi
instrumentsarecompletesynthesizers,inandof Asmuchaspossible,differentEXiinstrumentswill
themselves;theymaycreateorprocesssoundsin supportallofthevoiceassignoptions.However,there
completelydifferentways,andallowyoutoadjust maybesomecasesinwhichaparticularEXidoesnot
completelydifferentparameters. supportaspecificvoiceassignparameter.
Forinstance,oneEXimightbeavirtualanalog Additionally,whenaProgramusestwodifferentEXi
synthesizer,andanothermightbeaphysically instruments,someofthevoiceassignoptionswillonly
modeledtonewheelorgan. takeaffectiftheyaresupportedbybothEXi.These
ThismenudisplaysalloftheEXisinstalledonthe include:
system. ThemainModeselection(PolyorMono)
PolyLegato
SingleTrigger

163
Program mode: EXi

MonoLegato On(checked):Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing,
Monomode(NormalorUseLegatoOffset) thenoteswithinalegatophrasewillsoundsmoother,
accordingtothesettingoftheModeparameter,below.
Unison
Off(unchecked):Legatophrasingwillproducethe
(Voice Assign Mode) [Poly, Mono] samesoundasdetachedplaying.
Theseradiobuttonsselectthebasicvoiceallocation Mode [Normal, Use Legato Offset]
mode.Dependingonwhichmodeyouselect,various
otheroptionswillappear,suchasPolyLegato(Poly ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenMonoLegatois
modeonly)andUnison(Monomodeonly). On.

Poly:Theprogramwillplaypolyphonically,allowing Normal:Whenyouplaylegato,theenvelopesand
youplaychords. LFOs(andsamples,iftheEXisupportssamples)will
notbereset.Instead,onlythepitchoftheoscillatorwill
Mono:Theprogramwillplaymonophonically, change.Thissettingisparticularlyeffectiveforwind
producingonlyonenoteatatime. instrumentsandanalogsynthsounds.
Poly WhenusedwithEXiwhichsupportsamples,the
pitchmayoccasionallybeincorrect,dependingon
Poly Legato [Off, On] whichmultisampleyouplay,andwhereonthe
PolyLegatoisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignMode keyboardyouplay.
issettoPoly.ThisoptionappliesonlytoEXiwhich UseLegatoOffset:ThisappliesonlytoEXiwhich
includesampleplayback. supportsamples.Whenyouplaylegato,allbutthefirst
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand notewillusetheMultisamplesLegatoStartPoint,
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnote insteadoftheonesetbytheStartOffsetparameter.
isreleased.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached. ThiswillbemosteffectiveforMultisampleswith
specificallydesignedLegatoOffsetpoints;forsome
On(checked):Whenyouplaywithlegatophrasing, Multisamples,itmayhavenoeffect.
onlythefirstnotesinthephrase(withinthefirst30ms)
willusethenormalMultisampleStartPoint,assetby EnvelopesandLFOswillstillbereset,astheyarewith
theStartPointOffsetparameter.Therestofthenotes detachedplaying.
willusetheLegatoStartPoint. Priority [Low, High, Last]
Off(unchecked):Noteswillalwaysusethesettingof PriorityisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeisset
theStartPointOffset,regardlessofwhetheryouplay toMono.
legatoordetached.
Thisparameterdetermineswhathappenswhenmore
WithsomeMultisamples,PolyLegatomaynothave thanonenoteisbeinghelddown.
anyeffect.
Low:Thelowestnotewillsound.Manyvintage,
Single Trigger [Off, On] monophonicanalogsynthsworkthisway
SingleTriggerisavailablewhentheVoiceAssign High:Thehighestnotewillsound.
ModeissettoPoly. Last:Themostrecentlyplayednotewillsound.
On(checked):Whenyouplaythesamenote
repeatedly,thepreviousnotewillbesilencedbefore Max # of Notes
thenextnoteissounded,sothatthetwodonot
overlap. Max # of Notes [Dynamic, 116]
Off(unchecked):Whenyouplaythesamenote Dynamicisthedefault.Withthissetting,youcanplay
repeatedly,thenoteswilloverlap. asmanynotesasthesystemallows.
116letsyoulimitthemaximumnumberofnotes
Mono playedbytheProgram.Youcanusethisto:

Mono Legato [Off, On] Modelthevoiceleadingofvintagesynthesizers,


suchasthePolysix
ThisisavailablewhentheVoiceAssignModeissetto
Mono. Controltheresourcesrequiredbyindividual
ProgramsinCombinationandSequencermodes
Legatomeanstoplaynotesothattheyaresmoothand
connected;thenextnoteisplayedbeforethelastnote Max#ofNotesappliesonlywhenthemainVoice
isreleased.Thisistheoppositeofplayingdetached. AssignModeissettoPoly.IfMonoisselected,thisis
grayedout.
WhenMonoLegatoisOn,thefirstnoteinalegato
phrasewillsoundnormally,andthensubsequentnotes ThissettingdoesnotlimittheUnisonNumberof
willhaveasmoothersound,formoregentle Voicesparameter.Forinstance,ifMax#ofNotesisset
transitionsbetweenthenotes. to6,andUnisonNumberofVoicesissetto3,youcan
playupto6notes,eachwith3Unisonvoices.
TheModeparameter,below,switchesbetweentwo
differentMonoLegatoeffects,eachofwhichachieves IftherearetwoEXiintheProgram,theMax#ofNotes
thissmoothnessinadifferentway.Seethedescription appliesequallytoboth.Forinstance,ifMax#ofNotes
ofthatparameterformoredetails. issetto4,youcanplayupto4notesoneachEXi.

164
EXi Program P4: Basic/Vector 41: Program Basic

Chord case,intermediatesettingsofStereoSpreadmaybe
themosteffective,sincetheywillstillpreservesomeof
Chord [Off, Bsc, Adv] theoriginalstereoimage.
OffdisablestheChordfunction. Unisondetuningisspreadasevenlyaspossibleacross
Bsc(Basic)recreatesthechordmodeoftheKORG theleftandrightchannels.Thelowestvoicewillbeon
Polysix.Eachtimeyouplayanewchord,itwillcutoff theleft,andthehighestontheright;thenextloweston
thepreviouschord.ThisoptionignorestheVoice theleft,andthenexthighestontheright,etc.,as
Assignsettings. below:

Adv(Advanced)usestheProgramsVoiceAssign 14cents:L
settings,asifeachnoteinthechordwasatransposed +14cents:R
setofoscillatorslayeredwithintheProgram.
10cents:L
Poly,PolyLegato,SingleTrigger,Mono,MonoLegato,
+10cents:Retc.
LegatoOffset,MonoPriority,andMonoandPoly
Unisonallapply. DependingontheThicknesssetting,thedetuning
mayleanslightlytooneside.
YoucanachievethesameeffectasBsc,above,by
settingChordtoAdvanced,VoiceAssigntoMono, Detune [00200 cents]
PrioritytoLastNote,andLegatotoOff.
DetuneisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Formoreinformation,seeUsingChordmodeon
ThisparametersetsthetuningspreadfortheUnison
page 54oftheOperationGuide.
voices,incents(1/100ofasemitone).TheThickness
Source Pad [1...8] parameter,below,controlshowthevoicesare
distributedacrossthedetuneamount.When
ChordmodeusesthechordsassignedtothePads.This
ThicknessisOff,thevoicesaredistributedevenly,
selectswhichofthePadstouse.Youcanalsochoose
centeredaroundthebasicpitch.
chordsusingthePadsthemselves;formore
information,seeSelectingchordsonpage 55ofthe Forinstance,letssaythattheNumberofvoices
OperationGuide. parameterissetto3,Detuneissetto24,and
ThicknessisOff:
Unison Voiceonewillbedetuneddownby12cents,voicetwo
willnotbedetuned,andvoicethreewillbedetunedup
Unison [On, Off]
by12cents.
UnisoncanbeusedinbothMonoandPolymodes.
Voice Detune
On(checked):WhenUnisonison,theProgramuses
twoormorestacked,detunedvoicestocreateathick 1 12
sound.
UsetheNumberofVoicesandDetuneparametersto 2 0
setthenumberofvoicesandamountofdetuning,and
3 +12
theThicknessparametertocontrolthecharacterofthe
detuning. Asanotherexample,letssaythatDetuneisstillsetto
Off(unchecked):TheProgramplaysnormally.If 24andThicknessisstillOff,butNumberofvoicesis
UnisonisOff,thenallofitsassociatedparametersare setto4:
grayedout. Voiceonewillstillbedetuneddownby12cents,voice
Number of voices [216] twowillbedetuneddownby4cents,voicethreewill
bedetunedupby4cents,andvoice4willbedetuned
Thiscontrolsthenumberofdetunedvoicesthatwillbe upby12cents.
playedforeachnotewhenusingUnison.Itapplies
onlywhenUnisonisOn. Voice Detune
Stereo Spread [0...100] 1 12
StereoSpreadletsyoucreateawiderstereofieldwhen
usingUnison.ItappliesonlywhenUnisonisOn. 2 4

ThisfeatureseparatesthedifferentUnisonvoicesinto 3 +4
twogroups.Onegroupispannedtotheleft,andthe
othertotheright.At0,bothgroupswillbeinthe 4 +12
center;at100,thetwogroupswillbehardpannedleft
andright,respectively;atintermediatevalues,they Thickness [Off, 0109]
willbepannedtointermediateleftandrightpositions. ThicknessisavailablewhenUnisonisOn.
Ifthereisanoddnumberofvoices,onevoicewillbe Thisparametercontrolsthecharacterofthedetuning
pannedtothecenter. fortheunisonvoices.
Ifthevoicesaretruestereo,StereoSpreadsteersthe Off:Unisonvoiceswillbeevenlydistributedacross
stereoimageofeachvoice,similartoMIDIPan theDetunerange,asshownabove.
(CC#10)andtheControlSurfacePanknobs.Inthis

165
Program mode: EXi

0109:Unisonvoiceswillbedetunedinanasymmetric
way,increasingthecomplexityofthedetune,and 41e: Scale
changingthewayinwhichthedifferentpitchesbeat
Type [Equal TemperamentUser Octave Scale15]
againstoneanother.Thiscreatesaneffectsimilarto
vintageanalogsynthesizers,inwhichoscillatorswere SelectsthebasicscalefortheProgram.
frequentlyslightlyoutoftune.Highernumbers Notethatformanyofthescales,thesettingoftheKey
increasetheeffect. parameter,below,isveryimportant.
Foracompletelistoftheavailablescales,pleasesee
41d: Key Zone 11g:Scaleonpage 37.
Youcancreatekeyboardsplitsbysettingtopand Key (Scale Key) [CB]
bottomkeysforEXi1and2.Also,youcancontrolthe Selectsthekeyofthespecifiedscale.
keyboardrangeoverwhichtheHoldparametertakes
effect. ThissettingdoesnotapplytotheEqualTemperament,
Stretch,andUserAllNotesscales.
Setting Key Zones from the keyboard IfyoureusingascaleotherthanEqual
Inadditiontousingthestandarddataentrycontrols, Temperament,thecombinationoftheselectedscale
youcanalsosetallkeyboardzonesparametersdirectly andtheKeysettingmayskewthetuningofthe
fromthekeyboard.Justdothefollowing: note.Forexample,AabovemiddleCmightbecome
1. Selectthekeyzoneparameteryoudliketoedit. 442Hz,insteadofthenormal440Hz.Youcanuse
theGlobalModesMasterTuneparametertocorrect
2. PressandholdtheENTERbutton.
this,ifnecessary.
3. Playanoteonthekeyboardtosettheparameter.
4. ReleasetheENTERbutton. Random [07]
Youcanusethisshortcutforallkeyandvelocity Thisparametercreatesrandomvariationsinpitchfor
parametersintheOASYS. eachnote.Atthedefaultvalueof0,pitchwillbe
completelystable;highervaluescreatemore
EXi 1 Bottom [C-1G9] randomization.
ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichEXi1willplay. Thisparameterishandyforsimulatinginstruments
thathavenaturalpitchinstabilities,suchasanalog
EXi 1 Top [C-1G9] synths,tapemechanismorgansoracoustic
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichEXi1willplay. instruments.

EXi 2 Bottom [C-1G9]


ThissetsthelowestkeyonwhichEXi2willplay. 41f: Note-On Control
EXi 2 Top [C-1G9] EXi 1 Delay [0ms5000ms, KeyOff]
ThissetsthehighestkeyonwhichEXi2willplay. Usethistocreateadelaybetweenthetimethatyou
pressakey,andthetimethatEXi1snoteactually
Hold [On, Off] sounds.
Holdislikepermanentlypressingdownonthesustain ThisismostusefulinDoublePrograms,fordelaying
pedal.Inotherwords,notescontinuetosoundasif oneEXiinrelationtotheother.
youwereholdingdownthekeyevenafteryoulift
KeyOffisaspecialsetting.Insteadofdelayingthe
yourfingersfromthekeyboard.
soundbyaparticularamountoftime,thesoundwill
UnlesstheSustainLevelissetto0inAmpEG1(and playassoonasyoureleasethekey.
AmpEG2inaDoubleProgram),thesoundwill
Youcanusethistocreatetheclickheardwhena
continuetoplayforeveror,forEXiwhichsupport
harpsichordnoteisreleased,forinstance.
samples,itwillplayfortheentirelengthofthe
sample(s). Ingeneral,whenyouusetheKeyOffsetting,itsalso
besttosettheAmpEGSustainLevelto0(assuming
On(checked):TheHoldfunctionisenabledforthe
theEXiincludesanAmpEG).
rangesetbytheHoldBottomandHoldTop
parameters,below. EXi 2 Delay [0ms5000ms, KeyOff]
Off(unchecked):Noteswillplaynormally.Thisisthe ThiscontrolsthenoteondelayforEXi2.Formore
defaultsetting. information,seeEXi1Delayonpage 166.

Hold Bottom [C-1G9]


ThissetsthelowestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction. 41g: Half-Damper Control
Ahalfdamperpedalisaspecialtypeofcontinuous
Hold Top [C-1G9]
footpedal,suchastheKorgDS1H.Incomparisontoa
ThissetsthehighestkeyaffectedbytheHoldfunction. standardfootswitch,halfdamperpedalsoffermore
subtlecontrolofsustain,whichcanbeespeciallyuseful
forpianosounds.

166
EXi Program P4: Basic/Vector 41: Program Basic

TheOASYSwillautomaticallysensewhenahalf
damperisconnectedtotherearpanelDAMPERinput. t 41: Page Menu Commands
Forproperoperation,youwillalsoneedtocalibrate ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
thepedal,usingtheCalibrateHalfDampercommand numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
intheGlobalpagemenu. shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Theoffandfullonpositionsofthehalfdamperwork commandsonpage 142.
justlikeastandardfootswitch.Inconjunctionwiththe 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
EnableHalfDamperparameter,below,intermediate Programonpage 142.
positionsallowagraduatedcontrolofsustain,similar
tothedamperpedalofanacousticpiano. 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Enable Half-Damper [On, Off] 2:CopyEXiOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
WhenthisisOn(checked),HalfDamperpedals, CopyEXiOscillatoronpage 174.
normalsustainpedals,andMIDICC#64willall
modulatetheAmpEG,asdescribedbelow.
WhenthisisOff(unchecked),thepedalsandMIDI
CC#64willstillholdnotesasusual,butwillnot
modulatetheAmpEG.

Half-Damper Pedal and Release Time


Theamountofmodulationdependsonwhetherthe
AmpEGSustainLevelissetto0(asisthecasewith
mostacousticpianosounds),orsetto1ormore.The
modulationiscontinuous,from1x(nochange)to55
timeslonger;thetablebelowshowsaselectionof
representativepoints.
HalfDampermodulationofAmpEGReleaseTime

CC#64 Multiply Amp EG Release Time by


Value If Sustain = 0 If Sustain = 1 or more
0 1x 1x
32 2.1x 2.1x
64 3.2x
80 5.9x
3.2x
96 22.3x
127 55x

41h: Transpose
Theseparametersmakeiteasytotransposeoneorboth
EXi.Tokeepthetimbrethesameforagivenpitch,
otherkeyrelatedparametersaretransposedaswell,
suchaskeytrackingandnotenumberAMS.
Forinstance:
1. SetakeytrackbreakpointtoC2.
2. Setthetransposeto+2.
Now,thekeytrackbreakpointwillstilldisplayasC2,
butwillbetransposeduptoD2.
Thesetranspositionsarecumulativewith
Timbre/TracktransposeinCombinationsandSongs.
Note:TheEXi1/2keyzonesdirectlyrepresentthe
physicalkeyboard,andarenotaffectedbythese
transposesettings.Formoreinformation,see41d:
KeyZoneonpage 166.

EXi 1 [60+60]
ThistransposesEXi1,insemitones.Thedefaultis0.

EXi 2 [60+60]
ThistransposesEXi1,insemitones.Thedefaultis0.

167
Program mode: EXi

42: EXi Audio Input


42PMC

42a 42b

TheseparametersletyourouteaudiointoEXi Offdisablestheinput.
instrumentswhichsupportaudioinput,suchasthe AudioInput1/23/4andS/P DIFInputL/Rusethe
STR1.Youcanusethistocreatefeedbackloops,orto liveaudiofromtheselectedinput.
processliveorrecordedaudiothroughtheEXis
synthesisengine. L/ROutputandIndiv.Output1/27/8usetheaudio
asitisheardfromtheselectedoutput(likeconnecting
EXiwhichdonotsupportaudioinputwillignorethese acablefromtheoutputbacktotheinput).
settings.
REC1/23/4andFXControl1,2usetheaudiofrom
Formoreinformationonusingaudioinputswiththe theselectedbus.
STR1,see48c:Feedbackonpage 261.
IFX112,MFX1,2,andTFX1,2usetheoutputofthe
Youcanoverridethesesettings,ifdesired,in selectedeffect.
CombinationandSequencermodes.Formore
information,see26:EXiAudioInputonpage 422 Channel Select [Stereo/L+R, Left, Right]
(Combimode),and26:EXiAudioInputon Stereo/L+R:ThisselectionroutesastereosignaltoEXi
page 530(Sequencermode). withstereoinputs,andanL+RsummationtoEXiwith
monoinputs.
42a: EXi 1 Left,Right:Thisusesonlyamonosignalfromthe
selectedchannel.
Input Source [Off, Audio Input 1/2...3/4,
S/P DIF Input L/R, L/R Output,
Indiv. Output 1/2...7/8, REC 1/2, 3/4, 42b: EXi 2
FX Control 1, 2, IFX 1...12, MFX 1, 2, TFX 1, 2] EXi2hasthesamecontrolsasEXi1,above.
ThisselectstheinputsourceforEXi1.Youcanusethis
tocreateafeedbackloop,ifdesired.

45: Vector Control


VectorSynthesisletsyoucontrolProgramandEffects
parametersbymovingtheVectorJoystick,byusingthe t 45: Page Menu Commands
programmableVectorEnvelope,orbythecombination ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
ofthetwo. numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
ThispageworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1 shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
Programs,substitutingEXi1/2forOSC1/2.Formore commandsonpage 142.
information,see15:VectorControlonpage 39. 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.

168
EXi Program P4: Basic/Vector 46: Vector Envelope

1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see 2:CopyEXiOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142. CopyEXiOscillatoronpage 174.

46: Vector Envelope


TheVectorEnvelopeworkstogetherwiththeVector ThispageworksexactlylikethesimilarpageforHD1
JoysticktocontroltheVectorposition.Itsalsospecial Programs,substitutingEXi1/2forOSC1/2.Formore
becauseitstheonlyprogrammablemodulationsource information,see16:VectorEnvelopeonpage 43.
whichletsyoumodulatebothProgramandEffects
parameters.
t 46: Page Menu Commands
TheVectorEnvelopeisdifferentfromtheother
envelopesinseveralways: ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
EachpointhastwolevelsonefortheXaxis,and
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
onefortheYaxis.
commandsonpage 142.
Theenvelopetimescanbebasedonsecondsand
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
milliseconds,orsyncedtotempo.
Programonpage 142.
Eachpointhasaholdtime,aswellasatransition
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
timetothenextpoint.
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
Theenvelopecanloopbetweentwopoints,for
2:CopyEXiOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
eitheraspecifiednumberofrepeats,oraslongas
CopyEXiOscillatoronpage 174.
youholdthenote.

48: Set Up Controllers


ThispageletsyousetupthefunctionalityofSW1/2 0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
andRealTimeKnobs58.Itworksexactlylikethe Programonpage 142.
similarpageforHD1Programs;formoreinformation, 1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
see18:SetUpControllersonpage 46. ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyEXiOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
t 48: Page Menu Commands CopyEXiOscillatoronpage 174.
ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.

49: Set Up Pads


Thispageletsyouviewandeditthenoteassignments
forthe8drumpads.Itworksexactlylikethesimilar
pageforHD1Programs;formoreinformation,see1
9:SetUpPadsonpage 47.

t 49: Page Menu Commands


ThenumberbeforeeachcommandshowsitsENTER+
numberkeyshortcut.Formoreinformationonthese
shortcuts,seeENTER+09:shortcutsformenu
commandsonpage 142.
0:WriteProgram.Formoreinformation,seeWrite
Programonpage 142.
1:ExclusiveSolo.Formoreinformation,see
ExclusiveSoloonpage 142.
2:CopyEXiOscillator.Formoreinformation,see
CopyEXiOscillatoronpage 174.
3:CopyPadSetup.Formoreinformation,see
CopyPadSetuponpage 148.

169
Program mode: EXi

EXi Program P5: Modulation


TheentireProgramsharesseveralmodulationsources, TwoCommonKeyTrackinggenerators,whichare
including: setupfortheentireProgram,butthencalculated
AsingleCommonLFO,sharedbyallthevoices individuallyforeachvoice
similartotheglobalLFOonsomevintageanalog ThesepagesletyousetuptheseProgramwide
synths modulationsources.
AsingleCommonStepsequencer,sharedbyallthe
voices

51: Common Step Seq


51d 51PMC

51a

51a

51b

51c

dosoexplicitlyviatheSequencerResetparameter.
Overview ThisisdifferentfromthepervoiceStepSequencers
TheCommonStepSequencercreatescomplex, KeySyncOffsetting,whichresetswheneverallnotes
rhythmicpatterns,whichcanthenbeusedasanAMS arereleased.
source.Forinstance,youcanmodulateafiltertocreate (However,youcancreateasimilarbehavior,ifyou
sampleandholdeffects,modulatepitchtocreate like;seetheSequencerResetparameterformore
melodicpatterns,ormodulateamplitudetocreate information.)
pulsing,triggeredgateeffects.
TheCommonStepSequencerspersistencecanbe
Thesequencecanhaveupto32steps,eachwithits handyifyouwanttocreateaconstantrhythm,and
ownlevelandduration.Itcanloop,orplayonlyonce. thenplayunderneaththatrhythmwithoutre
Youcanalso: triggeringit.Forinstance,youcanuseaMIDI
RestarttheStepSequencerviaAMS controllerinyoursequencertoresettheCommonStep
Sequencereveryfewbars,regardlessofwhatnotesare
ModulatetheStartStepviaAMS beingplayed.
Useindividualstepstoeithergateordosample
andholdonacontinuousAMSsource,suchasan Creating melodic patterns with the Step Sequencer
LFO YoucanusetheStepSequencertomodulatesynthesis
Assignindividualstepstocreatearandomlevel parameters,suchasfiltercutoffandyoucanalsouse
ittocreatemelodicpatterns.Todoso:
UseSmoothingtocreategentle,curvingshapes
1. AssigntheStepSequencerasanAMSsourcefor
Differences from per-voice Step Sequencers Pitch.
ThereisonlyasingleCommonStepSequencershared 2. SettheAMSintensityto+25.
bytheentireProgram.Itstartsrunningassoonasyou 3. IntheStepSequencer,setthestepvaluesas
selecttheProgram,andonlyresetswhenyoutellitto desired.Eachincrementof4equalsasemitone.

170
EXi Program P5: Modulation 51: Common Step Seq

Forexample,toplayanascendingchromaticscale,set valueofzero.(Youcouldusenegativevalues,aswell,
thestepvaluesto0,+4,+8,+12,+16,andsoon.One butthatwouldmaketheactionoftheAttackand
octaveupis+48,andtwooctavesupis+96. Decaycontrolsmorecomplicated.)
Toheartheeffectclearly,letsuseanAL1,andassign
51a: Step Sequencer theStepSequencertomodulateFilterCutoff:
1. InasingleEXiProgram,setEXi1toAL1.
Mode [Loop, One Shot]
2. SettheFilterTypetoLowpass,andtheRoutingto
LoopmakestheStepSequenceloopcontinuously 24dB(4pole).
betweentheStartStepandtheEndStep.
3. SettheFilterCutoffto00.
OneShotmakestheStepSequenceplayoncefromthe
4. OntheFilterModpage,setFilterAsAMSto
StartSteptotheEndStep,andthenholdattheEnd
CommonStepSequencer,andsettheIntensityto
Step.YoucanstillresettheStepSequencerfromAMS
90.
tomakeitplayagain.
YoucouldalsousethepervoiceStepSequencer,but
Start Step [132] forthisexamplewellusetheCommonone.
Thissetsthesteponwhichthesequencewillstart.The 5. IntheCommonStepSequencer,settheEndStep
StartStepisimportantfortheModeparameter,above. to4.
YoucanalsomodulateitviaAMS. 6. SettheModetoLoop.
AMS [AMS Sources] 7. SetStep1sValueto+100.
ThisselectsanAMSsourcetomodulatetheStartStep. 8. ForbothStep2andStep4,settheValueto0.
ForalistofAMSsources,seeAlternateModulation 9. SetStep3sValueto+80.
Source(AMS)Listonpage 1021.
10.SettheDurationsofallfourStepstoa32ndnote.
Intensity [-32+32] 11.TurnthefrontpanelTempoknobtothecenter,at
ThiscontrolsthedepthanddirectionoftheStartStep about120bpm.
modulation. Ifthetempoisreallyfast,youdneedtouse